TOPDRAWER
              Version 5.12 ( Rice Bonner Lab )
                          July 1993

                 Fermilab Document PP0005.1
                    Author:  John Clement
                  Support level:  5 (full)





         TOPDRAWER is a keyword-driven interface to the SLAC
         Unified Graphics system, designed  specifically  to
         generate  physics  graphs  with  minimal specifica-
         tions.  Reasonable defaults are  assumed  for  axis
         scales,  tic  locations,  label locations and size,
         etc.  

         Topdrawer  originated  at  the  Stanford Linear Ac-
         celerator Center.  The  manual  for  this  modified
         version            is           online           in
         TOPDRAWERROOT:[DOC]TOPDRAWER.DOC,  and  via   HELP,
         both at the VMS level and within the Topdrawer pro-
         gram.  The original SLAC document  number  is  CTGM
         178.  

         Many  devices are supported, including Xwindows and
         Tektronix displays,  and  Postscript,  QMS1200  and
         EXCL printers.  


























                                                      Page 2








                                  Table of Contents


     CHAPTER 1  PREFACE                                                       1 

     CHAPTER 2  SETUP                                                         2 

     CHAPTER 3  INTRODUCTION                                                  3 

     CHAPTER 4  PHILOSOPHY                                                    5 

     CHAPTER 5  OPERATION                                                     6 
             5.1     FILENAME                                                 6 
             5.2     DEVICES                                                  6 
             5.3     OPTIONS                                                  6 

     CHAPTER 6  DEVICES                                                       8 
             6.1     LIST_OF_DEVICES                                          8 

     CHAPTER 7  INPUT                                                        10 

     CHAPTER 8  OUTPUT                                                       11 

     CHAPTER 9  SET_UP                                                       13 

     CHAPTER 10  DATA                                                        14 
             10.1    EXPRESSIONS                                             14 
             10.1.1    Constants                                             14 
             10.1.2    Functions                                             14 
             10.1.3    Operators                                             15 
             10.1.4    Filenames                                             15 
             10.1.5    Examples                                              16 
             10.2    ORDER                                                   16 
             10.3    NUMBERS                                                 16 
             10.4    POINTS                                                  16 
             10.5    SYMBOLS                                                 17 
             10.6    TIME-ANGLES-DATES                                       17 
             10.7    TYPES                                                   17 
             10.8    ON|OFF                                                  18 
             10.9    EXAMPLES                                                18 

     CHAPTER 11  COORDINATE_FRAME                                            19 

     CHAPTER 12  FONTS                                                       20 
             12.1    LIST_OF_FONTS                                           20 
             12.2    ROMAN                                                   20 
             12.3    GREEK                                                   21 
             12.4    CYRILLIC                                                21 
             12.5    PUNCTUATION                                             21 
             12.6    MATH SYMBOLS                                            21 
             12.7    THEORETIC                                               22 
             12.8    ARROWS                                                  22 
             12.9    PHYSICS                                                 22 
             12.10   ASTRONOMICAL                                            23 
             12.11   MARKERS                                                 23 
             12.12   DRAWING                                                 23 
             12.13   MOVEMENT                                                24 


                                          
                                          

             12.14   SUBSCRIPT                                               24 
             12.15   CHARACTER_SIZE                                          24 
             12.16   POSITION                                                24 
             12.17   EXAMPLES                                                25 
             12.18   SETTING_FONTS                                           25 

     CHAPTER 13  3-DIMENSIONAL_PLOTS                                         26 
             13.1    AXES_EXAMPLE                                            26 

     CHAPTER 14  HISTOGRAMS                                                  28 

     CHAPTER 15  COMMANDS                                                    29 
             15.1    FORMAT_OF_COMMANDS                                      29 
             15.2    QUESTION_MARK                                           30 
             15.3    LIST_OF_COMMANDS                                        30 
             15.4    OPTIONS                                                 31 
             15.4.1    APPEND                                                32 
             15.4.2    CYCLE                                                 32 
             15.4.3    EXPAND                                                32 
             15.4.4    FILL                                                  33 
             15.4.5    HIDE                                                  33 
             15.4.6    LOG                                                   33 
             15.4.7    NAME                                                  33 
             15.4.8    POINTS|COLUMNS                                        33 
             15.4.9    SELECT                                                34 
             15.4.10   SETS                                                  34 
             15.4.11   SOLID...                                              34 
             15.4.12   SLICES                                                34 
             15.5    TITLE                                                   35 
             15.6    WHITE...                                                35 
             15.7    ADD                                                     35 
             15.8    SUBTRACT                                                35 
             15.8.1    APPEND                                                35 
             15.8.2    AVERAGE                                               35 
             15.8.3    CHECK                                                 36 
             15.8.4    ERROR                                                 36 
             15.8.5    FIT                                                   36 
             15.8.6    LIMITED                                               36 
             15.8.7    LOG                                                   36 
             15.8.8    VECTOR                                                36 
             15.8.9    WEIGHT-EWEIGHT                                        37 
             15.8.10   X|Y                                                   37 
             15.8.11   Notes                                                 37 
             15.8.12   Example                                               37 
             15.9    ARROW                                                   38 
             15.9.1    Options                                               38 
             15.9.2    Example                                               38 
             15.10   BARGRAPH                                                38 
             15.11   BIN                                                     39 
             15.11.1   Introduction                                          39 
             15.11.2   Options                                               40 
             15.11.3   AVERAGE                                               40 
             15.11.4   APPEND                                                40 
             15.11.5   ERRORS                                                40 
             15.11.6   FROM...                                               41 
             15.11.7   LIMITED                                               41 
             15.11.8   MESH                                                  41 
             15.11.9   MONITOR                                               42 


                                      Page iii


                                          
                                          

             15.11.10  NORMAL                                                42 
             15.11.11  X...                                                  42 
             15.11.12  VALUES                                                42 
             15.11.13  Histograms                                            42 
             15.11.14  Example                                               42 
             15.12   BOX                                                     43 
             15.12.1   AT                                                    43 
             15.12.2   FROM-TO                                               43 
             15.12.3   FILL                                                  43 
             15.12.4   CURSOR                                                43 
             15.12.5   DATA                                                  44 
             15.12.6   DSIZE                                                 44 
             15.12.7   ROTATE                                                44 
             15.12.8   SIZE                                                  44 
             15.12.9   SQUARE                                                44 
             15.12.10  SOLID...                                              44 
             15.12.11  INTENSITY                                             44 
             15.12.12  WHITE...                                              44 
             15.12.13  Example                                               44 
             15.13   CASE                                                    45 
             15.14   CIRCLE                                                  45 
             15.15   CONTOUR                                                 45 
             15.15.1   N1...                                                 46 
             15.15.2   COLOR                                                 46 
             15.15.3   CYCLE                                                 46 
             15.15.4   EXPAND                                                46 
             15.15.5   FROM|TO|BY|N                                          47 
             15.15.6   INTENSITY                                             47 
             15.15.7   LABEL                                                 47 
             15.15.8   OUTSIDE                                               47 
             15.15.9   INSIDE                                                47 
             15.15.10  DOUBLE                                                47 
             15.15.11  PARALLEL                                              47 
             15.15.12  PERPENDICULAR                                         48 
             15.15.13  PRIMARY|SECONDARY                                     48 
             15.15.14  SAVE                                                  48 
             15.15.15  SIZE                                                  48 
             15.15.16  SOLID...                                              48 
             15.15.17  Example                                               48 
             15.16   CONVOLUTE                                               48 
             15.16.1   Options                                               49 
             15.16.2   Errors                                                49 
             15.17   CREATE                                                  49 
             15.18   DATA                                                    50 
             15.18.1   Example                                               50 
             15.19   DELETE                                                  50 
             15.19.1   DATA                                                  50 
             15.19.2   HISTOGRAMS                                            52 
             15.20   DEFINE                                                  53 
             15.20.1   COMMAND                                               53 
             15.20.2   HISTOGRAMS                                            54 
             15.20.3   KEY                                                   59 
             15.20.4   STRING                                                61 
             15.20.5   VALUE                                                 61 
             15.21   DIAMOND                                                 62 
             15.21.1   AT                                                    62 
             15.21.2   FROM-TO                                               63 
             15.21.3   FILL                                                  63 


                                      Page iv


                                          
                                          

             15.21.4   CURSOR                                                63 
             15.21.5   DATA                                                  63 
             15.21.6   DSIZE                                                 63 
             15.21.7   ROTATE                                                63 
             15.21.8   SIZE                                                  63 
             15.21.9   SOLID...                                              63 
             15.21.10  INTENSITY                                             64 
             15.21.11  WHITE...                                              64 
             15.22   DIVIDE                                                  64 
             15.22.1   APPEND                                                64 
             15.22.2   CHECK                                                 64 
             15.22.3   EFFICIENCY                                            64 
             15.22.4   ERROR                                                 65 
             15.22.5   FIT                                                   65 
             15.22.6   LIMITED                                               65 
             15.22.7   LOG                                                   65 
             15.22.8   WEIGHT-EWEIGHT                                        65 
             15.22.9   Notes                                                 65 
             15.23   DU                                                      65 
             15.24   DV                                                      65 
             15.25   DW                                                      66 
             15.26   DX                                                      66 
             15.27   DY                                                      66 
             15.28   DZ                                                      66 
             15.29   ELLIPSE                                                 66 
             15.29.1   AT                                                    66 
             15.29.2   FROM-TO                                               66 
             15.29.3   FILL                                                  66 
             15.29.4   CURSOR                                                67 
             15.29.5   DSIZE                                                 67 
             15.29.6   ROTATE                                                67 
             15.29.7   SIZE                                                  67 
             15.29.8   SQUARE                                                67 
             15.29.9   DATA                                                  67 
             15.29.10  ANGLE                                                 67 
             15.29.11  SOLID...                                              67 
             15.29.12  INTENSITY                                             68 
             15.29.13  WHITE...                                              68 
             15.30   ELSE                                                    68 
             15.31   ENDFILE                                                 68 
             15.32   ENDIF                                                   68 
             15.33   ENDREPEAT                                               68 
             15.34   CLEAR                                                   68 
             15.35   FFT                                                     69 
             15.35.1   Restrictions                                          69 
             15.35.2   Interpretation                                        70 
             15.36   FILL                                                    70 
             15.36.1   Options                                               70 
             15.37   FIT                                                     71 
             15.37.1   Options                                               72 
             15.37.2   AGAIN                                                 72 
             15.37.3   EQUATION                                              73 
             15.37.4   POLYNOMIAL                                            73 
             15.37.5   INVERSE                                               73 
             15.37.6   SINE                                                  73 
             15.37.7   COSINE                                                74 
             15.37.8   LEGENDRE                                              74 
             15.37.9   EXPONENTIAL                                           74 


                                       Page v


                                          
                                          

             15.37.10  GAUSSIAN                                              74 
             15.37.11  DGAUSSIAN                                             75 
             15.37.12  DPOLYNOMAIL                                           75 
             15.37.13  USER                                                  75 
             15.37.14  COEFFICIENTS|ERRORS                                   75 
             15.37.15  CURVE                                                 76 
             15.37.16  EXCLUDE/INCLUDE                                       76 
             15.37.17  LIMITED                                               76 
             15.37.18  NONLINEAR                                             77 
             15.37.19  LOG/FULL                                              78 
             15.37.20  OFFSET                                                78 
             15.37.21  MESH                                                  79 
             15.37.22  NAME                                                  79 
             15.37.23  MONITOR                                               79 
             15.37.24  POINTS                                                79 
             15.37.25  SCALE                                                 79 
             15.37.26  SETS                                                  79 
             15.37.27  ORDER/TERMS                                           79 
             15.37.28  Y|Z                                                   80 
             15.37.29  Warning                                               80 
             15.37.30  Yerrors                                               80 
             15.37.31  Examples                                              80 
             15.38   FLUSH                                                   81 
             15.39   FREQUENCY                                               81 
             15.40   HISTOGRAM                                               81 
             15.40.1   CYCLE                                                 82 
             15.40.2   DEPTH                                                 82 
             15.40.3   EXPAND                                                82 
             15.40.4   FILL                                                  82 
             15.40.5   FRAME                                                 82 
             15.40.6   GRID                                                  82 
             15.40.7   HIDE                                                  83 
             15.40.8   POINTS|COLUMNS                                        83 
             15.40.9   SETS                                                  83 
             15.40.10  SOLID                                                 83 
             15.40.11  X|Y|Z|BLOCK                                           83 
             15.40.12  XY                                                    84 
             15.40.13  CROSS|RANDOM                                          84 
             15.40.14  DX                                                    84 
             15.40.15  SLICES                                                84 
             15.40.16  3-d_histograms                                        85 
             15.40.17  Variables                                             86 
             15.40.18  Limits                                                86 
             15.40.19  Shading_example                                       87 
             15.41   HELP                                                    87 
             15.42   IF                                                      87 
             15.43   INTERPOLATE                                             88 
             15.43.1   Options                                               88 
             15.43.2   Notes                                                 89 
             15.44   JOIN                                                    89 
             15.44.1   Level                                                 90 
             15.44.2   CYCLE                                                 90 
             15.44.3   ERRORS                                                90 
             15.44.4   EXPAND                                                90 
             15.44.5   FILL                                                  90 
             15.44.6   HIDE                                                  90 
             15.44.7   SPLINE|GENERAL                                        91 
             15.44.8   TEXT                                                  91 


                                      Page vi


                                          
                                          

             15.44.9   LINES                                                 91 
             15.44.10  POINTS|COLUMNS                                        91 
             15.44.11  SETS                                                  91 
             15.44.12  INTENSITY                                             91 
             15.44.13  WHITE...                                              91 
             15.44.14  SOLID...                                              91 
             15.44.15  X|Y|Z                                                 92 
             15.44.16  SLICES                                                92 
             15.44.17  3-d_plot                                              92 
             15.45   LIST                                                    92 
             15.45.1   DATA                                                  92 
             15.45.2   FIT                                                   94 
             15.45.3   HISTOGRAMS                                            94 
             15.46   MERGE                                                   95 
             15.47   MONITOR                                                 95 
             15.47.1   AVAILABLE                                             96 
             15.47.2   EXACT                                                 96 
             15.47.3   EXPAND                                                96 
             15.47.4   ENTRIES                                               96 
             15.47.5   FILE                                                  96 
             15.47.6   IDENT                                                 96 
             15.47.7   INTERVAL                                              97 
             15.47.8   LOG                                                   97 
             15.47.9   MESH                                                  97 
             15.47.10  NAME                                                  97 
             15.47.11  OVERFLOWS                                             97 
             15.47.12  PAUSE                                                 97 
             15.47.13  REPEAT                                                97 
             15.47.14  RESCALE                                               97 
             15.47.15  SECTION                                               98 
             15.47.16  SCAN                                                  98 
             15.47.17  SKIP                                                  98 
             15.47.18  STATISTICS                                            98 
             15.47.19  SHOW                                                  98 
             15.47.20  TIME                                                  98 
             15.47.21  TREE                                                  98 
             15.47.22  WINDOWS                                               98 
             15.48   MORE                                                    98 
             15.49   MULTIPLY                                                99 
             15.49.1   APPEND                                                99 
             15.49.2   CHECK                                                 99 
             15.49.3   ERROR                                                 99 
             15.49.4   FIT                                                   99 
             15.49.5   LIMITED                                               99 
             15.49.6   LOG                                                  100 
             15.49.7   VECTOR                                               100 
             15.49.8   WEIGHT-EWEIGHT                                       100 
             15.49.9   Notes                                                100 
             15.50   NEW_FRAME                                              100 
             15.50.1   ALIAS                                                100 
             15.50.2   Comment                                              101 
             15.50.3   RESET                                                101 
             15.51   NDU                                                    101 
             15.52   NDV                                                    101 
             15.53   NDW                                                    101 
             15.54   NDX                                                    101 
             15.55   NDY                                                    101 
             15.56   NDZ                                                    101 


                                      Page vii


                                          
                                          

             15.57   PAUSE                                                  102 
             15.57.1   FOR                                                  102 
             15.58   PLOT                                                   102 
             15.58.1   Options                                              103 
             15.58.2   AXES|GRID                                            103 
             15.58.3   COUNTS                                               106 
             15.58.4   CYCLE                                                106 
             15.58.5   EXPAND                                               106 
             15.58.6   FILL                                                 107 
             15.58.7   INTENSITY                                            107 
             15.58.8   LIMITED                                              107 
             15.58.9   ERRORS                                               107 
             15.58.10  RANDOM                                               108 
             15.58.11  SOLID...                                             108 
             15.58.12  LINES|ROWS                                           108 
             15.58.13  OUTLINE                                              108 
             15.58.14  POINTS|COLUMNS                                       108 
             15.58.15  SETS                                                 108 
             15.58.16  SLICES                                               109 
             15.58.17  SYMBOL                                               109 
             15.58.18  SIZE                                                 109 
             15.58.19  TABLE                                                109 
             15.58.20  VARIABLE                                             110 
             15.58.21  VECTOR                                               110 
             15.58.22  WHITE...                                             110 
             15.58.23  3-d                                                  110 
             15.59   PROJECT                                                110 
             15.59.1   ADD|AVERAGE                                          111 
             15.59.2   APPEND                                               111 
             15.59.3   INTEGRATE                                            111 
             15.59.4   SPLIT                                                111 
             15.59.5   X|Y|Z                                                111 
             15.59.6   LOG                                                  112 
             15.59.7   SETS                                                 112 
             15.59.8   Examples                                             112 
             15.60   READ                                                   112 
             15.60.1   POINTS                                               112 
             15.60.2   MESH                                                 113 
             15.61   REPEAT                                                 115 
             15.61.1   Examples                                             115 
             15.61.2   Warning                                              116 
             15.62   RESTORE                                                116 
             15.62.1   DATA                                                 116 
             15.62.1.1   APPEND                                             116 
             15.62.1.2   CONFIRM                                            116 
             15.62.1.3   SELECT                                             116 
             15.62.1.4   SETS                                               116 
             15.62.2   FIT                                                  117 
             15.62.3   HISTOGRAMS                                           117 
             15.62.3.1   Options                                            117 
             15.63   SAVE                                                   118 
             15.63.1   FIT                                                  118 
             15.63.2   DATA                                                 118 
             15.63.3   HISTOGRAMS                                           119 
             15.63.3.1   Options                                            119 
             15.64   SET                                                    120 
             15.64.1   Introduction                                         120 
             15.64.2   Options                                              121 


                                     Page viii


                                          
                                          

             15.64.3   AREA                                                 122 
             15.64.4   ARROW                                                122 
             15.64.5   AXES                                                 122 
             15.64.5.1   Options                                            122 
             15.64.5.2   Example                                            123 
             15.64.6   BAR                                                  123 
             15.64.6.1   ALL-X-Y-Z                                          124 
             15.64.6.2   SIZE                                               124 
             15.64.6.3   BREAK                                              124 
             15.64.6.4   SUPPRESS                                           124 
             15.64.6.5   PERMANENT                                          124 
             15.64.6.6   Examples                                           124 
             15.64.7   BOX                                                  124 
             15.64.8   BLINK                                                125 
             15.64.9   CARD                                                 125 
             15.64.10  CHARACTER                                            125 
             15.64.11  CIRCLE                                               126 
             15.64.12  CLEAR                                                126 
             15.64.13  COLOR                                                126 
             15.64.14  COMMAND                                              126 
             15.64.15  Ctrl_Z                                               126 
             15.64.16  CYCLE                                                127 
             15.64.16.1  Options                                            127 
             15.64.16.2  Examples                                           127 
             15.64.16.3  Defaults                                           127 
             15.64.17  DATE                                                 127 
             15.64.18  DEVICE                                               128 
             15.64.18.1  Names                                              128 
             15.64.18.2  COLOR                                              129 
             15.64.18.3  LANDSCAPE-PORTRAIT                                 129 
             15.64.18.4  TEST                                               129 
             15.64.18.5  CALCOMP                                            129 
             15.64.18.6  EXCL                                               129 
             15.64.18.7  GKS                                                130 
             15.64.18.8  GRINNELL                                           132 
             15.64.18.9  HPGL                                               132 
             15.64.18.10  IMAGEN                                            133 
             15.64.18.11  POSTSCRIPT                                        133 
             15.64.18.12  PRINTRONIX                                        133 
             15.64.18.13  QMS-1200                                          133 
             15.64.18.14  REGIS                                             134 
             15.64.18.15  SIXELS                                            135 
             15.64.18.16  TEKTRONIX                                         135 
             15.64.18.17  TEK4027                                           138 
             15.64.18.18  VERSATEC                                          139 
             15.64.18.19  Xwindows                                          139 
             15.64.18.20  String                                            139 
             15.64.18.21  ADD                                               139 
             15.64.18.22  FILE                                              139 
             15.64.18.23  WIDTH|HEIGHT                                      140 
             15.64.18.24  IDENT                                             140 
             15.64.18.25  INTERACTIVE                                       140 
             15.64.18.26  NUMBER                                            140 
             15.64.18.27  ORIENTATION                                       140 
             15.64.18.28  REVERSE                                           140 
             15.64.18.29  SIDEWAYS                                          140 
             15.64.18.30  PERMANENT                                         140 
             15.64.18.31  UNIT                                              141 


                                      Page ix


                                          
                                          

             15.64.18.32  Example                                           141 
             15.64.19  DIAMOND                                              141 
             15.64.20  DIGITS                                               141 
             15.64.21  ELLIPSE                                              141 
             15.64.22  ERRORS                                               142 
             15.64.23  EXACT                                                142 
             15.64.24  FILE                                                 142 
             15.64.24.1  INPUT                                              142 
             15.64.24.2  LIST                                               143 
             15.64.24.3  JOURNAL                                            143 
             15.64.24.4  Filename                                           143 
             15.64.24.5  Example                                            143 
             15.64.25  FILL                                                 144 
             15.64.26  FIT                                                  144 
             15.64.27  FLUSH                                                144 
             15.64.28  FONT                                                 144 
             15.64.29  FORMAT                                               145 
             15.64.30  GRID                                                 145 
             15.64.30.1  Options                                            146 
             15.64.30.2  Example                                            146 
             15.64.31  HISTOGRAM                                            147 
             15.64.31.1  Options                                            147 
             15.64.31.2  APPEND                                             148 
             15.64.31.3  AREA|DIRECTORY                                     148 
             15.64.31.4  CHECK                                              148 
             15.64.31.5  CONFIRM                                            148 
             15.64.31.6  ENTRIES                                            149 
             15.64.31.7  ERRORS                                             149 
             15.64.31.8  FILE                                               149 
             15.64.31.9  HISTOGRAM                                          149 
             15.64.31.10  LOG                                               149 
             15.64.31.11  MESH                                              149 
             15.64.31.12  NTUPLES                                           150 
             15.64.31.13  NUMBER                                            150 
             15.64.31.14  OVERFLOWS                                         150 
             15.64.31.15  CURRENT|NEXT|PREVIOUS|FIRST|LAST                  150 
             15.64.31.16  SECTION                                           151 
             15.64.31.17  SELECT                                            151 
             15.64.31.18  TITLE                                             151 
             15.64.31.19  TREE                                              151 
             15.64.31.20  WILD                                              152 
             15.64.31.21  WRAP                                              152 
             15.64.31.22  Lexicals                                          152 
             15.64.31.23  Restrictions                                      152 
             15.64.31.24  Examples                                          152 
             15.64.32  INPUT                                                153 
             15.64.33  INTENSITY                                            153 
             15.64.34  LABELS                                               153 
             15.64.34.1  ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|LEFT|RIGHT                          153 
             15.64.34.2  X|Y|Z                                              153 
             15.64.34.3  CHARACTERS                                         154 
             15.64.34.4  INSIDE                                             154 
             15.64.34.5  SIZE                                               154 
             15.64.34.6  SHIFT                                              154 
             15.64.34.7  ON|OFF                                             155 
             15.64.34.8  INTENSITY                                          155 
             15.64.34.9  WHITE...                                           155 
             15.64.34.10  PERMANENT                                         155 


                                       Page x


                                          
                                          

             15.64.34.11  Examples                                          155 
             15.64.35  LIMITS                                               155 
             15.64.35.1  SCALE                                              156 
             15.64.35.2  CURSOR                                             156 
             15.64.35.3  PERMANENT                                          156 
             15.64.35.4  Example                                            156 
             15.64.36  MODE                                                 157 
             15.64.36.1  AUTOPLOT                                           158 
             15.64.36.2  ABORT                                              158 
             15.64.36.3  APPEND                                             158 
             15.64.36.4  CONFIRM                                            158 
             15.64.36.5  CHECK                                              158 
             15.64.36.6  DATAVECTOR                                         158 
             15.64.36.7  DEBUG                                              158 
             15.64.36.8  ECHO                                               158 
             15.64.36.9  ERASE                                              158 
             15.64.36.10  EXPAND                                            158 
             15.64.36.11  FILECASE                                          159 
             15.64.36.12  HARDTEXTURE                                       159 
             15.64.36.13  JOURNALING                                        159 
             15.64.36.14  LISTING                                           159 
             15.64.36.15  LOG                                               159 
             15.64.36.16  MONITOR                                           159 
             15.64.36.17  PROPORTIONAL                                      159 
             15.64.36.18  QUICK                                             159 
             15.64.36.19  SHOW                                              159 
             15.64.36.20  TITLE                                             159 
             15.64.36.21  TRACE                                             160 
             15.64.36.22  TREE                                              160 
             15.64.36.23  VECTOR                                            160 
             15.64.36.24  VLOG                                              160 
             15.64.37  MONITOR                                              160 
             15.64.38  NAME                                                 160 
             15.64.39  ORDER                                                161 
             15.64.39.1  Options                                            161 
             15.64.39.2  Examples                                           162 
             15.64.40  OUTLINE                                              162 
             15.64.40.1  Options                                            162 
             15.64.41  PATTERN                                              163 
             15.64.41.1  Example                                            163 
             15.64.42  PAUSE                                                164 
             15.64.43  PEN                                                  164 
             15.64.44  POLAR                                                164 
             15.64.45  PROMPT                                               165 
             15.64.45.1  Examples                                           166 
             15.64.46  REVISION                                             166 
             15.64.47  SECONDARY                                            166 
             15.64.48  SEGMENTS                                             166 
             15.64.49  SCALE                                                166 
             15.64.49.1  X|Y|Z|ALL                                          167 
             15.64.49.2  BASE                                               167 
             15.64.49.3  DAYS                                               167 
             15.64.49.4  LABELS                                             167 
             15.64.49.5  LINEAR                                             167 
             15.64.49.6  LOGARITHMIC                                        168 
             15.64.49.7  MINUTES                                            168 
             15.64.49.8  MONTHS                                             168 
             15.64.49.9  NORMAL                                             168 


                                      Page xi


                                          
                                          

             15.64.49.10  POWER|ROOT                                        168 
             15.64.49.11  REVERSE                                           169 
             15.64.49.12  SECONDS                                           169 
             15.64.49.13  TICKS                                             169 
             15.64.49.14  TIME-HOURS                                        169 
             15.64.49.15  USER                                              169 
             15.64.49.16  YEARS                                             169 
             15.64.49.17  PERMANENT                                         170 
             15.64.49.18  Example                                           170 
             15.64.50  SHADOW                                               170 
             15.64.50.1  Options                                            170 
             15.64.50.2  Example                                            171 
             15.64.51  SHIELD                                               171 
             15.64.52  SIZE                                                 172 
             15.64.52.1  X,y                                                172 
             15.64.52.2  UNITS                                              172 
             15.64.52.3  CM....                                             172 
             15.64.52.4  MAGNIFY|REDUCE                                     172 
             15.64.52.5  ORIENTATION                                        173 
             15.64.52.6  SIDEWAYS                                           173 
             15.64.52.7  MARGINS                                            173 
             15.64.52.8  LEFT|RIGHT|TOP|BOTTOM                              173 
             15.64.52.9  Examples                                           173 
             15.64.53  SPHERICAL                                            173 
             15.64.54  STATISTICS                                           174 
             15.64.54.1  LIMITED                                            174 
             15.64.54.2  LINES|ROWS                                         175 
             15.64.54.3  POINTS|COLUMNS                                     175 
             15.64.54.4  SETS                                               175 
             15.64.55  STORAGE                                              175 
             15.64.56  SYMBOL                                               176 
             15.64.56.1  Xx                                                 176 
             15.64.56.2  ANGLE                                              176 
             15.64.56.3  SIZE                                               176 
             15.64.56.4  THETA                                              176 
             15.64.57  PERMANENT                                            176 
             15.64.57.1  PHI                                                176 
             15.64.57.2  3-d                                                177 
             15.64.57.3  Example                                            177 
             15.64.58  TEXTURE                                              177 
             15.64.58.1  Example                                            178 
             15.64.59  THREE                                                178 
             15.64.59.1  Options                                            179 
             15.64.59.2  CENTER                                             179 
             15.64.59.3  DIRECTION                                          179 
             15.64.59.4  DISTANCE,SCRD,RDIST                                180 
             15.64.59.5  REDUCE|MAGNIFY                                     181 
             15.64.59.6  ON|OFF|AUTOMATIC                                   181 
             15.64.59.7  ORIGIN                                             181 
             15.64.59.8  PERMANENT                                          181 
             15.64.59.9  SEPARATION                                         181 
             15.64.59.10  VERTICAL                                          181 
             15.64.59.11  WORLD                                             181 
             15.64.59.12  XAXIS                                             182 
             15.64.59.13  Revisions                                         182 
             15.64.59.14  Examples                                          182 
             15.64.60  TICKS                                                182 
             15.64.60.1  Options                                            183 


                                      Page xii


                                          
                                          

             15.64.60.2  Examples                                           183 
             15.64.61  TITLES                                               183 
             15.64.61.1  Options                                            184 
             15.64.61.2  ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|LEFT|RIGHT|X|Y                      184 
             15.64.61.3  INDEX                                              184 
             15.64.61.4  INTENSITY                                          184 
             15.64.61.5  LINES                                              184 
             15.64.61.6  MARGIN                                             185 
             15.64.61.7  PERMANENT                                          185 
             15.64.61.8  SCALE                                              185 
             15.64.61.9  SIZE                                               185 
             15.64.61.10  WHITE...                                          185 
             15.64.61.11  Windows                                           185 
             15.64.61.12  ESCAPE                                            185 
             15.64.61.13  SUBSTITUTE                                        186 
             15.64.61.14  Examples                                          186 
             15.64.62  UNITS                                                186 
             15.64.62.1  CM....                                             187 
             15.64.62.2  REDUCE                                             187 
             15.64.62.3  ALL...                                             187 
             15.64.63  WAIT                                                 187 
             15.64.64  WIDTH                                                187 
             15.64.65  WINDOWS                                              187 
             15.64.65.1  ABSOLUTE                                           188 
             15.64.65.2  NUMBERED                                           188 
             15.64.65.3  RELATIVE                                           189 
             15.64.65.4  LEVEL                                              190 
             15.64.65.5  Labels                                             190 
             15.64.65.6  Examples                                           191 
             15.64.65.7  3-d                                                191 
             15.65   SHOW                                                   192 
             15.65.1   Options                                              192 
             15.65.2   CURSOR                                               193 
             15.65.3   DATA                                                 194 
             15.65.3.1   BRIEF...                                           194 
             15.65.3.2   LIMITED                                            194 
             15.65.3.3   LINES|ROWS                                         195 
             15.65.3.4   OUTPUT                                             195 
             15.65.3.5   POINTS|COLUMNS                                     195 
             15.65.3.6   SETS                                               195 
             15.65.3.7   Statistics                                         195 
             15.65.3.8   Example                                            196 
             15.65.4   ERRORS                                               196 
             15.65.5   FLAGS                                                196 
             15.65.6   HISTOGRAMS                                           196 
             15.65.6.1   Options                                            197 
             15.65.6.2   AREA|DIRECTORY                                     197 
             15.65.6.3   ALL|FULL                                           198 
             15.65.6.4   BRIEF                                              198 
             15.65.6.5   CONTENTS                                           198 
             15.65.6.6   CURRENT                                            198 
             15.65.6.7   ENTRIES                                            198 
             15.65.6.8   EXACT                                              198 
             15.65.6.9   FROM|TO                                            198 
             15.65.6.10  IDENT                                              198 
             15.65.6.11  HISTOGRAM                                          198 
             15.65.6.12  NTUPL                                              198 
             15.65.6.13  NLIMITS                                            198 


                                     Page xiii


                                          
                                          

             15.65.6.14  NMASKS                                             199 
             15.65.6.15  MESH                                               199 
             15.65.6.16  SELECT                                             199 
             15.65.6.17  SEARCH                                             199 
             15.65.6.18  STATISTICS                                         199 
             15.65.6.19  TREE                                               199 
             15.65.6.20  Example                                            199 
             15.65.7   KEYS                                                 200 
             15.65.8   LEXICALS                                             200 
             15.65.9   TIME                                                 200 
             15.65.10  Example                                              200 
             15.66   SMOOTH                                                 200 
             15.66.1   Options                                              201 
             15.66.2   Algorithm                                            202 
             15.67   SORT                                                   202 
             15.68   SPAWN                                                  202 
             15.69   STOP                                                   203 
             15.70   SWAP                                                   203 
             15.71   SYMBOL                                                 204 
             15.72   TITLE                                                  204 
             15.72.1   Xyz                                                  204 
             15.72.2   ANGLE                                                205 
             15.72.3   LJUSTIFY|CENTER|RJUSTIFY                             205 
             15.72.4   DATA|XDATA|YDATA|TEXT                                205 
             15.72.5   DIGITS                                               205 
             15.72.6   Lexicals                                             206 
             15.72.7   TIME                                                 206 
             15.72.8   TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|GENERAL                        206 
             15.72.9   X|Y|Z                                                206 
             15.72.10  LINES                                                206 
             15.72.11  SIZE                                                 207 
             15.72.12  INDEX                                                207 
             15.72.13  SPACES                                               207 
             15.72.14  INTENSITY                                            207 
             15.72.15  WHITE...                                             207 
             15.72.16  CASE                                                 207 
             15.72.17  3-d                                                  208 
             15.72.18  Consecutive_titles                                   208 
             15.73   TRANSFORM                                              208 
             15.74   TYPE                                                   209 
             15.75   U                                                      209 
             15.76   V                                                      209 
             15.77   W                                                      209 
             15.78   X                                                      209 
             15.78.1   APPEND                                               210 
             15.78.2   BINS|VALUES                                          210 
             15.78.3   ERROR                                                211 
             15.78.4   Expression                                           211 
             15.78.5   LINES|ROWS                                           212 
             15.78.6   LOG                                                  212 
             15.78.7   NAME                                                 212 
             15.78.8   POINTS|COLUMNS                                       212 
             15.78.9   POISSON|SQRT                                         212 
             15.78.10  SAMPLES                                              212 
             15.78.11  SETS                                                 213 
             15.78.12  TIMES                                                213 
             15.78.13  PLUS                                                 213 
             15.78.14  MINUS                                                213 


                                      Page xiv


                                          
                                          

             15.78.15  DIVIDE                                               214 
             15.78.16  Warning                                              214 
             15.78.17  Examples                                             214 
             15.78.18  Mesh_examples                                        215 
             15.79   Y                                                      216 
             15.80   Z                                                      216 

     CHAPTER 16  LEXICAL_VALUES                                             217 
             16.1    LIST_OF_NAMES                                          217 
             16.2    VALUES                                                 219 
             16.3    REPEAT                                                 219 
             16.4    EXAMPLES                                               219 

     CHAPTER 17  EXAMPLES                                                   221 

     CHAPTER 18  SUBROUTINES                                                222 
             18.1    NAMES                                                  222 
             18.2    STRINGS                                                222 
             18.3    UNIT_NUMBERS                                           223 
             18.4    LINKING                                                223 
             18.5    DEMO_PROGRAM                                           223 
             18.6    LIST_OF_SUBROUTINES                                    223 
             18.7    CPUTIM                                                 224 
             18.8    CPULIM                                                 224 
             18.9    HELP                                                   225 
             18.10   INTRAC                                                 225 
             18.11   SPAWN                                                  225 
             18.12   TRACE                                                  225 
             18.13   READPR                                                 225 
             18.14   DEFKEY                                                 226 
             18.15   TDARRO                                                 226 
             18.16   TDCRCL                                                 226 
             18.17   TDEND                                                  227 
             18.18   TDFLSH                                                 227 
             18.19   TDGETV                                                 227 
             18.20   TDHIST                                                 227 
             18.20.1   Example                                              228 
             18.21   TDJOIN                                                 228 
             18.21.1   Example                                              228 
             18.22   TDLIMS                                                 229 
             18.22.1   Example                                              229 
             18.23   TDNEW                                                  229 
             18.24   TDNEWP                                                 229 
             18.25   TDPLOT                                                 229 
             18.25.1   Example                                              230 
             18.26   TDPLT                                                  230 
             18.26.1   Example                                              230 
             18.27   TDSET                                                  230 
             18.28   TDSETS                                                 231 
             18.28.1   Example                                              231 
             18.29   TDSHOW                                                 231 
             18.29.1   Example                                              231 
             18.30   TDTEXT                                                 231 
             18.30.1   Example                                              232 
             18.31   TDTITL                                                 232 
             18.31.1   Example                                              232 
             18.32   TDTSET                                                 232 
             18.33   TD3JIN                                                 233 


                                      Page xv


                                          
                                          

             18.34   TD3HST                                                 233 
             18.35   TDVAX_PLOT                                             234 
             18.36   T2CURS                                                 234 
             18.37   T2MAIN                                                 234 
             18.38   T2UPCS                                                 235 
             18.39   T2SQEZ                                                 235 
             18.40   T2_TRAP                                                235 

     CHAPTER 19  LINKING                                                    236 

     CHAPTER 20  REVISIONS                                                  237 
             20.1    OBSOLETE_COMMANDS                                      237 
             20.2    86                                                     237 
             20.3    87                                                     239 
             20.4    88                                                     241 
             20.5    89                                                     241 
             20.6    90                                                     242 
             20.7    91                                                     243 

     CHAPTER 21  INSTALLATION                                               246 

     CHAPTER 22  AUTHOR                                                     247
     Index                                                                  248 





































                                      Page xvi














                                          1

                                       PREFACE



     This is a program primarily designed to produce graphs of scientific data.
     It also has some  calculation  ability.   You  may  create,  modify,  fit,
     combine,  and smooth data sets.  The results may be displayed in a variety
     of formats.  In the documentation your response is underlined and optional
                                                        ----------
     syntax is enclosed inside square brakets [].  







































                                       Page 1














                                          2

                                        SETUP



     To use Topdrawer it may be necessary to set it up.  To do this:  
          $ SETUP TOPDRAWER 
     If you wish to use the previous old version:  
          $ SETUP TOPDRAWER.OLD 
     If you wish to use the version currently being tested:  
          $ SETUP TOPDRAWER.TEST 







































                                       Page 2














                                          3

                                    INTRODUCTION



     TOPDRAWER  is  fairly easy to use if you confine yourself to simple plots.
     First invoke TOPDRAWER by typing:  
          $ TOPDRAWER 
            ---------
     You are then prompted:  
          TD:   You  first  enter  your data as a set of X,Y,DX,DY values.  The
     DX,DY may be omitted if no error bars are  needed.   Each  data  point  is
     specified on a separate line.  For example a line going from 0,0 to 1,1 is
     specified as:  
          TD:0,0 
             ---
          TD:1,1 
             ---
     Then  the data may be plotted as a set of points with error bars (if DX,DY
     are not zero) by typing the command:  
          TD:PLOT 
             ----

     If you wish to produce a histogram use the command:  
          TD:HISTOGRAM 
             ---------
     On the other hand if you wish to plot a smooth curve type:  
          TD:JOIN 
             ----
     For series of straight lines connecting the points:  
          TD:JOIN 1 (1 segment per interval) 
             ---- - -- ------- --- ---------
     To put a title at the top:  
          TD:TITLE TOP 'This is my title' 
             ----- --- ----- -- -- ------
     To put a title at the bottom:  
          TD:TITLE BOTTOM 'This is the X axis' 
             ----- ------ ----- -- --- - -----
     To put a title on the left:  
          TD:TITLE LEFT 'This is the Y axis' 
             ----- ---- ----- -- --- - -----

     If you are done, you then type:  
          TD:EXIT 
             ----

     Now you liked the plot, but you wish to change a few things.  The commands
     you typed are in file TD.TDJ.  You may  edit  this  file  to  correct  any


                                       Page 3


                                    INTRODUCTION
                                          

     mistakes you made.  You also should rename it:  
          $ RENAME TD.TDJ MYPLOT.TOP 
            ------ ------ ----------
     and  invoke  TOPDRAWER  again.  Now instead of typing all the commands in,
     just type:  
          $ SET FILE IN 'MYPLOT' 
            --- ---- -- --------
     TOPDRAWER  will  re-execute the commands in the file.  Now you wish to get
     the plots out on the Postscript printer.  so you type:  
          TD:SET DEVICE POSTSCR 
             --- ------ -------
     Then replot the data by typing:  
          TD:SET FILE IN 'MYPLOT' 
             --- ---- -- --------
     Finally type:  
          TD:EXIT 
             ----

     Now the plot is printed on the Talaris by:  
          $ PRINT MYPLOT.PS 
            ----- ---------

     More  plots may be added to the first plot by entering more data, and then
     either PLOT, HISTOGRAM, or JOIN.  Each command may be  modified  by  extra
     commands to make the plot more pleasing.  For example if you type:  
          TD:HISTOGRAM DOTS RED 
             --------- ---- ---
     Then  the  histogram will be formed with red dotted lines.  This is useful
     to differentiate it from other previously plotted histograms.  































                                       Page 4














                                          4

                                     PHILOSOPHY



     TOPDRAWER  is  designed to plot and manipulate data.  It assumes that data
     consists of X vs Y with errors DX, DY.  It may be X,Y  vs  Z  with  errors
     DX,DY,DZ.   You  may  also specify NDX,NDY or NDZ the negative part of the
     error bars separately from DX,DY or DZ.  The data may be  a  histogram  in
     which  case  DX  would  be  the  bin width, or it may be a set of discrete
     points with unrelated errors.  You may plot the data accordingly.  

     There  is  also an auxiliary set of coordinates, that may be used for data
     manipulation, but not plotting.  They  are  U,DU,NDU,V,DV,NDV,W,DW,NDW  To
     plot   the  data  in  these  coordinates  they  must  be  moved  to  X,Y,Z
     coordinates.  This is easily done with the SWAP command.  

     The basic plotting operations are:  
          1.  PLOT plots the data with optional error bars.  
          2.  JOIN joins the data points with line segments.  
          3.  HISTOGRAM plot the data as a histogram.  
          4.  BAR plots the data as a bar chart (similar to a histogram) 




























                                       Page 5














                                          5

                                      OPERATION



     The following command invokes TOPDRAWER:  
          $ TOPDRAWER [filename [device1 [device2...]]] [/options] 
            --------- --------- -------- -------------- ----------
     If the filename is omitted you are prompted with 
          TD:  

     You then start typing in commands to TOPDRAWER.  

     If  you  start  TOPDRAWER  from  a  batch  stream, the commands follow the
     $ TOPDRAWER command.  


     5.1  FILENAME 

          TD:SET FILE INPUT filename 
             --- ---- ----- --------

     If  the  optional  filename is specified after TOPDRAWER, the commands are
     read from the specified file and both the journal and list  file  are  not
     produced.  


     5.2  DEVICES 

     This  is  a specification of the output device type to use when processing
     the input file.  The device is specified the same  as  in  the  SET DEVICE
     command.   You  may  specify  up to 7 output devices by separating them by
     spaces.  

     For  example  if  you  want  to  get  postscript  output  in Portrait mode
     appropriate for use with TeX 
          $ TOPDRAWER TD.TOP "POSTSCR,ORIENT=3" 

     For example you want to get postscript, and view it in an X window 
          $ TOPDRAWER TD.TOP XWINDOW POSTSCR 


     5.3  OPTIONS 

          1.  /[NO]COMMAND[=file]  -  Specifies  a  file  to  get  commands for
              TOPDRAWER setup.  
              (Default:TDINIT.TOP) 



                                       PAGE 6


                                     OPERATION
                                      OPTIONS

          2.  /[NO]JOURNAL[=file] - Specifies a file to journal all interactive
              commands.  
              (Default:TD.TDJ) 
          3.  /[NO]LIST[=file]  -  Specifies  a  file  to list the commands and
              error messages.  
              (Default:TD.LIS) 






















































                                       Page 7














                                          6

                                       DEVICES



     The device may be specified on the command line.  Otherwise  TD  sets  the
     output  device  according  to  the  logical name PLOT_TERM or if it is not
     defined PLOT_DEVICE.  If neither is defined the device is assumed to be  a
     Talaris printer.  

     Normally  PLOT_TERM  is  automatically  set  when  you  log in.  It is not
     defined for a batch job.  This means that TD uses your  terminal  when  in
     interactive  mode,  and  the  Talaris  while in a batch stream.  The login
     procedure defines PLOT_TERM by asking  the  terminal  for  its  ANSWERBACK
     message.  This message must be set properly inside the terminal.  You need
     to know how to SET-UP the ANSWERBACK message.  
     For more information see:COMMANDS SET DEVICE 


     6.1  LIST_OF_DEVICES 

     To set your device use the command:  
          TD:SET DEVICE options 
             --- ------ -------
     Options                  Device 
     -------                  ------
     TEKTRONIX                Tektronix 4010 terminal 
     TEKTRONIX "CIT467"       CIT-467 Color graphics terminal 
     TEKTRONIX "RADM3A"       ADM-3A with Retrographics 
     TEKTRONIX "RVT100"       VT-100 with retrographics 
     TEKTRONIX "RVT100A"      VT-100 with retrographics (Green screen) 
     TEKTRONIX "RVT100,YPIXELS=3055"
                              
                              Falco infinity series (48 lines) 
     TEKTRONIX "SEL100XL"     Selanar HiREZ 100XL 
     TEKTRONIX "VIS102"       Visual 102 
     TEKTRONIX "TAL1590"      Talaris 1590 laser printer 
     TEKTRONIX "KERMIT"       Kermit simulation of TEK-4010 with color 
     TEKTRONIX "LSI7107"      LSI model 7107 color terminal 
     TEKTRONIX "TEK4207"      Tektronix color terminal 
     TEKTRONIX "TEEMTALK"     Tektronix color terminal 
     TEKTRONIX "VT240"        C.ITOH 328 
     TEKTRONIX                "TEK4010,RVT100,NSEGM"
                              
                              VersaTerm (Macintosh terminal emulation) 
     TEK4027                  Tektronix-4027 color term.  
     TEKEMUL                  Tektronix 4010 emulator 
     REGIS                    VT-240 


                                       PAGE 8


                                      DEVICES
                                  LIST_OF_DEVICES

     REGIS "COLOR=WRGWWWWD"   VT-241 color terminal 
     EXCL                     Talaris 1590 
     VERSATEC                 Versatec printer plotter 
     SIXELS "LN03"            LN-03 Laser printer 
     SIXELS "LN03HI"          LN-03 High resolution 
     SIXELS "LN03LO"          LN-03 Low resolution 
     SIXELS "LA50"            LA-50 or LA-100 with 8.5" paper 
     SIXELS "LA100"           LA-100 14" paper 
     QMS1200                  QMS Lasergrafix 1200 laser printer 
     IMAGEN                   Imagen laser printer 
     POSTSCRIPT               Postscript printer 
     PRINTRONIX               Printronix MVP printer/plotter.  
     XWINDOWS X windows ( Decwindows, MOTIF ) 

                                       Example
          TD:SET DEVICE TEKTRONIX "RVT100" 
             --- ------ --------- --------
     See also:TOPDRAWER command set device 










































                                       Page 9














                                          7

                                        INPUT



     Normally  TOPDRAWER  gets  primary input from either a batch file, or your
     terminal (SYS$INPUT).  You may have secondary input  files  by  using  the
     command:  
          TD:SET FILE INPUT filename 
             --- ---- ----- --------

     If you run TOPDRAWER interactively, but from an indirect command file, the
     input will be from the file that invoked TOPDRAWER.  If you wish  to  have
     input from the terminal, you may assign TT:  to SYS$INPUT temporarily by: 
          $ ASSIGN /USER TT:  SYS$INPUT 
            ------ ----- ---  ---------
          $ TOPDRAWER 
            ---------

     You  should  not  do  this in BATCH, as TT:  is the default output for the
     graphics.  You may get data  from  output  files  generated  by  histogram
     packages.  For more information on this see:Command SET HISTOGRAM.  

     Some input may be made via the cross hair cursor.  For example SHOW CURSOR
     brings  up  the  cursor on your terminal.  Move the cursor to the location
     you desire, and press any key except "Return" The current location of  the
     cursor will be typed and entered into the journal file as a comment.  Some
     other commands that use the cursor are ARROW, BOX, CIRCLE, ELLIPSE, TITLE,
     SET WINDOW, and SET LIMITS.  

     The  input  string  may not be longer than 256 characters.  If you need to
     omit columns or set up a special format for the  commands:   SET CARD  and
     SET FORMAT.  

     For more information see:TOPDRAWER DATA.  















                                      Page 10














                                          8

                                       OUTPUT



     TD produces the following output:  
          1.  Plot  - This may be on your terminal, LPA0:, another terminal, or
              a file on disk.  The plot data format and file is modified by the
              command:  
                   TD:SET DEVICE 
                      --- ------
              Plot output for a device other than your terminal is a file whose
              name matches the input file name,  and  whose  type  is  assigned
              according  to  the  device.   If there is no input file name, the
              output file name  is  UGDEVICE.   You  can  define  logical  name
              TOPDRAWER_OUTPUT to specify a name of your choice.  

              File types are:  
                  CAL  - Calcomp Microfiche 
                  HPGL - HPGL 
                  IMG  - Imagen 
                  PS   - Postscript 
                  PTX  - Printronix 
                  Q    - QMS 
                  REG  - Regis, Gigi, etc.  
                  SIX  - Sixels 
                  TEK  - Tektronix 
                  VEP  - Versatek 
                  XCL  - Talarix EXCL 

          2.  Listing - This lists all TD commands you used in a session.  This
              is normally TD.LIS, but the name may be changed by the command:  
                   TD:SET FILE OUTPUT 'newfilename' 
                      --- ---- ------ -------------
              If you do not want a list file:  
                   TD:SET MODE LIST OFF 
                      --- ---- ---- ---
                        or...  
                   TD:SET FILE OUTPUT NL:  
                      --- ---- ------ ---
          3.  Journal  - This file contains all commands entered interactively.
              It is normally file TD.TDJ, but the name may be  changed  by  the
              command:  
                   TD:SET FILE JOURNAL 'newfilename' 
                      --- ---- ------- -------------
              You may temporarily turn off journaling by:  
                   TD:SET MODE JOURNAL OFF 
                      --- ---- ------- ---


                                      Page 11


                                       OUTPUT
                                          

          4.  Errors  -  A  temporary file TOPDRAWER_ERRORS.DAT is used to save
              the error messages for the  current  plot.   This  file  is  only
              opened for interactive sessions.  
          5.  Data  - You may use the LIST command to output data sets suitable
              for input to TOPDRAWER.  If you do not specify the output file it
              goes to the Listing (TD.LIS).  






















































                                      Page 12














                                          9

                                       SET_UP



     You may specify a setup file to initialize TOPDRAWER.   This  is  done  by
     specifying  the  logical name TOPDRAWER_INIT.  TOPDRAWER_INIT should point
     to a file with TOPDRAWER commands to be executed  when  TD  first  starts.
     The  default  file name is TDINIT.TOP.  If you have a setup file then then
     journal file and listing file are suppressed.  You must start them in  the
     setup file if you want them.  

                                       example
          $ ASSIGN TDHBOOK TOPDRAWER_INIT 

     The file TDHBOOK.TOP contains the commands:  
          TD:SET HIST HBOOK FILE="hbook.dat" 
             --- ---- ----- ----------------
          TD:DEFINE KEY PF3 "SET HIST TITLE PREV;NEW;HIST"/TERMINATE 
             ------ --- --- ---- ---- ----- ------------------------
          TD:DEFINE KEY PF4 "SET HIST TITLE NEXT;NEW;HIST"/TERMINATE 
             ------ --- --- ---- ---- ----- ------------------------
          TD:SET FILE JOURNAL HISTS.TDJ 
             --- ---- ------- ---------

     Now  when you start TOPDRAWER your hbook histograms are already available,
     and keypad keys are defined to easily access them.  Your journal  file  is
     HISTS.TDJ and you have no listing file.  

     You assign:  
          $ ASSIGN TOPDRAWER_INIT SYS$LOGIN 
     The  file  TDINIT.TOP  in your root default login directory is used as the
     TOPDRAWER initialization file.  

















                                      Page 13














                                         10

                                        DATA



     TOPDRAWER accepts data in a variety of forms.  


     10.1  EXPRESSIONS 

          <expressions>
     An  expression  is an arithmetic computation enclosed inside angle brakets
     "<>".  An expression uses similar syntax to FORTRAN.  The syntax is not as
     rigid as FORTRAN and some syntactical elements may be omitted.  Expression
     evaluation is very slow, so you should use them sparingly.  


     10.1.1  Constants 

     Certain constants are built into TOPDRAWER.  They are:  
          1.  PI - 3.1416...  
              --
                                       example
          <2*PI> is 6.2831...  
          ------


     10.1.2  Functions 

     Functions are expressed as:  
          function<expression> 
          --------------------
     The  parenthesis around the argument of the function may be omitted if the
     argument is a number.  All functions may be  abbreviated.   The  available
     functions are:  
          1.  [ARC]SINE - [inverse] Sine of angle in degrees 
               -   ---
          2.  [A]COSINE - [inverse] Cosine of angle in degrees 
               - ---
          3.  [A]TANGENT - [inverse] Tangent of angle in degrees 
               - ---
          4.  RADIANS - Converts degrees to radians 
              ---
          5.  DEGREES - Converts radians to degrees 
              ---
          6.  GAMMA - GAMMA function (GAMMA(n)=(n-1)!) (Cern Library) 
              ---



                                      PAGE 14


                                        DATA
                                    EXPRESSIONS

          7.  LOGARITHM - Log to the base 10 
              ---
          8.  EXPONENTIAL - Power of e (inverse LN) 
              ---
          9.  LN - Logarithm to the base e 
              --
         10.  SQRT - Square root 
              --
         11.  RANDOM - Random number.  RAN(0) produces a random number.  RAN(n)
              ---
              sets the seed to n and starts a new random number sequence.  
         12.  ABSOLUTE - Absolute value 
              ---
         13.  INTEGER - Integer part of a number 
              ---
         14.  FRACTION - Fractional part of a number 
              ---
         15.  NINTEGER - Nearest integer to a number 
              ----
         16.  ERF - Error function (Cern Library) 
              ---
         17.  ERFC - Error function (Cern Library) 
              ----
         18.  FREQ - Frequency function (Cern Library) 
              ----


     10.1.3  Operators 

          1.  + - Add 
          2.  - - Subtract 
          3.  * - Multiply 
          4.  / - Divide 
          5.  ** - Power 
     These follow the same rules of precedence as in FORTRAN.  For example:  
          1.  2*3/4 is the same as (2*3)/4 or 1.5 
          2.  2*3+4*5 is the same as (2*3)+(4*5) or 26 
          3.  2**2**3 is the same as 2**(2**3) or 256 
          4.  2**2*3 is the same as (2**2)*3 or 12 
          5.  -2**2 is the same as -(2**2) or -4 
     Missing  operators  in  the  middle  of  an  expression  are assumed to be
     multiply "*".  <2(3)> is the same as <2*(3)>.  


     10.1.4  Filenames 

     TOPDRAWER will accept either VMS or UNIX style file specifications.  
                                       Example
          VMS                 UNIX
          [dir.subdir]file    /dir/subdir/file
          [.subdir]file       subdir/file
          [-.subdir]file      ../subdir/file








                                      PAGE 15


                                        DATA
                                    EXPRESSIONS

     10.1.5  Examples 

          <LOG(V_SUM)> 
          ------------
     the logarithm of the SUM.  
          <SINE(V_SUM)> 
          -------------
               or...  
          <SIN(V_SUM)> 
          ------------
     the sine of the SUM.  
          <ARCSIN(V_SUM)> 
          ---------------
               or...  
          <ASIN(V_SUM)> 
          -------------
     the arcsine of the SUM.  
          <4 SINE 30) 
     is the number 2.  
          <4(2+3)> 
     is the number 24.  


     10.2  ORDER 

     Data by default is entered in the following order.  
          X Y DX DY SYMBOL 

     Where:  
     DX is the error or 1/2 bin width for X+-DX.  
     DY is the error on Y+-DY.  
     SYMBOL is the symbol to plot.  

     You  may  change  the actual order that data is entered with the SET ORDER
     command.  


     10.3  NUMBERS 

     Data may be expressed in any legal FORTRAN format.  For example 
          1 = 1.0 = +1.0E0 


     10.4  POINTS 

     Data is entered in a series of lines one point to a line.  Each number may
     be  separated  by  spaces,  tabs,  or  commas",".  Numbers may also be run
     together without separators, provided they begin with either plus  "+"  or
     minus "-".  If you wish to enter several data points on a single line then
     they may be separated by semicolons ";".  Instead of a number you may also
     use expressions by enclosing it inside angle brakets "<>".  

     If you omit data the last value is used.  See: Command READ POINTS.  







                                      PAGE 16


                                        DATA
                                      SYMBOLS

     10.5  SYMBOLS 

     Symbols are 0O to 9O or any legal UGSYS duplex character set pair.  "NONE"
     indicates no symbol.  "  " or "DOT" produces a  dot.   If  the  symbol  is
     omitted  it is assumed to be NONE and the datum is plotted by default as a
     point rather than a symbol.  This may be modified by SET SYMBOL.   If  you
     wish  to  use  the  number  1 as a symbol it must be enclosed in quotes or
     apostrophes ("1").  


     10.6  TIME-ANGLES-DATES 

     Time  may  be  entered  in hours in the format hh:mm:ss.nnn.  You may also
     enter angles as dd:mm:ss.nn in degrees, minutes, seconds.  Time  or  angle
     data  must  begin  with  a  number.  0::1.5 is legal for 1.5 seconds after
     midnight, while ::1.5 is not legal.  

     Dates  may  be  entered  in  hours as YYYY\MM\DD.  If omitted MM or DD are
     assumed to be 1.  If you wish to enter both date and time  the  format  is
     YYYY\MM\DD\HH:mm:ss.ss.  See:Command SET DATE.  

     If  time  is preceded by a sign, then all 3 HOURS,MINUTES, and SECONDS are
     considered negative.  If a date or date\time is  preceded  by  a  sign  it
     applies  only to the YYYY (Year).  Signs (+ -) may not be imbedding inside
     a date\time.  

                                      Examples
          10 (10 am) 
          10:00 (10 am) 
          15:30:25.2 (25.2 seconds past 3:30 pm) 
          0.5 (Half past midnight) 
          0:30 (Half past midnight) 
          24:30 (Half past midnight) 
          1987\12\25\12:30 (12:30 on Dec 25, 1987) 
          -1:30:00 (10:30) 


     10.7  TYPES 

     Data  may  either  be  X,Y,Z  points or mesh data.  A point consists of an
     X,Y,[Z] value with optional errors DX,DY,[DZ],[NDX], [NDY],[NDZ] Z and  DZ
     are  optional and may not necessarily be present.  MESH data is a data set
     consisting of Z values as a function of X and Y.  A mesh is essentially  a
     square  grid of data with X,Y vs Z.  A mesh may also have optional DX, DY,
     and DZ values attached to it.  

     Data  may  be  subdivided  into  data  sets.   Each  data  set is numbered
     consecutively starting with 1.   Within  each  data  set  the  points  are
     numbered  from 1 to n.  To create a new data set use the DATA SET command.
     Some commands such as FIT allow automatic creation of a new  data  set  if
     the option APPEND is used.  

     When  plotting  you  may  specify which data set you wish to plot with the
     option SET=n.  For example PLOT SET=1 plots the first data set.   You  may
     also  use  FIRST,LAST,NEXT,PREVIOUS,  or  CURRENT  to  specify a data set.
     FIRST is always set number 1 while  LAST  is  the  number  of  data  sets.
     CURRENT is the last set specified.  NEXT is the current data set +1, while
     PREVIOUS is the current set -1.  


                                      PAGE 17


                                        DATA
                                       TYPES


     For example you may plot 2 sets by:  
          TD:PLOT SET=FIRST 
             ---- ---------
          TD:PLOT SET=NEXT 
             ---- --------
     You may also specify a range of sets.  
          TD:PLOT SET=2 TO LAST 
             ---- ----- -- ----
     plots all data sets except for number 1.  
                                       Warning
     When plotting multiple data sets, the format of the plot is taken from the
     first data set.  If the first set is a mesh, the plot will be 3-D.  


     10.8  ON|OFF 

     A number of options use ON or OFF to modify them.  For example:  
          TD:SET MODE VECTOR=OFF 
             --- ---- ----------
     Uses  hardware  characters  whenever possible.  Instead of ON, OFF you may
     also use T,F or TRUE,FALSE or YES,NO.  


     10.9  EXAMPLES 

     The   following   will  enter  a  series  of  data  points  in  the  order
     x,dx,y,dy,symbol.  
          TD:SET ORDER X DX Y DY SYMBOL 
             --- ----- - -- - -- ------
          TD:+1+.5+10+.5'0o' 
             ---------------
          TD:2 .5 25 .5 1o 
             - -- -- -- --
          TD:3 .25 10 .01 2o 
             - --- -- --- --
          TD:4 .1 5 1e-1 3o 
             - -- - ---- --






















                                      Page 18














                                         11

                                  COORDINATE_FRAME



     There are 2 different sets of frames used in  creating  plots.   They  are
     DATA  and TEXT frames.  TEXT is always specified in inches Unless modified
     by either a SET SIZE or SET UNITS command.  The character and symbol sizes
     and  are  all specified in tenths of inches.  Both of these may be changed
     by the SET UNITS command.  The actual data is in the DATA frame, which  is
     mapped  to  the  physical (TEXT) frame at the time of plotting.  The plots
     are all scaled automatically, unless you use the  command  SET  LIMITS  to
     specify  the  scale.   All commands which plot "things" work in either the
     DATA or the TEXT frame.  You may select the frame with the option DATA  or
     TEXT.   In  addition if 3d coordinates are used the frame is automatically
     DATA.  

          The  DATA  frame  is  not  mapped  to the TEXT frame until a plotting
     command or a command which uses the data frame is used.  Plotting commands
     are  JOIN,  HISTOGRAM,  PLOT and so on.  Commands which use the data frame
     are ARROW DATA, BOX DATA, TITLE DATA and so  on.   If  you  wish  to  have
     TOPDRAWER  automatically  set  the  data frame, you should supply the data
     before any commands which reference the data frame.  
     ------

     Several commands modify the data frame, once it has been defined:  
          SET WINDOW 
          SET LIMITS 
          SET THREE 
          SET SIZE 
          SET SCALE 
     These commands allow you to overlay different plots with different scales.
     Just reading in new data does not change the current data frame.  

















                                      Page 19














                                         12

                                        FONTS



     There  are  several  fonts  available  in the unified graphics.  They are:
     EXTENDED and DUPLEX.  

     The  EXTENDED  and DUPLEX support many sets of characters.  The DUPLEX set
     is slow compared to the extended set, but it  looks  almost  like  printed
     characters  if  you use a high resolution device.  The alternate character
     sets are determined by a character pair.  The first  character  determines
     the actual character printer, the second one determines the case.  


     12.1  LIST_OF_FONTS 

              Case      Character set 
              ----      --------- ---
          1.  blank     Roman (default) 
          2.  L         Roman lower case 
          3.  F+G       Greek 
          4.  B+C       Cyrillic 
          5.  P         Punctuation 
          6.  S         Typographicl symbols 
          7.  M         Math symbols 
          8.  T         Theoretic symbols 
          9.  W         Arrows 
         10.  K         Physics symbols 
         11.  A         Astronomical symbols 
         12.  O         Markers (Centered symbols) 
         13.  D         Drawing symbols (underscore,overscore) 
         14.  U+V       Movement control 
         15.  X         Subscript/Superscript 
         16.  Y         Character size 
         17.  Z         Position save/restore 



     12.2  ROMAN 

     Case character:  
     blank = upper case, L= Lower case 

     This  is  the normal ASCII character set.  It is not necessary to use L to
     shift to lowercase if your computer accepts lowercase characters.  




                                      PAGE 20


                                       FONTS
                                       GREEK

     12.3  GREEK 

     Case character:  
     F = upper case, G= Lower case 
       A Alpha     B Beta      G Gamma     D Delta
       E Epsilon   Z Zeta      H Eta       Q Theta
       I Iota      K Kappa     L Lambda    M Mu
       N Nu        X Xi        O Omicron   P Pi
       R Rho       S Sigma     T Tau       U Upsilon
       F Phi       C Chi       Y Psi       W Omega


     12.4  CYRILLIC 

     Case character:  
     B=Upper case, C=Lower case 
       A Ah        B Beh       V Veh       G Geh
       D Deh       E Yeh       X Zheh      Z Zeh
       I Ee        1 Ee S Kratkoy
       K Kah       L El        M Em        N En
       O Oh        P Peh       R Err       S Ess
       T Teh       U Ooh       F Ef        H Kha
       C Tseh      2 Cheh      3 Shah      4 Shchan
       Q Tvyordy Znak
       Y Yery      5 Myakhki Znak
       6 Eh Oborotnoye
       W Yoo       J Yah


     12.5  PUNCTUATION 

     Case character:  
     P=Punctuation 
          1.  .    Colon 
          2.  ,    semi-colon 
          3.  E    Exclamation mark 
          4.  U    question mark 
          5.  I    Interrobang 
          6.  A    Apostrophe 
          7.  Q    Quotation marks 
          8.  P    New paragraph 
          9.  D    Dagger 
         10.  F    Double dagger 


     12.6  MATH SYMBOLS 

     Case character:  
     M = Mathematical symbols 
          1.  .    Dot product 
          2.  X    Cross product 
          3.  /    Division sign 
          4.  P    Group plus 
          5.  M    Group multiply 
          6.  +    Plus or minus 
          7.  -    Minus or plus 
          8.  L    Less than 



                                      PAGE 21


                                       FONTS
                                    MATH SYMBOLS

          9.  G    Greater than 
         10.  M    Less than or equal 
         11.  H    Greater than or equal 
         12.  N    Not equal 
         13.  =    Identically equal 
         14.  A    Approximately equal 
         15.  C    Congruent to 
         16.  S    Similar to 
         17.  R    Proportional to 
         18.  T    Perpendicular to 
         19.  2    Square root 
         20.  D    Degrees 
         21.  I    Integral sign 
         22.  J    Line integral 
         23.  Y    Partial derivative 
         24.  Z    Del.  
         25.  (    Left floor braket 
         26.  )    Right floor braket 
         27.  B    Left ceiling braket 
         28.  E    Right ceiling braket 
         29.  0    Infinity 


     12.7  THEORETIC 

     Case character:  
     T = Theoretic special symbols 
          1.  E    Existential quantifier 
          2.  A    Universal quantifier 
          3.  M    Membership symbol 
          4.  N    Membership negation 
          5.  I    Intersection 
          6.  U    Union 
          7.  L    Contained in 
          8.  G    Contains 
          9.  K    Contained in or equals 
         10.  F    Contains or equals 


     12.8  ARROWS 

     Case character:  
     W = arrows 
          1.  U    Up 
          2.  D    Down 
          3.  L    Left (<--) 
          4.  R    Right (-->) 
          5.  B    Left/right (<-->) 


     12.9  PHYSICS 

     Case character:  
     K = Physics symbols 
          1.  H    H-bar 
          2.  L    Lambda bar 




                                      PAGE 22


                                       FONTS
                                    ASTRONOMICAL

     12.10  ASTRONOMICAL 

     Case character:  
     A=Astronomical symbols 
          1.  H    Sun 
          2.  M    Mercury 
          3.  V    Venus 
          4.  E    Earth 
          5.  W    Mars 
          6.  J    Jupiter 
          7.  S    Saturn 
          8.  U    Uranus 
          9.  N    Neptune 
         10.  P    Pluto 
         11.  O    Moon 
         12.  C    Comet 
         13.  *    Star 
         14.  X    Ascending mode 
         15.  Y    Descending mode 
         16.  K    Conjunction 
         17.  Q    Quadrature 
         18.  T    Opposition 
         19.  0    Aries 
         20.  1    Taurus 
         21.  2    Gemini 
         22.  3    Cancer 
         23.  4    Leo 
         24.  5    Virgo 
         25.  6    Libra 
         26.  7    Scorpius 
         27.  8    Sagittarius 
         28.  9    Capricornus 
         29.  A    Aquarius 
         30.  B    Pisces 


     12.11  MARKERS 

     Case character:  
     O= Plotting symbols 
               0   Vertical cross
               1   Diagonal cross
               2   Diamond
               3   Square
               4   Fancy diamond
               5   Fancy square
               6   Fancy vertical cross
               7   Fancy diagonal cross
               8   Star burst
               9   Octagon


     12.12  DRAWING 

     Case character:  
     D= Drawing characters 
               U   Underscore
               O   Overscore


                                      PAGE 23


                                       FONTS
                                      MOVEMENT

     12.13  MOVEMENT 

     This  moves  the current position by the specified amount.  This is useful
     for overstriking 2 characters to create a new character.  
     Case character:  
     U=Horizontal movement 
               0   1 space back
               1   Half space
               2   Half space back
               3   Third space
               4   Third space back
               5   Sixth space
               6   Sixth space back
     V=Vertical movement
               1   Half  up
               2   Half  down
               3   Third  up
               4   Third  down
               5   Sixth  up
               6   Sixth  down


     12.14  SUBSCRIPT 

     Case character:  
     X=Subscript control 
               0   Enter subscript
               1   Leave subscript
               2   Enter superscript
               3   Leave superscript


     12.15  CHARACTER_SIZE 

     Case character:  
     Y= Character size control 
               0   Increase by One-half 
               1   Decrease by One-half 


     12.16  POSITION 

     Case character:  
     Z=Position control 
               0   Save current state in area 1
               1   Restore state in area 1
               2   Save current state in area 2
               3   Restore state in area 2
               4   Save current state in area 3
               5   Restore state in area 3
               6   Save current state in area 4
               7   Restore state in area 4








                                      PAGE 24


                                       FONTS
                                      EXAMPLES

     12.17  EXAMPLES 

     To  draw the letter A with a bar over it.  You first draw an "A" then move
     back 1 space, then draw an Overscore.  
          TITLE "A0O" CASE " UD" 
     To draw a lowercase greek Lambda with a "hat or circumflex" over it.  
          TITLE "L012" CASE "GUV V" 


     12.18  SETTING_FONTS 

     The fonts are selected in 2 different ways for plot symbols and titles.  

     For  plot  symbols  you  use a 2 character identifier for the symbol.  For
     example 0O selects the cross as a plot symbol.  See commands:  
          1.  SET SYMBOL 
          2.  PLOT 
          3.  SET ORDER 

     For  titles  the  special symbols are selected with the CASE command.  The
     case command specifies a string with a font selection character  for  each
     character  in  the  title.   For  example  you  wish  to  write  in  Greek
     Alpha,Beta,Gamma followed by ABC.  
          TD:TITLE "ABGABC" 
             ----- --------
          TD:CASE  "GGG   " 
             ----  ----   -

































                                      Page 25














                                         13

                                 3-DIMENSIONAL_PLOTS



     TOPDRAWER will do a variety of 3-d  plots.   You  can  plot  a  series  of
     separate graphs superimposed on a third axis, or you can enter an array of
     data to be plotted with hidden line removal.  The array of data is entered
     by the READ MESH command.  The mesh is then plotted by the HISTOGRAM ,JOIN
     or PLOT commands.  
          1.  HISTOGRAM BLOCK produces a block or "Lego" plot of mesh data.  
          2.  JOIN produces a mesh surface.  
          3.  SET THREE OFF;PLOT produces a scatter plot of mesh data.  
          4.  CONTOUR produces a contour plot.  

          Axes  are  not  automatically added to 3-d graphs so you must use the
     command PLOT AXES.  You may turn each axis on  separately  using  the  SET
     AXIS  command  and then PLOT AXES X,Y,Z to place each axis in a convenient
     location.  

          The  command  SET  THREE  is used to specify the "viewpoint" of a 3-d
     plot.  SET SCALE is also used to specify the range and type  of  scale  to
     use along each of the X,Y,Z axes.  

          3-d  plots  may also be built from a series of 2-d plots.  To do this
     you must provide z values and:  
          TD:SET THREE ON 
             --- ----- --
     Then  either JOIN, HISTOGRAM or PLOT is used to plot the data.  Normally Z
     is the dependent variable, and X,Y are the independent variables.  If this
     rule is violated, 3-d histograms will not be correctly plotted.  Your data
     may be moved with the SWAP command if you need to get it into the  correct
     variables.  


     13.1  AXES_EXAMPLE 

     Assume  you are plotting a mesh.  The axes will normally appear behind the
     plot which may be hard to read.  You can move the axes to  the  front  for
     X,Y and to the left or right for Z with the following commands.  
          TD:SET AXES ALL ON FRONT 
             --- ---- --- -- -----
          TD:PLOT AXES HIDE 
             ---- ---- ----
          TD:TITLE X CENTER "X title" 
             ----- - ------ -- ------
          TD:TITLE Y CENTER "Y title" 
             ----- - ------ -- ------


                                      PAGE 26


                                3-DIMENSIONAL_PLOTS
                                    AXES_EXAMPLE

          TD:TITLE Z CENTER "Z title" 
             ----- - ------ -- ------


























































                                      Page 27














                                         14

                                     HISTOGRAMS



     TOPDRAWER  can  read  files  written by other histogram packages, and then
     plot them.  Support is provided for the HBOOK histogram package.  For more
     information see:  
          SET HISTOGRAM 









































                                      Page 28














                                         15

                                      COMMANDS





     15.1  FORMAT_OF_COMMANDS 

     Normally 1 command is placed on a single line.  If you wish  to  put  more
     than 1 command per line, they must be separated by a semicolon ";" 

     You may continue a command on the next line by putting a minus sign "-" at
     the end of the current line.  
          TD:SHOW DATA - 
             ---- ---- -
          _TD:STAT=OFF (continuation example) 
              -------- ------------- --------

     Optional  syntax  in  a command is shown enclosed in square brackets "[]".
     Required syntax may be enclosed in braces {}.   If  options  are  mutually
     exclusive they are separated by vertical bars "|" Options within a command
     may appear in any order.  Parameters must follow the option  they  modify.
     Options  in  a  command  may  be  separated  by tabs spaces * , or =.  For
     example SIZE=5 is the same as SIZE 5 or SIZE=5 or ,SIZE 5.  

     Commands and options may be abbreviated to the shortest number  of  unique
     characters or a minimum of 2 characters.  For example the command BARGRAPH
     may be abbreviated to BARGR, BAR or  even  BA.   SET  FILE  INPUT  may  be
     abbreviated to SE FI IN.  All commands may be abbreviated to 3 characters.
     The minimum abbreviation for each option is underlined.  

     Commands  are  read  from left to right.  If conflicting options are given
     for the same command, the right most option is used.  For example SET AXES
     ON OFF turns the axes off.  

     Many  commands  have synonyms.  For example AXES or AXIS, STOP or END, NEW
     FRAME or NEW PLOT or just NEW.  

     Comments  may be added to a command by enclosing them in parentheses "()".
     If the line begins with a double slash, "//" the rest of  the  line  is  a
     comment.  








                                      PAGE 29


                                      COMMANDS
                                   QUESTION_MARK

     15.2  QUESTION_MARK 

     The question mark may be used after a command to get immediate help on the
     options.  TOPDRAWER will list the various options  and  what  is  expected
     after  each  option.   If  the option expects more key words, they are not
     listed.  


     15.3  LIST_OF_COMMANDS 

                            3-d plot info.  is in parentheses ()
          1.  ADD - Adds together 2 data sets 
          2.  ARROW - Draws an arrow.  
          3.  BARGRAPH - Produces a bar graph.  
          4.  BIN - This transforms the data to a frequency distribution
              (histogram).  This may also be used to add data sets together.  
          5.  BOX - Draws a box.  
          6.  CIRCLE - Draws a circle or ELLIPSE.  
          7.  CLEAR - Clears the screen the next plot will use same parameters
              (WARNING:  usually you want command NEW) 
          8.  CONTOUR - Draws a contour plot of MESH data.  
          9.  CONVOLUTE - Calculates the convolution of 2 data sets.  
         10.  CREATE MESH - Creates mesh data.  
         11.  DATA SET - Starts a new data set.  
         12.  DELETE - Deletes data points.  
         13.  DEFINE COMMAND/KEY - Defines commands or keys on your keypad.  
         14.  DEFINE HISTOGRAM - Defines histograms (HBOOK ) 
         15.  DIAMOND - Draws a diamond.  
         16.  DIVIDE - Divides 2 data sets (histograms) 
         17.  NDU/NDV/NDW/NDX/NDY/NDZ - Enters a sequence of NDU,NDY...  or NDZ
              data values.  These are the negative errors on U,...  or Z.  
         18.  DU/DV/DW/DX/DY/DZ - Enters a sequence of DX,DY, or DZ data
              values.  These are the errors on U...  or Z.  
         19.  ELLIPSE - Draws a circle or ELLIPSE.  
         20.  ENDREPEAT - Ends a repeat loop.  
         21.  ENDFILE - Ends a file.  
         22.  FFT - Calculates a "fast" fourier transform of a data set.  
         23.  FIT - Fits functions to the data and/or generates a curve.  
         24.  FLUSH - Flush out all remaining data.  
         25.  HISTOGRAM - Draws a histogram or ("Block") plot.  
         26.  HELP - Get help on TOPDRAWER.  
         27.  IF/ELSE/ENDIF - Tests status 
         28.  JOIN - Joins the data points with a line or (Mesh) plot.  
         29.  LIST - List the current data points.  
         30.  LIST HISTOGRAM - List histograms (HBOOK ) 
         31.  MERGE - Merges the contents of data sets.  
         32.  MULTIPLY - Multiplies 2 data sets (histograms) 
         33.  NEW FRAME - Starts a completely new plot.  
         34.  NDX/NDY/NDZ - Enters a set of NDX...  data values.  These are
              negative error values.  
         35.  PAUSE - The program pauses.  
         36.  PLOT - Plots data as points or symbols (Scatter plot).  
               *  OUTLINE - Plots an outline around the plot.  
               *  AXES - Plots axes (Ticks and labels).  
               *  TABLE - Plots a table (list of numbers).  
         37.  READ - Reads in data points.  
         38.  REPEAT - Repeats a series of commands.  



                                      PAGE 30


                                      COMMANDS
                                  LIST_OF_COMMANDS

         39.  RESTORE - Restores things 
              A.  DATA - Restores data sets from a file.  
              B.  HISTOGRAM - Restores a set of histograms (HBOOK ) 
              C.  FIT - Restores a fit.  
         40.  SAVE - Saves things See:RESTORE 
         41.  SHOW - Shows current options as set by the SET command.  
         42.  SMOOTH - The data is smoothed.  
         43.  SORT - Sorts the contents of a data set.  
         44.  SPAWN - Spawns out of TOPDRAWER.  
         45.  SPLINE - Produce a spline fit to the data.  
         46.  STOP - Stops TOPDRAWER.  
         47.  SUBTRACT - Subtracts 2 data sets.  
         48.  SWAP - Swaps data for 2 axes.  
         49.  SYMBOL - Enters symbols for existing data.  
         50.  TITLE - Puts a title on the plot.  
         51.  TRANSFORM - Transform data from one coordinate frame to another
              (CARTESIAN,POLAR,SPHERICAL) 
         52.  TYPE - Types a line on your terminal.  
         53.  CASE - Controls the format of the title.  
         54.  MORE - Adds more text under the current title.  
         55.  SET - Sets options for plots (defaults).  
         56.  U/V/W/X/Y/Z - Enters a sequence of U,V,....  or Z values.  U,V,W
              are auxiliary coordinates while X,Y,Z are the coordinates used in
              plotting.  


     15.4  OPTIONS 

     There  are  a  number  of options that are common to many commands.  These
     select either the data to use, or  the  plot  attributes.   Commands  that
     modify data have some common output options.  
                                     Data selection
     POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2] 
     --     --       --        --
          Selects the data points or columns of a mesh by number 
     LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2] 
     ---   --    --        --
          Selects the lines of a mesh 
     SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2] 
     ---   --        --
          Selects the data sets by number 
     SELECT="name" 
     ---
          Selects the data sets by name 
     LIMITED  [VLOG[=ON|OFF]]  [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]] [RECURSOR]
     ---       --    -- --       --    --   -       -       -         --
          [CURSOR] 
           --
          Selects the data by specifying a range or value for each point 
     SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2] 
     --              --         --
          Selects the data by specifying a range and selects the axis to view a
          mesh.  
     [TITLE[=ON|OFF]] 
      --     -- --
          Uses the name of the current histogram to put a title on the plot.  
                                       Plot limits
     EXPAND[=ON|OFF] 
     --      -- --

                                      PAGE 31


                                      COMMANDS
                                      OPTIONS

                                     Plot attributes
     CYCLE[=ON|OFF] 
     ---    -- --
          Each data set is plotted with a different intensity, color ...  
     INTENSITY|WIDTH=n 
     --        --
          Selects the line width for the plotted data 
     WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN 
     --    --  --    ---  --     --      ---
          Selects the color for the plotted data 
     SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE 
     --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
          Selects the texture of the lines for plotted data.  
     HIDE[=ON|OFF] 
     --    -- --
          Hides the current data if behind a previous hidden set.  
     FILL[=ON|OFF] 
     --    -- --
          Fills the data with a pattern.  
                                    Output selection.
     APPEND[=ON|OFF] 
     --      -- --
          The  resulting  "new" data set is appended to the current sets rather
          than replacing it.  
     NAME="name" 
     ---
          Specifies the name of the "new" data set.  
                                      Miscellaneous
     LOG[=ON|OFF] 
     --   -- --


     15.4.1  APPEND 

     For  commands  that  transform  data  either  the  specified data sets are
     replaced by the new data set, or all data sets are  replaced  by  the  new
     data.   If you wish to retain the old data the option APPEND creates a new
     data set with the transformed data.  
     (Default:OFF) 

     See:Command SET MODE 


     15.4.2  CYCLE 

     When  plotting  more  than  1  slice  or  data  set, CYCLE causes the line
     texture, color, and width to vary from one plot to the next.  The order of
     cycling  is  set  by  the SET CYCLE command.  If you have specified either
     texture, color or width it overrides the cycle value.  
     (Default:OFF) 


     15.4.3  EXPAND 

     Sets  the  limits  so  that  the selected data expands to fill the window.
     This has no effect unless LIMITED, POINTS, SETS, or SLICES are  specified.
     Normally  the  limits of the plot are set according to all data.  This may
     inconvenient when the plotted subset of the data  occupies  only  a  small


                                      PAGE 32


                                      COMMANDS
                                      OPTIONS

     portion of the window.  EXPAND will make the data fill the window.  
     (Default:OFF) 


     15.4.4  FILL 

     Generates a fill pattern.  To set the fill pattern see:SET FILL.  
     (Default:OFF) 

     See:Command SET MODE 


     15.4.5  HIDE 

     Controls whether hidden lines are drawn for a 3-d  mesh,  or  whether  one
     plot hides the next.  You must specify HIDE for both the plot to be hidden
     and the plot that is to hide it.  The plot which is drawn first will  hide
     the  second  one.   HIDE=OFF  draws  the hidden lines, while HIDE=ON omits
     them.  
     (Default:HIDE=ON for mesh, HIDE=OFF for data) 

                                       example
     Assume  you  have 2 data sets where you want set 1 to hide elements in set
     2.  Also you would like to fill data set 2.  
          TD:JOIN SET=1 HIDE 
          TD:JOINS SET=2 HIDE FILL 

     You  can  produce a drawing of a mesh with hidden lines as dotted lines by
     doing the histogram twice:  
          TD:HISTOGRAM 
             ---------
          TD:HISTOGRAM HIDE=OFF DOTTED 
             --------- -------- ------


     15.4.6  LOG 

     This logs the operation by typing on your terminal a line telling you what
     was done.  
     (Default:OFF) 


     15.4.7  NAME 

     The  new  set will usually have a name consisting of a transformation name
     followed by the old set name.  If you specify a new name it is applied  to
     the  new  data set.  If the name ends in "%" then the old name is appended
     to the new name.  See option:APPEND 


     15.4.8  POINTS|COLUMNS 

     This selects the points or the colums of a mesh to plot or modify.  If not
     selected all points are used.  If n2 is omitted it is assumed  to  be  n1.
     You may specify the point number or the options FIRST,LAST.  





                                      PAGE 33


                                      COMMANDS
                                      OPTIONS

     15.4.9  SELECT 

     SELECT="name"
     selects  the  data  sets  to  plot  or modify by name.  You may use "wild"
     characters.   "*"  means  any  characters,  while  "%"  means  any  single
     character.  Normally the match is case blind unless you:  
          TD:SET EXACT 


     15.4.10  SETS 

     This  selects  the  data  sets  to plot or modify.  If n2 is omitted it is
     assumed to be n1.  You may specify the data  set  number  or  the  options
     FIRST,LAST.  


     15.4.11  SOLID...  

     This  determines  the  texture of the line.  By stringing together several
     texture commands you may create very complicated  textures.   For  example
     DOT  SPACE DOT DASH will produce a dot-dot-dast pattern with a large space
     between the dots.  

          1.  SOLID produces a totally solid line.  This overrides all previous
              specifications.  
          2.  DOT produces a dot 
          3.  DASH produces a short dash 
          4.  DAASH produces a long dash 
          5.  SPACE produces extra space between previous elements 
          6.  FUNNY produces random distances between elements 
          7.  PATTERNED  makes the pattern according to the current SET pattern
              if it is specified by itself.  If specified with other options it
              produces the patterns by generating a pattern.  The length of the
              elements is determined by the size in the SET PATTERN command.  
          8.  Some  combinations  will  produce  the  patterns by hardware when
              available.  This makes for quick, but not necessarily nice plots.
              The following generally use hardware:  
              A.  DOT 
              B.  DASH 
              C.  DOT DASH 
              D.  DAASH 

     See:Command SET TEXTURE 


     15.4.12  SLICES 

               [SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]] 
                                --         --
                    or...  
               [SLICE X|Y|Z=v1] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]] 

     This plots or joins points sliced from mesh data.  This command is illegal
     for normal data.  If v2 is omitted then v2=v1.  If  a  range  is  selected
     then  all  slices within the range are histogrammed.  IF you set THREE=OFF
     then the slices are histogrammed according to the first  X,Y,Z  Mentioned.
     If  X is first then the slices are taken perpendicular to the X axis.  You
     only need select X|Y|Z the first time you slice after a NEW FRAME command. 


                                      PAGE 34


                                      COMMANDS
                                       TITLE

     15.5  TITLE 

     This  takes the name of the data set you are plotting and uses it to write
     a title on the plot.  The name  is  divided  into  4  parts  separated  by
     semicolons  ";".  The 4 parts are placed at the TOP,X,Y,Z locations of the
     plot.  If the default title color,  width  are  none  then  the  title  is
     plotted with the same color, width as the the data set.  

     This  can be very helpful when overlaying several data sets, as the titles
     correspond to the data set.  


     15.6  WHITE...  

     This sets the color of the plot.  

     See:Command SET COLOR 


     15.7  ADD 

     See:  SUBTRACT 


     15.8  SUBTRACT 

     {ADD|SUBTRACT} [Y|Z] [FROM|TO] [EWEIGHT=n] [WEIGHT=n] {n1|"name1"} [BY]
      --  --         - -   --   --   --          --                      --
               {n2|"name2"|FIT} 
                           --
          [AVERAGE|EFFICIENCY[=ON|OFF]] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"]
           --      --          -- --     --      -- --     ---
               [CHECK[=ON|OFF]] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]] [POINTS|
                --     -- --     --     -- --     --
               COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
               --       --        --         ---   --    --        --
               [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
                ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] [LOG[=ON|OFF]] [VECTOR[=ON|OFF]] 
                --         --         --   -- --     --      -- --
     This  adds or subtracts the (Y/Z) values in data set n2 (from,to) data set
     n1.  The result is a modified set n1.  


     15.8.1  APPEND 

     If  APPEND  is  specified,  then a new data set is created, containing the
     result and n1 is unchanged.  


     15.8.2  AVERAGE 

     This  option  will  not  work  for  the  SUBTRACT  command.  If AVERAGE is
     specified, the data is averaged together according to  the  Y  statistics.
     If  Y  is non zero but DY is 0 then DY is assumed to be 1.  If both Y1 and
     DY1 are zero then Y3,DY3 = Y2,DY2.  
          Y3=(Y1/DY1**2+Y2/DY2**2)/(1/DY1**2+1/DY2**2) 
          DY3=SQRT(2*DY1**2*DY2**2/(DY1**2+DY2**2)) 


                                      PAGE 35


                                      COMMANDS
                                      SUBTRACT

     If you wish to average several data sets with statistics, this should give
     you the correct result.  Zero data  with  zero  statistics  indicates  the
     absence  of  data.   If  you  wish  to  average  several data sets without
     statistics then you should always set the  statistics  to  a  "reasonable"
     value.  


     15.8.3  CHECK 

     CHECK=OFF  turns off data set checking.  When CHECK=ON both data sets must
     have identical X (and Y if mesh) values, but data set n2 may contain  more
     points  than  n1.   If  (DX/DY) is non zero then the both DX and X must be
     identical within 1% of DX.  If you  have  data  sets  with  non  identical
     values  of  X  you  may  create  a set with identical values using the BIN
     command.  you may also add together data sets with the  BIN  command.   If
     the  X  values  of  2  data  sets  are not quite identical.  You may force
     TOPDRAWER to add them by setting DX for the data 100  times  greater  than
     the difference in X or by setting CHECK=OFF.  


     15.8.4  ERROR 

     ERROR=OFF excludes the errors from the FIT in the computation.  
     (Default:ERROR=ON) 


     15.8.5  FIT 

     Specifies  that  the  last  FIT is to be added or subtracted from the data
     set.  See:Command FIT.  


     15.8.6  LIMITED 

     You  may specify the limits over which the histograms are to be added.  If
     you specify the Y or Z limits, then all data that contains  values  inside
     these limits will be added.  For example if you 
          ADD 1 to 2 LIMITED FROM Y=10 to Y=11 
     But data set 1 contains the followind data:  
     1,0;  2,10;  3,0;  4,11;  5,0 
     Points  2  to  4  inclusive will be added, and only points 1 and 5 will be
     omitted.  


     15.8.7  LOG 

     If  LOG  is  specified  then  the  result  of the command is typed on your
     terminal.  


     15.8.8  VECTOR 

     The  DX,DY,DZ's  will  be  added together assuming they are a vector.  The
     X,Y,Z are not changed, and they should match for both input data sets.  

     If POLAR or SPHERICAL are ON the coordinates are handled correctly.  




                                      PAGE 36


                                      COMMANDS
                                      SUBTRACT

     15.8.9  WEIGHT-EWEIGHT 

     WEIGHT=n  specifies  a  weighting  factor  to  multiply the data by before
     adding or subtracting it.  EWEIGHT=n specifies the error on WEIGHT.   This
     option must precede the data set number.  


     15.8.10  X|Y 

     Selects which coordinate of regular data is to be added.  Mesh data always
     adds the dependent coordinate which is usually z.  
     (Default:Y) 


     15.8.11  Notes 

     For  mesh  data  the  independent  coordinate must be Z.  For 2-d data the
     independent coordinate is always Y.  If you add normal data to  mesh  data
     each  normal  Y value is added to the corresponding mesh Z value.  You may
     not add mesh data to normal 2-d data.  

     If  EFFICIENCY  is  not  specified then the new value is Y3=Y1(+-)Y2.  The
     errors  (DY)  are  treated  as  if  the   data   sets   are   uncorrelated
     DY3=SQRT(DY1**2+DY2**2).  

     The ADD command with CHECK=OFF allows you to combine X,Y,Z...  data 
          TD:SWAP  X  Y SET=1 from 1 data set with mismatched data from another
             ----  -  - -----
     set.  For example you wish to plot Y of set 1 vs Y of set 2.  
          TD:SWAP X Y SET=1 
             ---- - - -----
          TD:ADD 1,1 APPEND (Produces set 3=set 1) 
             --- --- ------
          TD:Y=0 SET=LAST (Set 3 has only X) 
             --- --------
          TD:ADD 2,3 CHECK=OFF (Set 3 has Y(1),Y(2)) 
             --- --- ---------
     Set 3 now has X=Y(set 1) and Y=Y(set 2) 


     15.8.12  Example 

          TD:ADD 1 TO 2 
             --- - -- -
               or...  
          TD:ADD 2 1 
             --- - -
               or...  
          TD:ADD TO 2 1 
             --- -- - -
     Data set 1 is added to data set 2.  Data set 1 is unchanged.  
          TD:ADD 1 TO 2 APPEND 
             --- - -- - ------
     Data  set 1 and 2 are added.  The result in put into a new data set.  Both
     sets 1 and 2 are unchanged.  
          TD:SUBTRACT 1 FROM 2 
             -------- - ---- -
     Data set 1 is subtracted from data set 2.  Data set 1 is unchanged.  


                                      PAGE 37


                                      COMMANDS
                                      SUBTRACT

     See:Command DIVIDE,MULTIPLY 


     15.9  ARROW 

     Draws an arrow from 1 point to another.  
     ARROW [FROM] [x,y[,z]|CURSOR] [DATA] [LESS=n] 
     --     --             --       --     --
          TO[x,y[,z]|CURSOR] [DATA] [LESS=n] 
          --         --       --     --
          [SIZE=n] [FLARE|FLAIR=n] 
           --       --    --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           --    --  --    --   --     --      --
          [SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
          [FILL[=ON|OFF]] [HIDE[=ON|OFF]] 
           --    -- --     --    -- --


     15.9.1  Options 

          1.  x,y,z  -  specify the location of the ends of the arrow.  If z is
              specified the end point  is  assumed  to  be  specified  in  data
              coordinates.   If CURSOR is specified you may enter the end point
              with the cross hair cursor.  The cursor appears  on  the  screen.
              Just  move  it  to the end point and press the space bar.  If you
              press any other key, the end point is not entered.  
          2.  DATA - specifies X,Y are in data coordinate frame.  Normally they
              are in the TEXT coordinate frame.  
          3.  LESS - Shortens the arrow by n so it does not touch x,y.  
          4.  SIZE - length of arrow head in tenths of an inch.  
          5.  FLARE  -  is  ratio  of  the base to the height of the arrow head
              (fatness).  
          6.  INTENSITY...  - Selects the intensity of the arrow.  
          7.  WHITE...  - Selects the color of the arrow 
          8.  SOLID...   -  Selects  the  texture  of  the  body  of the arrow.
              See:Command SET TEXTURE.  
          9.  FILL - Fills in the arrow head 


     15.9.2  Example 

          TD:ARROW From 1,1 TO DATA 25,100 LESS 0.1 
             ----- ---- --- -- ---- ------ ---- ---
     Draws  an  arrow  from 1,1 in the text frame to data location 25,100.  The
     arrow is shortened by 0.1 inches so it does not touch the data.  


     15.10  BARGRAPH 

     Produces a simple bar graph.  Bars are  centered  on  the  x  values  with
     heights given by Y.  Half widths are determined by DX and DY is not used. 

     BARGRAPH [EXPAND] 
     --        --


                                      PAGE 38


                                      COMMANDS
                                      BARGRAPH

          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --      --        --
          [SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]] 
           --              --         --        ---    -- --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           --    --  --    ---  --     --      ---
          [SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
                              3-d options 
          [X] [Y] [Z] [BLOCK|LEGO] [HIDE[=ON|OFF]] [FRAME[=ON|OFF]] [DEPTH[=ON|
           -           ---   --     --    -- --     --     -- --     --     --
               OFF]] [XY|YZ|ZX] [CROSS|RANDOM] 
               --     -- -- --   --    --

          If  the  points are not specified all data points are used.  The line
     texture is  determined  by  the  options  specified  or  by  the  default.
     See:Command HISTOGRAM for more information.  


     15.11  BIN 

     BIN|FREQUENCY 
     --  --
          [MESH] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]] [[X|Y] [FROM=n] [TO=n] [BY|WIDTH|STEP=n]
           --     --     -- --      - -   --       --     -- --    --
               [BINS|N=n]] 
                ---- -
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --      --        --
          [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [AVERAGE[=ON|OFF]] [VALUES] 
           --      -- --     ---           --       -- --     --
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
          [NORMAL[=ON|OFF]] 
           --      -- --
          [LOG[=ON|OFF]] [MONITOR[=ON|OFF]] 
           --   -- --     --       -- --
     This  transforms data to a frequency distribution (histogram) with equally
     spaced X/Y values.  


     15.11.1  Introduction 

     For  each X entered, the corresponding Y is added/averaged to a bin in the
     histogram.  If all selected Y and DYs are zero Y and DY are assumed to  be
     1.0.   When  averaging any data with zero DY is ignored.  The result is an


                                      PAGE 39


                                      COMMANDS
                                        BIN

     evenly spaced series of X values with the corresponding distribution in  Y
     and  the  standard deviation of each Y in DY/NDY.  The symbol for each bin
     is set to the default.  You may find that the resulting data is not in the
     correct storage locations especially if a 3-d plot is to be produced.  You
     may change locations with the SWAP command.  If the data has a non zero DX
     then  it  may  be  distributed  over  more  than  1  bin.   The  DX  error
     distribution is assumed to be gaussian, and the data is distributed with a
     cut off at 4 sigma.  If NORMAL=OFF a flat distribution is assumed.  

     You  may not BIN mesh data.  If you need to rebin mesh data then it should
     be decomposed to a series of data sets using the PROJECT BY n command.  


     15.11.2  Options 

          1.  MESH - Bins data into a MESH 
          2.  ERRORS - Bins data into a MESH with errors if MESH is selected.  
          3.  X,Y - Select the axes to specify bins.  
          4.  BINS|N - The number of bins in the histogram.  
          5.  VALUES - You are specifying the bin values rather than the bin
              edge.  
          6.  FROM - Sets the lowest bin value (low edge) 
          7.  TO - Sets the highest bin value.  
          8.  BY - Sets the bin width.  
          9.  NORMAL - Selects either a normal (Gaussian) distribution or a
              flat (histogram) distribution.  
         10.  NAME - Selects the name of the appended data set 
         11.  POINTS - Specifies the range of points within a data set to use. 
         12.  SETS - Specifies the range of data sets to use.  
         13.  APPEND - The new data is appended to the current data as a new
              set rather than replacing it.  
         14.  AVERAGE - Produces a weighted average of the data 
         15.  LIMITED - Selects the range of data to bin.  
         16.  LOG - Types the result of the command 
         17.  MONITOR - Plots the result.  



     15.11.3  AVERAGE 

     A  weighted  average  is  produced  of  the data.  The data is weighted by
     1/DY**2 if DY is non zero.  Otherwise a weight of 1 is used.   The  result
     is  X,Y,DY.   If the original DYs are all zero (or 1) then the final DY is
     1/SQRT(points).  Where points is the number of points averaged to  form  a
     bin.  


     15.11.4  APPEND 

     If  APPEND=ON  the  resulting  data  sets are appended to the current data
     sets.  If OFF then the current data is replaced by the new binned data.  


     15.11.5  ERRORS 

     If this option and MESH are selected, then the mesh will  have  errors  on
     its data.  



                                      PAGE 40


                                      COMMANDS
                                        BIN

     15.11.6  FROM...  

     [[X|Y] [FROM=n] [TO=n] [BY|WIDTH|STEP=n] [BINS|N=n]] 
       - -   --       --     -- --    --       ---- -
     Specifies  the range of the histogram.  If FROM,TO and NBINS are specified
     BY may not be specified.  FROM is the lowes bin edge.  TO is  the  highest
     bin edge.  BY is the bin width, And N is the number of bins.  

     If  VALUES  is  specified then the FROM and TO are the center of the first
     bin and the center of the last bin.  

     If  these  are  omitted then the data is scanned and the bins are arranged
     according to the current scale values.  (See:SET SCALE) If the data to bin
     is  arranged as a set of matching histograms, the final data set will have
     the same x values as the initial.  A histogram has equally spaced x values
     with identical DX.  Data sets match if the initial X and DX values are the
     same.  

     The following are equivalent commands:  
          TD:BIN FROM 0 TO 10 BY 1 
             --- ---- - -- -- -- -
          TD:BIN FROM 0 TO 10 N=10 
             --- ---- - -- -- ----
          TD:BIN FROM 0 BY 1 N=10 
             --- ---- - -- - ----
          TD:BIN VALUES FROM .5 TO 9.5 BY 1 
             --- ------ ---- -- -- --- -- -


     15.11.7  LIMITED 

     Specifies  which  data are to be binned.  If limits are not specified, the
     default is the current plot limits.  See:Command SET LIMITS.  
          1.  X - Specifies X limit 
          2.  Y - Specifies Y limit 
          3.  Z - Specifies the Z limit 
          4.  CURSOR  - Brings up the cursor.  You move it to the X,Y value you
              wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to  enter  X
              or Y to enter Y.  
          5.  RECURSOR - The cursor enters both limits.  

                                       Example
          TD:BIN LIMITED FROM X=1 to X=5 
             --- ------- ---- --- -- ---
     Sets limits on the range of X data to bin.  
          TD:BIN LIMITED FROM 1,5.5 TO 5,50.8 
             --- ------- ---- ----- -- ------
     Sets  limits  on  the range of X,Y to bin.  This does not set the range of
     the final data sets.  


     15.11.8  MESH 

     Bins  data  into  a  mesh of Z vs X,Y.  The Z values are added or averaged
     together.  If Z does not exist you are given an error message.  APPEND  is
     ignored for a MESH.  
                                       example
          TD:BIN MESH X FROM 1 to 10 by 1 Y FROM 10 to 100 by 10 
             --- ---- - ---- - -- -- -- - - ---- -- -- --- -- --

                                      PAGE 41


                                      COMMANDS
                                        BIN

     15.11.9  MONITOR     

     If selected it histograms the result.  
     See:  SET MODE MONITOR 


     15.11.10  NORMAL 

     NORMAL=ON  selects  a normal distribution with a cutoff at 4 sigma for the
     error DX.  NORMAL=OFF selects a flat distribution from -DX to  +DX.   This
     is probably preferable for rebinning another histogram.  
     (Default:NORMAL=ON) 


     15.11.11  X...  

     This  specifies which axes to bin.  X is always binned.  If Y is specified
     then both X and Y are binned.   After  X  or  Y  you  should  specify  the
     FROM,TO,BY options if you wish to bin into a specific range, or step size.
     If you specify Y without MESH then a set of data sets are  produced,  each
     for a different Y.  


     15.11.12  VALUES 

     Normally  FROM,TO  specify  the  edges of the minimum, maximum bins.  When
     VALUES=ON then they specify the center of the bins.  


     15.11.13  Histograms 

     You  may  add  together 2 histograms or average together 2 histograms with
     different bin widths.  You should specify the correct DX and DY  for  each
     data set you wish to add.  You probably also wish to use NORMAL=OFF 

     If  you do not specify FROM, TO ...  a set of values is assumed.  First if
     you are binning 2 histograms with equally spaced equivalent  values,  then
     the  same  X  values are assumed.  Otherwise the current X tick spacing is
     used.  


     15.11.14  Example 

     Say you wish to find the frequency distribution of a set of student grades
     in 5 point steps.  The following will do the job:  
          TD:SET ORDER X 
             --- ----- -
               (Enter grades) 
          TD:Grade1;  Grade2;  Grade3.....  
             -------  -------  -----------
          TD:Graden;.......  
             --------------
          TD:BIN BY 5 (now do the binning) 
             --- -- -
          TD:HISTOGRAM 
             ---------
     Suppose  you  wish  to  add  together  2 HBOOK histograms.  Each histogram
     contains counts, but the X spacing is different.  


                                      PAGE 42


                                      COMMANDS
                                        BIN

          TD:SET HIST HBOOK ID=n1 
             --- ---- ----- -----
          TD:SET HIST ID=n2 APPEND 
             --- ---- ----- ------
               You now have both hists in memory.  
          TD:BIN NORMAL=OFF 
             --- ----------
     You  now  have both histograms added together.  If both histograms had the
     same X values/bin then the result will have  the  same  X  values  as  the
     original.  


     15.12  BOX 

     Draws a box centered on the x,y with the sides parallel to the axes.  

     BOX [AT|FROM|TO]{x,y[,z]|CURSOR} [DATA] [SIZE=dx[,dy]]
     --   -- --   --                   --     --
               [DSIZE=dx[,dy[,dz]]] [ROTATE=n] [SQUARE|SYMMETRIC[=ON|OFF]]
                --                   --         --     --         -- --
               [FILL[=ON|OFF]] [HIDE[=ON|OFF]] 
                --    -- --     --    -- --
          [SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           --    --  --    --   --     --      --


     15.12.1  AT 

     x,y,z  specify  the  center  of  the box.  If z is specified then they are
     assumed to be data units.  Instead of x,y,z you may  specify  CURSOR.   If
     x,y,z are specified without FROM,TO, then AT is assumed.  


     15.12.2  FROM-TO 

     You  may also specify the diagonally opposite corners of the box.  If z is
     specified then they are assumed to be data units.  Instead  of  x,y,z  you
     may specify CURSOR.  


     15.12.3  FILL 

     Fills in the box using the current fill pattern.  See:SET FILL 


     15.12.4  CURSOR 

     The  cross hair cursor is used to specify the limits or center of the box.
     First move the cursor to a corner of the box.  Press the space bar.   Next
     move  the  cursor  the diagonally opposite corner and press space again to
     draw the box.  If you decide not to draw the  box,  press  any  other  key
     other than space or "Return".  




                                      PAGE 43


                                      COMMANDS
                                        BOX

     15.12.5  DATA 

     Specifies X,Y are in data coordinate frame.  Normally they are in the TEXT
     coordinate frame.  This  option  is  not  necessary  if  z  or  DSIZE  are
     specified.  


     15.12.6  DSIZE 

     Specifies  the  size  in data units.  If the size is in data units the x,y
     are assumed to be data units also.  


     15.12.7  ROTATE 

     Specifies  a  rotation  angle  in  degrees.   Rotation  is right handed or
     counterclockwise.  


     15.12.8  SIZE 

     Specifies  the  size in inches DX is the width of the box.  If omitted the
     width is the default see:Command SET BOX SIZE.  DY is the  height  of  the
     box.  If omitted DY=DX.  


     15.12.9  SQUARE 

     The option SQUARE or SYMMETRIC produces a square box.  The SIZE is treated
     as a diagonal through the center of a square, and FROM, TO are treated  as
     the coordinates of 2 opposite sides of a square.  


     15.12.10  SOLID...  

     Sets the texture of the line.  See:Command SET TEXTURE.  


     15.12.11  INTENSITY 

     Sets the intensity (n=1-5) 


     15.12.12  WHITE...  

     Sets the color of the line.  


     15.12.13  Example 

          TD:BOX AT 6.5,5 size=6.5,5 
             --- -- ----- ----------
               or...  
          TD:BOX 6.5,5 size 6.5,5 
             --- ----- ---- -----
               or...  
          TD:BOX FROM 3.25,2.5 TO 9.75,7.5 
             --- ---- -------- -- --------


                                      PAGE 44


                                      COMMANDS
                                        BOX

               or...  
          TD:BOX FROM 3.25,2.5 size=6.5,5 
             --- ---- -------- ----------
     Draws a centered box half the size of the screen assuming the default size
     of 13x10.  
          TD:Set limits X -100,100 Y -100,100 
             --- ------ - -------- - --------
          TD:BOX 0,0 DATA size 1 
             --- --- ---- ---- -
     Draws a box centered on the data 1 inch square 
          TD:Set limits X -100,100 Y -100,100 
             --- ------ - -------- - --------
          TD:BOX 50,50 Dsize 100,100 
             --- ----- ----- -------
     Draws a box around the upper right quadrant of the data.  
          TD:BOX AT CURSOR TO CURSOR 
             --- -- ------ -- ------
     Draws  a  box  centered  at the first cursor position with a corner at the
     second cursor.  
          TD:BOX FROM CURSOR SIZE=2 
             --- ---- ------ ------
     Draws  a  box  with  the lower left corner at the cursor position 2 inches
     square.  


     15.13  CASE 

     See:Command TITLE 


     15.14  CIRCLE 

     Draws a circle or ellipse.  See:Command ELLIPSE.  


     15.15  CONTOUR 

     Draws a contour plot from mesh data.  
     CONTOUR [n1,n2,n3.....] 
     ----
                                       Contour selection
          [FROM n TO n BY n N n] 
           --     --   --   -
          [PRIMARY|SECONDARY] [LABEL[=ON|OFF]] 
           --      --          --     -- --
                                        Data selection
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] [SELECT="name"] 
                --         --         ---
                                        Label selection
               [INSIDE[=ON|OFF]] [OUTSIDE[=ON|OFF]] [PEPPENDICULAR[=ON|OFF]]
                ---     -- --              -- --     ---            -- --
               [PARALLEL[=ON|OFF]] [DOUBLE[=ON|OFF]] 
                ---       -- --     --      -- --

                                      PAGE 45


                                      COMMANDS
                                      CONTOUR

                                          Attributes
          [EXPAND[=ON|OFF]] 
           --      -- --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           ---       --
          [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           --    --  --    --   --     --      ---
          [SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
          [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]] 
           ---    -- --
                                             Misc
          [TITLE[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [SAVE[=ON|OFF]] [NAME='name'] 
           --    -- --     --


     15.15.1  N1...  

     Contour lines are drawn for the specified values n1,n2...  

     If  no  values  are  specified, then lines are drawn according to the tick
     locations selected by the SET SCALE command.  Primary  contour  lines  are
     determined  by  the  long  tick  locations, and the secondary lines by the
     short ticks.  

     If the scale of the Z axis is set to  be  logarithmic,  then  the  primary
     lines are at powers of 10.  


     15.15.2  COLOR 

     Sets the color of primary contour lines.  


     15.15.3  CYCLE 

     CYCLE  causes  the  line texture, color, and width attributes to vary from
     one set of secondary contour lines to the next.  The order of  cycling  is
     set  by  the  SET  CYCLE  command.   The  attributes  specified by the SET
     SECONDARY command override those  specified  by  the  SET  CYCLE  command.
     Primary  contour  lines also vary according to cycles.  If you specify any
     attributes they are used for the primary contours, and  override  the  the
     cycles.  


     15.15.4  EXPAND 

     Sets the limits so that the selected data  expands  to  fill  the  window.
     This  has  no effect unless POINTS, or SETS are specified or the limits on
     MESH data have been set by a SET LIMITS command.  

     See:SET MODE 






                                      PAGE 46


                                      COMMANDS
                                      CONTOUR

     15.15.5  FROM|TO|BY|N 

     You  may  also  specify  a  range  of contours with FROM,TO,BY,N.  You may
     specify any 3.  The maximum number of contours you may specify at once  is
     100.  

                                       example
          TD:CONTOUR FROM 1 TO 10 BY 2 
             ------- ---- - -- -- -- -
               or...  
          TD:CONTOUR FROM 1 BY 2 N=5 
             ------- ---- - -- - ---
               or..  
          TD:CONTOUR 1,3,5,7,9 
             ------- ---------
     Draws contour lines at 1,3,5,7, and 9.  


     15.15.6  INTENSITY 

     Sets the line width or intensity of primary contour lines.  


     15.15.7  LABEL 

     If LABEL=ON is specified then any contours after the LABEL option will  be
     labelled.   If  no  contours  are specified LABEL=OFF produces the default
     contours without any labels.  


     15.15.8  OUTSIDE 

     This turns on labels along the outside boundary of the  contour  plot  for
     all contours that terminate at the boundary.  (Default) 


     15.15.9  INSIDE 

     This turns on labels in the interior of the contour plot for all contours.
     (Default) 


     15.15.10  DOUBLE 

     This turns on double labels on the outside boundary of  the  contour  plot
     for all contours that terminate at the boundary.  This labels both ends of
     each terminal contour.  
     (Default:DOUBLE=OFF) 


     15.15.11  PARALLEL 

     Produces label which are  parallel  to  inside  contour  lines.   Normally
     labels are horizontal parallel to the X axis.  
     (Default:PARALLEL=OFF) 





                                      PAGE 47


                                      COMMANDS
                                      CONTOUR

     15.15.12  PERPENDICULAR 

     Produces label which are perpendicular to inside contour lines.   Normally
     labels are horizontal parallel to the X axis.  
     (Default:PERPENDICULAR=OFF) 


     15.15.13  PRIMARY|SECONDARY 

     Sets  the type of contour line.  Primary lines use the default or selected
     color, intensity, and texture.  The secondary contour lines are determined
     by the SET SECONDARY command.  The default for secondary lines is DOTTED. 


     15.15.14  SAVE 

     This  saves  the contour as a series of data sets rather than plotting it.
     The new data sets have the name 'Contour ...' where ...  is the  old  data
     set name.  You may select the new data set with the NAME='...' option.  


     15.15.15  SIZE 

     SIZE=n  determines the size of the contour labels in tenths of inches.  If
     unspecified the size is determined by the SET LABEL command.   The  color,
     and  intensity  of  the contour labels is also determined by the SET LABEL
     command.  


     15.15.16  SOLID...  

     Sets the texture of primary contour lines.  


     15.15.17  Example 

          TD:CONTOUR 
             -------
     Draws a series of contour lines according to the Z scale.  

          TD:CONTOUR SECONDARY 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9,PRIMARY,20,LABEL,5,10 
             ------- --------- -------------------------------------
               or...  

          TD:CONTOUR SECONDARY FROM 1 TO 9 BY 1 PRIMARY,20,LABEL,5,10 
             ------- --------- ---- - -- - -- - ---------------------
     Draws  contours  for  Z=1  to 20.  Contour 5 and 10 are labeled.  Contours
     5,10, and 20 will be SOLID, all others are dotted.  
          TD:CONTOUR SAVE 10 
             ------- ---- --
     Saves the contours for Z=10 as separate data sets.  No plot is produced.  


     15.16  CONVOLUTE 

     CONVOLUTE BY={nset|"name"} [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [CHECK[=ON|
     ----      -                 --      -- --     ---           --     --
               OFF]] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]] [INVERT[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
               --     --     -- --     --      -- --     --   -- --

                                      PAGE 48


                                      COMMANDS
                                     CONVOLUTE

               [MONITOR[=ON|OFF]] [NORMALIZE[=ON|OFF]]
                --       -- --     --         -- --
               [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [SELECT="name"] 
                ---   --        --         ---
     Convolutes nset with the specified data sets.  

     The specified data sets and nset must be histograms with the same spacing
     between points.  If nset is a mesh, then the data sets must also be mesh
     data.  You may convolute a mesh by a normal data set.  

     NOTE:  The inverse convolution of 2 mesh data sets may not be correct.
     This problem may be fixed in the next version.  


     15.16.1  Options 

          1.  BY selects the data set to convolute by.  You may specify either
              the name or the data set number.  
          2.  CHECK=OFF Turns off the error checking.  Normally the 2 data sets
              must have matching channel widths.  And each data set must have
              equally spaced x values and y values if a mesh.  
              (Default:ON) 
          3.  ERROR=OFF Errors are not calculated for the result.  
              (Default:ON) 
          4.  INVERT=ON Convolutes by the inverted function.  This is not an
              exact calculation.  The resulting data may exhibit ripples, due
              to the inversion process.  Inversion uses CERN library routine
              CFT.  
              (Default:OFF) 
          5.  NORMALIZE=ON Convolutes the data set with a normalized nset.  
              (Default:OFF) 
          6.  APPEND=ON Creates a new data set containing the entire result.
              The appended set is longer than the original set to contain the
              entire result.  If you do not select APPEND some data might be
              lost.  
              (Default:OFF) 
          7.  MONITOR Histograms both the original data and the result in 2
              windows.  
              See:SET MONITOR 
          8.  NAME selects the name for the new appended data set.  
          9.  SELECT selects data sets to convolute by name.  
         10.  LOG=ON Logs the operation on your terminal.  
              (Default:OFF) 


     15.16.2  Errors 

     The error is computed using DY during a convolution.  The NDY if present
     is ignored in the computation, and it is set to DY when done.  

     No error calculation is done for inverse convolutions.  


     15.17  CREATE 

          CREATE MESH 
          --     --
          X|Y|Z [FROM n][TOn][BYn][N=n] [ERRORS] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]]
          - - -  --      --   --   -     --       --      -- --

                                      PAGE 49


                                      COMMANDS
                                       CREATE

               [NAME="name"] 
                ---
     Creates a mesh.  You may fill the mesh using the Z= command.  
     ERRORS creates a mesh with errors.  Storage is allocated for DX,DY,DZ.  

                                       example
          TD:CREATE MESH X FROM 1 TO 10 BY 1 Y FROM 10 TO 100 BY 10 
             ------ ---- - ---- - -- -- -- - - ---- -- -- --- -- --
          TD:Z="V_XV+V_YV" 
             -------------
     creates some mesh data.  
     ------- ---- ---- -----


     15.18  DATA 
     -----  ----

          DATA [SET] [NAME="name"] This starts a new data set.  If the data is
          --          ---
     broken up into sets, you may specify which data set to plot.  Also JOIN
     and HISTOGRAM will plot each set independently.  The Data sets are
     numbered in order 1,2,3...  When a data set is deleted the remaining data
     sets are renumbered.  You may specify data sets either by number or name. 

     You may intermix MESH and regular data sets.  


     15.18.1  Example 

     To add a new data set to the existing data, and enter 5 values into it:  
          TD:DATA SET name="New set" 
          -1.5,-1;-1,1;0,2;1,1;-2,-1.5 


     15.19  DELETE 

          DELETE [HISTOGRAMS|DATA] 
          --      --         --


     15.19.1  DATA 

     DELETE [ALL] 
     --      --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --      --        --
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
          [CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
           --       -- --     --   -- --

     Deletes  the  specified  data points.  If all the points in a data set are


                                      PAGE 50


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DELETE

     deleted, the entire set is deleted.  If an entire data set is deleted, all
     the  following  sets are renumbered.  You must specify either ALL, POINTS,
     SETS or LIMITS.  POINTS or SETS may be combined with LIMITS to select only
     certain  points  within a range.  For mesh data LIMITED and POINTS are not
     legal options.  


     15.19.1.1  ALL  - Deletes all data points 


     15.19.1.2  CONFIRM  - If ON you are asked to confirm whether you wish each
     point deleted.  If ON or OFF are omitted ON is assumed.  You reply:  
       *  Y - Yes delete it.  
       *  N - No, do not delete it (Default).  
       *  Q - Quit and delete no more points.  
       *  A  - All delete it and all other specified points, without asking any
          more.  


     15.19.1.3  LIMITED   - Specifies deletion of data within specific limts on
     X,Y, and Z.  If limits are not specified, the default is the current  plot
     limits.  See:Command SET LIMITS.  
          1.  X - Specifies X limit 
          2.  Y - Specifies Y limit 
          3.  Z - Specifies the Z limit 
          4.  CURSOR  - Brings up the cursor.  You move it to the X,Y value you
              wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to  enter  X
              or Y to enter Y.  
          5.  RECURSOR - The cursor enters both limits.  
                   TD:DELETE LIMITED RECURSOR 
                      ------ ------- --------
                        is the same as...  
                   TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR 
                      ------ ------- ---- ------ -- ------
          6.  VLOG  -  Draws  a cross when you press the space bar, and draws a
              dotted line around the final limits.  
                                       example
          TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM 1,1 to 2,5 
             ------ ------- ---- --- -- ---
               is the same as 
          TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM X=1 Y=1 TO X=2 Y=5 
             ------ ------- ---- --- --- -- --- ---
     Deletes  all  points  that  with  X  between 1 and 2 and Y between 2 and 5
     inclusive.  
          TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM Y=1 TO Y=5 
             ------ ------- ---- --- -- ---
     Deletes all data points with Y values between 1 and 5 inclusive.  
          TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR 
             ------ ------- ---- ------ -- ------
     Deletes all data points within a box defined by the cursor.  
          TD:DELETE LIMITED FROM X=CURSOR TO X=CURSOR 
             ------ ------- ---- -------- -- --------
     Deletes all data points within X values defined by the cursor.  







                                      PAGE 51


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DELETE

     15.19.1.4  LOG   - LOG=ON  Lists  all points deleted.  Note, that pressing
     Ctrl_C will abort the deletions.  If you do not specify ON or OFF,  ON  is
     assumed.  


     15.19.1.5  POINTS   - Specifies the range of points to delete.  n1,n2= the
     data point number or LAST or FIRST.  


     15.19.1.6  SETS  - Specifies the range of data sets to delete.  n1,n2= the
     data set number or LAST or FIRST.  


     15.19.2  HISTOGRAMS 

     DELETE HISTOGRAMA [ALL] 
     --     --          --
          [IDENT=[FROM] nmin [TO] [nmax]] 
           --     --          --
          [EXACT[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [SELECT|NAME='hist_name'] 
           ---    --
          [AREA|DIRECTORY="dir/subdir..."] 
           ---  --
          [TReE[=ON|OFF]] 
           -------- --
          [ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]] 
           --       -- --
          [HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]] 
           --         -- --
          [MESH[=ON|OFF]] 
           --    -- --
          [ARRAY[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [NTUPLES[=ON|OFF]] 
           --       -- --
          [CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
           --       -- --     --   -- --

     Deletes  the  specified  histograms.   You  must  specify either ALL, or a
     specific range of IDENTSs.  You may select histograms to delete  by  NAME,
     type  (ARRAY,HISTOGRAM,MESH,NTUPLES),  or  whether  they have entries.  In
     addition AREA, TREE allow selection of portions of the directory tree.  
     See also commands:  SHOW HISTOGRAM, SET HISTOGRAM 


     15.19.2.1  ALL  - Deletes all histograms.  


     15.19.2.2  IDENT  - Selects the range of IDs to delete.  


     15.19.2.3  CONFIRM  - If ON you are asked to confirm whether you wish each
     point deleted.  If ON or OFF are omitted ON is assumed.  You reply:  
       *  Y - Yes delete it.  
       *  N - No, do not delete it (Default).  



                                      PAGE 52


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DELETE

       *  Q - Quit and delete no more points.  
       *  A  - All delete it and all other specified points, without asking any
          more.  


     15.19.2.4  LOG   - LOG=ON  Lists  all points deleted.  Note, that pressing
     Ctrl_C will abort the deletions.  If you do not specify ON or OFF,  ON  is
     assumed.  


     15.20  DEFINE 

     This defines various things such as new commands, or the keys for a VT-100
     keypad.  


     15.20.1  COMMAND 

          DEFINE COMMAND new_command "command string" 
          --     --

     This  defines  a  new command as the command string.  New commands must be
     different from existing commands, and are only used if an existing command
     is  not  found.  There is a limit of 3 command substitutions in a row, and
     1000 total substitutions per input line.   The  limit  on  the  number  of
     substitutions per line may be modified by SET COMMAND.  

                                       example
          DEFINE COMMAND EDT "SPAWN EDT" 
          ------ ------- --- ------ ----
     Defines the command EDT so you may edit a file while using TOPDRAWER.  
          DEFINE COMMAND MAIL "SPAWN MAIL" 
          ------ ------- ---- ------ -----
     Defines  the  command  MAIL  so  you  may use the mail utility while using
     TOPDRAWER.  
          DEFINE COMMAND @ "SET FILE INPUT=" 
          ------ ------- - ---- ---- -------
     Defines @ to work similarly to @ in VMS.  @filename will get commands from
     the specified file.  
          DEFINE  COMMAND  EDAT "LIST DATA FILE=DAT.TMP;EDT DAT.TMP;DELETE ALL;
          ------  -------  ---- ----- ---- ---------------- -------------- ----
     SET FILE IN=DAT.TMP" 
     --- ---- -----------
     Defines the command EDAT to allow you to edit the current data.  


     15.20.1.1  Initialization   - You  may also define commands before running
     TOPDRAWER.  You make DCL symbols of the form:  
          TD_C_new_command :==the_command 
     When you type in new_command the_command is executed.  For example the DCL
     definition:  
          $ TD_C_DIR*ECTORY :=SPAWN DIRECTORY 
            --------------- ------- ---------
     is the same as the TOPDRAWER command:  
          TD:DEFINE COMMAND "DIR*ECTORY" "SPAWN DIR" 
             ------ ------- ------------ ------ ----




                                      PAGE 53


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEFINE

     15.20.1.2  Examples   - For  example  you wish to define some DCL commands
     such as DIRECTORY for convenience.  
          TD:DEFINE COMMAND DIR "SPAWN DIR" 
             ------ ------- --- ------ ----
               or...  
          TD:DEFINE COMMAND "DIR*ECTORY" "SPAWN DIR" 
             ------ ------- ------------ ------ ----
     These  both  define  the  command  DIR.   The second definition allows any
     abbreviation from DIR to DIRECTORY to be used.  
          TD:DEFINE COMMAND SC "SHOW HIST CURRENT FULL" 
             ------ ------- -- ----- ---- ------- -----
     Defines  the  command  SC  to  show  you  the  full  status of the current
     histogram.  (See:Command SET HIST and SHOW HIST) 
          TD:DEFINE COMMAND SD "SHOW DATA STATISTICS" 
             ------ ------- -- ----- ---- -----------
     Defines a command to show you the statistics of the data set.  
          TD:DEFINE COMMAND SD1 "SHOW DATA STATISTICS SET=1" 
             ------ ------- --- ----- ---- ---------- ------
     Defines a command to show you the statistics of the data set number 1.  


     15.20.2  HISTOGRAMS 

     This    creates    HBOOK    histograms   or   modifies   the   histograms.
     See:Command SET HISTOGRAM.  You may add together histograms or add ntuples
     to  histograms.   The  variables  in  NTUPLES  may  be  added  to  several
     histograms all in one operation.  
     DEFINE HISTOGRAMS {IDENT[=FROM n][TOn]| APPEND=n| CURRENT| NEXT| PREVIOUS|
     --     --          --     --      --    --        --       --    --
          FIRST| LAST| ALL} [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
          --     --    --    --   -- --
                                 Histogram selection
                                 --------- ---------
          [AREA|DIRECTORY="name"]                     [ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]] 
           ---  --                                     --       -- --
          [HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]]  [MESH[=ON|OFF]]       [ARRAY[=ON|OFF]] 
           --         -- --      --    -- --           --     -- --
          [NTUPLES[=ON|OFF]]    [SELECT|NAME="hist name"] 
           --       -- --        ---    --
          [CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]] 
           --       -- --
                                 Histogram creation
                                 --------- --------
          [[[X|Y][FROM n][TO n][BY n][BINS=n]]| 
             - -  --      --    --    --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]]                 [CHECK[=ON|OFF]] 
           ---   --        --                          --     -- --
          [RANGE=n]             [PROFILE[=ON|OFF]] 
           --                    ----     -- --
                               Histogram modification
          [BINSZ[=ON|OFF]]      [DEFNME='name']       [ERRORS[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --          ----                  --      -- --
          [STATISTICS[=ON|OFF]]                       [ZERO] [SECTION]] 
           --          -- --                           --     --
                                  Histogram Filling
          [[ADD|SUBTRACT|MULTIPLY|DIVIDE=n1[,n2]]     [FACTOR=f1[,f2]] 
            --  --       --       --                   --
          [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]]] 
           --     -- --

                                      PAGE 54


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEFINE

                                    Print options
          [DEFAULT[=ON|OFF]]    [PRAUTOMATIC]         [PRBIGBI=n] 
           ----     -- --        ----                  ----
          [PRBLACK]             [PRCHANNELS[=ON|OFF]] 
           ----                  ----        -- --
          [PRCONTENTS[=ON|OFF]]                       [PRERRORS[=ON|OFF]] 
           ----        -- --                           ----      -- --
          [PRHISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]]                      [PRINTEGRAL[=ON|OFF]] 
           ----         -- --                          ----        -- --
          [PRLOGARITHMIC|PRLINEAR[=ON|OFF]]           [PRLOW[=ON|OFF]] 
           -----         -----     -- --               -----  -- --
          [PRMAXIMUM=n]         [PRMINIMUM=n]         [PRROTATE[=ON|OFF]] 
           ----                  ----                  ----      -- --
          [PRSTAR]              [PRSTATISTICS[=ON|OFF]] 
           ------                ------        -- --
          [PRSQUEEZE[=ON|OFF]]  [PR1PAGE[=ON|OFF]]    [PR2PAGE[=ON|OFF]] 
           ----       -- --      ----     -- --        ----     -- --
          [PRPAGE=n]            [TITLE="general_title"] 
           ----                  --


     15.20.2.1  Options       - 
                                     Histogram selection
          1.  APPEND=n  - Selects the IDENT as 1 more than the last one to last
              one+n.  
          2.  CURRENT,NEXT,PREVIOUS,ALL,FIRST,LAST - Selects a histogram.  
          3.  ENTRIES - Selects only histograms with entries 
          4.  HISTOGRAMS - Selects only histograms 
          5.  SELECT - The name of histograms to modify.  
          6.  IDENT - Selects the histograms by number.  
          7.  MESH - Selects only mesh histograms 
          8.  NTUPL - Selects only ntuples 
          9.  SECTION - Selects the Global Section (applies to ZERO only) 
                                         Operations
         10.  ADD,SUBTRACT,MULTIPY,DIVIDE - Combines 2 histograms into a third. 
         11.  CYCLE - Cycles through hists.  
                                    Modifying parameters
         12.  DISK  - Enables histogram storage on DISK, with n records.  It is
              stored using unit 87.  
         13.  DEFNAME - The new name to assign to histograms.  
         14.  ERRORS  -  Enable/Disable  error  computations.   This slows down
              histogram filling.  
         15.  TITLE - Defines the title as the header to each hist printout.  
         16.  PR...   -  Modifies  the  printed  output from the LIST HISTOGRAM
              command.  
         17.  BINSZ - YES sets bin size to be set to a "resonable value" when a
              histogram is defined.  This is defined for all histograms.  
         18.  STATISTICS - Enable/Disable "real time" statistics calculations. 
         19.  ZERO - Clears or sets the histogram to zero 
                                          Creation
         20.  X,Y FROM n TO...  - Specifies the hist scale.  
         21.  SETS - Specifies the data sets to put into the histograms.  
         22.  RANGE - Selects the maximum range of the histogram (HBOOK) 
                                        Miscellaneous
         23.  LOG - Types the results of the definition 





                                      PAGE 55


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEFINE

     15.20.2.2  APPEND        - Selects the histogram ID after the last one for
     creating a histogram.  If the option n is specified it is  the  number  of
     histograms to create.  
                                       Example
          DEFINE HIST X fROM 1 to 10 by 1 APPEND=5 
     Creates 5 histograms with net ID's of size 10.  


     15.20.2.3  ADD...        - ADD,SUBTRACT,MULTIPLY,DIVIDE    [IDENT=n1[,n2]]
                                --  --       --       --         --
     [FACTOR=f1[,f2] [CYCLE=[ON|OFF] 
      --
     Takes  histograms  IDENT=n1  and  n2 and combines them into the previously
     specified histograms n3=nmin to nmax.  The number of  channels  in  n1,n2,
     and n3 must all be the same.  
          n3=n2*f2 operation n1*f1 
     If n1 or n2 are omitted they are assumed to be n3.  If f1 or is omitted it
     is assumed to be 1.0.  If n2 is specified and n3 does  not  exist,  it  is
     created.  CYCLE increments N1,N2 each time.  This combines n1,n2 into nmin
     and n1+1,n2+1 into nmin+1 and so on.  Only histograms  of  the  same  type
     with the same number of channels can be added.  

     If n1 is an NTUPL then it  is  binned  into  n3=nmin  to  nmax  using  the
     parameters  specified  in  previous  SET HISTOGRAM commands.  The possible
     options the may be set are X,DX,...,EVENTS,NLIMIT,NMASK.   If  the  target
     histogram  does  not  exist  it is automatically created with 100 channels
     using the NTUPL name.  If CYCLE is selected then the  X  specification  is
     incremented.  
                                       example
          TD:DEFINE HISTOGRAM IDENT=25 DIVIDE IDENT=1,2 FACTOR=.25,.75 
             ------ --------- -------- ------ --------- --------------
     HIST(25)=HIST(1)*0.25 / HIST(2)*0.75 
          TD:DEFINE HISTOGRAM IDENT=25 ADD IDENT=1,2 
             ------ --------- -------- --- ---------
     HIST(25)=HIST(1)+HIST(2) 
          TD:DEFINE HISTOGRAM IDENT=25 ADD IDENT=1 FACTOR=0.5 
             ------ --------- -------- --- ------- ----------
     HIST(25)=HIST(1)*0.5 
          TD:DEFINE HISTOGRAM IDENT 25 TO 30 ADD IDENT=1 CYCLE 
             ------ --------- ----- -- -- -- --- ------- -----
     N-tupl value 1 is added to histogram 25 
     N-tupl value 2 is added to histogram 26 
     ...  
     N-tupl value 6 is added to histogram 30 


     15.20.2.4  AREA|DIRECTORY  - 
          TD:DEFINE HISTOGRAM AREA=directory/subdir...  
             ------ --------- ------------------------
     For  HBOOK4  this  creates  the  specified directory, and sets it.  If the
     specified area does not begin with "/" it is assumed to be a  subdirectory
     of  the  current  directory.   If it begins with "/" it is assumed to be a
     subdirectory of the current root.  
                                       example
     Assume you have no subdirectories.  
          TD:DEFINE HIST AREA SUBA 
     creates directory //PAWC/SUBA 
          TD:DEFINE HIST AREA Q 


                                      PAGE 56


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEFINE

     then creates directory //PAWC/SUBA/Q 
          TD:DEFINE HIST AREA /SUBB/X/Y 
     creates subdirectories:  
               "//PAWC/SUBB" 
               "//PAWC/SUBB/X" 
               "//PAWC/SUBB/X/Y" 


     15.20.2.5  CHECK         - Turns  off bin checking for creating histograms
     from Topdrawer data sets.  


     15.20.2.6  CONFIRM       - Each  histogram that matches the specifications
     is logged, then you are asked whether you want to modify it.  You reply:  
       *  YES - to modify it.  
       *  NO - do not modify it (Default).  
       *  QUIT - do not modify all the rest 
       *  ALL - Stop asking questions and Modify all the rest.  
     If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.  
     (Default:CONFIRM=OFF) 


     15.20.2.7  IDENT...     - You  must  specify the IDENT of the histogram to
     modify or create.  
          1.  IDENT=FROM n TO n - where n is the ID to modify 
          2.  APPEND - The last histogram ID+1 in the current area 
          3.  CURRENT - The current histogram if any 
          4.  NEXT - The current histogram ID +1 
          5.  PREVIOUS - The current histogram ID -1 
          6.  ALL - All histograms 



     15.20.2.8  LOG         - Type on your terminal a log of the definition.  


     15.20.2.9  SELECT      - The name of the histograms you wish to modify.  


     15.20.2.10  SETS        - Creates histograms from TOPDRAWER data sets.  It
     selects the range of data sets to use in creating  some  histograms.   The
     MESH  and  SELECT options may be used to select the data set.  This allows
     you to take Topdrawer data and put it into the HBOOK structures.  The data
     used  must be strictly monotonic in x.  Mesh data must have equally spaced
     bins.  If you wish to store Mesh data without  equally  spaced  bins  then
     specify  CHECK=OFF  to  turn  off the bin checking.  The PROFILE option is
     ignored.  

     If you specify SETS then you may not specify X or Y ranges or ZERO.  
                                       EXAMPLE
          DEFINE HIST SETS 5 APPEND PR 
     Puts data set number 5 into an HBOOK histogram.  
          DEFINE HIST SETS APPEND 
     Puts all data sets into HBOOK histograms.  






                                      PAGE 57


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEFINE

     15.20.2.11  DEFNAME   - The name you wish to assign to a histogram.  HBOOK
     histograms may only have a new name when they are zeroed.  


     15.20.2.12  DEFAULT       - Resets all options to their default values.  


     15.20.2.13  HISTOGRAMS    - Selects only histograms (not mesh) to modify. 


     15.20.2.14  MESH          - Selects only MESH histograms to modify.  


     15.20.2.15  NTUPL         - Selects  only  NTUPLES  to modify.  NTUPLE=OFF
     selects all histograms but NTUPLES.  


     15.20.2.16  PR...         - These  options  modify  the printed output for
     LIST HISTOGRAM.  They either take a numeric parameter or ON/OFF.  If ON or
     OFF are omitted ON is assumed.  
          1.  MIN=n - Selects the minimum Y for print plot.  
          2.  MAX=n - Selects the maximum Y for print plot.  
          3.  BIGBI=n - Selects the number of columns per channel for histogram
              print.  
          4.  AUTOMATIC 
          5.  BLACK - Fills the area under the hist with "X" 
          6.  STAR - Prints an asterisk for the histogram 
          7.  ERROR - Puts on error bars 
          8.  CONTENTS - Prints the histogram contents 
          9.  INTEGRAL - Prints the integrated contents 
         10.  HISTOGRAM - Prints the histogram shape 
         11.  LINEAR - Prints on a linear scale in Y 
         12.  LOGARITHIC - Prints on a log scale in Y 
         13.  LOW - Prints the lower limits of the bins 
         14.  MAXIMUM=n - Sets the maximum on the contents 
         15.  MINIMUM=n - Sets the minimum on the contents 
         16.  PAGE=n - Sets the number of lines/page (all histograms) 
         17.  ROTATE - Rotates the hist 
         18.  STATISTICS - Includes hist statistics in output 
         19.  SQUEEZE   -   Squeezes   pages  together  to  save  paper.   (all
              histograms) 
         20.  1PAGE - hist takes only 1 page 
         21.  2PAGE - Spills hist over 2 pages 
         22.  TABLE - Prints 2-d hists as a table 
         23.  SCATTER - Prints 2-d hists as a scatter plot.  


     15.20.2.17  RANGE        - Specifies   the   maximum   range   for  a  new
     histogram.  See:  HBOOK documentation.  
     (Default:RANGE=0) 

                                       example
          TD:DEFINE HIST ID=5 RANGE=500 FROM 10 TO 10 BY 0.1 
             ------ ---- ---- --------- ---- -- -- -- -- ---






                                      PAGE 58


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEFINE

     15.20.2.18  STATISTICS    - Turns on or off statistics accumulation.  This
     applies to HBOOK.  


     15.20.2.19  X|Y...        - If you specify X|Y FROM,TO and BY or N= then a
     new histogram is created, or an  existing  histogram  is  rescaled.   When
     rescaled  it is recreated, and the existing scales, and title are kept, if
     not respecified.  If you specify  this  for  both  X  and  Y  then  a  3-d
     histrogram  is  created.   If unspecified FROM/TO=0 and N=100.  The option
     PROFILE creates a profile histogram using the specified X,Y limits.  

                                      examples
          TD:DEFINE HIST ID=5 X FROM 10 TO 20 BY 0.5 DEFNAME='test' 
             ------ ---- ---- - ---- -- -- -- -- --- --------------
          TD:DEFINE HIST ID=5 FROM 10 TO 20 BY 0.5 DEFNAME='test' 
             ------ ---- ---- ---- -- -- -- -- --- --------------
          TD:DEFINE HIST ID=5 FROM 10 TO 20 N=20 DEFNAME='test' 
             ------ ---- ---- ---- -- -- -- ---- --------------
     all create a histogram with 20 bins from 10 to 20 in steps 0f 0.5 
          TD:DEFINE  HIST  NEXT  X  FROM  10  to  20  BY  .5 Y FROM 1 TO 5 BY 1
             ------  ----  ----  -  ----  --  --  --  --  -- - ---- - -- - -- -
     DEFNAME='3-d test' 
     ------------ -----
     Creates a 3-d histogram of size 5 by 20.  
          TD:DEFINE HIST NEXT X N=50 
             ------ ---- ---- - ----
     Creates a histogram with 50 bins.  
          TD:DEFINE HIST NEXT X 
             ------ ---- ---- -
     Creates a histogram with 100 bins.  
          TD:DEFINE HIST IDENT=2 X FROM 1 TO 100 Y FROM 0 TO 1.5 PROFILE 
             ------ ---- ------- - ---- - -- --- - ---- - -- --- -------
     Creates  a profile histogram with 100 bins from 1 to 100 for Y values from
     0 to 1.5.  


     15.20.2.20  ZERO         - Sets the contents of the specified histogram to
     zero.  If SECTION is specified then the histogram in a global  section  is
     zeroed.   If  DEFNAME  is  specified  then  a  new name is assigned to the
     histogram.  Note:  To zero a histogram in a global section you must be the
     owner  of  the  section,  or  before  running the program that creates the
     section you must:  
          $ SET PROT=G:RWE/DEFAULT 


     15.20.3  KEY 

          DEFINE KEY keyname "key definition" options 
          --     --

     This  defines  a  key  on your keypad so you can abbreviate a command to a
     single keystroke.  The syntax is similar to the  VMS  DEFINE/KEY  command.
     Since  the syntax is VMS the key definition must be enclosed in quotes (")
                                                 ----
     and not in apostrophes (').  For more information  See:DEFINE/KEY  in  the
     VAX/VMS DCL Dictionary.  
     ------- --- ----------



                                      PAGE 59


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEFINE

     15.20.3.1  Keyname  - 
     The PF2 key is already defined as the HELP key.  
     The PF1 key is the gold key.  

                                    Vt-100 keypad
          PF1,PF2,PF3,PF4 
          PERIOD,COMMA,MINUS,ENTER 
          KP0,KP1...,KP9 
                                     Vt-2xx keys
               Upper row keys:  
          F6,...F20 
               Named keys:  
          E1    E2    E3    E4    E5    E6 
          Find  Ins.  Rem.  Sel   Prev. Nex.  
          HELP,DO 


                                        NOTE

          F1-F5  can not be redefined.  F6-F14 are used for keypad editing
          and  may  not  be  redefined  unless  Ctrl_V  is  pressed.   See
          HELP TERMINALS KEYS.  




     15.20.3.2  Options   - In general the only options you will frequently use
     are:  /TERMINATE, /NOECHO, and possibly /IF_STATE.  
          1.  /[NO]TERMINATE  -  When  the  key  is  pressed  the  line is also
              terminated.  
              (Default:/NOTERMINATE) 
          2.  /[NO]ECHO - The command is [not] echoed.  
              (Default:/ECHO) 
          3.  /[NO]IF_STATE=gold  -  The definition is for this key prefaced by
              gold key (PF1).  
              (Default:/NOIF_STATE) 
          4.  /[NO]LOCK_STATE - The state is defined till NOLOCK.  
              (Default:NOLOCK_STATE) 
          5.  /[NO]SET_STATE=name 
              (Default:/NOSET_STATE) 


     15.20.3.3  Example  - The PF1 and PF2 keys are already defined:  
          TD:DEFINE KEY PF1 " " /SET_STATE=gold 
             ------ --- --- - - ---------------
          TD:DEFINE KEY PF2 "HELP "/TERMINATE 
             ------ --- --- ----- -----------

                                      examples
          TD:DEFINE KEY PF3 "SET HIST PREV;  NEW;HIST" /TERMINATE 
             ------ --- --- ---- ---- -----  --------- ----------
          TD:DEFINE KEY PF4 "SET HIST NEXT;  NEW;HIST" /TERMINATE 
             ------ --- --- ---- ---- -----  --------- ----------
     This sets up 2 keys so that you can step through a list of histograms.  

          TD:DEFINE KEY MINUS "SET HIST ID=" 
             ------ --- ----- ---- ---- ----
     This sets up key to give the command.  When the minus key on the keypad is


                                      PAGE 60


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEFINE

     pressed the command is entered, and you enter the number followed  by  the
     "RETURN" key.  

          TD:DEFINE KEY KP7 "HISTOGRAM"/TERMINATE 
             ------ --- --- ---------------------
     This sets up the 7 key on the keypad to histogram.  

          TD:DEFINE KEY COMMA "SET FILE INPUT 'myfile'"/term 
             ------ --- ----- ---- ---- ----- --------------
     This sets up the comma (,) key on the keypad to get commands from the file
     MYFILE.TOP.  

          TD:DEFINE KEY PF4 "SET THREE ON"/term 
             ------ --- --- ---- ----- --------
          TD:DEFINE KEY PF4 "SET THREE OFF"/term/ifstate=gold 
             ------ --- --- ---- ----- ----------------------
     This sets up PF4 as a key to turn THREE ON or OFF.  To turn on three press
     PF4.  To turn THREE OFF press PF1 PF4.  


     15.20.4  STRING 

     You may define strings for "Lexicals" 
          TD:DEFINE STRING name 'string' 
             ---    --     ---- --------
     A lexical of the form S_name is give the string 

                                       Example
          TD:DEFINE STRING NAME 'George Washington 
             ------ ------ ---- ------- ----------
          TD:TITLE TOP 'The first president was ' S_NAME 
             ----- --- ---- ----- --------- --- - ------
          TD:TYPE 'NAME="' S_NAME '"' 
             ---- -------- ------ ---

     You  may  show  all  defined  strings  with  the SHOW STRINGS command.  An
     individual string may be examined by the TYPE command.  
          TYPE S_name 


     15.20.4.1  Variable  - This defines a local variable of the form 
          TD_S_name 
     which contains the string that you have defined.  You may define variables
     before entering TOPDRAWER so that they are available for use.  You do this
     by:  
          $ TD_S_NAME := "String to use" 


     15.20.5  VALUE 

     You may define values for "Lexicals" 
          DEFINE VALUE name=value [LOG=[ON|OFF]] [FAST[=ON|OFF]] 
          ---    --    ----------  --   -- --     --    -- --
     A  lexical  of the form V_name is give the value n If you specify LOG then
     the value is typed on your terminal.  When FAST=ON the value is defined as
     a  local  symbol  in  non  readable  form.   This  will  speeds  up symbol
     definitions, but it has little effect on the symbol usage.  You should use
     FAST  when you are repeatedly redefining symbols.  Non readable symbols do


                                      PAGE 61


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEFINE

     not make sense for a SHOW VALUE command.  If you need speed, single letter
     names are the most efficient.  
     (Default:FAST=OFF) 

                                       Example
          TD:DEFINE VALUE NORM=125.5 
             ------ ----- ----------
          TD:Y=Y TIMES V_NORM 
             --- ----- ------
     Multiplies all data by 125.5.  
          TD:DEFINE VALUE NORM=<100/V_SUM> 
             ------ ----- ----------------
          TD:Y=Y TIMES V_NORM 
             --- ----- ------
     Normalizes the data to SUM=100.  

     You  may  show all defined values with the SHOW VALUE command.  Individual
     values may be shown by the SHOW LEXICAL command.  See:TOPDRAWER DATA 


     15.20.5.1  Variable  - This defines a local variable of the form 
          TD_V_name 
     which  contains the value that you have defined.  You may define variables
     before entering TOPDRAWER so that they are available for use.  You do this
     by:  
          $ TD_V_NAME := "number" 
                                       example
          $ TD_V_A := "25.8E5" 
          $ TOPDRAWER 
          $ TITLE TOP 'A=',T_A 


     15.21  DIAMOND 

     Draws a diamond.  

          DIAMOND [AT|FROM|TO]{x,y[,z]|CURSOR} [DATA] [SIZE=dx[,dy]]
          --       -- --   --                   --     --
                    [DSIZE=dx[,dy[,dz]]] [ROTATE=n] [FILL[=ON|OFF]] [HIDE[=ON|
                     --                   --         --    -- --     --    --
                    OFF]] 
                    --
               [SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
                --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
               [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
                --        --
               [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
                --    --  --    --   --     --      --
     See also:Command BOX 


     15.21.1  AT 

     x,y,z  specify the center of the diamond.  If z is specified then they are
     assumed to be data units.  





                                      PAGE 62


                                      COMMANDS
                                      DIAMOND

     15.21.2  FROM-TO 

     You  may  specify  the  diagonally  opposite  corners of box enclosing the
     diamond.  


     15.21.3  FILL 

     Fills in the diamond using the current fill pattern.  See:SET FILL 


     15.21.4  CURSOR 

     The  cross  hair  cursor  is  used  to  specify the limits of the diamond.
     Simply move the cross hairs so they define the lower-left  limits  of  the
     diamond  and press the space bar.  Next move the cursor to the upper-right
     limits of the diamond an press space again.  If you press a key other than
     space,  the  cursor  information is not used.  Alternately you may specify
     the upper-left then lower-right extension, or any other  combination  that
     defines the diamond.  


     15.21.5  DATA 

     Specifies X,Y are in data coordinate frame.  Normally they are in the TEXT
     coordinate frame.  This  option  is  not  necessary  if  z  or  DSIZE  are
     specified.  


     15.21.6  DSIZE 

     DSIZE=dx[,dy]  Specifies  the  size in data units.  If the size is in data
     units the x,y are assumed to be data units also.  DY is  the  height.   If
     omitted DY=DX.  


     15.21.7  ROTATE 

     Specifies  a  rotation  angle  in  degrees.   Rotation  is right handed or
     counterclockwise.  


     15.21.8  SIZE 

     SIZE=dx[,dy] specifies the size in inches DX is the width.  If omitted the
     width is the default See:Command SET DIAMOND SIZE.  DY is the height.   If
     omitted DY=DX.  


     15.21.9  SOLID...  

     Sets the texture of the line.  See:Command SET TEXTURE.  








                                      PAGE 63


                                      COMMANDS
                                      DIAMOND

     15.21.10  INTENSITY 

     Sets the intensity (1-5) 


     15.21.11  WHITE...  

     Sets the color of the line.  


     15.22  DIVIDE 

     DIVIDE [Y|Z] [FROM|TO] [EWEIGHT=n] [WEIGHT=n] {n1|"name1"} [BY] {n2|
     ---     - -   --   --   --          --                      --
               "name2"|FIT} 
                       --
          [AVERAGE|EFFICIENCY[=ON|OFF]] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"]
           --      --          -- --     --      -- --     ---
               [CHECK[=ON|OFF]] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]] [POINTS|
                --     -- --     --     -- --     --
               COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
               --       --        --         ---   --    --        --
               [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
                ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
                --         --         --   -- --
     This  divides the Y values in data set n1 by data set n2.  The result is a
     modified set n1.  You may not divide normal 2-d data by mesh data.  


     15.22.1  APPEND 

     If  APPEND  is  specified,  then a new data set is created, containing the
     result and n1 is unchanged.  


     15.22.2  CHECK 

     CHECK=OFF  turns off data set checking.  When CHECK=ON both data sets must
     have identical X (and Y if mesh) values, but data set n2 may contain  more
     points  than  n1.   If  (DX/DY) is non zero then the both DX and X must be
     identical within 1% of DX.  If you  have  data  sets  with  non  identical
     values  of  X  you  may  create  a set with identical values using the BIN
     command.  If the X values of 2 data sets are not quite identical.  You may
     force  TOPDRAWER  to  divide  them  by  setting  DX for the data 100 times
     greater than the difference in X or by setting CHECK=OFF 


     15.22.3  EFFICIENCY 

     If EFFICIENCY is specified, the data is treated as an efficiency.  That is
     set n1 contains the number of successes, while n2 contains the  number  of
     trials.    The  result  has  error  bars  (DY)  which  follow  a  binomial
     distribution.  See:Command ADD,MULTIPLY.  






                                      PAGE 64


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DIVIDE

     15.22.4  ERROR 

     ERROR=OFF excludes the errors from the FIT in the computation.  
     (Default:ERROR=ON) 


     15.22.5  FIT 

     Specifies   that  the  data  set  is  to  be  divided  by  the  last  FIT.
     See:Command FIT.  


     15.22.6  LIMITED 

     You  may  specify  the limits over which the histograms are to be divided.
     If you specify the Y or Z limits,  then  all  data  that  contains  values
     inside these limits will be divided.  For example if you 
          DIVIDE 1 by 2 LIMITED FROM Y=10 to Y=11 
     But data set 1 contains the followind data:  
     1,0;  2,10;  3,0;  4,11;  5,0 
     Points  2  to 4 inclusive will be divided, and only points 1 and 5 will be
     omitted.  


     15.22.7  LOG 

     If  LOG  is  specified  then  the  result  of the command is typed on your
     terminal.  


     15.22.8  WEIGHT-EWEIGHT 

     WEIGHT=n  specifies  a  weighting  factor  to  multiply the data by before
     adding or subtracting it.  EWEIGHT=n specifies the error on WEIGHT.   This
     option must precede the data set number.  


     15.22.9  Notes 

     If  EFFICIENCY  is not specified then the new value is Y3=Y1/Y2.  If Y2 is
     zero then Y3 is set to 0.0.  The errors (DY) are treated as  if  the  data
     sets are uncorrelated, if BINOMIAL is not specified.  


     15.23  DU 

     See:Command X 


     15.24  DV 

     See:Command X 








                                      PAGE 65


                                      COMMANDS
                                         DW

     15.25  DW 

     See:Command X 


     15.26  DX 

     See:Command X 


     15.27  DY 

     See:Command X 


     15.28  DZ 

     See:Command X 


     15.29  ELLIPSE 

     Draws a circle or ellipse.  

     {CIRCLE|ELLIPSE} [AT|FROM|TO]{x,y[,z]|CURSOR} [DATA] [SIZE=dx[,dy]]
      --     ---       -- --   --                   --     --
               [DSIZE=dx[,dy[,dz]]] [ROTATE=n] [SQUARE|SYMMETRIC[=ON|OFF]]
                --                   --         --     --         -- --
               [FILL[=ON|OFF]] [HIDE[=ON|OFF]] 
                --    -- --     --    -- --
          [ANGLE [FROM] A1 [TO] [A2]] 
           --     --        --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           --    --  --    --   --     --      --
          [SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
     See also:Command BOX 


     15.29.1  AT 

     x,y,z  specify the center of the ellipse.  If z is specified then they are
     assumed to be data units.  If x,y,z are specified without FROM, TO, or  AT
     then AT is assumed.  


     15.29.2  FROM-TO 

     Specifies the diagonally opposite corners of box enclosing the ellipse.  


     15.29.3  FILL 

     Fills in the ellipse using the current fill pattern.  See:SET FILL 




                                      PAGE 66


                                      COMMANDS
                                      ELLIPSE

     15.29.4  CURSOR 

     The  cross  hair  cursor  is  used  to  specify the limits of the ellipse.
     Simply move the cross hairs so they define the lower-left  limits  of  the
     ellipse  and press the space bar.  Next move the cursor to the upper-right
     limits of the ellipse an press space again.  If you press a key other than
     space,  the  cursor  information is not used.  Alternately you may specify
     the upper-left then lower-right extension, or any other  combination  that
     defines the ellipse.  


     15.29.5  DSIZE 

     specifies  the  size  in data units.  If the size is in data units the x,y
     are assumed to be data units also.  You  should  note  that  if  DSIZE  is
     specified, you will usually get an ellipse.  


     15.29.6  ROTATE 

     Specifies  a  rotation  angle  in  degrees.   Rotation  is right handed or
     counterclockwise.  


     15.29.7  SIZE 

     specifies the size in inches DX is the width.  If omitted the width is the
     default See:Command SET ELLIPSE SIZE.  DY is the height.  If  omitted  the
     DY=DX.  


     15.29.8  SQUARE 

     The  option SQUARE or SYMMETRIC produces a circle.  The SIZE is treated as
     the X,Y of a diameter from the center  of  a  circle,  and  FROM,  TO  are
     treated as the ends of diameter of the circle.  


     15.29.9  DATA 

     Specifies X,Y are in data coordinate frame.  Normally they are in the TEXT
     coordinate frame.  This  option  is  not  necessary  if  z  or  DSIZE  are
     specified.  


     15.29.10  ANGLE 

     The  ellipse is drawn from the angle A1 to A2.  A1,A2 must be in the range
     -360 to 360 degrees.  


     15.29.11  SOLID...  

     Sets the texture of the line.  See:Command SET TEXTURE.  






                                      PAGE 67


                                      COMMANDS
                                      ELLIPSE

     15.29.12  INTENSITY 

     Sets the intensity (1-5) 


     15.29.13  WHITE...  

     Sets the color of the line.  


     15.30  ELSE 

          TD:ELSE 
             ----
     Starts or stops execution of TOPDRAWER commands depending on the preceding
     IF.  See:Command IF.  


     15.31  ENDFILE 

          TD:ENDFILE "Comment to type" 
             ------- -------- -- -----
     Ends  the  current file.  If this command is given from the terminal or is
     included in the command file used to run TOPDRAWER then it is the same  as
     EXIT.  


     15.32  ENDIF 

          TD:ENDIF 
             -----
     Ends the current if block.  See:Command IF 


     15.33  ENDREPEAT 

          TD:ENDREPEAT 
             ---------
     Ends the current repeat block.  See:Command REPEAT 


     15.34  CLEAR 

     {CLEAR|ERASE} [FROM] [x,y[,z]|CURSOR] [DATA] TO[x,y[,z]|CURSOR] [DATA] 
      --    --      --             --       --    --         --       --
     This  clears  the  screen  without  resetting  the  buffers or the default
     values.  This is useful if you wish to view several different things  with
     the same parameters.  If you specify a pair of X,Y values only a rectangle
     inside those values is cleared.  This only works on terminals that support
     selective  erase.   Each  X,Y[,Z]  may be specified in either Text or Data
     coordinates.  Text coordinates are assumed if a Z is not specified.  









                                      PAGE 68


                                      COMMANDS
                                       CLEAR

                                       WARNING
                                       -------

          After  CLEAR  the  current  scale  settings  are  retained,  and
          subsequent plots will not automatically have axes or scales.  In
          general you should use command NEW.  




     15.35  FFT 

     FFT [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [SELECT="name"] [CHECK[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|
     --   ---   --        --         ---             --     -- --     --   --
               OFF]] [INVERT[=ON|OFF]] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"]
               --     --      -- --     --      -- --     ---
               [POLAR[=ON|OFF]] [MONITOR[=ON|OFF]] 
                --     -- --     --       -- --
     This command produces a complex fast fourier transformation of the
     selected data sets.  For 2-d data the real part of the coefficients is
     stored in Y, and the imaginary part in Z if it exists.  If not then DY
     contains the imaginary part.  X contains the frequency value.  No error
     analysis is performed by this operation.  For mesh data the real part is
     stored in Z and the imaginary part in DZ.  
          1.  APPEND=ON Creates a new data set containing the result.  
          2.  CHECK=OFF Turns off the checking to see if data is a histogram.  
          3.  INVERT=ON inverts the forier series contained in Y,Z/DY.  
          4.  SETS selects the data sets to to transform.  
          5.  LOG=ON Logs the operation on your terminal.  
          6.  MONITOR If selected it histograms the original data set and the
              result.  
              See:  SET MODE MONITOR 
          7.  POLAR=ON selects polar coordinate output where Y is the magnitude
              and Z/DY is the angle.  The angle units is selected by the SET
              POLAR command.  

     The selected data must be a histogram, that is the X values must be
     equally spaced and strictly monotonic, and there must be at least 2 points
     in each data set.  


     15.35.1  Restrictions 

     The fast fourier transform is done by a modified version of the CERN
     library routine CFT.  The data is assumed to be periodic with an EVEN
     number of points.  For example, suppots you have NPT points, then we
     assume y[I]=y[I+NPT] Also, data sets are assumed to have lengths (say NPT)
     where NPT's largest prime factor is not more than 23.  The speed is
     enhanced by using small prime factors.  Thus, the routine fails for vector
     lengths 
     NPT=  29  31  37  41  43  47  53  61  67  71  73  79  83  89  97
          101 103 107 109 113 127 131 137 139 149 151 157 163 167 173
          179 181 191 193 197 199 211 223 227 229 233 239 241 251 257
          263 269 271 277 281 283 293 307 311 313 317 331 337 347 349
          353 359 367 373 379 383 389 397 401 409 419 421 431 433 439
          443 449 457 461 463 467 479 487 491 499 503 509 521 523 541
          547 557 563 569 571 577 587 593 599 601 607 613 617 619 631
          641 643 647 653 659 661 673 677 683 691 701 709 719 727 733


                                      PAGE 69


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FFT

          739 743 751 757 761 769 773 787 797 809 811 821 823 827 829
          839 853 857 859 863 877 881 883 887 907 911 919 929 937 941
          947 953 967 971 977 983 991 997 etc.


     15.35.2  Interpretation 

     Assuming you have periodic data, the spectrum will exhibit 2 peaks.  The
     first one will be at f the frequency of the structure.  The second one
     will be at a frequency of 1/(chan width)-f.  The peak will appear both in
     the real and imaginary parts of the spectrum.  


     15.36  FILL 

     FILL BY={nset|"name"} [LEVEL=n] [ADD=[n|Z]] 
     ---                    --        --     -
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
     This  takes  the data set nset and assumes it is a closed curve.  It fills
     the curve by adding 1 to each Z value of the specified data sets which lie
     inside the curve.  For mesh data Z must be the dependent variable.  

     If  the  filled  data  set  has  finite  DX  then it is incremented by the
     fraction of the curve that lies within the DX of X.  

     If  you specify LEVEL=n and DY is finite then n steps are used to find the
     part of the curve that lies within each channel +-DY.  


     15.36.1  Options 

          1.  ADD - Selects the value to fill by.  If ADD=Z then the Z value of
              the fill source is used in the fill.  
          2.  BY=n  -  Selects  the  data set to use in filling other data set.
              You may specify the set number or the name enclosed in quotes.  
          3.  LEVEL - Selects the number of passes to test.  0=no fractions.  
          4.  LIMITED - Selects data by range of X,Y,Z 
          5.  LINES - Selects the range of lines or rows of a mesh to fill.  
          6.  LOG - Tells you how many points have been filled.  
          7.  POINTS - Selects the range of points or columns to fill.  
          8.  SETS  -  Selects the data sets to fill.  The fill source is never
              filled.  
          9.  SELECT - Selects the data sets to fill by name.  






                                      PAGE 70


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

     15.37  FIT 

     FIT [AGAIN[=ON|OFF]] 
     ---  --     -- --
                                       Coordinate to fit
               [Y|Z] 
                - -
                                          Type of fit
               [POLYNOMIAL| LEGENDRE| SINE| COSINE| EXPONENTIAL| GAUSSIAN|
                --          --        --    ---     --           --
               INNVERSE| USER=n| EQUATION "term1;term2;..."] 
               --        --      --
          [SCALE] [ORDER|TERMS=n] [OFFSET=n] 
           --      --    --        --
          [NONLINEAR[=ON|OFF]] 
           ------     -- --
          [COEFFICIENTS|ECOEFFICIENTS|CMINIMUM|CMAXIMUM [INDEX=n] N1,N2,N3...]
           ---          ---           ---      ---       -
               [CONSTRAIN[=ON|OFF]] 
                ---        -- --
          [INCLUDE|EXCLUDE [NONE|EVEN|ODD] [n1,n2...] ] 
           --      --       --   --   --
                                        Data generation
          [CURVE [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [[X|Y] [FROM xmin] [TO xmax] [BY dx]
           --     --      -- --      - -   --          --        --
               [N=steps]] [BINS|VALUES]] [NAME="name"] 
                           --   --        ---
                                        Data selection
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
          [POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --      --        --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [MESH[=ON|OFF]] 
           --    -- --
                                       Output selection
          [LOG[=ON|OFF]] [FULL[=ON|OFF]] [MONITOR[=ON|OFF]] 
           --   -- --     --    -- --     --       -- --
                                     NONLINEAR=ON options
          [ECHISQ=n] [MINUIT] [GRAD[=ON|OFF]] [PRINTLEVEL=n] [REPEAT=n]
           ---        ---      --    -- --     ---            ---
               [TOLERANCE=n] 
                ---

     Fits  data  and  optionally  produces  a  curve  containing  the fit.  The
     coefficients are typed on the terminal and placed as comments in  the  log
     file.  Data points with zero or negative values of DY are omitted from the
     fit.  If DY does not exist or is 0.0 for all specified  data  then  DY  is
     assumed  to  be  1.0.   If all coefficients are constrained, no fitting is
     done, but you may generate the curve  for  those  coefficients.   You  may
     subtract the FIT from a data set with the SUBTRACT command.  




                                      PAGE 71


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

     15.37.1  Options     

          1.  AGAIN - Redo the last fit.  
          2.  Y|Z selects which coordinate is to be fit.  
                                         Type of fit
          3.  POLYNOMIAL,LEGENDRE,SINE,COSINE,EXPONENTIAL,GAUSSIAN,INVERSE - Is
              the function 
          4.  SCALE - Does fit to LOG(X) or LOG(Y) if the scale is set to LOG. 
          5.  ORDER|TERMS=n - The max number of terms used in the fit.  
          6.  OFFSET=n - An offset for the X value to set the center of the fit 
          7.  COEFFICIENTS - Selects constant coefficients.  
          8.  ECOEFFICIENTS|ERRORS - Selects constant coefficient errors.  
              A.  CONSTRAIN selects whether coefficient is constrained.  
              B.  INDEX selects the coefficient number.  
          9.  INCLUDE|EXCLUDE - Selects coef.  to fit or exclude from the fit. 
                                      Curve generation
         10.  CURVE - Produces a data set containing the fitted curve.  
              A.  APPEND appends the new curve to the data sets.  
              B.  NAME selects the new data set name.  
              C.  [X|Y] from n1 to n2 by n3 selects the range and bin width for
                  the curve.  
                                       Data selection
         11.  LIMITED - Selects data by range of X,Y,Z 
         12.  NAME - Selects the name of the appended data set 
         13.  POINTS - Selects the range of points to use in the fit 
         14.  SETS - Selects the data sets to use in the fit 
         15.  MESH - Selects mesh data (normally regular data is used) 
                                      Nonlinear options
         16.  MINUIT - Does nonlinear fits using interactive MINUIT.  
         17.  NONLINEAR   -   Selects   nonlinear   or   linear  fitting.   For
              NONLINEAR=on Uses linear fitting techniques if on.  If  off  uses
              MINUIT.  
              A.  REPEAT selects the maximum number of tries.  
              B.  PRINTELEVEL select the amount of log output.  
              C.  GRADIENT  selects  whether the calculated derivitives are use
                  in the fitting.  
              D.  TOLERENCE selects the tolerence for good fit 
              E.  ECHISQ selects the error in chisq for finding errors in coef.
                  (Default:1.0) 
         18.  Output options 
         19.  LOG  - Enables/Disable the terminal listing of the results of the
              fit.  
         20.  FULL - Enables output of error matrix as part of LOG.  
         21.  MONITOR - Plots the original data and the fit.  


     15.37.2  AGAIN       

     Redo  the  last  fit.   This  option must be the first option on the line.
     After the fit command.  When you redo the fit you may specify new  options
     to  modify the fit.  If you want to set fit options without doing any fits
     use the command 
          SET FIT [options] 
     This  sets  fitting  options to be performed by the next fit command.  The
     options on SET FIT are identical to the options on FIT.   You  may  use  a
     series of SET FIT commands to setup the next fit.  




                                      PAGE 72


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

     15.37.3  EQUATION    

          LINEAR  This  allows you to enter equations for each term of a series
          ------
     to fit.  Each term is separated by a semicolon  ";".   The  zeroeth  order
     term  is  always  assumed  to  be  a constant so only the first, second...
     order   terms   are   entered.    For   example   you    wish    to    fit
     Y=C0+C1*X**1.5+C2*EXP(X) 
          TD:FIT EQUATION "XV**1.5;EXP(XV)" 

     If you have previously fit using an equation:  
          TD:FIT EQUATION "" 
     Uses  the  same equation for a new fit.  All other fit options may be used
     with EQUATION, but any options that modify the number of terms to fit must
     appear  after  the  equation  definition.   The X offset is ignored by the
     equation.  

          NONLINEAR If you wish to perform a fit to an arbitrary function of X,
          ---------
     then you must enter the coefficients in the the equation  as  COE[n],  and
     you   must   specify  the  NONLINEAR  option.   Remember  that  each  term
     automatically has a coefficient, so you should  use  coefficients  in  the
     equation that have not been already used.  For example you wish to fit the
     equation:  
          C0+C1*/(1+C2*(X-C3)**2) 
     Recalling that C0, and C1 will already be used you enter:  
          TD:FIT EQUATION "1/(1+COE[2]*(XV-COE[3])**2)" NONLINEAR TERMS=3 
     You  may  also  need  to  specify  initial values for the coefficients and
     inital errors for the first step.  
         CONSTRAIN=OFF COEF n0,n1,n2,n3 ERROR n0,n1,n2,n3 

     Note:   The  constant  term  COE[0] is fit by default.  Likewise the C1 is
     automatically included as the coefficient of the first term.  To  get  rid
     of the constant term you use the option:  EXCLUDE 0 


     15.37.4  POLYNOMIAL  

     Does a fit to:  
          SUM( an*(X-Offset)**n );  n=0,TERMS-1 
     This is the default if no function is specified.  


     15.37.5  INVERSE     

     Does a fit to an inverse poser series:  
          Y=SUM( an*(X-Offset)**(-n) );  n=0,TERMS-1 


     15.37.6  SINE        

     Does a fit to:  
          Y=a0+SUM( an*SINE((n)*(THETA-Offset)) );  n=1,TERMS-1 







                                      PAGE 73


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

     15.37.7  COSINE      

     Does a fit to:  
          Y=a0+SUM( an*COS((n*(THETA-Offset)) );  n=1,TERMS-1 

     The  angle  THETA  is normally in degrees.  If you wish to modify this see
     SET POLAR.  


     15.37.8  LEGENDRE    

     Does a fit to:  
          Y=SUM of a legendre polynomial in (X-Offset).  ,br;If you select both
     LEGENDRE and COSINE or the data is POLAR then the  Legendre  series  is  a
     function of COS((THETA-Offset)).  


     15.37.9  EXPONENTIAL 

     Does a fit to:  
          Y=EXP( a0+a1*(x-offset)) + Polynomial when NONLINEAR=ON (Default) 
               or ...  
          LN(Y)=series(x-offset) 
     for data points with Y>0.0.  
     Where series is either POLY,SINE,COSINE or LEGENDRE.  
     If  you  wish to fit data which has negative or zero data points, you must
     either SMOOTH the data to get rid of them, or use the BIN command to rebin
     the  data  into large bins.  If all y data is less than zero, you may make
     it positive with the command:  
          TD:Y=Y TIMES -1 

     When  a NONLINEAR fit is used, and NTERMS=n is greater than 2 a polynomial
     background of n-2 terms is added to the exponential.  


     15.37.10  GAUSSIAN    

     Does a fit to:  
          Y=a0*EXP(-0.5*((X-a1)/a2)**2)[+a3+a4*X+...]      for     NONLINEAR=ON
     (Default) or 
          LN(Y)=LN(a0)+-0.5*((X-a1)/a2)**2 for NONLINEAR=OFF 
          for data points with Y,DY not 0.0.  

     Since  only  data  with  both  Y,DY  nonzero  are  fit,  there may be some
     inaccuracy for histogram data with zero in a large  number  of  bins,  and
     small  numbers in a few bins.  Such data should be smoothed or rebinned to
     remove the bins with DY=0.  

     For  linear  fits  if  you  specify the a0 or a1 coefficient you must also
     specify a3.  If you wish to fit data  which  has  negative  or  zero  data
     points, you must either SMOOTH the data to get rid of them, or use the BIN
     command to rebin the data into large bins.  If all y  data  is  less  than
     zero, you may make it positive with the command:  
          TD:Y=Y * -1 

     When  a NONLINEAR fit is used, and NTERMS=n is greater than 3 a polynomial
     background of n-3 terms is added  to  the  gaussian.   If  NTERMS=4,5,6  a
     constant, straignht line, or parabola are used for the background.  Larger


                                      PAGE 74


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

     values are possible, but not recommended.  
     For  LINEAR fits the OFFSET is used as the initial guess for the center of
     the gaussian.  When done, it is approximately equal to a1.  

     WARNING If you get the warning message that negative data points have beem
     omitted in a Gaussian fit, the fit may be incorrect.  


     15.37.11  DGAUSSIAN   

     Does a fit to:  
          Z=a0*EXP(-0.5*(((X-a1)/a2)**2)+((Y-a3)/a4)**2))[+a5+a6*X+a7*Y]    for
     NONLINEAR=ON (Default) or 
          for data points with Y>0.0.  

     If  you specify NTERMS=n where n is larger than 5 a Dpolynomial background
     is added to the gaussian.  The number of terms in the background  is  n-5.
     If NTERMS=6,8 a constant, or sloped plane is used for the background.  


     15.37.12  DPOLYNOMAIL 

     Does a double polynomial fit to:  
          Z=a0+a1*X+a2*Y+a3*X**2+a4*X*Y+a5*Y**2+z6*X**3....  


     15.37.13  USER        

          USER=n 
     Does  a  fit to a user supplied function type.  N must be between 1 and 99
     with a default of 1.  If  none  then  a  polynomial  is  used.   For  each
     coefficient of the linear fit the user supplied function is called:  
          Y=TDUFUN(n,NORD,X) 
     Where  n  is  the  function  type.   NORD is the number of the coefficient
     (1-19) and X is the x value.  The user function must return the y value of
     the term.  

     For  example  if  you  want  USER=1  to select a polynomial, and USER=2 to
     select an inverse polynomial.  You would write the following subroutine:  
          FUNCTION TDUFUN(n,NORD,X)
          IF (n.eq.1) THEN
            TDUFUN=X**NORD
          IF (n.eq.2) THEN
            TDUFUN=X**(-NORD)
          ELSE
          END


     15.37.14  COEFFICIENTS|ERRORS 

     Sets  individual  coefficients|errors.   If coefficients are set then they
     are not included in the calculation of the fit unless  CONSTRAIN=OFF.   If
         ---
     CONSTRAIN=OFF  then  you  are  merely  settting  the  initial value of the
     coefficient.  This is only useful for nonlinear  fits.   If  you  set  the
     error  it  is used as the initial step for nonlinear fits.  INDEX sets the
     index of the coefficient|error.   The  index  may  range  from  0  to  19.
     Undefined errors are assumed to be 0.0.  


                                      PAGE 75


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

                                       EXAMPLE
          TD:COEFFICIENTS 1,2.5,.5 ERRORS .1,.5,.2 
             ------------ -------- ------ --------
     Sets - a0=1.0+-.1, a1=2.5+-.5, a3=0.5+-.2 
          TD:COEFFICIENTS INDEX=3 .5 ERRORS I=3 .1 
             ------------ ------- -- ------ --- --
     Sets - a3=0.5+-.1 
          TD:COEFFICIENTS 1.0 I=3 2.0 I=5 .5,-.7 
             ------------ --- --- --- --- ------
     Sets - A0=1.0, A3=2.0, A5=0.5, A6=-0.7 


     15.37.15  CURVE       

     Generates  the fitted curve, (Y,DY) as a function of X, which replaces the
     current data.  DY is calculated using the error matrix.  
          1.  X                 Selects the X coordinate.  (Default) 
          2.  Y                 Selects  the  Y  coordinate.   This  is used to
              generate a mesh.  
          3.  APPEND  -  The  new data is appended to the current data as a new
              set rather than replacing it.  
          4.  N - Sets the number of bins in the resulting curve.  
          5.  FROM - Sets the lowest value for the fitted curve.  
          6.  TO - Sets the highest value for the fitted curve.  
          7.  BY - Sets the width between data points in the fitted curve.  You
              may not specify all four FROM,TO,BY, and N.  
          8.  BINS  -  Specifies  that  FROM, TO refer to the lower edge of the
              first bin and the upper edge of the last bin.  
          9.  VALUES - Specifies that FROM, TO refer to the center of the first
              and last bins.  
              (Default:VALUES) 

                                           Example
              The following all produce points at X=0.5,1.5,...9.5 
                   CURVE VALUES FROM .5 TO 9.5 BY 1 
                   CURVE BINS FROM 0 TO 10 BY 1 
                   CURVE BINS FROM 0 TO BY 1 N=10 
                   CURVE BINS FROM 0 TO BY 1 N=10 Y FROM 100 to 120 by 2 

     If  you do not specify FROM, TO ...  a set of values is assumed.  First if
     you are fitting a histogram with equally spaced values, then  the  same  X
     values are assumed.  Otherwise the current X tick spacing is used.  


     15.37.16  EXCLUDE/INCLUDE 

     Selects terms to include or exclude from the fit.  n1...  may range from 0
     to 19.  If you specify INCLUDE NONE then no terms are fit.  This is useful
     if  you  wish  to  generate  a  curve  by specifying coefficients, without
     actually performing a fit.  
     (Default:EXCLUDE NONE) 


     15.37.17  LIMITED     

     Fits points between the specified limits.  If limits  are  not  specified,
     the  default  is the current plot limit.  See:Command SET LIMITS.  You may
     specify up to 5 sets of limits.  This allows you to fit the data using  up


                                      PAGE 76


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

     to 5 regions, and omitting the rest of the data.  
          1.  X - Specifies X limit 
          2.  Y - Specifies Y limit 
          3.  Z - Specifies the Z limit 
          4.  CURSOR  - Brings up the cursor.  You move it to the X,Y value you
              wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to  enter  X
              or Y to enter Y.  
          5.  RECURSOR  -  The  cursor enters all regions from the current one,
              until you type "Q".  
          6.  VLOG  -  Draws  a cross when you press the space bar, and draws a
              dotted line around the final limits.  

                                       example
          TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM 1,1 to 2,5 
             --- ---- ------- ------- ---- --- -- ---
               or...  
          TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM X=1 Y=1 TO X=2 Y=5 
             --- ---- ------- ------- ---- --- --- -- --- ---
     Fits  all  points  that  with  X  between  1  and  2 and Y between 2 and 5
     inclusive.  
          TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM Y=1 TO Y=5 
             --- ---- ------- ------- ---- --- -- ---
     Fits all data points with Y values between 1 and 5 inclusive.  
          TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR 
             --- ---- ------- ------- ---- ------ -- ------
     Fits all data points as defined by the cursor limits.  
          TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM X=CURSOR TO X=CURSOR 
             --- ---- ------- ------- ---- -------- -- --------
     Fits all data points according to X values defined by the cursor.  
     TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED FROM 1 to 20 FROM 40 TO 80 
        --- ---- ------- ------- ---- - -- -- ---- -- -- --
     Fits a parabola to data in 2 regions, and skips the X values 20 to 40.  
          TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED VLOG RECURSOR 
             --- ---- ------- ------- ---- --------
     Fits  a parabola to the data for the regions selected by the cursor.  Both
     X and Y values are determinded  by  the  cursor.   Each  cursor  value  is
     entered  by  pressing the space bar.  After the last region, Press the "Q"
     key to quit.  
          TD:FIT POLY TERMS=3 LIMITED VLOG X=RECURSOR 
             --- ---- ------- ------- ---- ----------
     This  is  the  same  as  above,  except  that only X values are entered by
     cursor.  


     15.37.18  NONLINEAR   

     Selects nonlinear fitting techniques.  If ON MINUIT is used to do the fit.
     The ECHISQ, GRADIENT, TOLERENCE, REPEAT, and PRINTLEVEL are used to modify
     the MINUIT fit.  They are ignored for linear fits.   If  you  specify  the
     option MINUIT you will enter interactive MINUIT mode.  You must then guide
     the fit using MINUIT commands.  In addition you may  specify  the  maximum
     and  minimum  value  for  each  coeffiecint with the CMINIMUM and CMAXIMUM
     options.   You  might  also  wish  to  pick  an  initial  error  for  each
     coefficinent, and possibly an initial value.  

     The   nonlinear  errors  agree  with  the  linear  values  if  you  select
     ECHISQ=1.0.   Note:   Though  Topdrawer  and  PAW  both  use  MINUIT,  the
     resulting  CHISQ  disagrees  by  about a factor of 3.  The TOPDRAWER CHISQ


                                      PAGE 77


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

     seems to agree with the correct value by subtracting the fitted curve from
     the data and calculating SUM((Y/DY)**2)/(Points-Params) 

     The  linear  methods  are  much faster and convergence is guaranteed if no
     numerical errors occurr.  Unfortunately many curves can not  be  expressed
     as a linear combination of terms.  

     Most  linear  fits may be performed either by linear or nonlinear methods.
     This may be useful in checking the accuracy of the fitting techniques.  
     (Default:OFF, ON if GAUSSIAN or EXPONENTAIL) 


     15.37.18.1  ECHISQ       - Selects the difference in CHISQ for calculating
     the error in the coefficients.  
     (Default:1) 


     15.37.18.2  GRADIENT     - If ON use the calculated gradient.  
     (Default:GRADIENT=ON, OFF for EQUATION) 


     15.37.18.3  PRINTLEVEL   - Selects   the  MINUIT  printlevel  (-1  to  3).
     Higher levels produce more detailed reporting.  
     (Default:PRINTLEVEL=-1) 


     15.37.18.4  REPEAT       - The number of times to repeat before giving up. 
     (Default:REPEAT=25) 


     15.37.18.5  TOLERENCE    - Selects  the  tolerence for fitting.  Fit stops
     when    the    estimated    distance    from    the    min    chisq     is
     0.001*TOLERENCE*ECHISQ*CHISQ.  
     (Default:0.1) 


     15.37.19  LOG/FULL    

     Types  the result of the fit on your terminal.  If you select LOG=OFF then
     the results of the fit are not typed on your terminal.  If you select FULL
     then  the  error  matrix as well as all result of the fit is typed on your
     terminal.  
     (Default:LOG=ON,FULL=OFF).  


     15.37.20  OFFSET      

          OFFSET=n  If non zero the data is fitted as a function of (X-n).  For
     non orthogonal functions such as plynomials, you should always specify the
     offset  as  the  center  of  the  region  that you wish to fit.  This will
     produce a better fit with lower errors on the coefficients.  The offset is
     included  in  the  a1  coefficent for GAUSSIAN fits, so you do not need to
     specify it.  







                                      PAGE 78


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

     15.37.21  MESH        

     Selects mesh data.  Normally mesh data is ignored when performing a fit.  


     15.37.22  NAME        

     The  new  set will usually have a name consisting of a transformation name
     followed by the old set name.  If you specify a new name it is applied  to
     the  new  data set.  If the name ends in "%" then the old name is appended
     to the new name.  See option:APPEND 


     15.37.23  MONITOR     

     If selected it plots the original data and joins the fitted curve.  
     See:  SET MODE MONITOR 
     The fitted curve is joined using the SECONDARY attributes.  to change them
     use the SET SECONDARY command.  


     15.37.24  POINTS      

     Specifies  the  range of points to use.  If n2 is omitted it is assumed to
     be n1.  You may specify the point number or the options FIRST,LAST.  


     15.37.25  SCALE       

     Fits  the LOG(X or Y) to the base e if a log scale is selected for X or Y.
     see the  command:   SET SCALE.   Similarly  the  option  EXPONENTIAL  fits
     LOG(Y)=series.  

                                       example
          TD:SET SCALE Y LOG 
             --- ----- - ---
          TD:FIT TERMS=4 
             --- -------
     Fits a polynomial LOG(Y)=a0+a1*X+a2*X**2+a3*X**3 
                                       example
          TD:SET SCALE X LOG 
             --- ----- - ---
          TD:FIT TERMS=3 
             --- -------
     Fits a polynomial Y=a0+a1*LOG(X)+a2*LOG(X)**2 


     15.37.26  SETS        

     Specifies  the  range of data sets to use.  If n2 is omitted it is assumed
     to be n1.  You may specify the data set number or the options FIRST,LAST. 


     15.37.27  ORDER/TERMS 

     Sets  the  number  of  terms  in a series or the order of the series.  The
     number of terms must be between 1 and 20.  The  order  (TERMS-1)  must  be
     between 0 and 19.  


                                      PAGE 79


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

     (Default:TERMS=2) 


     15.37.28  Y|Z         

     This  selects  the  coordinate to fit.  By default Z is fit for MESH data,
     DPOLYNOMIAL, or DGAUSS.  Otherwise Y is fit.  


     15.37.29  Warning     

     A  fit  may  fail with floating point overflow when the number of terms is
     large.  Sometimes you may avoid this be rescaling the data  to  a  smaller
     range,  and fitting the rescaled data.  Selecting an offset for X may also
     prevent errors.  

     For example you have data with X ranging from 1 to 100 and Y from 0 to 10.
     When you try to fit the data with more  than  9  terms  you  get  floating
     overflow.   This may be prevented by rescaling X to be in the range .01 to
     1.  
          TD:X=X TIMES 0.01 
             --- ----- ----
     Then try performing the fit again.  

     Even  if  there  is no overflow, a fit may fail if a large number of terms
     are selected, and the limit  of  the  computer  accuracy  is  reached  (14
     digits).   Polynomials are particularly sensative to this type of problem.
     In general polynomials should not be fitted to more than 9 terms.  


     15.37.30  Yerrors     

     The  error bars on the Y values are used as weighting factors for the fit.
     If they are all 0.0 they are assumed to be 1.0.   The  resulting  fit  has
     error  bars on the coefficients according to the assumed error bars on the
     Y values.  X errors are not used in the fit.  

     When  a curve is generated, it will have error bars on the Y values if the
     fitted curve had non zero error bars.  For some functions the final errors
     depend  on the initial center of the expansion.  This is set by specifying
     an offset (OFFSET=n).  Generally best results are obtained with an  offset
     in the middle of the data set.  


     15.37.31  Examples    

          TD:FIT POLY TERMS=10 INCLUDE EVEN 
             --- ---- -------- ------- ----
     Fits  a  polynomial using the even powers of X.  (1.0,X**2...X**8) A curve
     with the resulting fit replaces the current data.  
          TD:FIT LEGEN TERMS=3 
             --- ----- -------
     Fits  a  legendre  polynomial  of  3  terms.   (1,L1,L2)  A curve with the
     resulting fit replaces the current data.  
          TD:FIT POLY INCLUDE 2,3,5 CURVE APPEND FROM 0 to 10 by .1 
             --- ---- ------- ----- ----- ------ ---- - -- -- -- --
     Fits  a  polynomial  using X**2,X**3,X**5 and appends the histogram at the
     end of the current data.  The curve contains 101 data points spanning  the


                                      PAGE 80


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

     range of X from 0.0 to 10.0 
          TD:FIT POLY INCLUDE NONE COEF 1.0,.5,-.25 CURVE FROM 0 TO 10 BY .5 
             --- ---- ------- ---- ---- ----------- ----- ---- - -- -- -- --
     Creates  a  parabola  Y=1.0+0.5*X-0.25*X**2  from 0 to 10 in steps of 0.5.
     Note:  that no fit is performed since no coefficints were included.  


     15.38  FLUSH 

          FLUSH  This  flushes  any  information  in  the  buffers.  If you are
          --
     plotting on an interactive device, from the terminal you can do  the  same
     thing by hitting "return".  


     15.39  FREQUENCY 

     This is a synonym for BIN.  See the BIN command.  


     15.40  HISTOGRAM 

     Draws a histogram from the specified data points.  Bin edges  are  halfway
     between the ends of adjacent error bars (DX), or halfway between points if
     no error bars.  

     HISTOGRAM [EXPAND[=ON|OFF]] 
     --         --      -- --
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
          [SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]] 
           --              --         --
          [TITLE[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]] 
           ---    -- --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           --    --  --    ---  --     --      ---
          [SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] [HIDE[=ON|
           --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --      --    --
               OFF]] [FILL[=ON|OFF]] 
               --     --    -- --
                              MESH options 
          [X] [Y] [Z] [BLOCK|LEGO] [FRAME[=ON|OFF]] [DEPTH[=ON|OFF]] [GRID[=ON|
           -           ---   --     --     -- --     --     -- --     --    --
               OFF]] [XY|YZ|ZX] [CROSS|RANDOM] 
               --     -- -- --   --    --

                                      PAGE 81


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

     15.40.1  CYCLE 

     When  plotting  more  than  1  slice  or  data  set, CYCLE causes the line
     texture, color, and width to vary from one plot to the next.  The order of
     cycling  is  set  by  the SET CYCLE command.  If you have specified either
     texture, color or width it overrides the cycle value.  


     15.40.2  DEPTH 

     DEPTH=OFF  plots  the  mesh as a series of disconnected histograms, rather
     than as a solid.  Each histogram is drawn as a flat  2  dimensional  hist,
     but  one after the other.  Necessary lines to delineate edges of different
     planes are included when a plot with depth is requested.  By omitting some
     lines the plot is much faster.  
     (Default:DEPTH=ON) 

     If  you  wish  to  pick which axes is histogrammed you may use the options
     X,Y,Z 


     15.40.3  EXPAND 

     Sets  the  limits  so  that  the selected data expands to fill the window.
     This has no effect unless POINTS, SETS, SLICES are specified or the limits
     on MESH data have been set by a SET LIMITS command.  

     See:SET MODE 


     15.40.4  FILL 

     Generates a fill pattern under the histogram, or bar chart.  


     15.40.5  FRAME 

     This option specifies that the edge of the 3-d plot is to be always drawn.
     If turned off the edge is not drawn when the data=ZMIN.  Essentially  this
     histograms only the "important" interior data.  
     (Default:FRAME=ON) 


     15.40.6  GRID 

     Draws  grid lines corresponding to Z major ticks on a histogram of a MESH.
     These are drawn according to the style,color...  selected by the  SET GRID
     command.   The  CYCLE  option  in  the  SET  GRID  command  can make these
     different colors and textures.  
     (Default:GRID=OFF) 

     If  SET  AXES  THREE=ON  and  SET  GRID  X=ON  Y=ON are selected then GRID
     defaults to ON.  







                                      PAGE 82


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

     15.40.7  HIDE 

     Controls whether hidden lines are drawn for a 3-d  mesh,  or  whether  one
     histogram hides the next.  You must specify HIDE for both the histogram to
     be hidden and the histogram that is to hide it.  The  histogram  which  is
     drawn  first  will  hide the second one.  HIDE=OFF draws the hidden lines,
     while HIDE=ON omits them.  
     (Default:HIDE=ON for mesh, HIDE=OFF for data) 

                                       example
     Assume  you  have 2 data sets where you want set 1 to hide elements in set
     2.  Also you would like to fill data set 2.  
          TD:JOIN SET=1 HIDE 
          TD:JOINS SET=2 HIDE FILL 

     You  can  produce a drawing of a mesh with hidden lines as dotted lines by
     doing the histogram twice:  
          TD:HISTOGRAM 
             ---------
          TD:HISTOGRAM HIDE=OFF DOTTED 
             --------- -------- ------


     15.40.8  POINTS|COLUMNS 

     Specifies  the  range  of  points  or the colums of a mesh to use.  If not
     selected all points are plotted.  If n2 is omitted it is assumed to be n1.
     You may specify the point number or the options FIRST,LAST.  


     15.40.9  SETS 

     This  selects  the data set to plot.  The data must be broken up into sets
     using the data set command, for this option to work properly.   If  n2  is
     omitted  it  is  assumed to be n1.  You may specify the data set number or
     the options FIRST,LAST.  


     15.40.10  SOLID 

     This determines the texture of the line.  See:Command SET TEXTURE 


     15.40.11  X|Y|Z|BLOCK 

     For normal data X,Y,Z pick the dependent axis of the plot.  

     Mesh data produces a "solid" plot.  The limits are set from the  beginning
     of  the first X,Y data point to the last.  This may not be satisfactory if
     the bins at the edges are large.  

     The options X...  modify the format of the plot.  
          1.  X - Draws all bin edges in the X direction.  
          2.  Y - Draws all bin edges in the Y direction.  
          3.  Z - Draws all bin edges in the Z direction.  
          4.  BLOCK or LEGO - Draws all bin edges.  It is equivalent to X Y Z. 
     This produces a block or "Lego" plot.  



                                      PAGE 83


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

     15.40.12  XY 

     XY|YZ|ZX  determine  which  faces  are  "shaded".   The shading is done by
     either drawing parallel lines, a cross from corner to corner or random dot
     patterns.  The default is parallel lines.  


     15.40.13  CROSS|RANDOM 

     CROSS|RANDOM  produce  either  a diagonal cross or a set of random dots as
     shading patterns on  the  selected  faces.   DX  controls  the  number  of
     dots/face.  DX is the total number of dots to pruduce.  


     15.40.14  DX 

     DX|DY|DZ  are  the  separation  between  parallel  lines used to shade the
     faces.  If zero parallel lines are not drawn.  

                                       Example
     You  wish  to shade face YZ,ZX with lines parallel to the Y axis separated
     by 0.1 units.  Essentially this draws  lines  at  even  multiples  of  0.1
     units.  This may be used in a similar fashion to grid lines on 1-d plots. 
          TD:HISTOGRAM YZ ZX DX=0.1 
             --------- -- -- ------
     Note:   you  specify  DX the distance along the X axis.  Since DY is 0, no
     lines parallel to the X axis are drawn.  When selecting RANDOM shading  DX
     specifies the number of dots/face.  


     15.40.15  SLICES 

               [SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]] 
                                --         --
                    or...  
               [SLICE X|Y|Z=v1] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]] 

     This plots a histogram sliced from mesh data.  This command is illegal for
     normal data.  If v2 is omitted then v2=v1.  If a range  is  selected  then
     all  slices  within the range are histogrammed.  IF you set THREE=OFF then
     the slices are histogrammed according to the first X,Y,Z Mentioned.  If  X
     is  first then the slices are taken perpendicular to the X axis.  You only
     need select X|Y|Z the first time you slice after a NEW FRAME command.  


     15.40.15.1  Operation   - If THREE is ON then the histogram is sliced into
     a section between v1 and v2.  The data outside of  the  range  is  omitted
     from the plot.  

     If  THREE  is OFF then each line/column of the histogram between v1 and v2
     is plotted as a separate histogram.  If both v2 and v1 are  omitted,  then
     all slices are plotted.  

     If  you  wish to add together a series of slices and plot them as a single
     histogram see:Command PROJECT.  





                                      PAGE 84


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

     15.40.15.2  Warning   - If  you  intend to use options X,Y,or Z to control
     the format of a histogram they should not follow a SLICE command, or  they
     should be separated from it by some other option.  


     15.40.15.3  Example  - 
                                     2-d Example
     You read in a mesh of data x,y vs Z.  X ranges from 0.0 to 1.0 in steps of
     0.1 and Y from 100 to 200 in steps of 1.  Then you:  
          TD:SET THREE OFF 
             --- ----- ---
     You  wish  to view a histogram of x vs Z for Y=140 and expand the scale so
     that the final plot fills the window.  
          TD:HISTOGRAM SLICE Y=140 EXPAND 
             --------- ----- ----- ------

     You now wish to view y vs z for values Y=.2 to .5:  
          TD:HISTOGRAM SLICE X FROM .2 to 0.5 
             --------- ----- - ---- -- -- ---
          (This plots 4 histograms) 

     Now you wish to view all slices along the X axis:  
          TD:HISTOGRAM SLICES Y 
             --------- ------ -
          (This plots 100 histograms!) 
          TD:HISTOGRAM SLICE X FROM 0 to 0.5 Y FROM 105.5 to 110.0 
             --------- ----- - ---- - -- --- - ---- ----- -- -----
     Plots  the  mesh data as a series of slices looking along the X axis for a
     limited range of Y.  
          TD:HISTOGRAM SLICE Y=105 X FROM .25 TO .5 
             --------- ----- ----- - ---- --- -- --
     Plots  the  mesh  data  as  a  single slice looking along the Y axis for a
     limited range of X.  

                                     3-d Example
     You enter mesh data in steps of 1 for Y=1 to 10, X=0 to 20.  
          TD:HIST SLICE X=10.  
             ---- ----- -----
     You are looking at X=10.  
          TD:HIST SLICE X=10.  TO 20 
             ---- ----- -----  -- --
     You are looking at X=10 to 20.  
          TD:HIST SLICE X=10.  TO 20 Y=5 TO 7 
             ---- ----- -----  -- -- --- -- -
     You are looking at X=10 to 20, Y=5 to 7.  


     15.40.16  3-d_histograms 

     A 3-d histogram can be either a plot of mesh data or a  plot  of  "normal"
     x,y,z  data.   Mesh  data  is  normally plotted as a "solid".  XYZ data is
     plotted as a histogram of X vs Z in the plane determined by  Y.   For  all
     3-d  histograms Z must be the dependent variable, and X,Y are independent.
     Repeated XYZ plots may be used to build up a series of histograms.  

                                        NOTE
                                        ----
     Some  lines  may  be  missing from the plot, because of the viewpoint.  If


                                      PAGE 85


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

     this happens you may need to:  
          TD:SET THREE RDIST 1000 
             --- ----- ----- ----
     This moves the viewpoint closer to infinity, but maintans the plot size.  

     If  the  plot  is  too  large  you may need to adjust the screen or window
     distance.  
          TD:SET THREE DIST 1000 SCRD 300 
             --- ----- ---- ---- ---- ---
     Will  reduce  the  size  of  the  plot.   The  size of the plot is roughly
     proportional to the ratio of SCRD to DIST.  

     If you specify color, intensity, or texture it is used for the top side of
     the mesh, while the default is used for the bottom.  

                                       example
          TD:SET COLOR RED 
             --- ----- ---
          TD:SET TEXTURE DOTS 
             --- ------- ----
          TD:HISTOGRAM SOLID WHITE 
             --------- ----- -----
     Produces  a  mesh plot with bottom in dotted red lines, while the top side
     is drawen in white solid lines.  


     15.40.17  Variables 

     Normally  for  2-d  plots  X  is  the  independent  variable  and Y is the
     dependent one.  

     Normally  for  3-d  plots  X,Y  are the independent variables and Z is the
     dependent variable.  

     The  bin width is half way between the X or X,Y values if DX,DY are 0.  If
     DX,DY are specified then they determine the bin width.  


     15.40.18  Limits 

     The  limits  of  the  data  for  histograms  is  normally  set so that the
     lowerlimit of the dependent axis with a linear scale is 0.0,  unless  some
     data points are less than zero.  If you wish a different value you can:  
          TD:SET LIMIT YMIN=n 
             --- ----- ------
               or for 3-d....  
          TD:SET LIMIT ZMIN=n 
             --- ----- ------


                                       WARNING
                                       -------

          If  this  command  is  issued in between 2 plots overlaying each
          other, they will not have the same scales.  





                                      PAGE 86


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

     15.40.19  Shading_example 

     Shading is produced by the options:  
          XY YZ ZX DX DY DZ CROSS RANDOM 
     If  you  wish to shade the 3 faces differently, you must histogram 3 times
     with each pattern you wish.  For example you wish parallel lines on the YZ
     face, dots on the ZX face, and crosses on the XY face:  
          TD:HISTOGRAM XY CROSS 
             --------- -- -----
          TD:HISTOGRAM YZ DX=0.1 DY=0.1 
             --------- -- ------ ------
          TD:HISTOGRAM ZX RANDOM DX=1000 
             --------- -- ------ -------


     15.41  HELP 

     This gives you help on TOPDRAWER commands.  This command is not  journaled
     unless the MODE ABORT=OFF is set.  
          TD:HELP topic subtopic sub-subtopic...  
             --

     For example to get the list of set commands:  
          TD:HELP COMMAND SET list 
             ---- ------- --- ----
     To get help on the JOIN command.  
          TD:HELP COMMAND JOIN 
             ---- ------- ----


     15.42  IF 

     IF|IFNOT [.AND.|.OR.] [.NOT.]
     -- ---
               [DATA] [ERROR] [INTERACTIVE] [MESH]
                --     --      --            --
               [THREE|3D] [value {.LT.|.EQ.|.GT.|.LE.|.NE.|.GE.} value]
                --    --

     The  condition  is  tested and if satisfied the rest of the line up to the
     semicolon ";" is executed.  If not satisfied it is skipped.  If .AND.   or
     .OR.  are omitted .AND.  is assumed.  

     IF|IFNOT [conditions] THEN
     -- ---
               . . .
     ELSE
     --
               . . .
     ENDIF
     ----

     If  the  tested  condition  is satisfied lines up to the ENDIF or ELSE are
     executed.  Otherwise they are skipped.  
          1.  DATA - True if any data points are available.  
          2.  ERROR - This condition is true if the last line had an error.  




                                      PAGE 87


                                      COMMANDS
                                         IF

          3.  INTERACTIVE - True if the program is running interactively, False
              if it is run in BATCH mode.  The device you are using may or  may
              not be interactive independent of the mode of operation.  
          4.  MESH - True if the data is (3D) mesh data.  
          5.  3D  -  True if 3D is turned on.  You should notice that mesh data
              may be plotted as flat or 3D data.  
          6.  value - Any number or lexical.  

                                       Example
          TD:IF MESH PLOT;IFNOT MESH HISTOGRAM;  
             -- ---- ---------- ---- ----------
               or...  
          TD:IF MESH THEN;PLOT;ELSE;HISTOGRAM;ENDIF;  
             -- ---- -------------------------------
     If the current data is mesh data it is plotted as a scatter plot otherwise
     it is histogrammed.  
          TD:IF 3D .AND.  V_SUM .GT.  0 HISTOGRAM 
             -- -- -----  ----- ----  - ---------
     Histograms 3-d data if it is greater than zero.  
          TD:IF V_SUM .GT.  0 .OR.  V_SUM .LT.  -1 .AND.  3D JOIN 
             -- ----- ----  - ----  ----- ----  -- -----  -- ----
     Joins mesh data if the sum over the data is not between -1 and 0.  


     15.43  INTERPOLATE 

     INTERPOLATE [LEVEL=n] [{SPLINE|GENERAL}] [CLOSED[=ON|OFF]] 
     --           --         --     --         --      -- --
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
          [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
           --      -- --     --            --   -- --
     Interpolates a data set and puts the result into a new data set.  LEVEL is
     the number of intervals per pair of  points.   If  2  a  single  point  is
     interpolated in between each existing point.  If it is 5 then 4 points are
     interpolated.  X, Y, and Z if available are all interpolated.  

     The  data  must  be  strictly  monotonic  in  either  Y  or X for a SPLINE
     interplation.  

     If the first and last points of a curve are the same, the curve is assumed
     to be closed, and the interpolation is done accordingly.  If the  data  is
     POLAR or SPHERICAL then the angles must vary smoothly for proper closure. 


     15.43.1  Options 

          1.  LEVEL - Selects the number of subintervals from 2 to 10.  
              (Default:LEVEL=2) 



                                      PAGE 88


                                      COMMANDS
                                    INTERPOLATE

          2.  SPLINE|GENERAL - Selects the type of fit to use in interpolation. 
              (Default:GENERAL) 
          3.  CLOSED  forces the interpolation to consider the data as a closed
              curve.  CLOSED=OFF will fil an unclosed curve even when the first
              and last points are identical.  
              (Default:data determines closure) 
          4.  POINTS - Selects the data points to use by number.  
          5.  SETS - Selects the range of data sets to interpolate.  
          6.  SELECT="name" - Selects the data sets by name 
          7.  LIMITED  -  Selects  the points to use by a range of values.  The
              actual data  selected  will  include  all  data  that  meets  the
              selection.   Some  data  outside  of the range may be included to
              avoid breaking up a data set into multiple pieces.  
          8.  APPEND  -  Appends  the  new  data  sets.  Otherwise the new data
              replaces the old set.  
              (Default:APPEND=OFF) 
          9.  NAME - Specifies the name for the new data set.  
              (Default:"Spline %" 
         10.  LOG - Summarizes the operations done.  
              (Default:LOG=OFF) 


     15.43.2  Notes 

     The spline fit is based on the spline fitter from FXB$CG from the Stanford
     SPSS package.  

     The general fit was originally adapted from ACM Algorithm #433, by Hiroshi
     Akima.  

     The  interpolation by n will not give the same results as joining the data
     by n, since the joininig is done after  the  data  coordinates  have  been
     transformed into text coordinates.  


     15.44  JOIN 

     Joins the data points with a series of line segments.  
     JOIN [[LEVEL=]n] [{SPLINE|GENERAL}] [TEXT] [EXPAND[=ON|OFF]] 
     --     --          --     --         --     --      -- --
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
          [SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]] 
                           --         --
          [TITLE[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]] 
           ---    -- --


                                      PAGE 89


                                      COMMANDS
                                        JOIN

          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           --    --  --    --   --     --      ---
          [SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
          [HIDE[=ON|OFF]] 
           --    -- --
                              3-d options 
                    [X|Y|Z] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]] 
                             --     -- --


     15.44.1  Level 

     This  is  the  number of line segments/point to use in joining the points.
     If omitted TOPDRAWER picks a suitable value 


     15.44.2  CYCLE 

     When  plotting  more  than  1  slice  or  data  set, CYCLE causes the line
     texture, color, and width to vary from one plot to the next.  The order of
     cycling  is  set  by  the SET CYCLE command.  If you have specified either
     texture, color or width it overrides the cycle value.  


     15.44.3  ERRORS 

     This puts error bars as vertical lines on a mesh plot.  


     15.44.4  EXPAND 

     Sets  the  limits  so  that  the selected data expands to fill the window.
     This has no effect unless POINTS, SETS, SLICES are specified or the limits
     on MESH data have been set by a SET LIMITS command.  

     See:SET MODE 


     15.44.5  FILL 

     Generates a fill pattern inside the curve.  The pattern will be  generated
     so  that alternate areas witin the curve are shaded.  The curve is assumed
     to be closed with the last pont connecticted to the first one.  

     No  spline  or general fits are done to the data with fill.  The number of
     segements per point or level is assumed to be 1 with fill.  


     15.44.6  HIDE 

     Controls whether hidden lines are drawn for a 3-d  mesh,  or  whether  one
     histogram  hides the next.  HIDE=OFF draws the hidden lines, while HIDE=ON
     omits them.  
     (Default:HIDE=ON for mesh, HIDE=OFF for data) 



                                      PAGE 90


                                      COMMANDS
                                        JOIN

     This  works  very well for curves which are functions of x, or curves that
     have at most 2 y values for a given x.  Curves with more than 2  y  values
     per X will hide the entire region from the minimum to the maximum y.  


     15.44.7  SPLINE|GENERAL 

     SPLINE  uses a natural cubic spline to fit the points.  Either x or y must
     be strictly increasing.  A GENERAL curve is calculated using an  algorithm
     which allows multiple-valued functions and repeated points.  
     (Default:GENERAL) 


     15.44.8  TEXT 

     Use the TEXT coordinate frame instead of the DATA frame.  


     15.44.9  LINES 

     Specify which lines or rows of a mesh are to be used in the plot.  


     15.44.10  POINTS|COLUMNS 

     Specifies  the  range  of  points  or the colums of a mesh to use.  If not
     specified all data points are used.  If n2 is omitted it is assumed to  be
     n1.   You may specify the point number or the options FIRST,LAST.  For 3-d
     plots this specifies the columns to use in the plot.  


     15.44.11  SETS 

     This  selects  the data set to plot.  The data must be broken up into sets
     using the data set command, for this option to work properly.   If  n2  is
     omitted  it  is  assumed to be n1.  You may specify the data set number or
     the options FIRST,LAST.  


     15.44.12  INTENSITY 

     Sets line intensity or width (1-5).  


     15.44.13  WHITE...  

     Sets the line color.  See:Command SET COLOR.  


     15.44.14  SOLID...  

     Set the line texture.  See:Command SET TEXTURE 








                                      PAGE 91


                                      COMMANDS
                                        JOIN

     15.44.15  X|Y|Z 

     This  specifies  that  mesh  data  is to be joined only in X,Y, or Z.  The
     default is to join in both.  


     15.44.16  SLICES 

     This plots data sliced from a mesh.  For more  information  see  HISTOGRAM
     SLICE.  


     15.44.17  3-d_plot 

     This produces a mesh plot of the data.  Essentially the  data  points  are
     joined in X,Y.  If you specify color, intensity, or texture it is used for
     the top side of the mesh, while the default is used for the bottom.  

                                       example
          TD:SET COLOR RED 
             --- ----- ---
          TD:SET TEXTURE DOTS 
             --- ------- ----
          TD:JOIN SOLID WHITE 
             ---- ----- -----
     Produces  a  mesh plot with bottom in dotted red lines, while the top side
     is drawen in white solid lines.  


     15.45  LIST 



     15.45.1  DATA 

     LIST [DATA] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [FILE|OUTPUT=filename] [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
     --    --     --      -- --     --   --                --   -- --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
          [STATISTICS[=ON|OFF]] 
           --          -- --
          [COMPRESS[=ON|OFF]] 
           --        -- --

     lists  the  current  data  in the buffer.  The data values are listed in a
     format that may be used as  input  to  TOPDRAWER.   For  more  information
     See:Command SHOW DATA.  



                                      PAGE 92


                                      COMMANDS
                                        LIST

     15.45.1.1  APPEND  - Adds the listing to the end of the specified file.  
     (Default:APPEND=OFF) 


     15.45.1.2  COMPRESS   - Selects  compressed  output.   This saves space on
     disk, at the expense of readability.  If you do not specify ON or OFF,  ON
     is assumed.  
     (Default:COMPRESS=OFF) 


     15.45.1.3  FILE   - Selects  the  filename  for  output.   If  omitted the
     listing file is used.  If the filename  is  NONE  then  no  file  name  is
     selected.  If you wish to specify a file name containing either semicolons
     or blanks, it must be enclosed in parenthesis.  


     15.45.1.4  LIMITED   - Limits the data listed to the specified range.  For
     3-d data the limit on the dependent variable is ignored.   If  limits  are
     not    specified,    the    default    is   the   current   plot   limits.
     See:Command SET LIMITS.  
          1.  X - Specifies X limit 
          2.  Y - Specifies Y limit 
          3.  Z - Specifies the Z limit 
          4.  CURSOR  - Brings up the cursor.  You move it to the X,Y value you
              wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to  enter  X
              or Y to enter Y.  
          5.  RECURSOR - The cursor enters both limits.  
          6.  VLOG  -  Draws  a cross when you press the space bar, and draws a
              dotted line around the final limits.  
          7.  LOG - Type on the terminal a summary of the data listing.  

                                       example
          TD:LIST DATA LIMITED FROM 1,1 to 2,5 
             ---- ---- ------- ---- --- -- ---
               or...  
          TD:LIST DATA LIMITED FROM X=1 Y=1 TO X=2 Y=5 
             ---- ---- ------- ---- --- --- -- --- ---
     Lists  all  points  that  with  X  between  1  and 2 and Y between 2 and 5
     inclusive.  
          TD:LIST DATA LIMITED FROM Y=1 TO Y=5 
             ---- ---- ------- ---- --- -- ---
     Lists all data points with Y values between 1 and 5 inclusive.  
          TD:LIST DATA LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR 
             ---- ---- ------- ---- ------ -- ------
     Lists all data points as defined by the cursor limits.  
          TD:LIST DATA LIMITED FROM X=CURSOR TO X=CURSOR 
             ---- ---- ------- ---- -------- -- --------
     Lists all data points according to X values defined by the cursor.  


     15.45.1.5  LINES|ROWS   - For  3-d  plots specifies which lines or rows of
     the mesh data to list.  








                                      PAGE 93


                                      COMMANDS
                                        LIST

     15.45.1.6  POINTS|COLUMNS  - This specifies which points to list.  For 3-d
     this is the range of column numbers.  


     15.45.1.7  SETS  - This specifies which data set to list.  


     15.45.1.8  STATISTICS   - This  displays  only the statistics on the data,
     and the actual data values are suppressed.  


     15.45.2  FIT 

     LIST FIT [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [FILE|OUTPUT=filename] [FULL[=ON|OFF]] 
     --   --   --      -- --     --   --                --    -- --
     Produces a listing on disk of the current fit parameters.  
          Options:  
          1.  APPEND adds the listing to the end of the specified file 
              (Default:APPEND=OFF) 
          2.  FULL outputs all information.  
              (Default:FULL=OFF) 
          3.  FILE specifies the file name 
              (Default:tfit.lis) 



     15.45.3  HISTOGRAMS 


     LIST HISTOGRAMS 
     --   --
          [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] 
           --      -- --
          [FILE|OUTPUT=filename] 
           --   --
          [IDENT=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --        --
          [SELECT|NAME='hist_name'] 
           ---    --
          [EXACT[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [AREA|DIRECTORY="dir/subdir..."] 
           ---  --
          [TReE[=ON|OFF]] 
           -------- --
          [ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]] 
           --       -- --
          [HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]] 
           --         -- --
          [MESH[=ON|OFF]] 
           --    -- --
          [ARRAY[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [NTUPLES[=ON|OFF]] 
           --       -- --
          [INdEX[=ON|OFF]] 
           --------- --
          [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
           --   -- --

                                      PAGE 94


                                      COMMANDS
                                        LIST

     This produces a line printer listing of the current histogram data.  The
     options ENTRIES,MESH,NTUPLES,EXACT,NAME, and IDENT select which histograms
     are printed.  TREE lists all histograms in the directory tree.  You may
     specify the output file name FILE=name.  The option LOG types the file
     name of the histogram listing on your terminal.  The histogram data is
     listed in a form suitable to be printed.  Some histogram packages allow
     you to specify the format of the output.  For more information see
     command:  SET HISTOGRAM.  

     An index precedes all of the histograms.  If you specify INDEX=OFF then no
     index is listed.  
     (Default:FILE=histo.lis,TREE=OFF,INDEX=ON,APPEND=OFF) 


     15.46  MERGE 

     MERGE [ALL] 
     --     --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [NAMe="name"] 
           ------------
          [POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
          ---      --        --
          [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
           --      -- --     ---           --   -- --
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [CURSOR] ] 
                --

     Merges the specified data points into a single data set.  
          1.  ALL merges all data 
          2.  APPEND  creates  a  new  data set and copies all of the specified
              sets into it.  If not specified then the specified range of  data
              sets is deleted.  
          3.  LIMITED  allows you to specify which points to retain, all others
              are deleted or omitted in the case of APPEND.  
          4.  LOG shows which sets are merged.  
          5.  NAME specifies the name of the new data set.  
          6.  POINTS selects the data points by number 
          7.  SETS selects the range of data sets to merge.  
          8.  SELECT selects the data sets by name 
     You must specify either SETS, POINTS, LIMITED, or ALL If the range of data
     sets contains a mesh data set and APPEND is not specified,  the  data  can
     not be merged.  

     After  merging several data sets you may need to SORT the data if you wish
     to HISTOGRAM, JOIN, or BARCHART it.  


     15.47  MONITOR 

          MONITOR HISTOGRAMS [AVAILABLE|FILE=name|SECTION=name]
          ---     --          --        --        --
               [IDENT[=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
                --      --        --

                                      PAGE 95


                                      COMMANDS
                                      MONITOR

               [EXACT[=ON|OFF]] [EXPAND[=ON|OFF]] [SELECT|NAME='hist_name']
                ---    -- --     ---     -- --     ---    --
               [INTERVAL=n] [ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]] [HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|
                --           --       -- --     --         -- --     --   --
               OFF]] [MESH[=ON|OFF]] [OVERFLOWS[=ON|OFF]] [PAUSE[=ON|OFF]]
               --     --    -- --     --         -- --     --     -- --
               [REPEAT=n] [RESCALE[=ON|OFF]] [SHOW[=ON|OFF]] [SCAN[=ON|OFF]]
                ---        ---      -- --     --    -- --     --    -- --
               [SKIP=n] [STATISTICS[=ON|OFF]] [TIME[=ON|OFF]] [TREE[=ON|OFF]]
                --       --          -- --     --    -- --     --    -- --
               [WINDOWS=n] 
                --
     Repeatedly displays the selected histograms, or the last one selected by a
     SET HISTOGRAM command.  If more than 1 histogram are selected only the
     first 20 are displayed.  SEE:TOPDRAWER LINK and SET MONITOR 


     15.47.1  AVAILABLE 

     Selects currently available histograms rather than histograms in a global
     section or direct access file.  


     15.47.2  EXACT 

     Histogram names are treated as exact strings, and they are not searched in
     a case independent manner.  
     (Default:OFF) 


     15.47.3  EXPAND 

     Expands the histogram scales by omitting leading and trailing zero
     channels.  The histogram is also centered in the window.  You may also set
     limits on the Y scales of individual histograms by:  
          DEFINE HIST ID=n PRMIN=nlow PRMAX=nhigh 


     15.47.4  ENTRIES 

     YES selects only histograms with entries, while NO selects histograms
     without entries.  


     15.47.5  FILE 

     Selects the direct access file to monitor.  If FILE="" then the current
     one is used.  


     15.47.6  IDENT 

     Specifies the IDs of the histograms to display.  If this qualifier is not
     used, then the current histogram is displayed.  If IDENT is used without
     any parameters then all histograms are candidates for monitoring.  





                                      PAGE 96


                                      COMMANDS
                                      MONITOR

     15.47.7  INTERVAL 

     Specifies the interval in seconds between updates.  
     (Default:10) 


     15.47.8  LOG 

     Types on your terminal the name of each histogram monitored.  If
     STATISTICS is selected then the statistics are also typed.  


     15.47.9  MESH 

     YES selects only mesh data (scatter plots), while NO selects only non mesh
     data.  Normally both mesh and nonmesh data are displayed.  


     15.47.10  NAME 

     Selects the histograms by name.  See SET or SHOW HISTOGRAM.  


     15.47.11  OVERFLOWS 

     Displays the overflow data in the first/last channels.  
     (Default:ON) 


     15.47.12  PAUSE 

     Selects pause mode rather than wait mode.  After each plot Topdrawer
     pauses until you press the "Return" key.  
     (Default:OFF) 


     15.47.13  REPEAT 

     Is the number of times to repeat.  It must be in the range of 1 to
     2147483647.  
     (Default:9999) 


     15.47.14  RESCALE 

     Selects whether hist is rescaled when it overflows.  Normally the
     TOPDRAWER automatically picks the scale of the displayed histogram.  Then
     when it is too big to fit on the screen, it is erased and rescaled.  If
     you set limits before the MONITOR command, they are used to determine the
     scale of the histogram.  The histogram is not automatically rescaled, if
     the limits are picked or if RESCALE=OFF.  
     (Default:ON) 








                                      PAGE 97


                                      COMMANDS
                                      MONITOR

     15.47.15  SECTION 

     Selects the global section to monitor.  If SECTION="" then the current one
     is used.  If neither FILE nor SECTION are specified then section is
     assumed unless FILE has been specified in a previous MONITOR HISTOGRAM or
     SET HISTOGRAM command.  SEE:TOPDRAWER LINK 


     15.47.16  SCAN 

     Displays all selected histograms, in order.  The screen is cleared between
     each update.  This allows you to look at more than 20 histograms.  
     (Default:OFF) 


     15.47.17  SKIP 

          SKIP=n Skips the first n histograms which meet the selection
     criteria.  


     15.47.18  STATISTICS 

     Puts histogram overflow/underflow and sum on the line below the top title. 


     15.47.19  SHOW 

     Adds the hist ID to the lower right corner of each window below the X
     title.  
     (Default:ON) 


     15.47.20  TIME 

     Adds the time to the lower left corner of the display.  
     (Default:ON) 


     15.47.21  TREE 

     Search the directory tree from the current directory for histograms to
     monitor, that match the selection criterions.  
     (Default:OFF) 


     15.47.22  WINDOWS 

     Selects the maximum number of windows to use.  You may specify any number
     from 1 to 20.  
     (Default:20) 


     15.48  MORE 

     Adds more text after the last title with the same parameters as the last
     title.  It may also be modified by a matching CASE command, see TITLE.  
          MORE 
          ---

                                      PAGE 98


                                      COMMANDS
                                        MORE

     15.49  MULTIPLY 

     MULTIPLY [Y|Z] [FROM|TO] [EWEIGHT=n] [WEIGHT=n] {n1|"name1"} [BY] {n2|
     --        - -   --   --   --          --                      --
               "name2"|FIT} 
                       --
          [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [CHECK[=ON|OFF]] [ERROR[=ON|OFF]]
           --      -- --     ---           --     -- --     --     -- --
               [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [LINES|
                --     --       --        --         ---
               ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO
               --    --        --         ---      --    -- --      --    --
               [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]] [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] [LOG[=ON|OFF]]
                 -       -       -         --         --         --   -- --
               [VECTOR[=ON|OFF]] 
                --      -- --
     This  multiplies  the  (Y/Z)  values  in  data set n1 by data set n2.  The
     result is a modified set n1.  You may not multiply mesh data by normal 2-d
     data.  


     15.49.1  APPEND 

     If  APPEND  is  specified,  then a new data set is created, containing the
     result and set n1 is unchanged.  


     15.49.2  CHECK 

     CHECK=OFF  turns off data set checking.  When CHECK=ON both data sets must
     have identical X (and Y if mesh) values, but data set n2 may contain  more
     points  than  n1.   If  (DX/DY) is non zero then the both DX and X must be
     identical within 1% of DX.  If you  have  data  sets  with  non  identical
     values  of  X  you  may  create  a set with identical values using the BIN
     command.  If the X values of 2 data sets are not quite identical.  You may
     force  TOPDRAWER  to  multiply  them  by setting DX for the data 100 times
     greater than the difference in X or by setting CHECK=OFF 


     15.49.3  ERROR 

     ERROR=OFF excludes the errors from the FIT in the computation.  
     (Default:ERROR=ON) 


     15.49.4  FIT 

     Specifies  that  the  data  set  is  to  be  multiplied  by  the last FIT.
     See:Command FIT.  


     15.49.5  LIMITED 

     You may specify the limits over which the histograms are to be multiplied.
     If you specify the Y or Z limits,  then  all  data  that  contains  values
     inside these limits will be multiplied.  For example if you 
          MULTIPLY 1 to 2 LIMITED FROM Y=10 to Y=11 
     But data set 1 contains the followind data:  


                                      PAGE 99


                                      COMMANDS
                                      MULTIPLY

     1,0;  2,10;  3,0;  4,11;  5,0 
     Points  2  to 4 inclusive will be multiplied, and only points 1 and 5 will
     be omitted.  


     15.49.6  LOG 

     If  LOG  is  specified  then  the  result  of the command is typed on your
     terminal.  


     15.49.7  VECTOR 

     The  DX,DY,DZ's  will  be  cross  multiplied together assuming they form a
     vector.  The X,Y,Z are not changed, and they should match for  both  input
     data sets.  


     15.49.8  WEIGHT-EWEIGHT 

     WEIGHT=n  specifies  a  weighting  factor  to  multiply the data by before
     adding or subtracting it.  EWEIGHT=n specifies the error on WEIGHT.   This
     option must precede the data set number.  


     15.49.9  Notes 

     The  new  value  is  Y3=Y1*Y2.  The errors (DY) are treated as if the data
     sets     are      uncorrelated.       DY3=Y3*SQRT((DY1/Y1)**2+(DY2/Y2)**2)
     See:Command ADD,DIVIDE.  


     15.50  NEW_FRAME 

          NEW [FRAME|PLOT] [RESET] [ALIAS=alias] "Comment about plot" 
          --   --    --     --
     Starts  a new picture.  Untreated points are PLOTTED before going on.  The
     old data points are retained until new  ones  are  read.   Parameters  are
     returned to the default values.  If the plot device is interactive and you
     are executing commands inside a file the program prompts:  
          PAUSE:  
     You press the "Return" key to start the next plot.  If instead of "return"
     you type in STOP, TOPDRAWER will stop executing the input file and  return
     to  command  level.   You  can  also type EXIT, QUIT, HALT, END, or Ctrl_Z
     instead of STOP.  

     If  you  press  Ctrl_C  then  TOPDRAWER will skip input until another STOP
     command is encountered, or the file ends.  Pressing Ctrl_C  twice  rapidly
     in succession will abort all file input.  Pressing Ctrl_C twice rapidly in
     succession again will cause the program to ask you if you wish to abort.  


     15.50.1  ALIAS 

     Each  picture  is  given  the  name PICT001, PICT002 etc., but they may be
     given an alias name.  If the name is "" then name is Plot0001, Plot002 ... 




                                      PAGE 100


                                      COMMANDS
                                     NEW_FRAME

     15.50.2  Comment 

     The  "Comment  on  plot"  is typed on your terminal, or written to the log
     file.  


     15.50.3  RESET 

     This  option resets all PERMANENT options to their original defaults.  For
     example you have:  
          TD:SET LIM FROM 1,2 TO 3,4 PERMANENT 
             --- --- ---- --- -- --- ---------
     The RESET option will set them back to the default of no limits.  
                                        note
     The STORAGE is not reset back to the default, and the existing data is not
     modified.  


     15.51  NDU 

     This set the value of the negative error on U.  
     See command X.  


     15.52  NDV 

     This set the value of the negative error on V.  
     See command V.  


     15.53  NDW 

     This set the value of the negative error on W.  
     See command X.  


     15.54  NDX 

     This set the value of the negative error on X.  
     See command X.  


     15.55  NDY 

     This set the value of the negative error on Y.  
     See command X.  


     15.56  NDZ 

     This set the value of the negative error on Z.  
     See command X.  








                                      PAGE 101


                                      COMMANDS
                                       PAUSE

     15.57  PAUSE 

          {PAUSE|WAIT} ['String'] [FOR n] 
           --    --                --

     This  causes  TOPDRAWER  type  the string and PAUSE.  This only works in a
     file or inside a repeat block.  You press the "Return"  key  to  continue.
     If instead of "return" you type in STOP, TOPDRAWER will stop executing the
     input file or repeat block and return to command level.  You can also type
     EXIT,  QUIT,  HALT,  END, or Ctrl_Z instead of STOP.  You may also use SET
     and SHOW commands while paused.  


     15.57.1  FOR 

     If  FOR n is specified then TOPDRAWER will wait for n seconds, then resume
     normal execution.  n may be in the range 0 to 200.  
     (Default:10) 

     example 
          TD:REPEAT "NEW;SET HIST NEXT;HIST;WAIT FOR 10" 10 
             ------ -------- ---- -------------- --- --- --
     Gets  the  next  histogram,  plots  it,  then  waits for 10 seconds before
     plotting the next one.  


     15.58  PLOT 

     Plots the data as a series of points or symbols 

     PLOT [EXPAND[=ON|OFF]] [AXES|GRID] [OUTLINE] [TABLE] 
     --    --      -- --     --   --     --        --
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]] 
           --              --         --
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [CURSOR] ] 
                --
          [TITLE[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           --    --  --    --   --     --      ---
          [SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
          [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]] 
           ---    -- --
          [[NO]SYMBOL[=sym]] [SIZE=n] 
            -- --             --


                                      PAGE 102


                                      COMMANDS
                                        PLOT

          [[X|Y|X]ERRORS[=ON|OFF]] 
            - - - --      -- --
          [FILL[=ON|OFF]] 
           --    -- --
                              Data plot options 
          [VECTOR[=ON|OFF]] 
           --      -- --
                              Mesh (scatter) plot options 
          [[NO]RANDOM[=n]] [VARIABLE[=ON|OFF]] [COUNTS] 
            -- --           --        -- --     --
                              Non data options 
          [OUTLINE] [AXES] [GRID] [GRID] 
           --        --     --     --

     The  data  points are plotted as a series of symbols with error bars.  The
     options AXES, OUTLINE, and GRID allow you to add specified elements  to  a
     plot.  TABLE plots the actual values for the data as a set of numbers.  


     15.58.1  Options 

          1.  AXES  -  Plots  axes (if enabled).  You may specify where to draw
              the ticks.  
          2.  GRID - Plots a grid with specified locations.  
          3.  COUNTS - Controls the number of symbols/bin for a scatter plot 
          4.  EXPAND - Sets the limits so the specified set fills the window 
          5.  FILL - Fills in the symbols that are plotted.  
          6.  INTENSITY - Sets the intensity of the plot 
          7.  LIMITED - Limits the plot to a specified range of X,Y,Z 
          8.  [X|Y|Z]ERRORS=OFF - Disables error bars.  
          9.  RANDOM - Controls the number of symbols/bin for a scatter plot 
         10.  OUTLINE - Draws an outline around the plot (if enabled) 
         11.  SETS - Selects the data sets to plot 
         12.  SLICES - Selects the mesh data points to plot in 2-d.  
         13.  [NO]SYMBOL - Selects the SYMBOL to use when plotting.  
         14.  SIZE - Selects the symbol size.  
         15.  TABLE - Plots the values of the data points as numbers.  
         16.  VARIABLE  -  Enables  symbol  sizes proportional to the value for
              scatter plots.  
         17.  VECTOR - Plots data as a vector field.  (DX,DY,DZ)=vector 
         18.  WHITE...  - Selects the color of the plot.  
         19.  SOLID...  - Selects the texture of the plot (error bars) 


     15.58.2  AXES|GRID 

          PLOT   {AXES|GRID}   [AT [x [y [z]]]]  [[TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|X|Y|Z]
          --      --   --       --                 --  --     --    --   - - -
     [[LABELS|TICKS]   [SHORT|LONG]   [n1,n2,n3.....]    [FROM n TO n BY n N n]
       --     --        --    --                          --     --   --   -
     [FFORMAT|GFORMAT|EFORMAT|YERS |MONTHS|DAYS|TIME]] 
      --      --      --      --    --     --   --
     Puts Axes and grid on the plot, but does not plot points.  This command is
     not usually necessary as axes are added to  the  picture  when  the  first
     PLOT,  HISTOGRAM,  or  JOIN  command is executed.  If you use this command
     before a PLOT, HISTOGRAM or JOIN command, then the automatic axes are  not
     produced.   The limits of the axes are determined either from the existing
     data or from the the SET LIMITS command, or by the LIMITED  options.   The


                                      PAGE 103


                                      COMMANDS
                                        PLOT

     format  of  the axes is determined by the SET AXES command.  The origin of
     the axes may be specified after the option AT.  

          This command is mainly useful for special graphs where 2 sets of axes
     with different scales are needed.  This is also used to plot axes on  a  3
     dimensional plot where x,y,z specify the origin of the axes.  3-d plots do
     not automatically produce axes, so you must use the PLOT AXES command.  

          The  origin  may  also be specified by the command SET THREE.  If not
     already specified by SET AXES,  LABELS,  or  TICKS  commands,  the  color,
     texture, and intensity options will be used in plotting the axes.  


     15.58.2.1  AT   - This allows you specify the data X,Y,Z at which the axis
     is plotted.  


     15.58.2.2  FROM|TO|BY|N    - You   may  specify  a  range  of  ticks  with
     FROM,TO,BY,N.  You may specify any 3.  

                                       example
          TD:PLOT AXES X FROM 1 TO 10 BY 2 
             ---- ---- - ---- - -- -- -- -
               or...  
          TD:PLOT AXES X FROM 1 BY 2 N=5 
             ---- ---- - ---- - -- - ---
     Draws ticks at 1,3,5,7, and 9.  


     15.58.2.3  GRID   - If  specified  without  the option AXES then a GRID is
     plotted.  The grid must be ON to be plotted.  See SET GRID.   If  AXES  is
     specified, then both are plotted if the GRID is ON.  Grid lines or symbols
     are plotted only for long ticks.  

                                       example
          TD:SET GRID ON 
             --- ---- --
          TD:PLOT AXES Y 0 X 2,4,6,8 ticks 1,3,5,7,9 
             ---- ---- - - - ------- ----- ---------
     The  grid is plotted at ticks 2,4,6,8 on the X and 0 on the Y.  An axes is
     also plotted with labels at X=2,4,6,8 Y=0, and short ticks at X=1,3,5,7,9. 
          TD:PLOT GRID Y 0 X 2,4,6,8 
             ---- ---- - - - -------
     Only a grid is plotted.  


     15.58.2.4  HIDE   - Controls whether hidden lines are drawn for a 3-d axes
     and grid.  HIDE=OFF draws the hidden  lines,  while  HIDE=ON  omits  them.
     This  assumes  that  the  axes are drawn in the normal position behind the
     plot.  It may not work properly for other  positions.   You  must  specify
                                                                  ----
     which axes are to be plotted.  
     (Default:HIDE=OFF) 
                                       example
     For example histogram a mesh with hidden axes:  
          TD:HISTOGRAM ( Hist mesh data) 
          TD:PLOT AXES X Y Z HIDE ( Now plot only visible portion of axes) 



                                      PAGE 104


                                      COMMANDS
                                        PLOT

     15.58.2.5  TOP...    - Produces only a single axes at the TOP according to
     n1,n2....  You may also produce the axes to  the  LEFT,RIGHT,  or  BOTTOM.
     For 1-d plot X produces both TOP and BOTTOM axes, Y produces both LEFT and
     RIGHT, while Z produces only TOP.  On 3-d plots they  produce  X,Y,  or  Z
     axes.  The axes are not produced if disabled by the SET AXES command.  

     After this option the tick values are assumed to be LABELS LONG.  


     15.58.2.6  LABEL|TICK   - LABEL  selects  long  ticks  with labels.  TICKS
     selects short ticks without labels.  Labels or ticks are not  produced  if
     disabled by the SET LABELS or SET TICKS command.  


     15.58.2.7  LIMITED  - If this option is used it may be used to specify the
     length of the axis, with respect to the data.  


     15.58.2.8  LONG|SHORT  - Selects either long or short ticks.  This must be
     used after the LABEL or TICK command it modifies.  


     15.58.2.9  FORMATS...    - These  determine  the  number format.  They are
     analogous to FORTRAN formats.  
          1.  FFORMAT  -  Numbers  are  written  as  nn.nnn or nn The number of
              digits to the right or left of the decimal point is determined by
              the  data.   All  labels for a selected axis are written with the
              same number of digits to the right of the decimal point.  
          2.  GFORMAT  -  Numbers are written as either F or E format depending
              on the range.  For example if you specify labels from 0 to  1  by
              .25 they are written as.  0,0.25,0.5,1 
          3.  EFORMAT  -  Labels  are written as n.nn with an exponent power of
              10.  
          4.  YEARS - Only the year is written 
          5.  MONTHS - The month is written 
          6.  DAYS - The day of the month is written 
          7.  TIME - The time is written.  
          8.  DATE - The date is written in the format dd-mmm-yyyy.  
     (Default:GFORMAT) 

                                        NOTE
     If  the  format  is  not  G,F,or E then SMALL ticks are not reproduced for
     labels.  This allows you to place the label in any  location  without  any
     ticks.  


     15.58.2.10  N1...    - These  select the tick/label locations.  If omitted
     then a set of default ticks and labels are  chosen.   These  are  selected
     according to the SET LABELS and SET TICKS commands.  


     15.58.2.11  Restrictions   - You may not specify more than 200 total ticks
     at one time.  If you need more than  200  ticks  you  need  to  plot  AXES
     several times.  

                                       example
          TD:PLOT AXES X FROM 1 TO 10 by 0.002 
             ---- ---- - ---- - -- -- -- -----


                                      PAGE 105


                                      COMMANDS
                                        PLOT

     generates 500 ticks, and is not allowed.  


     15.58.2.12  Examples  - 

                                       example
          TD:PLOT AXES 
             ---- ----
     Plot all axes with the current defaults.  
          TD:PLOT AXES X 
             ---- ---- -
     Produces default TOP and BOTTOM axes.  
          TD:PLOT AXES X LABELS 1,2,3,4 TICKS 1.5,2.5,3.5 
             ---- ---- - ------ ------- ----- -----------
     Produces labels at 1,2..  and short ticks at 1.5,...  
          TD:PLOT AXES RIGHT EFORMAT LABELS 1,2,3,4 TICKS LONG 1.5,2.5,3.5 
             ---- ---- ----- ------- ------ ------- ----- ---- -----------
     Produces  the  same  labels,  but in exponential format with long ticks in
     between the labels.  
          TD:PLOT AXES BOTTOM LABELS 1,2,3 TOP 1.5,2.5 
             ---- ---- ------ ------ ----- --- -------
     Produces  labels  with  long ticks on the top and bottom of the plot.  The
     labels are at different locations.  
          TD:PLOT AXES X LIMITED FROM X=1 Y=5 TO X=11 LABELS 1,5,11 
             ---- ---- - ------- ---- --- --- -- ---- ------ ------
     This plots an X axis from X=1 to 11 Y=5 with labeled ticks at 1,5,11.  


     15.58.3  COUNTS 

     This sets the number of DOTS=ZMAX-ZMIN.  This is for data that consists of
     counts versus X,Y.  ZMIN,ZMAX are either automatically  set  by  the  data
     set, or by the SET LIMITS command.  


     15.58.4  CYCLE 

     When plotting more than 1 data set, CYCLE causes the line symbol, texture,
     color, and width to vary from one plot to the next.  The  cycle  table  is
     set  by  the  SET  CYCLE  command.   If  you have specified either symbol,
     texture, color or width it overrides the cycle values.  

     When doing a scatter plot of a mesh, CYCLE causes the symbol,  line  color
     and width to vary according to the cycle table.  

     When  plotting  a  mesh table the color and width of each number will vary
     according to the CYCLE TABLE.  


     15.58.5  EXPAND 

     Sets  the  limits  so  that  the selected data expands to fill the window.
     This has no effect unless POINTS, SETS, SLICES are specified or the limits
     on MESH data have been set by a SET LIMITS command.  

     See:SET MODE 




                                      PAGE 106


                                      COMMANDS
                                        PLOT

     15.58.6  FILL 

     Fills  the  symbols  to  make them "more solid".  You will have to use the
     command SET FILL to achieve the desired effect.  Many symbols can  not  be
     filled properly, so you must just try until you find a satisfactory one.  

     Of  the  normal  ASCII  character  set  the "0O8SZ$" look pretty good when
     filled.  The centered symbol 1o, 2o, 6o, 8o look good when filled.  3o and
     4o look bad when filled, while the rest to not fill at all.  


     15.58.7  INTENSITY 

     INTENSITY=n sets line intensity or width (1-5).  


     15.58.8  LIMITED 

     This plots only those data points that fall  within  the  specified  X,Y,Z
     limits.  If no limits are specified, then the limits used are those set by
     the SET LIMIT command.  This option has no effect on the density  of  dots
     or symbol size.  If a singe axis is plotted, then the limits determine the
     location and length of the axis.  

                                       example
          TD:PLOT LIMITED FROM 1,2,3 TO 4,5,6 
             ---- ------- ---- ----- -- -----
     Only points where 1<=X<=4 2<=Y<=5 3<=X<=6 are plotted.  

                                       example
          TD:PLOT LIMITED FROM Z=.5 to Z=10 
             ---- ------- ---- ---- -- ----
     Only points where 0.5<=Z<=10 are plotted.  
          TD:PLOT LIMITED FROM Y=.01 
             ---- ------- ---- -----
     Only points where 0.01<=Y are plotted.  

                                       example
          TD:PLOT LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR 
             ---- ------- ---- ------ -- ------
     The cross hair cursor appears on the screen.  You move it to the lower X,Y
     and press the space bar.  Then move it to the  upper  X,Y  and  press  the
     space bar again.  The points plotted will lie within the limits you set.  


     15.58.9  ERRORS 

     This selects plots with or without error bars.  ERRORS=OFF  plots  without
     any  errors,  while  XERRORS=OFF  only  omits the X error bars.  Similarly
     YERRORS=OFF or ZERRORS=OFF omit the Y or Z error bars.  
     (Default:ERRORS=ON) 

     If  you  wish  to modify the appearance of the error bars see the command:
     SET BAR.  This modifies the size of the bar at the end of the errors.  

     If the negative error bars are defined they are subtracted from the data. 




                                      PAGE 107


                                      COMMANDS
                                        PLOT

     15.58.10  RANDOM 

     RANDOM=n  -  Sets  the maximum number of points per bin for a scatter plot
     (3-d) If RANDOM is not specified The number of points  in  a  bin  is  the
     value  in the bin-Zmin+1.  The default RANDOM is limited to the range 1 to
     10.  If Zmax is less than 1.0 then the default RANDOM is  set  to  5.   No
     points are produced when the data equals ZMIN.  Zmin for a scatter plot is
     zero unless set by a SET LIMITS command.  

     If  the  contents of the bins range from 0 to 100 and RANDOM=10, Then each
     dot represents the value 10.  Any bin with values less than or equal to  0
     will  have no points plotted.  0.00001 to 10.0 will get 1 dot, 10.00001 to
     20 will have 2 dots and so on.  

     If  the  Z  axis  is  logarithmic  then  the  number  of  points  will  be
     proportional to ALOG10(Z)-ALOG10(ZMIN).  

     NORANDOM  modifies a scatter plot so that only one point is plotted in the
     center of each bin.  This option should be used  with  either  the  option
     LIMITED or VARIABLE.  


     15.58.11  SOLID...  

     Selects  the  texture  of  the  plot.   This  doesn not change the plotted
     symbol.  Error bars may be drawn as dotted or dashed.  


     15.58.12  LINES|ROWS 

     For 3-d plots specifies which lines or rows of the mesh data to list.  


     15.58.13  OUTLINE 

     Plots  the  outline  around  the  plot.  Sections of the outline which are
     disabled by the SET OUTLINE are not plotted.  If not already specified  by
     SET AXES,  or  OUTLINE commands, the color, and intensity may be specified
     by the PLOT OUTLINE command.  


     15.58.14  POINTS|COLUMNS 

     Specifies  the  range  of  points or the colums of a mesh to use.  For 3-d
     this is the range of column numbers.  


     15.58.15  SETS 

     This  selects  the data set to plot.  The data must be broken up into sets
     using the data set command, for this option to work properly.   If  n2  is
     omitted  it  is  assumed to be n1.  You may specify the data set number or
     the options FIRST,LAST.  







                                      PAGE 108


                                      COMMANDS
                                        PLOT

     15.58.16  SLICES 

     This scatter plots either a single slice or several slices from mesh data.
     If THREE is OFF the first X,Y,Z determines the view along either the  X,Y,
     or Z axis.  See HISTOGRAM for more details.  


     15.58.17  SYMBOL 

     SYMBOL=sym specifies the symbol to use for plotting data.  Any legal UGSYS
     symbol may be used.  Points that do not already have a symbol are normally
     plotted using the default symbol (See:Command SET SYMBOL).  The symbol you
     specify is used instead of the default.  You  may  change  the  color  and
     intensity of a symbol, but it may not have a changed texture.  You can not
     plot symbols dotted or dashed.  

     NOSYMBOL specifies that all points are plotted with the default symbol, or
     the selected SYMBOL instead of the symbol assigned to each point.  

     If  you  want a centered symbol use 0o, 1o, 2o, 3o, 4o, 5o, 6o, 7o, 8o, or
     9o.  Some characters from the  ASCII  character  set  are  also  suitable.
     "08OXNSYZ$*" are all possible characters which are centered and reasonably
     symmetrical.  Lower case characters are too far below the  center  of  the
     point.  


     15.58.18  SIZE 

     SIZE=n is the size of the symbol to plot.  If unspecified the default size
     is used.  See:Command SET SYMBOL.  


     15.58.19  TABLE 

                                       Options
               PLOT  TABLE  [AT]  [ABSOLUTE]  [DATA]  [VALUE]  [TOP] [OFFSET=n|
                             --    --          --      --       --    --
               [CURSOR]] 
                --
For  regular data points, the value of the dependent variable (Z or Y) is drawn
     along the X axis as a number at the angle -90 degrees.  

     Mesh  data  is  plotted as a table of numbers centered on the mesh points,
     The number is plotted horizontally.  

     The size of the numbers is adjusted to fit within the available space with
     a maximum size equal to the label size.  You may select the size by  using
     the SIZE=n option.  
                                       Options
          1.  OFFSET=n  moves  the  table  up  or  down by the selected offset.
              Normally it is specified in inches from the bottom data axis.  
          2.  DATA - The offset is specified in data units.  
          3.  VALUE - The offset is from the value of the data point.  
          4.  TOP - The offset is down from the top data axis.  
          5.  CURSOR - The cursor is used to select the offset.  
          6.  ABSOLUTE - The offset is an absolute value from the bottom of the
              window.  



                                      PAGE 109


                                      COMMANDS
                                        PLOT

     15.58.20  VARIABLE 

     This modifies scatter plots so that the size of the symbol is proportional
     to  Z-ZMIN.   Normally  this  is used with the options SIZE, NORANDOM, and
     VARIABLE.  


     15.58.21  VECTOR 

     This plots regular data as a vector field.  Each data point is plotted  as
     an   arrow   with   the   tail  located  as  (X,Y[,Z])  and  the  head  at
     (X+DX,Y+DY[,Z+DZ]).  The arrow head has a width equal to the BAR size.  


     15.58.22  WHITE...  

     WHITE, RED, BLUE, GREEN, YELLOW, CYAN, or MAGENTA sets the line color.  


     15.58.23  3-d 

     Mesh  data  produces a scatter plot if THREE is off and the dependent axis
     is Z.  If the dependent axis is Y or X then a series of slices are plotted
     of mesh data.  The scatter plot is truncated with zero dots for data equal
     to ZMIN, and the maximum number of dots  at  ZMAX.   The  options  SYMBOL,
     DOTS,  COUNTS,  NORANDOM, and VARIABLE are used to control the look of the
     scatter plot.  In addition by setting the Z limits and using  the  LIMITED
     option  you  can  control which data is plotted.  If the dependent axis is
     not correct for the desired type of plot use the SWAP  command  to  change
     them.  

                                       Example
          TD:PLOT SYMBOL=1O SIZE=10 NORANDOM VARIABLE 
             ---- --------- ------- -------- --------
     Plots  the  selected  symbol  in  varying  sizes.   It is 1.0" at ZMAX and
     nothing is plotted at ZMIN.  
          TD:SET LIM ZMAX=4;  PLOT BLUE LIMITED 
             --- --- -------  ---- ---- -------
               or...  
          TD:PLOT BLUE LIMITED TO Z=4 
             ---- ---- ------- -- ---
          TD:SET LIM ZMIN=4;  PLOT RED LIMITED 
             --- --- -------  ---- --- -------
               or...  
          TD:PLOT RED LIMITED FROM Z=4.0001 
             ---- --- ------- ---- --------
     Points Z=4 and lower are plotted in BLUE.  Points above 4 are RED.  

     The default for PLOT is THREE off.  


     15.59  PROJECT 

     PROJECT [ADD|AVERAGE] [INTEGRATE[=ON|OFF]] [SPLIT[=ON|OFF]]
     --       --  --        --         -- --     --     -- --
               [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [SELECT="name"] {X|Y|Z}=[v|
                ---   --        --         ---             - - -
               FROM v1TOv2[BYv3|N=n]]} [...] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"]
               --     --   --   -             --      -- --     ---

                                      PAGE 110


                                      COMMANDS
                                      PROJECT

               [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
                --   -- --

     Forms  1 or more projections of mesh data parallel to one of the axes.  DX
     is set to half of the bin width and Y is either the sum  or  average  over
     the  mesh  values.   If  available  Z=the mean over the summed coordinate.
     This forms the projections from all selected mesh data.  


     15.59.1  ADD|AVERAGE 

     ADD|AVERAGE  specifies  whether  the data is added or averaged to form the
     projection.  The default is to ADD the data.  This option must precede the
     X,Y,Z that it modifies.  


     15.59.2  APPEND 

     If  APPEND  is  specified,  then a new data set is created, containing the
     result and the original data is unchanged.  


     15.59.3  INTEGRATE 

     This produces a projection of the area under the curve.  The projection is
     the SUM( DY*Z ) if Y is specified.  If AVERAGE is also specified then  the
     projections  is  divided  by  the SUM( DY ).  This option must precede the
     X,Y,Z that it modifies.  


     15.59.4  SPLIT 

     SPLIT=ON  splits  channels to preserve the total sum over the projections.
     For example X channels run from 0 to 1, 1 to 2 ...  9 to 10.  
          TD:PROJECT  X FROM 0 TO 10 BY 2.5 Will produce 4 projections, but the
             -------  - ---- - -- -- -- ---
     sum over all projections will not be equal to the original sum.  
          TD:PROJECT SPLIT X FROM 0 TO 10 BY 2.5 
             ------- ----- - ---- - -- -- -- ---
     Produces a set of projections and preserves the sum.  
     (Default:SPLIT=OFF) 


     15.59.5  X|Y|Z 

     This  specifies the axis to project along.  If you specify v then only the
     row/column corresponding to v is projected.  If specified v1  and  v2  may
     select  a range of values to project.  If no values are specified then the
     entire mesh is  projected.   If  BY=v3  is  specified  then  a  series  of
     projections  are  made  from  v1  to  v2  with  a  width of v3.  If N=n is
     specified then the range from v1 to v2 is split into  n  equal  intervals.
     You  need  not  use  this  command  if you wish to histogram only a single
     slice.  The SLICE modifier on the HISTOGRAM, or JOIN commands may be used.
     If  X,Y,  or  Z  are  repeated  then  extra  data  sets  are  defined with
     projections.  





                                      PAGE 111


                                      COMMANDS
                                      PROJECT

     15.59.6  LOG 

     Each projection is listed on your terminal as it is formed.  


     15.59.7  SETS 

     This  selects the data sets to project.  If n2 is omitted it is assumed to
     be n1.  You may specify the data set number  or  the  options  FIRST,LAST.
     All mesh data between n1 and n2 are projected.  


     15.59.8  Examples 

     You read in a mesh of X,Y vs Z.  
          TD:PROJECT Y FROM 5 TO 10 
             ------- - ---- - -- --
     Projects  the Y slices corresponding to Y=5 to 10 onto the X axis, and 2-d
     array of values is stored.  The new array of values is the sum  of  all  Z
     values  corresponding  to  the  range  of  Y  values.   The  mesh  data is
     destroyed.  
          TD:PROJECT Y FROM 5 TO 10 BY 2 
             ------- - ---- - -- -- -- -
     Makes 3 projections from 5 to 7, 7 to 9, and 9 to 10 

          TD:PROJECT X Y APPEND 
             ------- - - ------
          TD:SET WINDOW X 1 of 2;HIST SET <SETS-1>;TITLE BOTTOM 'X axis' 
             --- ------ - - -- ------ --- -------------- ------ -- -----
          TD:SET WINDOW X 2 of 2;HIST SET LAST;TITLE BOTTOM 'Y axis' 
             --- ------ - - -- ------ --- ---------- ------ -- -----
          TD:DELETE SETS FROM <SET-1> 
     Projects both X and Y.  The projection along the X axis is in data next to
     last data set while along Y is in the last set.  Both projections are then
     histogrammed in separate windows.  Finally the projections are deleted.  
     Note:   This  assumes  only  1 mesh data set exists.  If n mesh sets exist
     then 2n projections will be formed.  

          TD:PROJECT X 1 2.5 X 3 5 X 6 10;HIST 
             ------- - - --- - - - - - -------
     Projects  3  different  bands of data along the X axis.  All 3 projections
     are then histogrammed.  


     15.60  READ 

          READ POINTS - Reads in data to be plotted 
          READ MESH - Reads in 3-d data to be plotted 


     15.60.1  POINTS 

          READ POINTS [APPEND=ON|OFF]] [SET] 
          ---  --      --     -- --     --

     This reads in data to be plotted.  Once data is read, it is retained until
     it  has  been used to generate a plot.  It is then discarded when new data
     is read.  Normally you plot the data immediately after reading  it.   When


                                      PAGE 112


                                      COMMANDS
                                        READ

     you  start  a  new  plot,  the  data  last  plotted is still available for
     replotting.  It is not discarded until  new  data  is  read.   The  option
     APPEND  allows  you  to append more data to the already plotted data.  The
     option SET starts a new data set.  If you do not  specify  a  symbol  when
     reading points, the default is determined by the last SET SYMBOL command. 

     This  command  is not necessary, since TOPDRAWER assumes that a number not
     preceded by a command is automatically a point.  If you wish to read  data
     with the symbol as the first item, you must use the READ DATA command, and
     terminate the data with a blank line.  

     Values that are omitted are initially set to 0.0, or to the previous value
     for that field.  

     When reading in data <XVALUE>, <DXVALUE>, <YVALUE>, ...  are the X, DX, Y,
     ...  values from the previous point.  


     15.60.1.1  Examples  - 
          TD:SET ORDER X Y SYMBOL DX DY 
             --- ----- - - ------ -- --
          TD:0 2 
             - -
          TD:1 4 1o 0.5 0.1 
             - - -- --- ---
          TD:2 8 
             - -
     Produces a data set with The following data:  
               X=0 Y=2 DX=0.0 DY=0.0 Symbol="" 
               X=1 Y=4 DX=0.5 DY=0.1 Symbol="1O" 
               X=2 Y=8 DX=0.5 DY=0.1 Symbol="1O" 

          TD:SET ORDER SYMBOL X Y 
             --- ----- ------ - -
          TD:READ POINTS 1O 1,1;  
             ---- ------ -- ----
          TD:2O 2.5,3.8 
             -- -------
          TD:(blank line to terminate) 
             ------ ---- -- ----------


     15.60.2  MESH 

     READ MESH [BINS] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [WITH] [ERRORS[=ON|OFF]] 
     --   --    --     --      -- --     --     --      -- --
          [FOR] {X|Y|Z}[=] N1,...,Nn [nn+1 ENDBINS] 
           --                              --
     [FOR] {X|Y|Z}[=]nn {X|Y|Z}[=] N1,...,Nn 
      --
     [FOR] {X|Y|Z}[=]nn {X|Y|Z}[=] N1,...,Nn 
      --
     ................  
     [[FOR] {X|Y|Z}[=]nn ENDBINS] 
       --                --
                    or instead of N1,...Nn 
               [[FROM=n] [TO=n] [BY|WIDTH|STEP=n] [N=n]] 
                 --       --     -- --    --       -


                                      PAGE 113


                                      COMMANDS
                                        READ


     You must specify the points as an array of X,Y,Z values.  If the attribute
     BINS is selected you specify the edge of the bins rather than  the  center
     of the bins and the optional END marks the end of the data.  


     15.60.2.1  APPEND  - This creates a new data set containing mesh data.  If
     not specified or APPEND=OFF, all existing data will be deleted.  


     15.60.2.2  ERRORS   - Storage  is  allocated for DX,DY,DZ.  You must enter
     the errors following the values for the dependent variable.  The errors on
     the independent variables are equal to the bin width.  

                                       example
     READ MESH WITH ERRORS
     FOR X=1,2,3
     FOR Y=5
         Z=5,.5,6,.2,7,.1
     FOR Y=8
         Z=9,.1,8,.1,7,.1


     15.60.2.3  Bin_spacing   - The  points/bins must be strictly monotonically
     spaced along the axes for good results.  

     If  a  histogram  has  unequal  size  bins,  the  last  bin edge should be
     specified with the option END.  If this is not done, the bins may  not  be
     properly  represented.   If bin edges are not specified, The bin edges are
     half way between the points.  Mesh  points  are  assumed  to  be  centered
     within each bin.  


     15.60.2.4  Point_example  - To Read in an array of 3 dimensional data 
          READ MESH 
                    Y  y1 y2 .... yn 
               X x1 Z z11 z21 ... zn1 
               X x2 Z z12 z22 ... zn2 
               ...............  
               X xm Z z1m z2m ... znm 

     or...  
          READ MESH 
               FOR      X= x1 x2 .... xn 
               FOR Y=y1 Z=z11 z21 ... zn1 
               FOR Y=y2 Z=z12 z22 ... zn2 
               ...............  
               FOR Y=ym Z=z1m z2m ... znm 


     15.60.2.5  Bin_example  - To Read in a 4 by 4 array of 3 dimensional data 
          READ MESH BINS 
               FOR   Y=0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 
               X=0.0 Z= 0 0 0 0 
               X=1.0 Z= 0 1 2 3 
               X=2.0 Z= 1 2 3 4 
               X=3.0 Z= 2 3 4 5 



                                      PAGE 114


                                      COMMANDS
                                        READ

     Is the same as:  
          READ MESH 
               FOR   Y=0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 
               X=0.5 Z= 0 0 0 0 
               X=1.5 Z= 0 1 2 3 
               X=2.5 Z= 1 2 3 4 
               X=3.5 Z= 2 3 4 5 
     or......  
          READ MESH BINS 
               FOR   Y=0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 ENDBINS 
               X=0.0 Z= 0 0 0 0 
               X=1.0 Z= 0 1 2 3 
               X=2.0 Z= 1 2 3 4 
               X=3.0 Z= 2 3 4 5 
               X=4.0 ENDBINS 


     15.61  REPEAT 

          TD:REPEAT "commands" [n] [FAST[=ON|OFF]] 
             ---                    --    -- --
     This  repeats  the  specified  commands  n  times.   The  commands must be
     specified as a string.  If n is omitted is assumed to be 9999.   ENDREPEAT
     terminates  all  current  repeats,  while  RETURN  terminates  the current
     repeat.  You may nest up to 5 repeat commands.  If FAST is specified  only
     the  repeat  command  is  journaled  otherwise  each  repeat  is journaled
     separately.  If you abort the repeat  with  CNTRL_C,  or  use  the  cursor
     inside  a  repeat  and  it  is  in FAST mode, the journal file will not be
     correct.  The lexical V_REPEAT[n] is the repeat number 
     NOTE:   The  command  SET  FILE  INPUT  should not be used inside a repeat
     block.  The lines from the new file will not be executed until  after  the
     repeat.  
     (Default:FAST=ON) 


     15.61.1  Examples 

          TD:SET WINDOW 1 of V_SETS 
             --- ------ - -- ------
          TD:REPEAT "HIST SET=V_WINDOW;SET WINDOW NEXT;" V_SETS 
             ------ ----- ---------------- ------ ------ ------
     produces histograms of all currently available data sets.  
          TD:DEFINE VALUE THETA=0 
             ------ ----- -------
          TD:DEFINE COMMAND INCR="DEV VAL THETA=<V_THETA +1>;" 
             ------ ------- --------- --- -------------- -----
          TD:DEFINE COMMAND LEND="IF THETA .GT.  180.1 ENDREPEAT" 
             ------ ------- -------- ----- ----  ----- ----------
          TD:REPEAT "V_THETA,<SIN(V_THETA)>;INCR;LEND" 
             ------ ----------------------------------
               or...  
          TD:REPEAT "V_THETA,<SIN(V_THETA)>;INCR" 181 
             ------ ----------------------------- ---
     Produces  a  SINE  function from 0 to 180 degrees in 1 degree steps.  This
     example breaks the command into small  separate  commands.   This  is  not
     really  necessary  since  the  total  length  of  a  command  may  be  256
     characters.  
          TD:REPEAT "<V_REPEAT-1>,<SIN<V_REPEAT-1>>" 181 
             ------ -------------------------------- ---

                                      Page 115


                                      COMMANDS
                                      Examples

     Also  generates  a  sine  function from 0 to 180 degrees, in a much faster
     fashion.  


     15.61.2  Warning 



                                        NOTE
                                        ----

          This command is very slow if FAST=OFF and JOURNALING is enabled. 




     15.62  RESTORE 

          RESTORE {DATA|FIT|HITOGRAMS} [options] 
          --       --   --  --
     Restores the selected data, fit, or histograms.  


     15.62.1  DATA 

     RESTORE   DATA   [FILE=file_name]   [APPEND[=ON|OFF]]   [CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]]
     --        --      --                 --      -- --       --       -- --
               [LOG[=ON|OFF]] [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] [SELECT="name"] 
                --   -- --     ---   --        --         ---
     Restores data from the specified file.  If no file is specified TDSAVE.TDB
     is assumed.  If you have unplotted data then the new data is automatically
     appended to the end of the current data as a new data set.  The LOG option
     types the number of points and sets of data restored.  When  restored  the
     data name is in lexical S_DATA_NAME.  


     15.62.1.1  APPEND   - Normall  the  current data is deleted.  If APPEND is
     selected, the new data is sets are appended to the current ones.  


     15.62.1.2  CONFIRM  - You are asked whether you wish to restore each set. 


     15.62.1.3  SELECT   - If  the data sets are named, you may select the data
     set by name.  


     15.62.1.4  SETS   - If the data file contains several sets of data you may
     select which one you wish to restore.  
          TD:RESTORE DATA SET=5 
             ------- ---- -----
     Restores the 5'th data set from the file.  
          TD:RESTORE DATA SET 5 TO 8 
             ------- ---- --- - -- -
     Restores the 5'th through the 8'th data set from the file.  





                                      Page 116


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FIT

     15.62.2  FIT 

     RESTORE FIT [FILE=file_name] 
     --      --   --
          [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
           --   -- --
     Restore  the  current  Topdrawer fit from a file.  If no file is specified
     TDFIT.TFB is assumed.  The SAVE command is used to save a fit.  


     15.62.3  HISTOGRAMS 

     RESTORE HISTOGRAMS 
     --      --
          [IDENT=[FROM] [n] [TO n]] 
                  --         --
          [FILE|SECTION=name] 
           --   --
          [{FETCH|READ|INPUT]}] 
            --    --   --
          [ADD|SUBTRACT|MULTIPLY|DIVIDE] 
           --  --       --       --
          [AREA|DIRECTORY[="directory"]] 
           ---  --
          [RELATIVE=[=ON|OFF]] [SHARE=[=ON|OFF]] 
           --         -- --     --      -- --
          [TReE[=ON|OFF]] 
           -------- --
          [IOFSET=n] 
           --
          [APPEND] 
           --
          [VERSION=n] 
           --
     Restores  histograms  from  files create by the HBOOK package.  FETCH,READ
     get histograms in the old HBOOK3 format.  Normally  you  do  not  need  to
     specify  FETCH  or  READ  as TOPDRAWER uses the file type to determine the
     operation needed to restore it.  


     15.62.3.1  Options  - 
          1.  AREA  selects  the directory of the disk file/global section.  If
              this is unspecified then  the  subdirectory  on  the  file/global
              section  is  assumed  to be the same as specified by the previous
              SET HIST AREA command.  
          2.  FETCH is for histograms stored in machine dependent HBOOK3 format
              by HSTORE.  Either all  histograms  or  1  histogram  ID  may  be
              fetched.  
          3.  FILE=file_name  selects  the file name or global section name for
              the shared histograms.  If FILE is not specified then it defaults
              to  HBOOK.BIN.   If  the  filename  is  NONE then no file name is
              selected.  
          4.  IDENT Selects the ID of the histogram to get.  If unspecified all
              histograms are fetched.  
          5.  INPUT gets histograms from a direct access file in HBOOK4 format.
              This is the default.  
              NOTE Topdrawer checks the file and will try to figure out whether
              ----


                                      Page 117


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAMS

              to FETCH, READ, or INPUT the file.  
          6.  READ is for the machine independent HBOOK3 format.  
          7.  RELATIVE  saves  histograms in a relative file for faster access.
              Otherwise a sequential file is used.  
              (Default:RELATIVE=OFF) 
          8.  SECTION  gets  histograms  from the specified global section.  If
              SECTION="" the current section is used.  SEE:TOPDRAWER LINK 
          9.  SHARE shares the file with other users.  SHARE=OFF prohibits file
              sharing.  
              (Default:SHARE=ON) 
         10.  VERSION  Selects  the  cycle (version number) of the histogram to
              get.  (INPUT only) 
         11.  IOFSET is added to the hist ID when fetched.  (INPUT only) 
         12.  APPEND Sets IOFSET=largest hist ID.  
         13.  ADD adds the new histograms to the current ones.  Normally all in
              the current directory are deleted.  ADD works only with INPUT, or
              with Global sections.  

              NOTE:  If you have a large number of histograms resident, you may
              not have enough memory to RESTORE ADD all at once.  You may force
              TOPDRAWER to add one at a time by:  
                   RESTORE HISTOGRAM ADD ID FROM 1 TO 99999 
         14.  SUBTRACT,MULTIPLY,DIVIDE  works  in  a  similar  fashion  to ADD.
              SUBTRACT subtracts the new histogram from the old  one...   These
              do not work for HBOOK3 histograms.  
         15.  TREE restores the entire directory tree.  (INPUT/SECTION only) If
              this is selected along with AREA it is possible to graft  a  file
              resident directory tree to a new root.  


     15.63  SAVE 

          SAVE   {DATA|FIT|HITOGRAMS}  [options]  This  command  saves  things.
          --      --   --  --
     SAVE DATA  saves  the  Topdrawer  data  in  a  binary  format   on   disk.
     SAVE HISTOGRAM saves foreign histograms on disk.  


     15.63.1  FIT 

     SAVE FIT [FILE=file_name] 
     --   --   --
          [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
           --   -- --
          [NAME="name of data"] 
           --
     Saves  the  current  Topdrawer  fit  in  a  file.  If no file is specified
     TDFIT.TFB is assumed.  The optional NAME  is  stored  in  the  file  as  a
     comment.  The RESTORE command is used to get saved fit.  


     15.63.2  DATA 

     SAVE DATA [FILE=file_name] 
     --   --    --
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --

                                      Page 118


                                      COMMANDS
                                        DATA

          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [SLICES [X|Y|Z] [FROM] v1 [[TO] v2]] 
           --              --         --
          [NAME="name of data"] 
           --
          [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] 
           --      -- --
     Saves  Topdrawer  data  in  a file.  If no file is specified TDSAVE.TDB is
     assumed.  By specifying the range of points, sets and so on you may select
     which  data  is  saved.   The  optional  NAME  is  stored in the file as a
     comment.  APPEND adds the data to the end of an existing file.  

     The RESTORE command is used to get saved data.  

     NOTE:   If  the  data  contains NDX,NDY, or NDZ coordinates, it can not be
     used with older verson of TD.  


     15.63.3  HISTOGRAMS 

     SAVE HISTOGRAMS 
     --   --
          [FILE=file_name] 
           --
          [IDENT=[FROM] [n] [TO n]] 
                  --         --
          [ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]] 
           --       -- --
          [HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]] 
           --         -- --
          [RELATIVE=[=ON|OFF]] [SHARE=[=ON|OFF]] [RECLENGTH[=n]] 
           --         -- --     --      -- --     ---
          [SELECT|NAME='hist_name'] 
           ---    --
          [{WRITE|STORE}] 
            --    --
          [UPDATE[=ON|OFF]] 
           --      -- --
          [AREA|DIRECTORY[="directory"]] 
           ---  --
          [TReE[=ON|OFF]] 
           -------- --
     Saves  the  foreign  histograms.   Some  options  apply  only  to specific
     histogram packages.  


     15.63.3.1  Options  - 
          1.  AREA|DIRECTORY  selects  the base directory of the disk file.  If
              this is unspecified then it  is  assumed.   to  be  the  same  as
              specified by the previous SET HIST AREA command.  
          2.  ENTRIES selects only histograms with entries.  
          3.  FILE=file_name  selects  the file name.  If FILE is not specified
              then it HBOOK.BIN.  If the filename is NONE then no file name  is
              selected.  



                                      Page 119


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAMS

          4.  HISTOGRAM|MESH selects only regular histograms or scatter plots. 
          5.  RECLENGTH specifies the record length for an RZ file.  
              (default:1024 Words) 
          6.  RELATIVE  saves  histograms in a relative file for faster access.
              Otherwise a  sequential  file  is  used.   This  works  only  for
              HBOOK V4.10 on a VaX.  
              (Default:RELATIVE=OFF) 
          7.  SELECT selects the name of the histograms to store.  
          8.  SHARE shares the file with other users.  SHARE=OFF prohibits file
              sharing.  This works only for HBOOK V4.10.  
              (Default:SHARE=ON) 
          9.  UPDATE=ON saves histograms in an existing file.  
              UPDATE=OFF saves histograms in a new file.  
         10.  TREE saves the entire directory tree.  (OUTPUT,PUT only) 
     (Default:UPDATE=OFF) 


     15.64  SET 

     Sets options for plots.  These options usually revert to the default  when
     a new plot is started.  


     15.64.1  Introduction 

     The  set  commands  are  used  to  set options.  Most set commands set the
     option for the duration of the  current  plot.   When  a  NEW  command  is
     issued,  the  options  revert  to  the  default.  You may make the current
     option the default by using the  option  PERMANENT.   If  no  options  are
     specified  for  the  set command, the options are set back to the original
     default value.  

     For  example  you wish to do a series of plots with the same limits on the
     X,Y scales.  Normally TOPDRAWER sets the limits automatically according to
     your data, so you use the command:  
          TD:SET LIMITS X FROM 0 TO 10 Y FROM 0.5 to 1.5 PERMANENT 
             --- ------ - ---- - -- -- - ---- --- -- --- ---------
     which  sets the limits permanently.  When you have done the plots you wish
     to revert to the original default:  
          TD:SET LIMITS 
             --- ------
     Now  the  limits  are reset to automatic limits for the current plot only.
     The next plot will have the PERMANENT limits.  To  have  automatic  limits
     for all subsequent plots you must:  
          TD:SET LIMITS;SET LIMITS PERMANENT 
             --- ---------- ------ ---------

     After  using  a  set  command you may "see" what you have done with a SHOW
     command.  For each set command there is a SHOW  command  which  shows  the
     current options.  For example you may see the limits you have modified by: 
          TD:SHOW LIMITS 
             ---- ------








                                      Page 120


                                      COMMANDS
                                      Options

     15.64.2  Options 

          1.  ARROW - Sets default arrow format 
          2.  AXES - Sets default axis 
          3.  BAR - Sets size of ends of error bars and a break in error bars 
          4.  BOX - Sets default box size 
          5.  BLINK - Sets the BLINK attribute.  
          6.  CARD - Maximum length of input lines 
          7.  CHARACTER - The character set used 
          8.  CIRCLE - Same as SET ELLIPSE 
          9.  CLEAR - Selects deferred or immediate screen clearing 
         10.  COLOR - Sets default color or pen number 
         11.  Ctrl_Z - Enables or disables the Ctrl_Z key.  
         12.  CYCLE - The color,width, texture to cycle through.  
         13.  DATE - Set base date for date\time.  
         14.  DEVICE - Chooses I/O device 
         15.  DIAMOND - Sets default diamond size 
         16.  DIGITS - Sets number of digits for show command.  
         17.  ELLIPSE - Sets default ellipse size 
         18.  ERRORS - Changes the output of errors 
         19.  FILE - Selects files for input, output, and journaling.  
         20.  FILL - Selects the fill style.  
         21.  FLUSH - Sets automatic flush mode.  
         22.  FONT - Chooses UGSYS character set 
         23.  FORMAT - Format for input lines (256A1) 
         24.  GRID - Specifies grid marks overlay plot 
         25.  INTENSITY - Sets default intensity (line width) 
         26.  LABELS - Sets defaults for numeric labels on axes 
         27.  LIMITS - Sets X,Y,Z limits for plot (range of data to plot) 
         28.  MODE - Set misc.  functions 
         29.  MONITOR - Set type of monitor plots 
         30.  ORDER - Determines interpretation of input data 
         31.  OUTLINE - Controls outline around plot 
         32.  PATTERN - Sets the pattern for PATTERNED lines 
         33.  PAUSE - Controls pause at end of plot 
         34.  PEN - Selects the default pen or color to use in plotting.  
         35.  POLAR - Selects polar coordinates.  
         36.  PROMPT - Sets the prompt string.  
         37.  REVISION - Sets the revision level (what features TD has) 
         38.  SECONDARY - Controls the attributes of secondary contour lines.  
         39.  SEGMENTS - Controls breaking the plot into segments 
         40.  SHADOW - Sets 3-d plots to shadow plot to make the point location
              more obvious.  
         41.  SHIELD - Sets an area to be shielded so that no more plotting is
              done there.  
         42.  SCALE - Controls scale (log/linear...), and the number of default
              labels and ticks.  
         43.  SIZE - Defines size of screen or paper 
         44.  STATISTICS - Sets the range of data to use in subsequent
              lexicals.  
         45.  STORAGE - Defines what is kept in storage 
         46.  SYMBOL - Sets default symbol to plot 
         47.  TEXTURE - Sets default line style (DOTTED,SOLID...) 
         48.  THREE - Sets parameters for 3-dimensional plots 
         49.  TICKS - Controls tick marks on axes 
         50.  TITLE - Sets size of title 
         51.  UNITS - Sets the units of the TEXT coordinates, and character
              sizes.  


                                      Page 121


                                      COMMANDS
                                      Options

         52.  WIDTH - Sets the line width or intensity 
         53.  WINDOW - Defines the plotting area (labels may be outside area) 


     15.64.3  AREA 

          See:Command SET WINDOW 


     15.64.4  ARROW 

     SET ARROW [SIZE=n] [FLARE|FLAIR=n] [PERMANENT] 
     --  ---    --       --    --        --
          1.  SIZE=n  -  length  of arrow head in tenths of an inch.  The units
              may be modified by SET UNITS CHARACTER.  
              (Default:2) 
          2.  FLARE=n  -  is  ratio of the base to the height of the arrow head
              (fatness).  
              (Default:0.2) 
          3.  PERMANENT - Makes the current setting the new default.  

     If no options are specified all parameters are set to the default.  


     15.64.5  AXES 

     Controls  the  presence or absence of each axes and sets the attributes of
     the axis.  
     SET AXES|AXIS [INHIBIT|ENABLE] [ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|X|Y|Z] [ON|OFF] 
     --  --   --    --      --       --  --  --     --    --   - - -   -- --
          [FRONT[=[ON|OFF]] 
           --      -- --
          [BOTH[=[ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [THREE[=[ON|OFF]] 
           --      -- --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           ----    --    --  --    --   --     --      --
          [NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           ----      --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
          [PERMANENT] 
           --

     Normally  AXES  are drawn at the first HIST, JOIN, BARGRAPH, PLOT, or PLOT
     AXES command unless  inhibited  or  turned  off.   To  control  individual
     elements of the axes use:  
     SET TICKS, SET LABELS, SET OUTLINE, SET SCALES 


     15.64.5.1  Options  - 
          1.  INHIBIT|ENABLE   -   inhibits   or  enables  the  automatic  axes
              generation for the current plot or window.  You  may  still  draw
              the outline and axes with the PLOT OUTLINE, PLOT AXES commands.  
              (Default:ENABLE) 
          2.  ALL - enables axes for top, bottom, right and left.  



                                      Page 122


                                      COMMANDS
                                        AXES

          3.  TOP - enables an axis for the TOP of plot 
          4.  BOTTOM - selects the axis for the bottom of the plot.  
          5.  RIGHT - selects the axis for the right hand side 
          6.  LEFT - selects the axis for the left hand side.  
          7.  X,Y,Z - selects the axis to plot.  For 2 dimensional plot X turns
              on both top and bottom, Y turns on both right and left.  
          8.  ON - allows drawing all three 
          9.  OFF  -  prevents drawing outline, label and ticks.  If an axis is
              off then no space is allocated for either ticks or labels.  
         10.  THREE  - If on it then axes are plotted by default when 3-d plots
              are made.  
              (Default:OFF) 
         11.  FRONT  -  If on then 3-d axes are plotted in the front, for PHI>0
              and in the back for PHI<0.  This prevents them  from  interfering
              with the plot.  
              (Default:OFF) 
         12.  BOTH  -  If  on  then  3-d axes are plotted both in the front and
              back.  
              (Default:OFF) 
         13.  INTENSITY  -  Sets  line  intensity  or  width (0-5).  0 gets the
              intensity from the SET INTENSITY command.  
         14.  WHITE...  - Sets the line color.  
         15.  SOLID...  - Sets the line texture.  
              (Default:SOLID) See:Command SET TEXTURE.  
         16.  PERMANENT  -  Makes  the  current settings permanent from plot to
              plot.  
     This  acts  on  the  current plot only a new SET AXES is required for each
     plot or the options need to  be  made  permanent.   The  command  must  be
     followed by either a HIST, JOIN, BARGRAPH or PLOT command to be effective. 
     (Default:ALL ON) 


     15.64.5.2  Example  - 

          TD:SET AXES ALL ON TOP OFF RIGHT OFF 
             --- ---- --- -- --- --- ----- ---
     This produces axes only on the left and bottom.  

          TD:SET AXES X ON Y ON Z OFF 
             --- ---- - -- - -- - ---
     This produces X,Y axes, but no Z axes on a 3 dimensional plot.  

          TD:SET AXES FRONT THREE PERMANENT 
             --- ---- ----- ----- ---------
     This automatically produces X,Y,Z axes for a 3 dimensional plot.  


     15.64.6  BAR 

     This sets options for error bars.  
     SET BAR [ALL|X|Y|Z] [BREAK=[n]] [SIZE=[n]] [SUPPRESS=[ON|OFF]] [PERMANENT] 
     --  --   --  - - -   --          --         --        -- --     --








                                      Page 123


                                      COMMANDS
                                        BAR

     15.64.6.1  ALL-X-Y-Z  - ALL,X,Y,Z select the error bar to change.  You may
     set the bar size and break independently for X,Y, or Z errors.  
     (Default:ALL) 

     If the SIZE or BREAK are not specified they revert to the default value.  


     15.64.6.2  SIZE   - SIZE=n in inches sets the half width of the bar at the
     end of error bars.  If n is negative n is the fraction of the symbol  size
     on  the  data point.  If unspecified it is automatically set to 1/2 of the
     symbol size.  

     In  3-D  plots  the  bar always is perpendicular to the error and to the Z
     axis.  This should make the directions fairly easy to see.  
     (Default:0.1) 


     15.64.6.3  BREAK   - BREAK=n  in  inches  sets  the size of a break in the
     error bars at the symbol.  When set to a non  zero  value  the  error  bar
     "breaks" at the symbol.  Essentially it is not drawn for a distance n from
     the center of the symbol.  By setting this the  error  bar  is  not  drawn
     through the symbol.  It is drawn only on either side of the symbol.  

     If  n is negative n is the fraction of the symbol size for the data point.
     If n is not specified it is assumed to be -1.  This is ignored if there is
     no symbol or SYMBOL=NONE.  
     (Default:0) 


     15.64.6.4  SUPPRESS   - SUPPRESS  does not the bar at the end of the error
     bars when they are smaller than either the symbol size, or the BREAK size.
     This is ignored if there is no symbol or SYMBOL=NONE.  
     (Default:OFF) 


     15.64.6.5  PERMANENT   - PERMANENT  -  Makes  the  current setting the new
     default.  


     15.64.6.6  Examples  - 
                                       example
          TD:SET BAR SIZE=0.2 BREAK=-1.1 SUPPRESS 
     Sets  all  bars to 0.2 inches and break the error bar just outside the the
     symbol by 10%.  In addition any error bars  smaller  than  1.1  times  the
     symbol size are suppressed.  
          TD:SET BAR Z SIZE=0.0 X SIZE=0.1 
     Sets  the  bar  to 0.0 inches for Z errors and to 0.1 for X errors.  The Y
     error remains at the current setting.  


     15.64.7  BOX 

     This sets the default size for boxes.  
     SET BOX [SIZE=dx[,dy]] [PERMANENT] 
     --  --   --             --

     PERMANENT - Makes the current setting the new default.  
     (Default:1.0) 


                                      Page 124


                                      COMMANDS
                                        BOX


     If  dx  is  omitted  it is set to the default.  If dy is omitted it is the
     same as dx.  


     15.64.8  BLINK 

     SET BLINK [ON|OFF] 
     --  --     -- --
     Text  or  data  plotted  while this is on will blink.  This will only work
     with certain devices.   The  blink  attrubute  is  reset  to  off  at  the
     beginning of each new plot.  If ON or OFF are omitted BLINK is set ON.  
     (Default:OFF) 


     15.64.9  CARD 

     This sets the number of columns per input line for non interactive input. 
     SET CARD|INPUT [LENGTH]=[length] 
     --  --   ---    --

     All  data past the length is ignored The length must be in the range 20 to
     256.  See also SET FORMAT.  This parameter remains the  same  when  a  new
     plot is started.  
     (Default:256) 

     You  should  be  careful when using this command.  If you extend the input
     line before extending the format, TOPDRAWER  will  expect  multiple  input
     lines per command.  

     If  length  is  omitted it is reset to the default value.  For interactive
     input on the VAX the length is 256 and it is independent of the  set  card
     command.  


     15.64.10  CHARACTER 

     SET CHARACTER {TERMINATOR|SEPARATOR|SPECIAL|ALPHA|ILLEGAL|COMMENT |
     --  --         --         --        --      --    --      --
               ENDCOMMENT} "characters" 
               -----
     This  redefines the input character set.  You may not redefine the letters
     "A" to "Z", the numbers "0" to "9", the period "." or the minus  and  plus
     signs "-+".  The current definitions are:  
          1.  SEPARATORS = ",/=" 
          2.  TERMINATOR = ";" 
          3.  SPECIAL = "@!#$%^&*~`{}|\[]" 
          4.  COMMENT = "(" 
          5.  ENDCOMMENT = "(" 
          6.  ALPHA = "_" 
          7.  ILLEGAL = all non printable characters.  
     Special  characters  may  be imbedded inside an option, but may not be the
     first character in an option.  







                                      Page 125


                                      COMMANDS
                                       CIRCLE

     15.64.11  CIRCLE 

     This sets the default size for circles.  
     SET CIRCLE [SIZE=dx[,dy]] [PERMANENT] 
     --  --      --             --

     This is same as SET ELLIPSE 

     PERMANENT - Makes the current setting the new default.  
     (Default:1.0) 

     If dx is omitted it is set to the default.  If dy is omitted it is the
     same as dx.  


     15.64.12  CLEAR 

     SET {CLEAR|ERASE} {DEFERRED|IMMEDIATE} 
     --   --    ---     --       --

          1.  DEFERRED  -  After  a CLEAR or NEW PLOT command the screen is not
              cleared until data is plotted.  In other words the  current  plot
              remains on the screen until the new plot appears.  
          2.  IMMEDIATE  -  The  screen is cleared immediately after a CLEAR or
              NEW PLOT command.  


     15.64.13  COLOR 

     SET COLOR [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
     --  --     --    --  --    --   --     --      --
          [PERMANENT] 
           --

     (Default:WHITE)  This  sets  the  default  color of the display or the pen
     number.  This is effective only for the current plot, or until another SET
     COLOR  or SET PEN command.  If PERMANENT is specified the current color is
     the permanent default.  See:Command SET PEN 

     If no options are specified it is set to the WHITE.  


     15.64.14  COMMAND 

     SET COMMAND [MAXSUBSTITUTION=n] 
     --  ---      ----
     This  sets the maximum number of command substitutions allowed on a single
     line.  
     (Default:MAXSUBSTITUTIONS=1000) 


     15.64.15  Ctrl_Z 

          SE Ctrl_Z [ON|OFF] 
          -- ------  -- --

     Enables or disables the Ctrl_Z key as a means of stopping TOPDRAWER.  
     (Default:ON) 


                                      Page 126


                                      COMMANDS
                                       CYCLE

     15.64.16  CYCLE 

     SET CYCLE [NUMBER=n] [ENTRY[=n]] [WIDTH|INTENSITY=n] [NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|
     --  --     --         --          ---   --            ---     --    --
               GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] [NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|
               --    --   --     --      --     ----      --    --   --
               DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] [SYMBOL=sym] [PERMANENT] 
               ---     ----    --        --    --      --           --
     This  selects  a  cycle  of attributes to be used when the CYCLE option is
     used with HISTOGRAM, JOIN, CONTOUR, or PLOT.  


     15.64.16.1  Options  - 
          1.  NUMBER selects the number of entries up to a maximum of 20 
              (Default:5) 
          2.  ENTRY  selects  the  cycle  entry to change.  If n is omitted the
              next entry is selected.   If  no  entry  is  specified  then  all
              entries  are  set.   ENTRY  must  follow  the options you wish to
              change.  
          3.  PERMANENT saves the current settings as the default.  
          4.  SYMBOL selects the symbol to use.  
     Once  you  select a color, texture, symbol, or width they remain in effect
     until changed, or the next NEW command.  If no options are  selected,  the
     entries all revert back to the default values.  


     15.64.16.2  Examples  - 
          TD:SET CYCLE WIDTH=3 ENTRY=3 RED ENTRY BLUE ENTRY GREEN 
     Will  set  entries 3 to 5 to colors RED, BLUE, GREEN and entry 3 is set to
     WIDTH=3.  All other attributes are unchanged.  
          TD:SET CYCLE SOLID WHITE 
     Will set all entries to SOLID WHITE.  


     15.64.16.3  Defaults  - 
                                   The default is:
     NUMBER=5 
          1.  BLUE DOTS SYMBOL=0o 
          2.  CYAN DOT DASH SYMBOL=1o 
          3.  GREEN DASH SYMBOL=2o 
          4.  YELLOW DAASH SYMBOL=3o 
          5.  RED SOLID SYMBOL=4o 
          6.  MAGNETA SOLID SYMBOL=5o 
          7.  WHITE SOLID SYMBOL=6o 
          8.  WHITE SOLID SYMBOL=7o 
          9.  WHITE SOLID SYMBOL=8o 
         10.  WHITE SOLID SYMBOL=9o 
     All others are WHITE SOLID SYMBOL=9o 


     15.64.17  DATE 

     SET DATE [YYYY\MM\DD] [MONTH=n] [YEAR=n] [DAY=n] [JANUARY,...,DECEMBER] 
     --  --                 --        --       --      --          --
     This  sets  the  base  date  for  date\time values.  Date\time is normally
     expressed in hours.  However since it  is  only  single  precision  it  is
     accurate  to  only  7  digits or about 1 day on the date 1900.  If greater
     accuracy is needed you may set the base date to a value within  the  range


                                      Page 127


                                      COMMANDS
                                        DATE

     of  time  you need to express.  If you do not specify any options the base
     date is reset to the original default.  
     (Default:0\1\1) 

     Options  YEAR,MONTH,  or  DAY  allow you to reset just the selected value.
     Instead of MONTH=3 you may also specify MARCH.   All  3  may  be  modified
                                             ---
     using the standard YEAR\MONTH\DAY notation.  


     15.64.18  DEVICE 

     This  selects the unified graphics device and sets options back to default
     values.  This is equivalent to starting a new plot on another device.  
     SET DEVICE [name] ["option_string"] 
     --  --
          [SIDEWAYS|ROTATED|ORIENTATION=n] 
           --       --      --
          [LANDSCAPE|PORTRAIT] 
           --        ---
          [COlOR[=ON|OFF] 
           --------- --
          [FILE|OUTPUT|DDNAME=filename|CHANNEL=dev:] 
           ---  --     --              --
          [INTERACTIVE|SEQUENTIAL|SLAVE] 
           ------      --         --
          [ADD|UNIT=n] 
           --- --
          [IDENT=aaaa] [NUMBER=nnnn] [PERMANENT] [WIDTH=n] [HEIGHT=n] [REVERSE] 
           --           --            --          --        --         --
     This selects the device name.  It is modified by  the  option_string.   If
     omitted the default is used.  See:PERMANENT.  

     (Interactive Default:TEK) 

     (Batch Default:PS) 


     15.64.18.1  Names  - 
          1.  TEST - null device 
          2.  CALCOMP - Calcomp plotters 
          3.  PRINTRONIX - Printronix printer plotter 
          4.  QMS-1200 - QMS Lasergrafix 1200 laser printer 
          5.  EXCL - Talaris 1590 printer 
          6.  REGIS  - Dec VT-24x, Dec GIGI, and other devices supporting REGIS
              protocol.  
          7.  SIXEL  -  Dec VT-240, LN-03, LA-50, LA-100 , Talaris 1590 and any
              other device using SIXEL graphics.  
          8.  TEKTRONIX  -  Tektronix  4010/4014  terminals or emulators.  This
              includes:  Dec  VT-240,  Terminals  with  retrographics,  Selanar
              100XL,  Visual  102,  CIT-467, Talaris 1590, Falco, and Macintosh
              with VERSATERM.  
          9.  VERSATEK - Versatek printer/plotter 
         10.  TEKEMUL - Tektronix 4010/4014 emulators, using the SLAC driver.  
         11.  TEK4027 - Tektronix 4027 color terminal 
         12.  GKS - Interface To DEC GKS package 
         13.  GRINNELL - Grinnell graphics device 



                                      Page 128


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

         14.  IMAGEN - Imagen laser printer 
         15.  POSTSCRIPT - Postscript printer 
         16.  GPOSTSCRIPT - Postscript driver using DEC-GKS 
         17.  EPS - Encapsulate postscript driver using DEC-GKS 
         18.  HPGL - Hewlett packard plotters 
         19.  XWINDOW - Vax station using DECwindows.  
     Note:  Some of these device drivers may not be available.  You will get an
     error message if they do not exist.  


     15.64.18.2  COLOR   - Selects  the  DEC  GKS  color driver rather than the
     Monochrome driver.  


     15.64.18.3  LANDSCAPE-PORTRAIT  - 
     LANDSCAPE or PORTRAIT select the orientation of the plot on paper, for GKS
     printer  drivers.   This  applies  to  Gpostscript,  EPS,  QMS1200,  EXCL,
     Versatek,  IMAGEN  and  all DEC-GKS drivers that support page orientation.
     This applies only to the  selected  driver,  and  not  to  any  additional
     drivers selected, unlike the SIDEWAYS and ORIENTATION commands.  

     It does not apply to workstation windows or TEKtronix graphics.  To rotate
     them use the SIDEWAYS or ORIENTATION option.  

     It  will  be  applied  in  addition  to the ORIENTATION option.  The final
     rotation will be the sum of the 2 rotations applied.  

     (Default:LANDSCAPE) 


     15.64.18.4  TEST   - This  is  a null device.  You must specify the device
     driver in the "option_string".  


     15.64.18.5  CALCOMP  - 
     1.  SMALL CALCOMP - 10inch Calcomp 
     2.  LARGE CALCOMP 


     15.64.18.6  EXCL   - This  if  for  laser  printers using Talaris extended
     control language (EXCL).  This includes  the  Talaris  1590  printstation.
     This  device  is  capable of intensity (line width) variation, and erasing
     data.  The line width is the intensity/150 inches.   It  produces  a  plot
     11.0 by 8.5 inches in size with 0.25 inch margins.  

     The  advantage of this driver over TEK4010 on the Talaris is the number of
     line  widths,  and  the  correct  reproduction  of  scatter  plots.    The
     disadvantage  is  that  the  file size is larger, and you can not send the
     file to a TEK-4010 emulator, to see the contents.  
                                       Warning
     Previously  it  was  stated  that  this  will  work  on  LN-03+.  Due to a
     misunderstanding this is not true.   For  LN-03  printers  use  SIXELS  or
     TEK-4010 for LN-03+.  







                                      Page 129


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

     15.64.18.6.1  Options  - The following options may be specified inside the
     string:  
          1.  DM=n - The default margin in cm.  (Default:0.25in.) 
          2.  TM=n - The top margin in cm.  (Default:DM) 
          3.  LM=n - The left margin in cm.  (Default:DM) 
          4.  BM=n - The bottom margin in cm.  (Default:DM) 
          5.  RM=n  -  The right margin in cm.  (Default:DM) If the margins are
              set to 0, then no margin, or  orientation  commands  are  in  the
              output file.  
          6.  PENLIST=n1n2n3n4n5 - maps penwidths to number of pixels.  Setting
              is number from 01 to 99.  1 pixel=0.0033 in.  If the penwidth  is
              00 then the default is assumed.  (Default:0204060810) 
          7.  WIDTH=size - The width of the paper in cm.  (Default:8.5in.) 
          8.  LENGTH=size - The length of the paper in cm.  (Default:11.0in.) 
          9.  inches  -  The  WIDTH/LENGTH/margins  must be expressed in inches
              rather than cm.  
         10.  ROTAXIS - Rotates the axis from landscape to portrait.  


     15.64.18.6.2  Examples  - 
          TD:SET DEVICE EXCL 
             --- ------ ----
     Selects the EXCL driver.  
          TD:SET DEVICE EXCL "DM=1,LM=1.5,inches,ROTAXIS" 
             --- ------ ---- ----------------------------
     Selects  the  EXCL  driver,  and  sets 1 inch margins on the left,top, and
     bottom, with 1.5in.  margins on the left.  The plot will  be  produced  on
     8.5x11 paper with portrait orientation.  
          TD:SET DEVICE EXCL "DM=.375,PENLIST=0202020404" 
             --- ------ ---- ----------------------------
     Produces plots approximately the same as 
          TD:SET DEVICE TEK "TAL1590" SEQUENTIAL 
             --- ------ --- --------- ----------


     15.64.18.7  GKS  - This is an interface to the DEC GKS package.  
     It allows access to a whole class of devices available through DEC GKS.  


     15.64.18.7.1  Options  - 
                                       Options
          1.  WSTYPE=nnn  -  Selects  the  DEC  GKS  workstation  If you do not
              specify a WSTYPE then the logical GKS$WSTYPE is  used  to  define
              the work station.  Normally you specify the workstation name.  
          2.  ERRLUN  -  Selects  an  output  logical  unit  for  GKS  messages
              (Default:6) 
          3.  OUTLUN  -  Selects  an  output  logical  unit for GKS files.  You
              normally do not specify this.  
          4.  WIDTH=n.n - Window width in cm (Default:25.4 (10 inches)) 
          5.  HEIGHT=n.n - Window height in cm (Default:20.32 (8 inches)) 
          6.  XSCREEN=n.n  -  X  Location  of lower left corner of window in cm
              (Default:0) 
          7.  YSCREEN=n.n  -  Y  Location  of lower left corner of window in cm
              (Default:0) 
          8.  XSIZE - Actual physical X size of screen if known (Default:  size
              reported by GKS or 10 inches for metafile).  Normally you do  not
              need to set this.  



                                      Page 130


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

          9.  YSIZE - Actual physical Y size of screen if known (Default:  size
              reported by GKS or 8 inches for metafile).  If XSIZE  is  picked,
              but  Y  is not then the YSIZE is assumed to scale as the selected
              XSIZE 
         10.  REVERSE - Sets background to black with white foreground.  
         11.  color=rrggbb  - Specifies the mixture of red,green,blue to mix to
              obtain the desired color.  Each value may vary from 0 to 99.  The
              default colors are:  
              A.  BLACK=008900 
              B.  WHITE=999999 
              C.  RED=992020 
              D.  GREEN=009900 
              E.  BLUE=202099 
              F.  YELLOW=998000 
              G.  MAGENTA=992099 
              H.  CYAN=008000 
         12.  DDNAME=filename - Specifies the output file name.  
         13.  PENLIST=n1n2n3n4n5  -  maps  penwidths to .01 cm.  from 01 to 99.
              (Default:PENLIST=0103050709) 01 is the minimum pen width.  
     If  both  OUTLUN and DDNAME are unspecified then logical GKS$CONID is used
     to specify the output device.  


     15.64.18.7.2  Devices  - In addition a whole set of devices are defined to
     interface through DEC GKS.  You may specify these instead of GKS.   If  it
     is  both sequential an interactive you may specify SEQUENTIAL.  Sequential
     output is sent to the default file if you have not specified a  file  name
     (FILE=xxxx).  These are:  
          1.  METAFILE WSTYPE=2 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.AGM 
          2.  CGM WSTYPE=7 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.CGM 
          3.  VT125 WSTYPE=11 (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE) File=UGDEVICE.SIX 
          4.  VT125BW WSTYPE=12 (INTERACTIVE) 
          5.  VT240 WSTYPE=13 - VT-240 color (INTERACTIVE) 
          6.  VT240BW WSTYPE=14 - VT-240 in Black and white mode (INTERACTIVE) 
          7.  LCP01 WSTYPE=15 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.SIX 
          8.  VT330 WSTYPE=16 (INTERACTIVE) 
          9.  VT340 WSTYPE=17 (INTERACTIVE) 
         10.  VSXXX   WSTYPE=41   -   A  variety  of  VAX  stations  using  UIS
              (INTERACTIVE) 
         11.  LVP16A WSTYPE=51 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.SIX 
         12.  LVP16B WSTYPE=52 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.SIX 
         13.  HP7550 WSTYPE=53 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.HP 
         14.  HP7580 WSTYPE=54 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.HP 
         15.  HP7585 WSTYPE=56 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.HP 
         16.  GPOSTSCRIPT WSTYPE=61 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.PS 
         17.  EPS WSTYPE=65 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.EPS 
         18.  TEK4107 WSTYPE=83 (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE) File=UGDEVICE.TEK 
         19.  TEK4207 WSTYPE=83 (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE) File=UGDEVICE.TEK 
         20.  TEK4128 WSTYPE=85 (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE) File=UGDEVICE.TEK 
         21.  TEK4129 WSTYPE=85 (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE) File=UGDEVICE.TEK 
         22.  LJ250 (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.LJ 
         23.  LJ250_180DPI (SEQUENTIAL) File=UGDEVICE.LJ 
         24.  XWINDOW  WSTYPE=211  - X or (DEC) window (SEQUENTIAL,INTERACTIVE)
              This uses the logical DECW$DISPLAY to specify the connection.  To
              do this you must:  
                   $ DEFINE DECW$DISPLAY nodename::0.0 
     For example you may select interactive XWINDOWS (DEC windows) by:  
          TD:SET  DEVICE  XWINDOW  To  select  VT125  output  to  a  file named


                                      Page 131


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

     "VT125.PLOT" 
          TD:SET DEVICE VT125 SEQUENTIAL FILE=VT125.PLOT 


     15.64.18.7.3  Examples  - 
          TD:SET DEVICE TEK4014 
     For a Tektronix 4014.  
          TD:SET DEVICE SEQUENTIAL TEK4010 DDNAME=TEK4014.PLOT 
     For a Tektronix 4014 plot sent to a file.  
          TD:SET DEVICE TEK4010 DDNAME=TKA0:  
     For a Tektronix 4014 plot sent to a TEK-4014 window on a VAXstation.  
          TD:SET DEVICE VSX "RED=990000,GREEN=009900,BLUE=009900' 
     For a plot on a VAXstation with "pure" colors.  
          TD:SET DEVICE HP7585 
     For a Hewlett Packard 7578 plotter 


     15.64.18.7.4  Assignments  - If you wish to default to GKS then you should 
          DEFINE PLOT_TERM "UGGKSWM,[options]" 


     15.64.18.8  GRINNELL   - This  is  a  slave  raster  graphics device only.
     Options are:  
          1.  CHANNEL=<value> - Identification of I/O controller (Default:GRA0) 
          2.  UNITS=<value>  - Selects the monitors to use.  This is sum of the
              display units (1,2,4...).  (Default:1) 
          3.  BWTYPE=<value>   -   Selects   black   and  white  monitor  type.
              (Default:1) 
                        1 = 1 memory plane no look-up 
                        2 = 2 memory planes no look-up 
                        3 = 2 memory planew with look-up 
          4.  COLTYPE=<value> - Selects the type of color monitor.  
                        1 = 4 memory planes (7 colors 2 levels) 
                        2 = 4 memory planes (7 colors + blink mode) 
                        3 = 3 memory planes (color, intensity, blink) 
                        4 = Same as 2 but with look up table.  
          5.  XMAX=<value> Maximum raster value (Default:511) 
          6.  YMAX=<value> Maximum raster value (Default:511) 
          7.  CSIZ=<value> Character spacing.  (Default:7) 
          8.  EXTCHR - Indicates the controller produces extended char.  set.  
          9.  REPCHR - Character data replaces existing data 
         10.  XSIZ=<value> - Size of monitor in cm (Default:25.4) 
         11.  YSIZ=<value> - Size of monitor in cm (Default:25.4) 



     15.64.18.9  HPGL   - This  is  for a generic Hewlett Packard plotter.  The
     plotter pauses in between each plot to wait for a new sheet of paper.  The
     colors you select are mapped to pen numbers as:  
          1.  WHITE 
          2.  Red 
          3.  Green 
          4.  Blue 
          5.  Yellow 
          6.  Magenta 
          7.  Cyan 
     Options are:  



                                      Page 132


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

          1.  WIDTH=n.n - Paper width in cm (Default:26.0) 
          2.  HEIGHT=n.n - Paper height in cm (Default:20.0) 
          3.  XSCREEN=n.n - X Offset of plot in cm (Default:0.0) 
          4.  YSCREEN=n.n - Y Offset of plot in cm (Default:0.0) 
          5.  UNITS=nn.n - Number of pixels/cm (Default:400) 
          6.  MAXCOLOR=n  -  Maximum number of pens (Default:7) This may be set
              within the range of 1 to 7.  All pens requested larger than  this
              value will revert to to the maximum.  
          7.  PENLIST=n1n2n3n4n5  -  maps  penwidths to .01 cm.  from 01 to 99.
              (Default:PENLIST=0103050709) 01 is the minimum pen width.  
          8.  GENIL simulate intensity levels by doing multiple passes with the
              pen.  If not specified then the PENLIST is ignored.  
          9.  PENWIDTH=n.n - The width of the pen points in cm (Default:0.03) 
     If you wish to default to HP plotter output:  
          $ DEFINE PLOT_TERM "UGHPGLD[,options]" 

     These  options may work differently depending on the plotter.  Most of the
     big plotters have the origin at the center of tha page,  while  the  small
     ones   use   an   origin   at   a   corner.   By  suitably  adjusting  the
     WIDTH,HEIGHT,XSCREEN,YSCREEN any coordinate system or  page  size  may  be
     accomadated.  MAXCOLOR=1 is useful when you wish to reduce a color plot to
     a single color.  

                                       example
          TD:SET DEVICE HPGL "PENLIST=0309152430" 
     Sets up to draw with much wider lines.  


     15.64.18.10  IMAGEN   - This  is  for  an  IMAGEN  laser printer using the
     IMPRESS language.  It  has  a  resolution  of  1/3150  in  the  horizontal
     direction.  Options are:  
          1.  ROTAXIS 
          2.  BIGMAR 
          3.  GENIL 
          4.  EXPA=LETTER or LEGAL 
     The default is to send output to UGS$IMGN300:  


     15.64.18.11  POSTSCRIPT   - This  is for output on a postscript printer It
     has a resolution of 1/3387 in the horizontal direction.  The  output  file
     type is PS .  


     15.64.18.12  PRINTRONIX  - Printronix model MVP printer/plotter.  


     15.64.18.13  QMS-1200   - This  is  the QMS Lasergrafix 1200 laser printer
     The options are:  
          1.  FLUNIT=n - Logical unit number (Default:29) 
          2.  TRAY=nnnn   -  4  character  code  to  specify  the  tray/stacker
              0000=upper tray, 0001=lower tray, XXXX=keep old setting.  
          3.  PENLIST=n1n2n3n4n5  -  maps penwidths to setting.  Setting is odd
              number from 03 to 99.  (Default:0303050709) 
          4.  LANDSCAPE,PORTRAIT - Selects orientation 
          5.  LM,RM,BM,TM=n - Selects margins in inches (Default:0.9) 
          6.  NR,NC=n - Selects number of rows/colums of subplots on page.  For
              example NR=2,NC=3 will plot 6 pictures on 1 page.  
              (Default:NR=1,NC=1) 


                                      Page 133


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

     15.64.18.14  REGIS   - This  is for interactive GIGI, VT-240, VT-241 color
     monitor,  or  suitable  emulator  such  as  the  VT-300  emulation  on   a
     VAXstation.   (note:VT-241 can only reproduce the colors RED,GREEN,BLUE or
     WHITE,RED,GREEN).  The TEKTRONIX driver is slightly  faster  on  a  VT-240
     than  the  REGIS  driver.  The physical screen size is set to 10.56 by 6.6
     inches or 26.85 by 16.76 cm.  These devices support Hardware structure and
     hardware characters in any size.  The GIGI also supports BLINK mode.  



     15.64.18.14.1  Options  - 
          1.  COLOR=xxxxxxxx     This     specifies     the    color    mapping
              (default:WRGBYMCD) You may modify this to suit your tastes.  This
              corresponds  to  the  colors  White,  Red,  Green,  Blue, Yellow,
              Magenta,  Cyan,  Dark(black).   The  eighth  color  "D"  is   the
              background color.  
          2.  HARDST  or SOFTST to select hardware, or software line structure.
              HARDST is faster, but SOFTST will give identical results  on  all
              devices.  

                                       Example
          TD:SET DEVICE REGIS 
             --- ------ -----
     Sets up to plot on a normal REGIS device 
          TD:SET DEVICE REGIS "HARDST,COLOR=WWWWWWWD" 
             --- ------ ----- -----------------------
     Sets up to plot quickly in black and white only.  
          TD:SET DEVICE REGIS "COLOR=WRGBRGBD" 
             --- ------ ----- ----------------
     Plots  only  in  white,red,green, and blue.  Yellow, magenta, and cyan are
     mapped to red, green, and blue respectively.  


     15.64.18.14.2  Answerback    - You   should   set  the  answerback  to  be
     "DECGIGI,COLOR=WRGWWWWD,<CR>" for a VT241 terminal.  


     15.64.18.14.3  Windows   - Normally  when you do plots in REGIS the cursor
     is left at the top of the screen.  If your terminal  is  capable  of  more
     than  24  lines,  you  may  wish  to freeze the top 24 lines, and create a
     scrolling region underneath the plot.  Assume your terminal has more  than
     24  lines  and  less  than  100.   This  is  possible if it is an emulated
     terminal using a windowing system.  To move the cursor to  the  bottom  of
     the screen:  
          TD:SET PROMPT BOTTOM,'TD:' 
     To freeze or thaw the top few lines:  
          TD:define command freeze 'type 27,"7",27,"[24;r",27,"8",27,"M"' 
          TD:define command thaw 'type 27,"7",27,"[0;r",27,"8",27,"M"' 
     You issue the command FREEZE to freeze the top lines, and THAW to unfreeze
     them.  You will want to FREEZE when you are doing plots, and the thaw when
     you are showing data, or parameters, so you can use the whole window.  

     For your convenience you may do all of this by:  
          TD:SET FILE INPUT TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FREEZE 

     Now  when you do plot the top part of your screen is used to view the plot
     while the bottom is used to give the commands.  



                                      Page 134


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

     If  your screen has only 24 lines you may wish to reduce the plot size and
     freeze the top 22 lines.  This will give you a 2 line command window.   To
     do this:  
          SET FILE INPUT TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FREEZE22 
     Similarly there is a FREEZE30 and FREEZE40 file.  


     15.64.18.15  SIXELS   - This  is  for the LA-50, LA-100, VT-240, LN-03 and
     any other device that uses sixel graphics.  The size is  about  10  by  8"
     except for an LA-100 which is 14 by 10.  To specify this device:  
          TD:SET DEVICE SIXELS "type,options" 
             --- ------ ------ --------------
     Where  type  is  LA50,  LA100,  VT240,  LN03,  LN03HI, LN03LO, or LN03MED.
     HI,LO,MED select the resolution for the LN-03 printer.  If you do not have
     lots of memory inside the LN-03 you shoule use LN03LO or possibly LN03MED.
     If you wish to get sixel output on a  Talaris  1590  printer  You  specify
     option LN03, and then print the file with /SET=LN03.  
                                       example
          TD:SET DEVICE SIXEL "LN03" 
             --- ------ ----- ------


     15.64.18.16  TEKTRONIX  - Tektronix 4010/4014 compatible terminals 
          TD:SET DEVICE TEKTRONIX "type,options" 
             --- ------ --------- --------------


     15.64.18.16.1  Type  - 
     1.  "RADM3A" - For ADM-3A+Retrographics terminal 
     2.  "RVT100" - A VT-100+Retrographics terminal 
     3.  "RVT100A" - High resolution Retrographics (Green screen).  
     4.  "SEL100XL" - For a Selanar HiREZ 100XL 
     5.  "VIS102" - For a Visual 102 with graphics.  
     6.  "KERMIT" - Kermit simulation of TEK-4010 with color 
     7.  "LSI7107" - LSI model 7107 color terminal 
     8.  "TEK4207" - For Tektronix model 4207 with Dialog box.  
     9.  "TEEMTALK"  -  For Tektronix 4207 emulators which support simultaneous
     Tek and terminal windows.  
     10.  "VT240"  -  For  a VT-240 terminal, or C.ITOH 328 For a VT-240 or 241
     terminal you will get better results using the REGIS protocol.   Both  TEK
     and  REGIS  are supported on the VT-240.  When using the TEK protocol on a
     VT-240 the keypad is disabled in graphics mode, and the screen  is  erased
     when you leave graphics mode.  
     11.  "CIT467" - for a CIT-467 color graphics terminal 
     12.  "TAL1590"  -  for a Talaris 1590 laser printer.  This produces a plot
     approximately 10.24 by 7.8 inches with 3/8 inch margins.  
     If  you  do  not  specify  a  terminal  type, then a plain vanilla 4010 is
     assumed.  


     15.64.18.16.2  Terminal_setup   - It  is  important  that your terminal be
     setup properly for Tek-4010.  The following settings must be observed.  
          1.  <CR> should generate only <CR> 
          2.  <LF> should generate only <LF> 
          3.  GIN terminator must be <CR>.  In particular you do not want <EOT>
              as a terminator.  
          4.  <DEL> must be enabled as a valid graphics character or it implies
              Lo Y.  


                                      Page 135


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

          5.  You may wish to enable Automatic Tek entry.  
          6.  You probably do not want screen clear when Tek is entered.  


     15.64.18.16.3  Falco   - The  Falco  infinity  series can display up to 49
     lines of FBG-II graphics.  You should calculate the number of available  y
     pixels as 
       For FBG-II 
          pixels=3120*(lines/49) 
       For FBG-I 
          pixels=3120*(lines/23) 
     Then you set:  
          TD:SET DEVICE TEKTRONIX "RVT100,YPIXELS=pixels" 


     15.64.18.16.4  Options  - 
          1.  "HARDST"  or "SOFTST" select hardware structure, or software line
              structure.  HARDST is faster,  but  SOFTST  will  give  identical
              results on all devices.  
          2.  "HIRES"  or  "LORES" select the resolution (4096 or 1024).  HIRES
              is slower, and will only work on some devices.  For example HIRES
              messes up the plots on a Visual-102.  
          3.  "HARDCH"  or  "SOFTCH" selects the range of character generation.
              HARDCH generates 4 character sizes by hardware.  SOFTCH generates
              only 1.  
          4.  "NOINTEN"  or  "INTEN"  selects  intensity  variation.  This only
              works on "real" 4010 terminals, and VT-240.   There  are  only  2
              levels of variation 1,2,3 or 4,5.  
          5.  "HEIGHT=n" selects the screen height in cm.  This componsates for
              emulators without "good" aspect ratios.  
          6.  "YPIXELS=n"  selects  the number of Y pixels for emulators with a
              different number from the standard 3120.   This  may  be  in  the
              range of 1024 to 4096.  Xpixels are assumed to be 4096.  
          7.  "WIDTH=n" selects the screen width in cm.  
          8.  "SLOW" selects full rather than compressed output for each point.
              All redundant characters are transmitted.  
          9.  "RECSIZE=nnn" selects the record size (72-512) 
         10.  "RSEGM"  or  "NSEGM" - Selecte [no]return to terminal mode at end
              of each segment.  This  is  useful  for  terminals  that  support
              simultaneous ANSI, and Tek graphics on screen at the same time.  
         11.  "COLOR=WRGBYMCB"  -  specifies the 8 color mapping characters for
              White, Red, Green, Blue,  Yellow,  Magenta,  Cyan,  Black.   Each
              escape  sequence  has  a unique single character to select color,
              which may be specified by the color option.  Spaces indicate keep
              the color the same.  For example KERMIT uses "COLOR=71243560" 
         12.  "PRECOL=sequence"  specifies  the "escape" sequence to use before
              the color character.  For example KERMIT uses "PRECOL=[3" 
         13.  "POSTCOL=sequence"  specifies the sequence to use after the color
              character.  For example KERMIT uses "POSTCOL=m" 
         14.  "ENTER=sequence"   specifies   the  "escape"  sequence  to  enter
              TEK-4010 mode from terminal mode.  For example VT-240 and  KERMIT
              use "ENTER='[?38h'" 
         15.  "EXIT=sequence"  specifies the "escape" sequence to Exit TEK-4010
              mode to terminal mode.  This sequence is  executed  whenever  the
              screen  is  erased  or  at  the  end  of each segment if RSEGM is
              selected.  For example VT-240 and KERMIT use "EXIT='[?38l'" 

     NOTE:   It  is  assumed  that the escape character "27" begins each escape


                                      Page 136


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

     sequence, and  it  need  not  be  entered.   Escape  sequences  containing
     lowercase  letters need to be inside quotes.  In addition escape sequences
     are limited to 7 characters and they may not contain blanks.  


     15.64.18.16.5  Table_of_types  - 
     Type      Width  Height Features
     ----      -----  ------ --------
     TEK4010   19.97  15.21
     TEK4014   19.97  15.21  HIRES,HARDCH,INTEN
     TEK4207   19.97  15.21  HIRES,HARDCH,INTEN,EXIT,COLOR
     TEEMTALK  19.97  15.21  HIRES,HARDCH,INTEN,EXIT,RSEGM,COLOR
     VT240     21.59  16.45  HARDCH,INTEN,EXIT
     SEL100XL  22.00  16.76  HIRES,HARDCH,RSEGM
     VIS102    21.66  16.50  EXIT,RSEGM
     RVT100    21.09  15.76  EXIT,RSEGM
     RVT100A   21.09  15.76  EXIT,RSEGM
     RADM3A    19.95  15.21  EXIT,RSEGM
     CIT467    19.97  15.21  EXIT,RSEGM,COLOR
     TAL1590          25.92  19.75 HIRES,HARDCH,INTEN
     KERMIT    19.97  15.21  HIRES,HARDCH,INTEN,EXIT,COLOR
     LSI7107          19.97  15.21 HARDCH,EXIT,COLOR
     All use HARDST.


     15.64.18.16.6  Windows    - Sone   TEK4010   emulators   are   capable  of
     simultaneous graphics and text where  the  graphics  scrolls  off  of  the
     screen.   An  example of such a terminal is the Visual-630.  For this type
     of terminal you may wish to reduce the plot size and  freeze  the  top  22
     lines.   This  will give you a 2 line command window with a fixed graphics
     window.  To do this:  
          TD:SET FILE INPUT TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FREEZE22 
     When you wish to use the whole window for listings you type:  
          TD:THAW 
     and then to restore the 2 line command window:  
          TD:FREEZE 


     15.64.18.16.7  Escape_seq  - Each TEK4010 emulator uses slightly different
     escape sequences.  The following is  a  listing  of  the  sequences  which
     differ from one device to another.  

          1.  ENTER Tek mode 
              A.  <ESC>[?38h - VT240,Kermit 
              B.  <ESC>#!1 - TEK4207 
              C.  <GS> - Most other devices 

          2.  EXIT Tek mode or Resume ANSI terminal mode 
              A.  <ESC>[?38l - VT240,Kermit 
              B.  <ESC>#!0 - TEK4207 
              C.  <ESC>2 - CIT467 
              D.  <CAN> - most other devices 

          3.  Set color (X=single color character) 
              (White,Red,Green,Blue,Yellow,Magenta,Cyan,Black) 
              A.  <ESC>[3Xm - Kermit X=71243560 
                  The KERMIT color emulation uses <ESC>[3F;Bm 
                  Where F is the Foreground color and B is the background.  


                                      Page 137


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

              B.  <ESC>MLX - TEK4207 X=12347650 
                  Alternate colors for TEK4207 are:  
                  <         ;         :         9 
                  Violet    Lt.Blue   Blue-Grn  Yellow-Grn 
                  8         =         >         ?  
                  Orange    Salmon    Dk.Gray   Lt.Gray 
              C.  <ESC>X - CIT467 X=oiljmknh 
              D.  <ESC>CX  -  LSI7107  X=71243560 The LIS7107 additionally must
                  return to terminal mode to setup a new color.  

          4.  Set mode ERASE/DRAW 
              A.  Color terminals use color black 
              B.  <ESC><RUB>/<ESC>a - RADM3A 
              C.  <ESC>1d/<ESC>0d - RVT100,VIS102 
              D.  <ESC>OW b` @@/<ESC>OW `` @@ - SEL100XL 
                                   Codes (decimal)
     3.  <ESC> = 27 
     4.  <CAN> = 24 
     5.  <GS> = 29 
     6.  <RUB> = 127 


     15.64.18.16.8  Example  - 
          TD:SET DEVICE TEK "SEL100XL" 
             --- ------ --- ----------
     Selects the SEL100XL terminal protocol.  
          TD:SET DEVICE TEK "SEL100XL,SOFTST,LORES" 
             --- ------ --- -----------------------
     Selects  the  SEL100XL  but  in  1024 resolution, with software structure.
     This produces faster plots  that  look  identical  to  those  produced  by
     hardcopy devices that do not have hardware structure.  


     15.64.18.16.9  Hints  - Some terminals such as the KERMIT emulation do not
     support simultaneous display of graphics and text.  This may be  fixed  in
     several  ways.   You  can specify the "RSEGM" option, and do a SHOW CURSOR
     whenever you wish to look at the graphics page.  

          Some  terminals such as the CIT328 , and the VT-240 clear the display
     when switching from graphics  to  text.   For  such  devices  the  "NSEGM"
     options  should be specified.  This returns to terminal mode only when the
     device is closed, or when the screen is erased.  

          You may modify the actual color mapping by specifying the appropriate
     escape sequences.  For example for KERMIT you may  draw  black  against  a
     white backround by specifying:  
          SET DEVICE TEKTR "KERMIT,COLOR=01243567,POSTCOL=';7m'" 
     You  may  modify  the  color  mapping for TEK4027 to substitute Violet for
     blue.  
          SET DEVICE "COLOR=' <' 


     15.64.18.17  TEK4027  - This is for the Tektronix 4027 color terminal.  







                                      Page 138


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

     15.64.18.18  VERSATEC   - Versatec  1200  printer/plotter.   The  plotting
     space is 10.55" by 7.8" (26.8cm by 19.81cm) 2110 by 1560 pixels.  Plotting
     nominally  begins 0.35" from the perforations.  The 7.8" is nominal due to
     variations in the paper feed.  There is always a margin of 0.225"  on  the
     short  side  of  the paper.  The following options may be specified inside
     the string.  
          1.  "LENGTH=n,inches" - n is the length of the paper in inches.  This
              allows you to make long plots on roll paper, or plots that  bleed
              across  the  page  boundaries.   You can also make a plot smaller
              using this parameter.  



     15.64.18.19  Xwindows  - If you wish to serve the Xwindows to another node
     on DECnet (HEPNET) you must declare the node before entering Topdrawer, by
     entering the line:  
          $ SET DISPLAY/CREATE/NODE=nodename 
     If  you  do not have a DECnet connection, but you are connected via TCP/IP
     (Arpanet or Internet) you must use one of the following commands:  

     If you have Multinet TCP/IP software:  
          $ SET DISPLAY/CREATE/NODE=nodename/TRANSPORT=TCPIP 
     If you have Wollengong TCP/IP software (WINTCP):  
          $ SET DISPLAY/CREATE/NODE=nodename/TRANSPORT=WINTCP 


     15.64.18.20  String  - This is passed to UGOPEN.  This selects options for
     the selected device.  The options  are  separated  by  commas.   For  more
     information see:UGSYS.  An example of using the string is:  
          TD:SET DEVICE SIXELS "LN03HI,NOCLEAR,NORESET,LENGTH=n,inches" 
             --- ------ ------ ----------------------------------------

     This  selects  output  for  the  LN-03 with no imbedded formfeeds or reset
     commands.  You might produce a plot in this form so you can add it  to  an
     existing text file.  The result is a plot imbedded in the text.  

     LENGTH=n  adjusts  the  page  length where n is the length of the paper in
     inches.  Shortening the plot size is useful for imbedded plots.   You  may
     also lengthen the page length on the LA50 and LA100 printers.  

     If the option inches is omitted the length is in centimeters.  


     15.64.18.21  ADD   - This  adds  another  device  so now you have 2 device
     open.  You may select the unit number by using UNIT=n.  


     15.64.18.22  FILE   - FILE=filename - This selects the device and filename
     for output.  This option only  works  for  non-interactive  or  sequential
     devices.   If you wish to specify a file name containing either semicolons
     or blanks, it must be enclosed in parenthesis.  

     CHANNEL=DEV:   -  This selects the output device.  For interactive devices
     or slave devices this is your terminal by default.  

     You  either  select  a  device or filename.  Interactive and slave devices
     generally accept CHANNEL,  while  sequential  devices  accept  FILE.   The
     TEKTRONIX and REGIS devices treat FILE and CHANNEL as synonyms.  


                                      Page 139


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

     15.64.18.23  WIDTH|HEIGHT   - Sets  the width and height of the display in
     the current units.  This only applies to some drivers.  


     15.64.18.24  IDENT   - IDENT=aaaa  -  This selects an identification to be
     added to a sequential output file before each  plot.   For  TEKTRONIX  and
     REGIS, if aaaa='NONE' then there is no identification for each plot.  

     This is equivalent to "PICTID=aaaa" 


     15.64.18.25  INTERACTIVE   - This  plots  on  your  terminal.  INTERACTIVE
     turns on both PAUSE and FLUSH.  When  this  is  selected  TOPDRAWER  stops
     after each plot and waits for you to hit the "Return" key.  If you wish to
     stop you type STOP, EXIT, QUIT, HALT, or END.  In addition data is flushed
     after  each  line of interactive input.  INTERACTIVE devices support extra
     features such as cursor input.   INTERACTIVE  devices  produce  output  on
     device  TT:.   If you attempt interactive output to TT:  in a batch queue,
     your output will vanish, as TT is assigned to NLA0:.  

     SEQUENTIAL - Produces plots in an output file 

     SLAVE  -  Produces  the  plots  at  another  device.   This  is similar to
     INTERACTIVE, but the CURSOR is not supported for a slave device.  

     The default is:  
          INTERACTIVE if you are running interactively 
          SEQUENTIAL in BATCH mode 


     15.64.18.26  NUMBER   - NUMBER=nnnn - This selects the sequence number for
     the first plot in the set.  This is only used by sequential devices.  


     15.64.18.27  ORIENTATION    - This  is  an  integer  value  from  0  to  3
     specifying the orientation of the plot.   It  rotates  all  plots  on  all
     opened devices, unlike the LANDSCAPE and PORTRAIT options.  
         ***  0 Normal orientation 
         ***  1 Rotated 90 degrees clockwise.  This is the same as sideways.  X
              goes from top to bottom, while Y points to the right.  
         ***  2 Rotated 180 degrees or Upside down 
         ***  3 Rotated 270 degrees clockwise, appropriate for TeX 


     15.64.18.28  REVERSE   - This reverses the foreground/background colors on
     the plot.  


     15.64.18.29  SIDEWAYS   - SIDEWAYS  -  Rotates  the  plot  by  90 degrees.
     See:Command SET SIZE.  This rotates all plots on all opened devices.  


     15.64.18.30  PERMANENT   - This  sets the currently selected device as the
     Default.  The Default may be restored by a  SET  DEVICE  command  with  no
     device specified.  





                                      Page 140


                                      COMMANDS
                                       DEVICE

     15.64.18.31  UNIT  - You may select the unit to open UNITS range from 1 to
     8.  This allows you send the output to several devices at once.  


     15.64.18.32  Example   - To  get  plots  on  your  terminal  a VT-100 with
     retrographics.  
          TD:SET DEVICE TEKTRONIX "RVT100" 
             --- ------ --------- --------

     To get plots on another terminal (TTAn:) a VT-100 with retrographics.  
          TD:SET DEVICE TEKTRONIX "RVT100" FILE=TTAn:  
             --- ------ --------- -------- ----------

     To get output on a Postscript printer:  
          TD:SET DEVICE POSTSCR 
             --- ------ -------
     The  actual output will be a file called filename.PS which must be printed
     on a Postscript printer.  

     To get direct output to a spooled printer:  
          TD:SET DEVICE POSTSCR FILE=LPA0:DUMMY.PS 
             --- ------ ------- ------------------


     15.64.19  DIAMOND 

     This sets the default size for diamonds.  
     SET DIAMOND [SIZE=dx[,dy]] [PERMANENT] 
     --  ---      --             --

     PERMANENT - Makes the current setting the new default.  
     (Default:1.0) 

     If  dx  is  omitted  it is set to the default.  If dy is omitted it is the
     same as dx.  


     15.64.20  DIGITS 

          SET DIGITS=n 
          --  ---

     Sets the number of significant digits displayed in a SHOW DATA command and
     the lexicals.  The number of digits may be set to a value from 0 to 7.  If
     n=0  then  the  number of digits is adjusted to suit the display.  If n is
     omitted it is assumed to be 0.  
     (Default:DIGITS=0) 


     15.64.21  ELLIPSE 

     This sets the default size for the major and semi-major ellipse sizes.  If
     dy is omitted the ellipse becomes a circle.  
     SET ELLIPSE [SIZE=dx[,dy]] [PERMANENT] 
     --  --       --             --

     PERMANENT - Makes the current setting the new default.  
     (Default:1.0) 


                                      Page 141


                                      COMMANDS
                                      ELLIPSE


     If  dx  is  omitted  it is set to the default.  If dy is omitted it is the
     same as dx.  


     15.64.22  ERRORS 

     SET ERRORS [{DEFERRED|IMMEDIATE|LIST}] [WAIT|PAUSE[=ON|OFF]] 
     --  ---      --       --        --      --   --     -- --

          1.  DEFERRED - The error messages appear after the plot is finished. 
          2.  IMMEDIATE  -  The  error  messages  appear  when  the  command is
              entered.  
          3.  LIST - The error messages appear only in the listing file.  
          4.  WAIT  -  When error messages are immediate, WAIT causes TOPDRAWER
              to wait after each message.  PAUSE is a synonym for wait.  

     This option remains the same until changed by a SET ERRORS command.  
     (Default:IMMEDIATE,NOWAIT) 


     15.64.23  EXACT 

          SET EXACT [ON|OFF] [PERMANENT] 
          --  --     -- --
     Sets the character comparison to be exact rather than case blind.  
     (Default:OFF) 


     15.64.24  FILE 

     This selects the file names for data input, output, and journaling.  
     SET FILE 
     --  --
          [INPUT=filename] 
           --
          [LIST|OUTPUT=filename] 
           --   --
          [JOURNAL=filename] 
           --
                                        NOTE
     This  command  is  very  different  from  the  original  SLAC  version  of
     TOPDRAWER.  


     15.64.24.1  INPUT   - Selects  the  input  file.  Once a file is selected,
     TOPDRAWER looks for all commands in that file.  After the last command  in
     the file, TOPDRAWER looks for more input in the current file.  
     (Default:TOPDRAWER.TOP) 

                                       WARNING
                                       -------
          If  any  commands  follow  SET FILE INPUT, they will be executed
          before the commands in the input file.  






                                      Page 142


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FILE

     15.64.24.2  LIST   - Selects  the  listing  output (Default:TD.LIS).  This
     lists all the commands you give TOPDRAWER.  Both commands entered  at  the
     keyboard,  and from an input file are listed.  It is also the default file
     for a LIST command.  


     15.64.24.3  JOURNAL   - Selects the journal file name (Default:TD.TDJ) The
     journal file contains any commands you type  at  the  keyboard.   Commands
     from a disk file are not incuded in the journal file.  There is no journal
     file when TOPDRAWER is run from a batch job.  


     15.64.24.4  Filename   - The  file  specification  may  include device and
     directory.  If the filename contains a semicolon ";", or begins with  "V_"
     or  "S_"  or  a  special  character  such  as a dollar sign "$" it must be
     enclosed in quotes or apostrophes "'".  For example you may get the sample
     input file.  
          TD:SET FILE INPUT TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TDINTRO 
             --- ---- ----- --------------------------------

     This  is  a  modification  of the original Topdrawer syntax.  The original
     required a Fortran unit number.  By performing a  logical  assignment  you
     may simulate the original syntax.  For example:  
          $ ASSIGN FOR009.DAT "9" 
            ------ ---------- ---
     defines 9 as the usual input on unit 9.  


     15.64.24.5  Example  - 
          TD:SET FILE INPUT TEST 
             --- ---- ----- ----
     Input will be taken from file TEST.TOP.  
          TD:SET FILE INPUT myfile.dat 
             --- ---- ----- ----------
     Input will be taken from file MYFILE.DAT.  
          TD:SET FILE INPUT 'myfile.dat;1' 
             --- ---- ----- --------------
     Input  will  be  taken  from file MYFILE.DAT;1.  Notice, that if you use a
     semicolon ";" in the file name you  must  enclose  it  in  apostrophes  or
     quotes.  

          TD:SET FILE INPUT="$TEST" LIST=TESTD 
             --- ---- ------------- ----------
     Input will be $TEST.TOP the output will be TESTD.LIS.  

          TD:SET FILE INPUT TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TDINTRO 
             --- ---- ----- --------------------------------
     The input will be from TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES] file TDINTRO.TOP 

          TD:SET FILE INPUT DRA0:[USER.SUBDIR]MY_PLOTS.PLT 
             --- ---- ----- ------------------------------
     The  input  will  be  from  device  DRA0:,  directory  [USER.SUBDIR], file
     MY_PLOTS.PLT 
          TD:SET FILE JOURNAL NL:  
             --- ---- ------- ---
     This   discards   the   journal  output  a  better  way  to  do  this  is:
     SET MODE JOURNAL OFF.  



                                      Page 143


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FILL

     15.64.25  FILL 

     SET FILL [ENTRY[=n]] [FULL] [SIZE[=n]] [ANGLE[=n]] [ALTERNATE=[ON|OFF]]
     --  ---   --          --     --         --          --         -- --
               [WIDTH|INTENSITY=n] [NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|
                ---   --            ---     --    --  --    --   --
               MAGENTA|CYAN] [NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|
               --      --     ----      --    --   --     ---     ----
               PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
               --        --    --
     This  selects  a  fill  attributes to be used when the FILL option is used
     with HISTOGRAM, JOIN, or PLOT.  This selects the type of cross hatch fill.
     Up to 4 different lines may be used.  
          1.  ALTERNATE  selects  filling  alternate  areas.  If off the entire
              area bounded by the outside of the curve is filled.  (Default:ON) 
          2.  ENTRY selects the fill entry to change.  If n is omitted the next
              entry is selected.  
          3.  FULL  sets the fill size to be the same as the screen resolution,
              the angle is set to 90, and the WIDTH is set to 1.  
          4.  SOLID...  selects the line texture to use.  (Default:NONE) 
          5.  WHITE...  selects the line color to use.  (Default:NONE) 
          6.  ANGLE  the  angle  that  the  line  is  to  be  drawn  at.   0 is
              horizontal, while 90 is straight up and down.  
              (Default:+-45 degrees) 
          7.  SIZE  the  separation  between  the  lines.   If negative this is
              specified in pixels.  If positive it is specified in inch.  
              (Default:0.1) 
          8.  WIDTH  selects  the  line  width  to  use (0 to 5).  A width of 0
              indicates no width is selected.  
              (Default:NONE) 
     IF  no  options  are specified, the fill patterns are reset to the default
     value.  


     15.64.26  FIT 

          SET FIT [options] 
          --  ---
     Sets the fitting options.  
     See:Command FIT.  


     15.64.27  FLUSH 

          FLUSH [ON|OFF] 
          --     -- --
     This  selects  automatic  flush  of plot data.  When automatic flushing of
     data is on, plot data is displayed immediately after each interactive line
     of  input.   When OFF plot data is only displayed after a FLUSH command or
     when the plot buffer is  full.   Pause  is  normally  on  for  interactive
     devices, and off for non interactive.  


     15.64.28  FONT 

     This selects which fonts are used in generating plots.  
     SET FONT [BASIC|EXTENDED|DUPLEX] 
     --  ---   --    --       --


                                      Page 144


                                      COMMANDS
                                        FONT

          1.  BASIC - 64 character uppercase font (not useful) 
          2.  EXTENDED - Full font with Greek and lowercase (Default) 
          3.  DUPLEX  - Fancy font.  This one may not look good on devices such
              as Tektronix 4010 with limited resolution.   This  also  requires
              the most memory and time to generate.  

     This  option  remains  in effect until changed by a SET FONT command.  The
     EXTENDED and DUPLEX fonts both use proportional spacing.  If you  wish  to
     use a fixed spacing font See:Command SET MODE PROPORTIONAL.  


     15.64.29  FORMAT 

     Sets the format used by the Fortran READ statement.  
     SET FORMAT "format" 
     --  ---

     This  is  useful if you wish to skip lines at the beginning of a line when
     you are using a list file as input to TOPDRAWER.  Normally you do not need
     to use this command, unless the data is in an extremely weird format.  The
     format is limited  to  64  characters.   (Default:(256A1)  The  number  of
     columns  is  also limited by SET CARD.  This option remains the same until
     changed by a SET FORMAT command.  This option has no effect on  input  you
     enter interactively at the terminal.  
                                       Example
     If you wish to skip the first 10 columns:  
          TD:SET FORMAT "(10x,256A1)" 
             --- ------ -------------


     15.64.30  GRID 

     This causes a grid to overlay the plot when  axes  are  drawn.   The  grid
     lines  are  lined  up with the large tick marks.  This acts on the current
     plot only a new SET  GRID  is  required  for  each  plot  or  the  options
     PERMANENT  must  be  specified.   The command must be followed by either a
     HIST, JOIN, BARGRAPH or PLOT command to be effective.  
     SET GRID [ON|OFF] [Y|HORIZONTAL|X|VERTICAL!Z[=ON|OFF]] [SYMBOL[=sym]] [XY|
     --  --    -- --    - --         - --       -  -- --     --             --
               YZ|ZX[=ON|OFF]] [CYCLE[=ON|OFF]] [OUTLINE[=ON|OFF]] 
               -- --  -- --     --     -- --     --       -- --
          [SIZE=n] 
           --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           ----    --    --  --    --   --     --      ---
          [NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           ----      --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
          [THETA=n] [PHI=n] [ANGLE=n] 
           --        --      --
          [PERMANENT] 
           --







                                      Page 145


                                      COMMANDS
                                        GRID

     15.64.30.1  Options  - 

          1.  ON - Draws horizontal, vertical, and Z lines.  
          2.  OFF - No grid is drawn.  (Default) 
          3.  Y|HORIZONTAL - Draws horizontal lines at Y major tics.  
          4.  X|VERTICAL - Draws vertical lines at X major tics.  
          5.  Z - Draws line perpendicular to Z at Z major tics.  
          6.  :XY - Draws lines in XY plane.  
          7.  YZ - Draws lines in YZ plane when THREE=ON.  
          8.  ZX - Draws lines in ZX plane when THREE=ON.  
              If XY,YZ,ZX are not specified, then all 3 are assumed to be on.  
          9.  CYCLE  -  Draws  the grid lines corresponding to Z major ticks in
              different  colors,  textures...   according  to  the  SET   CYCLE
              command.  (Default:OFF) 
         10.  OUTLINE - Draws outline around 3-d grid.  (Default:OFF) 
         11.  INTENSITY  -  Sets  line  intensity  or  width (0-5).  0 gets the
              intensity from the SET INTENSITY or SET AXES command.  
         12.  WHITE...  - Sets the line color.  (Default:Same as axes) 
         13.  SOLID...   -  Sets  the  line  texture.   (Default:Same  as axes)
              See:Command SET TEXTURE.  
         14.  SYMBOL  -  Draws  a symbol [sym] to be plotted at intersection of
              vertical and horizontal lines.  (Default:sym=0O) 
         15.  SIZE  -  sets the size of the grid symbols If the size is not set
              then it is adjusted automatically by the window size.  
         16.  THETA,PHI - specify the normal to the grid symbol for 3-d plots. 
         17.  ANGLE - rotates the symbol around the normal for 3-d plots.  
         18.  PERMANENT - Sets the current grid options permanently for all NEW
              plots.  
     If  no  options  are  specified, then all grid parameters are reset to the
     original defaults.  
     (Default:OFF SYM='0O' INTEN=0 NOCOLOR NOTEXTURE THETA=0 PHI=0 ANGLE=0) 


     15.64.30.2  Example  - 
          TD:SET GRID DOTS VERT SYM=1O 
             --- ---- ---- ---- ------
     When  the  axes are plotted, a grid is drawn consisting of vertical dotted
     lines at each large X tick, and symbols at the intersection of large X and
     Y ticks.  
          TD:SET GRID DOTS VERT HORIZ 
             --- ---- ---- ---- -----
               is the same as ...  
          TD:SET GRID DOTS ON 
             --- ---- ---- --

          TD:SET GRID RED ON PERMANENT 
             --- ---- --- -- ---------
     All subsequent plots with axes have red grids.  

          TD:SET GRID SYM=0O THETA=90 PHI=90 
             --- ---- ------ -------- ------
     The  grid will be plotted with crosses as the grid symbol, oriented normal
     to the Y axis.  The symbol lies in the XZ plane.  

          TD:SET GRID X Y Z YZ ZX DOTS OUTLINE PERM 
             --- ---- - - - -- -- ---- ------- ----
     Plots  grids only on the YZ and ZX planes.  Since only the XY plane exists
     for normal plots, TD will only put grids on 3-D plots.  


                                      Page 146


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

     15.64.31  HISTOGRAM 

     SET HISTOGRAM [HBOOK|HANDYPAK|RICE] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [CHECK[=ON|OFF]]
     --  --         --    --       --     --      -- --     --------- --
               [CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]] [ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]] [ERRORS[=ON|OFF]]
                --       -- --     --       -- --     --      -- --
               [OVERFLOWS[=ON|OFF]] [LOG[=ON|OFF]] [SECTION=section_name]
                --         -- --     --   -- --     --
               [FILE=filename] [NUMBER=n] [SELECT|NAME='hist_name'] [IDENT=nnn]
                --              --         ---    --                 --
               [EXACT[=ON|OFF]] [CURRENT|NEXT|PREVIOUS|FIRST|LAST]
                --     -- --     --      --   --       --    --
               [PROCESS='Process_name'] [PID='nnnn'] [TITLE[=ON|OFF]]
                --                       --           --     -- --
               [WRAP[=ON|OFF] [HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]] [MESH[=ON|OFF]] 
                --    -- --    --         -- --     --    -- --
                                          HBOOK4 only
               [AREA|DIRECTORY[="directory"]] [TREE[=ON|OFF]] [WILD[=ON|OFF]]
                ---  --                        --    -- --     --    -- --
               [SHRE=section_id] [IOFFSET=n] [CYCLE=n] 
                --                ---         ---
                                            NTUPLES
               [NTUPLES[=ON|OFF]] [EVENTS[=[FROM] n [TO] n] [[N][D]{X|Y|Z|U|V|W
                --       -- --     --       --       --             - - - - - -
               |THETA|RADIUS|PHI}=N] [NLIMIT[=n [FROM] n [TO] n]
                --    --     --       ---        --       --
               [NMASK[=n [IDENT=n] [X=n] [Y=n]] 
                ---
     This  selects a histogram and puts it into data storage.  Once a histogram
     is selected, the data is available for plotting.  The command:  
          SHOW HISTOGRAMS 
     Shows the current list of histograms available.  
          LIST HISTOGRAMS 
     Produces a listing of the current histograms.  


     15.64.31.1  Options  - 
          1.  APPEND - The hist is appended as a new data set 
          2.  AREA="xxx/yyy/zzz" - Selects the histogram area.  
          3.  CHECK - Turns on or off duplicate checking.  
          4.  CONFIRM - You are asked before the histogram is set.  
          5.  ENTRIES - Selects only histograms which have entries (data).  
          6.  ERRORS - Sets the errors (DY).  
          7.  EXACT  -  Histogram  names are treated as exact strings, and they
              are not searched in a case independent manner.  This must precede
              the option NAME="...".  
          8.  SECTION=sectionname  -  Sets up a global section to RESTORE hists
              from.  SEE:TOPDRAWER LINK 
          9.  FILE - Specifies a direct access file to get histograms from.  
         10.  HISTOGRAM - Selects only histogram (non mesh) data.  
         11.  IDENT - The histogram number to set.  
         12.  LOG - Informs you when it gets the data.  
         13.  MESH - Chooses only MESH data.  
         14.  NAME - Selects hist by name.  
         15.  NUMBER - Then number of hists to fetch from the file.  
         16.  NTUPLES - Selects only NTUPLES.  
         17.  OVERFLOWS - Includes the overflows in the data set.  



                                      Page 147


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

         18.  CURRENT|NEXT|PREVIOUS|FIRST|LAST - Selects the hist to get.  
         19.  TITLE - Plots the histogram name as a title.  
         20.  TREE - Searches through the entire directory tree.  
         21.  WILD - Allows wild searches of areas in SHOW, MONITOR, SET, SAVE,
              RESTORE HISTOGRAM.  If WILD=ON then the star "*" and percent  "%"
              signs are reserved for wild searches.  
              (Default:WILD=ON) 
         22.  WRAP  - Continues or terminates the search at the end of the list
              of histograms.  


     15.64.31.2  APPEND   - The  new  data is appended to the current data as a
     new set rather than replacing it.  If you  omit  ON  or  OFF  then  ON  is
     assumed.  
     (Default:APPEND=OFF) 


     15.64.31.3  AREA|DIRECTORY    - This   selects   the   histogram  AREA  or
     DIRECTORY.  If you specify "//"  or  "/"  then  the  "root"  directory  or
     "//PAWC"  is  selected.  If the area begins with "/" then it is considered
     to be a subdirectory of the root.   ""  moves  down  the  directory  tree.
     "AAAA"  move  up  the tree to subdirectory AAAA.  and "aAAA" moves over to
     the adjacent subdirectory AAAA.  Note that "" may need to be  enclosed  in
     quotes,  unless  you  have SET CHAR ALPHA "".  Unfortunately if you modify
     the meaning of "" then dates must be entered  enclosed  in  angle  brakets
     <1989523>.   This  is  generally not necessary unless you have directories
     which consist entirely of numbers.  

     If  you use "wild" characters in an area name then a directory tree search
     is automatically done using the wild characters to select  subdirectories.
     Wild  characters  are  "*" which means and string, and "%" which means any
     character.  

                                       example
     Assume you are in directory "//PAWC/X" 
          TD:SET HIST AREA Y 
     moves you to //PAWC/X/Y 
          TD:SET HIST AREA "q" 
     moves to //PAWC/X/Q 
          TD:SET HIST AREA /A 
     moves to //PAWC/A 
          TD:SET HIST AREA // 
     moves to //PAWC 
          TD:SET HIST AREA /E* ID=2 
     Gets   the   first   histogram   with  ID=2  from  area  //PAWC/ENERGY  or
     //PAWC/ERROR...  


     15.64.31.4  CHECK   - If  on  it TOPDRAWER issues a warining if there is a
     duplicate histogram for the selected one.  This is normally on except when
     the options CURRENT, NEXT,PREVIOUS,LAST,FIRST are used.  


     15.64.31.5  CONFIRM   - Each  histogram that matches the specifications is
     logged, then you are asked whether you want to accept it.  You reply:  
       *  Y,A - Yes accept it.  
       *  N - No, do not accept it (Default).  



                                      Page 148


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

       *  Q - Quit and stop asking questions.  
     If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.  
     (Default:CONFIRM=OFF) 


     15.64.31.6  ENTRIES  - If ON it selects only histograms which have entries
     (contain data).  If OFF it selects only histograms without  entries.   The
     default is ON.  


     15.64.31.7  ERRORS   - Set the error array DY or DZ.  If this is specified
     for HBOOK and the histogram contains no errors, garbage may  be  collected
     in  DY.   For  2 dimensional or RICE histograms the ERROR=SQRT(Y).  If you
     omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.  
     (Default:ERROR=ON when REVISION>4.30) 


     15.64.31.8  FILE   - FILE=filename  -  Selects the filename to restore the
     histograms from.  If IDENT is specified then  the  selected  histogram  is
     fetched  from  the  file.   If  the  filename is NONE then no file name is
     selected.  If the filename is blank (FILE='') then the last opened file is
     used, or if none has been opened.  
          HBOOK.BIN - For HBOOK4 direct access files.  

                                       example
          TD:SET HIST FILE=MY_HISTS.BIN 
             --- ---- -----------------
     Gets the histograms from file MY_HISTS.BIN.  
          TD:SET HIST FILE="MY_HISTS.BIN;1" 
             --- ---- ---------------------
     Gets histograms from the first version of the file.  


     15.64.31.9  HISTOGRAM   - If  HISTOGRAM=ON selects only histograms.  IDENT
     IDENT=nnn - Selects the histogram by id number.  The data in the histogram
     is loaded into the data buffer.  If this is combined with NAME='hist_name'
     then the next histogram that first  matches  either  the  ID  or  NAME  is
     selected.  


     15.64.31.10  LOG   - This causes TOPDRAWER to type the histogram name when
     it sets it.  The histogram ID,NAME,size, and range of values is  typed  on
     your terminal.  If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.  
     (Default:LOG=OFF) 


     15.64.31.11  MESH   - If MESH=ON only histograms with 3-d or mesh data are
     set.  If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.  

                                       example
          TD:SET HISTOGRAM NEXT MESH 
             --- --------- ---- ----
     Gets the next mesh plot.  







                                      Page 149


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

     15.64.31.12  NTUPLES   - You  may select the NTUPLE data and put it into a
     1-d histogram.  These options remain the same, unless respecified.  If the
     option  is  used  without any parameters it is reset to the initial value.
     You may show the options by:  SHOW HISTOGRAM SELECT These options are also
     used to control NTUPL usage by:  DEFINE HISTOGRAM ADD/SUBTRACT commands 
          1.  NTUPLES  selects  only NTUPLES.  Normall NTUPLES are excluded, so
              you must use this option to look at NTUPLE data.  
          2.  EVENTS  FROM n1 TO N2 selects the event range The event selection
              remains the same, unless respecified.  
          3.  X/DX/Y/DY...NDW=n  selects  the  value  to put into X/DX...  from
              each NTUPLE Initially they are X=1, Y=2,  ...W=6,  DX=-1,  DY=-2,
              DZ=-3.   0  is the event number while positive values are each of
              the variables in an NTUPLE.  
          4.  NLIMIT=n  FROM  n1  TO  N2 places limits on the selected value n.
              Where n is the coordinate in the NTUPLE.  If specified without  a
              value  n  or with n=0 then all limits are set.  If all parameters
              are unspecified then all limits are reset to large values.  
          5.  NMASK=n Sets MASK number n.  If 0 all masks are cleared.  
              A.  IDENT=n Will mask the data by histogram n 
              B.  X=m  Specifies  which  Variable  to  check  against  the X of
                  histogram n Zero is the event number.  
              C.  Y=m  Specifies which Variable to check against Y of histogram
                  n 
              The   data   is   checked   against  the  histogram  and  if  the
              correspoinding bin of the histogram is  non  zero  the  NTUPL  is
              kept,  and  discarded  if not.  These options are also use by the
              DEFINE HISTOGRAM command to  ADD  or  SUBTRACT  NTUPL  data  from
              histograms.  

                                       example
     You  have an NTUPLE with 6 coordinate values A,B,C,D,E,F You may place all
     of the C values into X and the F values into Y While limiting the B values
     to the range -1 to 1.  
          TD:SET HIST ID=5 EVENTS X=3 Y=6 NLIMIT=2 FROM -1 TO 1 
     The resulting data may then be histogrammed using the BIN command.  


     15.64.31.13  NUMBER   - The  number  of  hists  to  fetch  when specifying
     FILE=name.  This only works it the ID was specified along  with  the  FILE
     name.  

                                       example
          TD:SET HIST FILE=my_file IDENT=200 NUMBER=25 
             --- ---- ------------ --------- ---------
     Fetches 25 histograms from my_file beginning from number 200.  Hist number
     200 is put into data.  


     15.64.31.14  OVERFLOWS  - Selects underflow and overflow data in the first
     and last bin of the histogram.  If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed. 
     (Default:OVERFLOWS=OFF) 


     15.64.31.15  CURRENT|NEXT|PREVIOUS|FIRST|LAST    - Selects   the  current,
     next, previous, first or last histogram.  This may be  modified  by  ID=n,
     NAME='hist_name',  MESH...   to select the next histogram with the desired
     ID, NAME, or type.  When NEXT, PREVIOUS, FIRST or LAST are  specified,  no
     error messages are issued for duplicate histograms selected one.  


                                      Page 150


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

     15.64.31.16  SECTION   - SECTION=SECTION_NAME  maps  a  global  section to
     Topdrawer, for  getting  histograms.   If  IDENT  is  specified  then  the
     selected histogram is fetched from the global section.  If the section has
     a  blank  name  (SECTION="")  the  already   mapped   section   is   used.
     SEE:TOPDRAWER LINK 

     To show available global sections:  
          $ INSTALL :==$sys$system:install/command 
          $ INSTALL LIST/GLOBALS 
     The  available  globals  sections  will be near the end under the category
     Group Globals.  


     15.64.31.17  SELECT   - NAME='hist_name'  Selects the histogram by name or
     title.  The data in the histogram is loaded into  the  data  buffer.   The
     entire list of histograms is searched starting at the first one for a name
     matching the hist_name.  If a histogram has more characters  in  its  name
     than the hist_name, the extra characters are ignored.  If the option NEXT,
     PREVIOUS, FIRST, or LAST  is  used,  the  search  begins  from  the  NEXT,
     PREVIOUS,  FIRST,  or  LAST  histogram.  Percent '%' and star '*' are wild
     characters.  '%' means any single character while '*' means any  character
     string.    For   example  NAME='*ENERGY'  will  select  a  histogram  name
     containing the word ENERGY.  However NAME='ENERGY' will select a histogram
     beginning   with   the  word  ENERGY.   NAME='*PI*ENERGY'  will  find  all
     histograms with the name containing the string 'PI' followed by  the  word
     ENERGY  separated  by any number of characters.  The case of the hist_name
     is ignored.  

     If  more  than  1  histogram match the selected name, a warning message is
     issued.  


     15.64.31.18  TITLE   - This plots the histogram name as a title.  The name
     may be split into 4 parts, Top, X,  Y,  and  Z  by  separating  them  with
     semicolons.  
          Top label;X label;Y label;Z label 
     If  the  number  of lines is insufficient for a title, then it is omitted.
     For example you wish to omit the Y title so you:  
          TD:SET TITLE LEFT LINES=0 

     WARNING For 3-D histograms the title should not be plotted until after the
     histogram has been plotted.  If you omit ON or OFF then ON is assumed.  
     (Default:TITLE=OFF) 


     15.64.31.19  TREE   - Searches the entire directory tree for the histogram
     starting with the current area.  This option  remains  set  from  one  SET
     HISTOGRAM  command to the next.  You may only search a directory tree in a
     forward directions so this does not work for the option PREVIOUS or  LAST.
     Essentially  the  first time you specify TREE the entire directory tree is
     setup for a search.  Subsequent SET HISTOGRAM commands should not use  the
     TREE option unless a new search is desired.  








                                      Page 151


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

     15.64.31.20  WILD   - If  WILD  is  on then the characters "*" and "%" are
     "wild" and may be used in AREA names.  A wild character in an area  causes
     a directory tree search, of only the selected subdirectories.  


     15.64.31.21  WRAP   - If  WRAP  is  on then when you SET HIST NEXT and the
     current histogram is the last one, the histogram number will  wrap  around
     to  the first number.  Similarly SET HIST PREVIOUS will wrap around to the
     last one.  If you specify WRAP=OFF then you will  get  a  warning  message
     instead  of  wrapping.   If  you  omit  ON  or OFF then ON is assumed.  By
     default WRAP is ON when TOPDRAWER is used interactively, but OFF  when  it
     is used in a batch stream.  


     15.64.31.22  Lexicals   - When a histogram is set S_HIST_NAME contains the
     the current histogram name.  

     If  the  histogram package has limits or markers set on the histogram they
     are put into V_XMARKER[n] and V_YMARKER[n].  HBOOK has  no  markers.   The
     number of markers is limited to n=8.  The lexicals are set to a very large
     number 1.0E+30 if they do not contain markers.  


     15.64.31.23  Restrictions   - The  maximum  number  of  histograms you may
     restore is 499.  The maximum memory for HBOOK histograms is 150,000 words.
     (1.2 Mbyte)  The  maximum  title  length is 256 characters.  If you have a
     file  exceeding  these  restrictions  you  must  restore  each   histogram
     individually by:  
          TD:SET HISTOGRAM HBOOK FILE=name ID=n 
             --- --------- ----- --------- ----


     15.64.31.24  Examples   - The  following  sequence  will  plot a histogram
     stored by HSTORE.  
          TD:RESTORE HIST FETCH FILE=filename (Get the hists) 
             ------- ---- ----- ------------- ---- --- ------
          TD:SET HIST ID=5;HIST 
             --- ---- ---------
               or...  
          TD:SET HIST NAME='title of hist 5' 
             --- ---- ----------- -- ---- --
          TD:HISTOGRAM 
             ---------

               or...  
          TD:SET HIST HBOOK FILE=filename ID=5 
             --- ---- ----- ------------- ----
          TD:HISTOGRAM 
             ---------

          TD:SET HIST NAME='ENERGY' 
             --- ---- -------------
     sets the first histogram named "ENERGY...." into the data array.  
          TD:SET HIST NEXT NAME="*ENERGY" 
             --- ---- ---- --------------
     sets the next histogram with a title containing the word "ENERGY".  
          TD:SET HIST NEXT NAME='*ENERGY' CONFIRM 
             --- ---- ---- -------------- -------


                                      Page 152


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAM

     types  the  name  of each histogram containing the word "ENERGY", then you
     are asked if it is acceptable.  You type "Y" if it is, and press  "Return"
     if it is not.  
          TD:SET HIST LAST HIST NAME='ENERGY' 
             --- ---- ---- ---- -------------
     sets  the  last  1  dimensional histogram named "ENERGY...." into the data
     array.  


     15.64.32  INPUT 

          See command:  SET CARD 


     15.64.33  INTENSITY 

     SET {INTENSITY|WIDTH} level [PERMANENT] 
     --   ---       --            --
     This sets the intensity level or line width  of  a  plot.   The  permanent
     default is restored when a new plot is started.  

     level=1  to  5.  (Default:2) 5 is the brightest (widest).  If no intensity
     is specified it is set to 2.  
     PERMANENT - Sets the current width to be the new default.  


     15.64.34  LABELS 

     This sets the size and enables  the  numeric  labels  on  each  axis.   To
     control the default number of ticks see SET SCALE.  
     SET LABELS [SIZE=n] [CHARACTERS=n] [INSIDE[=ON|OFF] [ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|
     --  --      --       --             ---     -- --    --  --  --     --
               LEFT|X|Y|Z] [ON|OFF] [SHIFT=n] 
               --   - - -   -- --    --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           ---       --
          [NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           ----    --    --  --    --   --     --      --
          [PERMANENT] 
           --
     This  acts  on  the  current plot only if PERMANENT not specified.  If the
     parameters are omitted they are reset to the original default.  To control
     other individual elements of the axes use:  
     SET AXES, SET TICKS, SET OUTLINE, SET SCALES 

     (DEFAULT:LEFT ON,BOTTOM ON) 


     15.64.34.1  ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|LEFT|RIGHT   - Selects  labels for top, bottom,
     right and left.  Top selects labels for the TOP of plot and so on.  


     15.64.34.2  X|Y|Z   - selects  the  axis to plot.  Y selects both LEFT and
     RIGHT, while X selects TOP and BOTTOM.  






                                      Page 153


                                      COMMANDS
                                       LABELS

     15.64.34.3  CHARACTERS   - CHARACTERS=n  specifies  the  maximum number of
     characters in left or right titles.  When setting up the windows  room  is
     allocated  for  the  specified  number  of  characters.   The room is only
     allocated if the corresponding axis and labels are enabled.   If  negative
     the  actual number of characters needed is used to locate titles.  LEFT or
     RIGHT titles are only  moved  over  according  to  the  number  of  actual
     characters if they are plotted after the corresponding axes.  

                                       Example
          TD:SET LABELS CHARACTERS=4 PERMANENT 
             --- ------ ------------ ---------
     All plots will allocate room for 4 character labels on the left and right. 
          TD:SET LABELS CHARACTERS=-6 
             --- ------ -------------
          TD:PLOT AXES 
             ---- ----
          TD:TITLE LEFT 'Flush title 
             ----- ---- ------ -----
     First  the  window  is  allocated  leaving room for 6 characters, then the
     title is located according to the actual number of characters used to form
     the labels.  


     15.64.34.4  INSIDE   - INSIDE=OFF  turns  off  labels for adjacent axes of
     negative windows.  If you wish to plot data in a set of windows  with  the
     same scales and limits, you may want to have each window flush against the
     next one.  This is achieved by using negative windows.  Unfortunately when
     plotting  the  axes,  you  will  get  labels  inside  the  windows.   With
     INSIDE=OFF you will only get labels on the perimeter.  

                                       Example
     Assume you have 6 data sets to plot in separate windows.  
          TD:SET LABELS INDIDE=OFF 
             --- ------ ----------
          TD:SET WINDOW X 1.2 OF -3.5 Y 1.2 OF -2.5 
             --- ------ - --- -- ---- - --- -- ----
          SET WINDOW 1;PLOT SET=1 
          --- ------ ------ -----
          SET WINDOW 2;PLOT SET=2 
          --- ------ ------ -----
          SET WINDOW 3;PLOT SET=3 
          --- ------ ------ -----
          ....  


     15.64.34.5  SIZE   - SIZE=n  is  the  character  size in tenths of an inch
     Normally this is automatically set according to the paper size, and window
     to  give you pleasing results.  This applies to all labels.  The units may
     be modified by SET UNITS CHARACTER.  
     (Default:2) 


     15.64.34.6  SHIFT   - selects  the amount to shift the label from the edge
     of the plot to the center of the first character.  It is specified as  the
     number   of   characters.    This   should   be  preceded  by  the  option
     ALL,BOTTOM....  If the axis is not specified ALL is assumed.  




                                      Page 154


                                      COMMANDS
                                       LABELS

     15.64.34.7  ON|OFF   - Allows  or  prevents  drawing labels This should be
     preceded by the option ALL,BOTTOM....  If the axis is not specified ALL is
     assumed.  


     15.64.34.8  INTENSITY   - Sets  line intensity or width (0-5).  0 gets the
     intensity from the SET INTENSITY command.  


     15.64.34.9  WHITE...   - Sets the line color.  


     15.64.34.10  PERMANENT   - Makes  the current settings permanent from plot
     to plot.  


     15.64.34.11  Examples  - 
          TD:SET LABELS ON SHIFT=2 
             --- ------ -- -------
     Selects labels on all axes shifted by 2.  
          TD:SET LABELS RIGHT ON SHIFT=2 
             --- ------ ----- -- -------
     Selects  labels  for  the  right  hand  axis shifted by 2.  All other axes
     remain the same.  
          TD:SET LABELS ALL OFF TOP ON RIGHT ON SHIFT=2 
             --- ------ --- --- --- -- ----- -- -------
     Selects  labels  on  the  top,right  axes  only.   The right label will be
     shifted by 2.  The shift for the other axes remains the same.  


     15.64.35  LIMITS 

     SET LIMITS [CURSOR] [PERMANENT] [SCALE n1 [[TO] n2]] 
     --  ---     --       --          --         --
                              either...  
          FROM [X=]nx,[[Y=]ny,[[Z=]nz]]] TO [X=]nx,[[Y=]ny,[[Z=]nz]]] 
          --    -       -       -        --  -       -       -
                              or...  
          [X [FROM] x [TO] x] 
              --       --
          [Y [FROM] y [TO] y] 
              --       --
          [Z [FROM] z [TO] z] 
              --       --
          [XMIN=x] [XMAX=x] [YMIN=y] [YMAX=y] [ZMIN=z] [ZMAX=z] [PERMANENT] 
           ---      ---      ---      ---      ---      ---      --
     Limits define the space to draw the data.  They do not necessarily limit
     the data points plotted.  Normally limits are automatically set from all
     available data during the first plot.  If you read data, plot and then
     read more data and plot again, the first data set determines the limits.
     This command allows you to set the limits of the plot independently of the
     data.  This should be used before the first PLOT, JOIN, HIST, or BARGRAPH
     command.  The limits are reset when a new plot is started.  If this
     command is issued without any limits specified, all currently set limits
     are removed.  
                                       WARNING
                                       -------
          If this command is issued in between 2 plots overlaying each


                                      Page 155


                                      COMMANDS
                                       LIMITS

          other, they will not have the same scales.  

     See also:SET WINDOW 


     15.64.35.1  SCALE  - This sets a uniform scale for both X,Y.  The window
     size is n1/n2 of the displayed X,Y.  If n2 is omitted it is assumed to be
     1.0.  If both n1 and n2 are omitted, both x,y have the same scale as
     determined by the limits, and window size.  The plot is centered with
     respect to any selected limits.  
          TD:SET LIMITS X 20,40 Y 40,60 SCALE 1 to 10 
             --- ------ - ----- - ----- ----- - -- --
          TD:SET WINDOW X 1 to 4 Y 1 to 2 
             --- ------ - - -- - - - -- -
     The X is displayed from 10 to 50 Y is displayed from 40 to 60.  


     15.64.35.2  CURSOR  - CURSOR puts a cursor on the screen.  Move the cursor
     to the desired first limits.  Then hit the space bar.  Next move the
     cursor to the desired second limits, and again hit the space bar.  A new
     set of limits are now set for the next graph.  If you wish to set only the
     X limit hit "X" instead of "space".  Likewise hit "Y" or "Z" if you wish
     to set only Y or Z limits.  The new limits are entered into the journal
     file.  

     If both X limits are the same, then they are ignored.  Likewise identical
     Y or Z limits are ignored.  For 3-d data the limits are not changed.
     Instead the parameters SCRD, THETA, PHI, and CENTER are adjusted.  The
     CURSOR option should be the last option in the command line for 3-d plots. 

     For example the following command will set new limits, and replot the
     current data:  
          TD:SET LIM CUR;NEW;PLOT 
             --- --- ------------


     15.64.35.3  PERMANENT  - PERMANENT sets the current limits permanently or
     until the next SET LIMIT command.  If you wish to unset permanent limits,
     set them permanently immediately after an NEW PLOT command.  


     15.64.35.4  Example  - The following commands are equivalent:  
          TD:SET LIMITS X FROM 0 to 10.0 Y 5 6 
             --- ------ - ---- - -- ---- - - -
          TD:SET LIMITS X 0 10 Y FROM 5.0 to 6.0 
             --- ------ - - -- - ---- --- -- ---
          TD:SET LIMITS XMIN=0.0 XMAX=10.0 YMIN=5 YMAX=6 
             --- ------ -------- --------- ------ ------
          TD:SET LIMITS FROM 0.0,5 TO 10.0,6 
             --- ------ ---- ----- -- ------
          TD:SET LIMITS FROM Y=5 X=0.0 TO Y=6 X=10.0 
             --- ------ ---- --- ----- -- --- ------








                                      Page 156


                                      COMMANDS
                                        MODE

     15.64.36  MODE 

     This controls a grab-bag of options.  
          SET MODE 
          --  ---
               [AUTOPLOT[=ON|OFF]] 
                --        -- --
               [ABORT[=ON|OFF]] 
                --     -- --
               [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] 
                --      -- --
               [CHECK[=ON|OFF]] 
                --     -- --
               [CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]] 
                --       -- --
               [ERASE[=ON|OFF]] 
                --     -- --
               [DEBUG[=ON|OFF]] 
                --     -- --
               [ECHO=[n]|NOECHO] 
                --       ---
               [EXPAND[=ON|OFF]] 
                --      -- --
               [FILECASE=UPPER|LOWER|MIXED] 
                --       --    --    --
               [HARDTEXTURE[=ON|OFF]] 
                ----         -- --
               [JOURNALING[=ON|OFF]] 
                --          -- --
               [LISTING[=ON|OFF]] 
                --       -- --
               [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
                --   -- --
               [MONITOR[=ON|OFF]] 
                --       -- --
               [PROPORTIONAL[=ON|OFF]] 
                --            -- --
               [QUICK|SLOW] 
                --    --
               [SHOW[=ON|OFF]] 
                --    -- --
               [TITLE[=ON|OFF]] 
                --     -- --
               [TRACE[=ON|OFF]] 
                ---    -- --
               [TREE[=ON|OFF]] 
                ---   -- --
               [VECTOR[=ON|OFF]] 
                --      -- --
               [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] 
                --    -- --
     If ON|OFF is omitted ON is assumed.  Most of these options remain the same
     until explicitly reset.  They are generally not reset by a NEW PLOT
     command.  
     (Default:AUTOPLOT=ON, ABORT=ON, APPEND=OFF, CONFIRM=OFF, ERASE=OFF,
     DEBUG=OFF, ECHO=20, HARD=ON, JOURNALING=ON, LISTING=ON, LOG=OFF,
     MONITOR=OFF, PROPORTIONAL=ON, SHOW=OFF, TRACE=OFF, TREE=OFF, VECTOR=ON) 



                                      Page 157


                                      COMMANDS
                                        MODE

     15.64.36.1  AUTOPLOT  - If an EXIT or CLEAR command occurs and none of the
     current data set has been histogrammed, plotted, or joined, then it is
     plotted.  When AUTOPLOT is off no plotting is automatically done.  


     15.64.36.2  ABORT  - If an error occurs during a command the command is
     aborted.  This applies generally to commands that produce output such as
     ARROW, BOX, CIRCLE, HISTOGRAM, PLOT, BAR, JOIN, and LIST as well as
     SMOOTH, BIN, X=, and so on.  It does not apply to the SET commands.  In
     addition ABORT just prevents journaling of inconvenient commands such as
     SHOW, SPAWN, and HELP.  


     15.64.36.3  APPEND  - This is equivalent to using the APPEND option for
     all commands that create new data sets.  


     15.64.36.4  CONFIRM  - This is equivalent to using the CONFIRM option for
     any command that uses this option.  When this mode is on you must confirm
     all data deletions with a YES, NO, QUIT, or ALL answer.  


     15.64.36.5  CHECK  - CHECK=OFF is equivalent to using the CHECK=OFF option
     for commands such as ADD, SMOOTH, FFT, DEFINE HIST ....  It turns off the
     checks for appropriate data.  Usually this means that the data must be a
     histogram with equally spaced bins.  For commands that take 2 data sets
     there is the requirement that the data sets must match.  


     15.64.36.6  DATAVECTOR  - This modifies the interpretation of DX,DY,DZ to
     be vector components.  It modifies only the PLOT, ADD, SUBTRACT, and
     MULTIPLY commands.  


     15.64.36.7  DEBUG  - Automatic flush at the end of each command.  If you
     SET FILE LIST=TT:  and DEBUG=ON you can see each command and its result in
     order.  For compatability with previous versions NODEBUG is a synonym for
     DEBUG=OFF.  


     15.64.36.8  ECHO  - ECHO=n selects n data points to be listed when read.
     NOECHO is the same as ECHO=0 If you do not specify n it is assumed to be
     1000.  


     15.64.36.9  ERASE  - Selects erase mode for plotting.  While plotting in
     this mode The plotted data erases previous data.  This mode is reset to
     ERASE=OFF whenever a new plot is begun.  


     15.64.36.10  EXPAND  - Selects EXPAND=ON whenever you PLOT, JOIN, or
     HISTOGRAM.  








                                      Page 158


                                      COMMANDS
                                        MODE

     15.64.36.11  FILECASE  - Selects the case of file names.  
          1.  Upper - File names are converted to upper case 
          2.  Lower - File names are converted to lower case 
          3.  Mixed - The case remains the same as typed.  

     If a file name is enclosed in quotes, then it is never converted.  


     15.64.36.12  HARDTEXTURE  - Selects hardware or software texture
     generation.  


     15.64.36.13  JOURNALING  - Turns on or off output to the journal file.  


     15.64.36.14  LISTING  - Turns on or off the output to the listing file.  


     15.64.36.15  LOG  - Turns on or off automatic logging.  Many commands use
     the option LOG to tell you what they are doint.  When logging mode is on
     these commands automatically log teir actions.  For example with LOG=ON
     when you use the MULTIPLY command, it informs you which data sets are
     multiplied.  


     15.64.36.16  MONITOR  - This is the same as using the MONITOR option for
     all commands where it is legal.  For example if MODE MONITOR=ON then when
     you do a fit the result is automatically plotted.  


     15.64.36.17  PROPORTIONAL  - Selects proportional or fixed spacing for the
     text.  


     15.64.36.18  QUICK  - This turns off certain calculations to make plotting
     faster.  One side effect of this is to prevent proper centering or
     justification of titles, and labels.  If you wish both speed and proper
     justification, you can get proper justification for titles with no
     sub/superscripts by:  
          TD:SET MODE PROPORTIONAL=OFF 
             --- ---- ----------------
     Plots can be made still faster by:  
          TD:SET MODE VECTOR=OFF 
             --- ---- ----------
     This only works if your output device has hardware character generation
     for the size characters you select.  


     15.64.36.19  SHOW  - Show mode automatically generates a SHOW command
     after any SET command is used.  


     15.64.36.20  TITLE  - Automatically plots the title of a data set along
     with the data when you use a CONTOUR, HISTOGRAM, JOIN, or PLOT command.
     This is equivalent to specifying TITLE=ON along with the commmand.  





                                      Page 159


                                      COMMANDS
                                        MODE

     15.64.36.21  TRACE  - Produces traceback whenever an error occurrs.  For
     compatability with previous versions NOTRACE is a synonym for TRACE=OFF.  


     15.64.36.22  TREE  - Setting mode TREE=ON is the same as specifying
     TREE=ON for any command that uses this option.  This is used when
     searching HBOOK4 for histograms.  


     15.64.36.23  VECTOR  - VECTOR=ON requires software drawn characters
     instead of hardware chars.  Character generation is slower, but more
     uniform.  Software characters are always drawn when a non blank case
     string is supplied, or if your output device can not produce hardware
     characters in the size selected.  You may request hardware characters by
     setting the title/label size to a negative value.  For compatability with
     previous versions NOVECTOR is a synonym for VECTOR=OFF.  


     15.64.36.24  VLOG  - Enables Video logging.  When you use the cursor a
     Cross will be drawn at the selected cursor location, and a dotted line
     will be drawn around the resulting limits.  


     15.64.37  MONITOR 

     This sets the type of plot each monitor mode produces.  
     SET MONITOR [{ALL|DATA|MESH} {BIN|CONTOUR|JOIN|HISTOGRAM|PLOT "options"}] 
     --  ---       --  --   --     --  --      --   --        --
     The options may be any legitimate options for the type of plot selected.
     If you do not supply any options then the defaults are used.  
                                       example
          TD:SET MONITOR MESH HISTOGRAM "BLOCK" 
             --- ------- ---- --------- -------
     Produces a block or "Lego" plot when you monitor a mesh histogram.  
          TD:SET MONITOR DATA JOIN "1 dots 
             --- ------- ---- ---- -- ----
     Joins normal data sets with single dotted line segments.  
          TD:SET MONITOR DATA PLOT "SYM=5O" MESH JOIN 
             --- ------- ---- ---- -------- ---- ----
     Plots normal data and joins mesh data.  
     (Default:MESH PLOT "NORAN VAR SYM=10" DATA HISTOGRAM "") 


     15.64.38  NAME 

     SET NAME "New data set name" [CONFIRM[=ON|OFF]] [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
     --  --                        --       -- --     ---   --        --
               [SELECT="old name"] 
                ---

     Sets a new name for all the selected data sets.  If no sets are specified,
     then all data set names are modified.  If the name ends in  "%"  then  the
     old name is appended to the new name.  

     Options 
          1.  CONFIRM  -  If  selected  Topdrawer will prompt you for each data
              set.  You repy YES, NO, ALL, or  QUIT.   ALL  will  do  the  rest
              without any more prompts, while QUIT skips all the rest.  


                                      Page 160


                                      COMMANDS
                                        NAME

          2.  SETS - Selects a range of data sets to rename.  
          3.  SELECT  -  Selects  the  data  sets by name.  WIld characters are
              permitted "*" or "%" See:SET EXACT.  
                                       Example
          TD:SET NAME "My data" SET=5 
     Data set number 5 has the new name "My data" 
          TD:SET NAME "My %" SELECT="Your*" 
     All data sets beginning with the name "Your" are renamed to "My Your..." 


     15.64.39  ORDER 

     This sets the order in which data must be entered.  The order is the  same
     as specified in the set order command.  This option remains the same until
     the next SET ORDER or NEW PLOT command.  This has no effect on  mesh  data
     input.  
     SET ORDER [[N][R|D]{X|THETA} [fctr]] [[N][R|D]{Y|RADIUS} [fctr]] [[N][R|
     --  --              - --                       - --
               D]{Z|PHI} [fctr]] [[N][R|D]U [fctr]] [[N][R|D]V [fctr]] [[N][R|
                  - --                    -                  -
               D]W [fctr]] [SYMBOL] [DUMMY[=n]] [PACKED[=ON|OFF]] [PERMANENT] 
                 -          --       ---         --      -- --     --


     15.64.39.1  Options  - 

          1.  X,Y,Z - The data to plot 
          2.  U,V,W - Auxiliary coordinate data 
          3.  DX,DY,...DW  -  The error on the data as half width for the error
              bars.  
          4.  NDX,NDY,...NDW  -  The  negative  half  of the error bar.  If not
              defined then it is the same as the error (DX...).  
          5.  RX,RY,...NRX,...NDW - Errors given relative to the central value.
              (DX=RX*X) 
          6.  RADIUS,DRADIUS,THETA,DTHETA  - Polar coordinates are also enabled
              for the current plot.  
          7.  PHI,DPHI  -  Spherical  coordinates  are  enabled for the current
              plot.  
          8.  RRADIUS,RTHETA,RPHI  -  Errors given relative to a central value.
              If PHI is used SPHERICAL is enabled, otherwise POLAR is enabled. 
          9.  SYMBOL  - The symbol to plot.  This should not be the first item.
              If you need to have the symbol first, then you must use the  READ
              POINTS command, or omit the symbol for the first data point.  
         10.  DUMMY  -  Specifies  this entry is a dummy and should be ignored.
              If n is specified then n entries are ignored.  Only  numbers  are
              ignored.  
         11.  fctr - Is a scale factor to multiply the data by when it is read. 
              (Default:1.0) 
         12.  PACKED  -  Specifies  that  dats is in packed format with several
              points per line and no semicolons ";" between them.  
         13.  PERMANENT - Specifies that this order is permanent until the next
              SET ORDER command.  

     (Default:X 1.0,Y 1.0,DX 1.0,DY 1.0,SYMBOL) 

     If  this  command  is  used  without any options other than PERMANENT, the
     order is set to the default.  Numeric fields preceding the symbol  may  be
     onitted.  


                                      Page 161


                                      COMMANDS
                                       ORDER

     15.64.39.2  Examples  - 
          TD:SET ORDER X,Y,DX,DY,SYMBOL,Z,DZ 
             --- ----- ---------------------
          TD:1,2 1O 3,4,5,6,7 
             --- -- ---------
     Enters  a  point  X=1, Y=2, DX=DY=0, SYMBOL=1O, Z=3, DZ=4 The numbers 5,6,
     and 7 are ignored.  
          SET ORDER X Y PACKED 
          --- ----- - - ------
          1 2 3 4 
          - - - -
     Enters 2 points X=1,Y=2 and X=3,Y=4 
          SET ORDER Y PACKED 
          --- ----- - ------
          1 3 5 
          - - -
          X=0 BY 1 
          --- -- -
     Enters 3 points (0,1), (1,3) and (2,5) 


     15.64.40  OUTLINE 

     This  enables  the outline on each axis.  The outline is the line drawn at
     the edge of the plot.  
     SET {OUTLINE|FRAME} [INHIBIT|ENABLE] [ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT] [ON|OFF] 
     --   --      --      --      --       --  --  --     --    --     -- --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           ----    --    --  --    --   --     --      --
          [NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           ----      --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
          [PERMANENT] 
           --
     This acts on the current plot only if PERMANENT not specified.  To control
     other individual elements of the axes use:  
     SET AXES, SET TICKS, SET LABELS, SET SCALES 

     (Default:ON) 


     15.64.40.1  Options  - 
          1.  INHIBIT|ENABLE  -  inhibits  or  enables  the  automatic  outline
              generation for the current plot or window.  (Default:ENABLE)  You
              may still draw the outline with the PLOT OUTLINE command.  
          2.  ALL - enables outlines for top, bottom, right and left.  
          3.  TOP - enables outline for the TOP of plot 
          4.  BOTTOM - selects outline for the bottom of the plot.  
          5.  RIGHT - selects outline for the right hand side 
          6.  LEFT - selects outline for the left hand side.  
          7.  ON - allows drawing outlines 
          8.  OFF - prevents drawing outlines 
          9.  INTENSITY  -  Sets  line  intensity  or  width (0-5).  0 gets the
              intensity from the SET INTENSITY or SET AXES command.  
         10.  WHITE...  - Sets the line color.  
         11.  SOLID...     -    Sets   the   line   texture.    (Default:SOLID)
              See:Command SET TEXTURE 


                                      Page 162


                                      COMMANDS
                                      OUTLINE

         12.  PERMANENT  -  Makes  the  current settings permanent from plot to
              plot.  



     15.64.41  PATTERN 

     This selects the pattern for patterned lines.  These are produced by JOIN,
     HIST,  PLOT,  or BAR commands.  This option remains the same until changed
     by a SET PATTERN command.  
     SET PATTERN [RANDOM|FUNNY] [DOT] [DASH] [DAASH] [SPACE] [SIZE=n]
     --  ---      --     --      --    --     ---     --      --
               [PERMANENT] 
                --
     SET PATTERN p1 s1 p2 s2 ....p10 s10 
     --  ---

          1.  RANDOM - The distance following this is random.  
          2.  DOT - Draws a single dot followed by a 0.1" space.  
          3.  DASH - Draws a short dash 0.1" long followed by 0.1" space.  
          4.  DAASH - Draws a long dash 0.3" followed by 0.1" space.  
          5.  SPACE - Adds 0.05" of blank space.  
          6.  SIZE=n  -  Size  of  dashes,  and the distance between dashes and
              dots.  
              (Default:0.1) 
          7.  p = distance to draw in inches.  If negative it varies randomly. 
          8.  s = distance to skip in inches.  If negative it varies randomly. 
          9.  PERMANENT - Makes the current SIZE the permanent default.  

     You  may  enter  up  to  a  maximum  of  20  values  or  10 DOT/DASH/DAASH
     specifiers.  Random values vary from zero to the value specified.  You may
     also specify patterns as part of any drawing command.  For example:  
          TD:HISTOGRAM PATTERN DOT DOT DASH 
             --------- ------- --- --- ----
               is the same as ...  
          TD:SET PATTERN DOT DOT DASH;  HISTOGRAM PATTERN 
             --- ------- --- --- -----  --------- -------
               or...  
          TD:HISTOGRAM DOT DOT DASH 
             --------- --- --- ----
     See:Command SET TEXTURE 


     15.64.41.1  Example  - 
          TD:SET PATTERN DOT DOT DASH DASH 
             --- ------- --- --- ---- ----
               or...  
          TD:SET PATTERN 0.,.1,0.,.1,.1,.1,.1,.1 
             --- ------- -----------------------
     is a dot,dot,dash,dash pattern 
          TD:SET PATTERN DOT DOT SPACE 
             --- ------- --- --- -----
               or...  
          TD:SET PATTERN 0,.1,0,.15 
             --- ------- ----------
     is an assymmetrical dot,dot pattern.  
          TD:SET PATTERN .3,.1,.1,.1 
             --- ------- -----------


                                      Page 163


                                      COMMANDS
                                      PATTERN

               or...  
          TD:SET PATTERN DAASH DASH 
             --- ------- ----- ----
     is a long,short dash pattern.  
          TD:SET PATTERN -.2,.1 
             --- ------- ------
     is a dash pattern where the dash varies in length from 0.0 to 0.2 
          TD:SET PATTERN RANDOM DOT 
             --- ------- ------ ---
               or...  
          TD:SET PATTERN 0.0,-0.1 
             --- ------- --------
     is a randomly spaced dot pattern.  
          TD:SET PATTERN RANDOM DOT DASH 
             --- ------- ------ --- ----
               or...  
          TD:SET PATTERN 0,-.1,.1,.1 
             --- ------- -----------
     is a random dot,fixed dash pattern.  
          TD:SET PATTERN SIZE=.05 DOT DASH 
             --- ------- -------- --- ----
               or...  
          TD:SET PATTERN 0,.05,.05,.05 
             --- ------- -------------
     is a small dot dash pattern.  


     15.64.42  PAUSE 

          SET PAUSE|WAIT [ON|OFF] 
              ---   --    -- --
     Pause  is  normally  set  on  for  interactive  devices,  and  off for non
     interactive.  The Pause occurrs at each NEW PLOT command inside  an  input
     file, or when deferred errors must be typed.  


     15.64.43  PEN 

     This selects the default Calcomp plotter  pens  or  the  color.   This  is
     effective only for the current plot, or until another SET COLOR or SET PEN
     command.  
          SET PEN 1|2|3|4|5|6|7 
          --  --

     See:Command SET COLOR 

     (Default:1) 

     If no pen number is specified it is set to 1.  


     15.64.44  POLAR 

     SET POLAR [ON|OFF] [DEGREES|RADIANS|GRAD|PERCENT|FULLCIRCLE=n] [PERMANENT] 
     --  --     -- --    --      --      --   ----    --             ----

     This  sets  up  to plot in polar coordinates.  Coordinates are (R,THETA,Z)
     instead of (X,Y,Z)  In  addition  you  may  select  the  scale  for  angle


                                      Page 164


                                      COMMANDS
                                       POLAR

     representaton.   This  affects not only the plotting of data, but also the
     FFT and TRANSFORM commands.  
          1.  ON|OFF turn the polar coordinates on or off.  (Default:ON) 
          2.  PERMANENT - Sets these parameters permanently.  
          3.  DEGREES...  - Selects angle representation (Default:DEGREES) 
              A.  GRAD - (0-400) 
              B.  DEGREES - (0-360) 
              C.  PERCENT - (0-100) 
              D.  RADIANS - (0-6.2831853) 
              E.  FULLCIRCLE=n - (0-n) 

     This  feature is not fully implemented.  You still set the limits in X,Y,Z
     coordinates, and automatic scaling centers the origin.  When you plot, the
     axes  are  not  automatically  generated if polar coordinates are on.  You
     must manually plot the axes with the command:  PLOT AXES.  If you wish the
     X and Y axes to be scaled the same way you should.  
          TD:SET LIMITS SCALE 
             --- ------ -----
     See commands:X,SET ORDER,SET STORAGE,SET SPHERICAL 

                                       Example

          TD:SET POLAR FULL=1.0 
             --- ----- --------
     Angles represented by a number from 0 to 1.0 range from 0 to 360 degrees. 


     15.64.45  PROMPT 

     SET    PROMPT    [MAIN|PAUSE]   [ERASE]   [TOP]   [BOTTOM]   [BELL]   [nn]
     --     --         --   --        --        --      --         --
               ["prompt_string"] 

     This sets the current prompt string with a maximum of 80 characters.  If a
     null or blank string is used, then there is no prompt.  If  a  prompt  has
     imbedded  blanks it must be enclosed in quotes.  The prompt string remains
     the same until a new one is selected.  
          1.  MAIN - Is the main prompt string.  
              (Default:"TD:") 
          2.  PAUSE - Is the prompt string used when a NEW PLOT is started.  
              (Default:"PAUSE:") 
          3.  ERASE  -  The  prompt  erases  the  screen (ANSI terminal).  This
              erases text from a VT-1xx/2xx compatible terminal.  This does not
              erase  TEKTRONIX  graphics,  but  REGIS  graphics will be erased.
              This must be precede the string.  
          4.  TOP - The prompt is at the top of the screen (ANSI terminal).  
          5.  BOTTOM  -  The  prompt  is  at  the  bottom  of  the screen (ANSI
              terminal).  
          6.  BELL - This rings the bell for each prompt.  
          7.  nn - This inserts a control character (0-255) into the string.  
          8.  

     This  command  is useful for controlling the prompt for different types of
     terminals.  On some terminals you can control the position of the  prompt,
     so  that it will not interfere with the plot, while on others, you may not
     want any prompts.  




                                      Page 165


                                      COMMANDS
                                       PROMPT

     15.64.45.1  Examples  - 
          TD:SET PROMPT MAIN TOPDRAWER:  PAUSE " " 
             --- ------ ---- ----------  ----- - -
     Changes the main prompt and sets no prompt for pause.  
          TD:SET PROMPT MAIN "TD: " 
             --- ------ ---- ---- -
     This puts a space at the end of the prompt.  
          TD:SET PROMPT MAIN=TOP "TD:" 
             --- ------ -------- -----
               or...  
          TD:SET PROMPT MAIN=27,"[f",27,"[KTD:" 
             --- ------ -----------------------
     Puts  the  prompt  at  the  top  of  an ANSI (VT100 etc.) terminal for the
     prompt.  


     15.64.46  REVISION 

          SET REVISION=n.m 
          --  --
     Sets the current revision level.  This affects the operation of TOPDRAWER.
     By lowering the revision level you may return to old  behavior.   Some  of
     the old revision levels are:  
       *  1.0 - Original version 
       *  2.0 - SET THREE THETA modified to conform to documentation.  
       *  2.2 - X= SET=n FROM=n1 TO=n2...  Worked incorrectly if n>1.  


     15.64.47  SECONDARY 

     SET SECONDARY 
     --  ---
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           --    --  --    --   --     --      --
          [NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           ---       --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --


     15.64.48  SEGMENTS 

     SET SEGMENTS [ALL |AXES |LABELS |OULINE |POINTS |PLOTS |TICKS |TITLES
     --  ---       --   --    --      --      --      --     ---    ---
               =[ON|OFF]] 
                 -- --
     Breaks the selected objects into separate segments.  Each segment is
     immediately flushed.  


     15.64.49  SCALE 

     This selects the scales to use.  To select the range of data to plot
     See:Command SET LIMITS.  
          SET SCALE {X|Y|Z|ALL} 
          --  --     - - - --
               [LINEAR] [MONTHS] [YEARS] [DAYS|TIME|HOURS|MINUTES|SECONDS]
                ---      --       --      --   --   --    --      --


                                      Page 166


                                      COMMANDS
                                       SCALE

                    [POWER[=n]|ROOT[=n]] [USER=[n1[,n2,...n10]]] 
                     --        --         --
               [LABELS|TICKS=n [LONG|SHORT|NONE]] 
                --     --       --   --    --
               [NORMAL [MEAN=x] [DEVIATION=s] ] 
                --      --       --
               [[-]LOGARITHMIC] 
                   --
                    [LABELS=n1,n2... [EXPONENTIAL[=ON|OFF]][NONE]] 
                     --               --           -- --    --
                    [TICKS=n1,n2... [LONG|SHORT|ALL|NONE]] 
                     --              --   --    --  --
                    [DECADES=n] [SUBTICKS=n] 
                     --          --
               [REVERSE[=ON|OFF]] [BASE=n] [PERMANENT] 
                --       -- --     --       --
     To control other individual elements of the axes use:  
     SET AXES, SET TICKS, SET LABELS, SET OUTLINE 
     (Default:ALL LINEAR LABELS=6 TICKS=5) 


     15.64.49.1  X|Y|Z|ALL  - Selects which axis to set.  You may set all three
     axes with one set axes command.  


     15.64.49.2  BASE       - 
          BASE=n - Selects the base for the plot.  
       *  LINEAR  this  is useful for non-decimal units.  The labeled ticks are
          put at locations BASE*ROUND*POWER where:  
               POWER = a power of 10 1,10,100 
               ROUND = 1.0,1.0,2.5, or 5.0 
       *  LOG  scaling  large  ticks  are  put  at  powers  of  the base.  This
          determines where ticks are put.  BASE 2 would put labels at 1, 2,  4,
          8, 16,....  If exponential notation is selected then the base is used
          in the notation.  


     15.64.49.3  DAYS       - Values are the number of days from the base date.
     See:Command SET SCALE TIME 


     15.64.49.4  LABELS     - This  selects  the  maximum  number of ticks with
     labels.  For more information See:LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC.  


     15.64.49.5  LINEAR     - Linear scale is used 
       *  LABELS - maximum number of big ticks with labels.  (Default:6) 
       *  TICKS  -  number  of  subintervals  with unlabeled ticks.  SHORT|LONG
          determine  whether  the  unlabeled  ticks  are  short  or  long.   If
          unspecified SHORT is assumed.  
          (Default:5 SHORT) 
     If TICKS=1 then there are no unlabeled ticks.  








                                      Page 167


                                      COMMANDS
                                       SCALE

     15.64.49.6  LOGARITHMIC   - Log scale is used.  Each decade may be divided
     into  subintervals  corresponding  to  the  leading  digit  of  the  scale
     (1,2...,9).  -LOGARITHMIC generates a log scale for negative values.  
       *  LABELS=n1,n2..   -  Specify  which  subintervals  within a decade are
          labeled (2-9).  ALL labels all  subintervals  while  NONE  labels  no
          subintervals.  If you specify NONE then no subintervals are labelled.
          If EXPONENTIAL is specified exponential notation is used.  
       *  TICKS=n1...   -  specifies  which  subintervals  have unlabeled ticks
          (2-9).  ALL puts ticks on all subintervals while NONE draws no ticks.
          SHORT|LONG  determine  whether  labelled ticks are short or long.  If
          unspecified LONG is assumed.   Labelled  ticks  at  each  decade  are
          always long.  
       *  DECADES=n  - (1 to 31) Specifies how often decades are labelled.  For
          example DECADES=2 labels every other decade.  
       *  SUBTICKS=n   -   (0-9)   Specifies  how  many  subticks  are  between
          subinterval ticks.  If n is greater than 0 then long ticks are  drawn
          at for each interval and n short subticks are drawn in between.  
     If  unspecified  labels,  and  ticks  are  picked  for "pleasing" results.
     Generally if less than one half decade is plotted  the  rules  for  making
     linear  scales  and  ticks  are  followed.   Otherwise a maximum of 6 or 7
     labels are produced.  Exponential notation is only used  if  specified  or
     when  the  the  label  would  exceed  6  digits or more than 3 decades are
     plotted.  


     15.64.49.7  MINUTES    - Values  are  the  number of minutes from the base
     date.  See:Command SET SCALE TIME.  


     15.64.49.8  MONTHS     - This  selects  labels  of  the form Jan, Feb etc.
     This invokes a special scale where Noon Jan 1=1.01 An entire day  is  from
     1.005 to 1.015.  1,13,25 are labeled January.  2,14 is February and so on.
     No year titles are generated.  Every 4'th year is a  leap  year  with  366
     days.   Year  1,2,3  are non leap years while years 4,8,12 are leap years.
     The current year is number 1.  
          1.  LABELS  -  The  value  n  specifies the maximum number of labels.
              SHORT,LONG generate either 1 Letter labels or 3 Letter labels.  
              (Default:1) 
          2.  TICKS - Specify the maximum number of small ticks between labels.
              SHORT,LONG specify either long or short ticks.  
              (Default:6 SHORT) 


     15.64.49.9  NORMAL     - The  scale is in units of standard deviation from
     the center of a normal curve.  MEAN, DEVIATION set the center,  and  width
     of the normal curve.  


     15.64.49.10  POWER|ROOT  - This sets the scale to be the selected power or
     root.  N must be in the range 0.1 to 100.  If n is  not  specified  it  is
     assumed  to  be  2.   The  sign of the axes is preserved to avoid multiple
     values.  The rules for determining ticks and labels are the  same  as  for
     linear scales.  

                                       Example
          TD:SET SCALE Y ROOT=3 
             --- ----- - ------
     Y is scaled as Y'=SIGN(ABS(Y)**(1/3),Y) 


                                      Page 168


                                      COMMANDS
                                       SCALE

          TD:SET SCALE X POWER=2 
             --- ----- - -------
     X is scaled as X'=SIGN(ABS(X)**2,X) 


     15.64.49.11  REVERSE    - If  this is specified before any data is plotter
     it makes the scale go from large to small rather than small to large.  For
     example  the limits on the x scale are 0.0 and 1.1.  The left hand side of
     the X axis would be 0.0 and the right would be  1.0.   REVERSE  makes  the
     left hand side 1.0 and the right hand side 0.0.  

     If this is specified for 3-d plots after the data is plotted, it moves the
     origin  of  the axes to the other side of the specified axis.  For example
     the following will plot axes along the sides of a 3-d cube.  
          TD:plot axes 
             ---- ----
          TD:set scale x reverse y reverse;plot axes 
             --- ----- - ------- - ------------ ----
          TD:set scale x reverse=off y reverse z reverse;plot axes 
             --- ----- - ----------- - ------- - ------------ ----
          TD:set scale x reverse=on y reverse=off;plot axes 
             --- ----- - ---------- - ---------------- ----


     15.64.49.12  SECONDS    - Values  are  the number of seconds from the base
     date.  See:Command SET SCALE TIME 


     15.64.49.13  TICKS      - This  selects  the  maximum  number of unlabeled
     ticks.  This varies with the type of scale selected.  For more  inforation
     see:LINEAR or LOGARITHMIC.  


     15.64.49.14  TIME-HOURS   - Values  are  the number of hours from the base
     date.    Normally   date/time   may   be   expressed   as   YYY\MM\DD   or
     YYY\MM\DD\HH:MM:SS.SS  or HH:MM:SS.SS.  This is translated into the number
     of hours from the base date.  See:Command SET DATE.  You may have the axes
     labels  in  date/time format by selecting either a time or hour scale.  If
     the time is stored as seconds,minutes, or days then  you  may  select  the
     scale appropriately.  


     15.64.49.15  USER       - 
          USER=n1,n1...  specifies the type of user scale.  This is only useful
     if you supply your own scaling routines.  n1 is the scale type.   n2...n10
     are values passed to the user routine.  The user function is called:  
          Value=TDFNCT(X,SCALE) 
     X is the value to rescale.  
     SCALE(10) is the array of values n1...n10.  
     For example a log scale would be:  TDFNCT=ALOG(X) 


     15.64.49.16  YEARS      - Values   are  given  by  year  and  Julian  day.
     YEAR+DAY*.001 

                                       Example
     Jan 1 1976=1976.001 



                                      Page 169


                                      COMMANDS
                                       SCALE

          1.  LABELS - Specifies the maximum number of labelled years.  
              (Default:6) 
          2.  TICKS   -  Specifies  the  maximum  number  of  ticks  per  year.
              SHORT,LONG specify either long or short ticks.  


     15.64.49.17  PERMANENT  - sets  the  values  permanently  for  the current
     axis.  Other axes are not affected.  Any values specified to the right  of
     the option permanent are not set permanently.  


     15.64.49.18  Example    - 
          TD:SET SCALE X LOG Y LINEAR 
             --- ----- - --- - ------
     Sets the X scale to logarithmic, and Y to linear.  
          TD:SET SCALE X LOG SCALE 1,5 TICKS 2,3,4,6,7,8,9 
             --- ----- - --- ----- --- ----- -------------
     This  sets  the  log  scales on the X axis so that labels will be drawn at
     1,10,100...  and 5,50,500...   All  subintervals  will  have  small  ticks
     2,3,4,6,7,8,9,20,30,40,60....  
          TD:SET SCALE X LINEAR LABELS=10 TICKS=8 LONG 
             --- ----- - ------ --------- ------- ----
     Selects  a  linear  scale for X with a maximum of 10 labelled ticks, and a
     maximum of 8 unlabelled ticks.  All ticks will be the same length.  
          TD:SET SCALE ALL LOG Z LINEAR 
             --- ----- --- --- - ------
     Sets X,Y scales logarithmic, and Z linear.  
          TD:SET SCALE ALL LOG 
             --- ----- --- ---
     Sets all scales logarithmic.  


     15.64.50  SHADOW 

     This causes a 3-d plot to be shadowed onto the back side where the grid is
     drawn.  
     SET SHADOW [ALL[=ON|OFF]] [SYMBOL[=ON|OFF]] [Y|X!Z[=ON|OFF]] [XY|YZ|
     --  ---     --   -- --     --      -- --     - - -  -- --     -- --
               ZX[=ON|OFF]] 
               --  -- --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           ----    --    --  --    --   --     --      ---
          [NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           ----      --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
          [PERMANENT] 
           --

     To produce shadowing you must select at least one plane to shadow the plot
     in (XY,YZ,ZX).  


     15.64.50.1  Options  - 

          1.  ALL - Turns on or off all shadowing options.  
          2.  SYMBOL - Shadows the symbol.  



                                      Page 170


                                      COMMANDS
                                       SHADOW

          3.  X - Draws lines from point to back plane along the X axis.  
          4.  Y - Draws lines from point to back plane along the Y axis.  
          5.  Z - Draws lines from point to back plane along the Z axis.  
          6.  :XY - Shadows in XY plane.  
          7.  YZ - Shadows in YZ plane when THREE=ON.  
          8.  ZX - Shadows in ZX plane when THREE=ON.  
          9.  INTENSITY  -  Sets  line  intensity  or  width (0-5).  0 gets the
              intensity from the SET INTENSITY or SET AXES command.  
         10.  WHITE...  - Sets the line color.  (Default:Same as axes) 
         11.  SOLID...   -  Sets  the  line  texture.   (Default:Same  as axes)
              See:Command SET TEXTURE.  
         12.  SYMBOL  -  Draws  a symbol [sym] to be plotted at intersection of
              vertical and horizontal lines.  (Default:sym=0O) 
         13.  PERMANENT  -  Sets the current shadow options permanently for all
              NEW plots.  
     If  no  options are specified, then all shadow parameters are reset to the
     original defaults.  
     (Default:ALL=OFF) 


     15.64.50.2  Example  - 
          TD:SET SHADOW DOTS YZ ZX X SYM 
             --- ------ ---- -- -- - ---
     This  shadows  the  PLOT in 2 planes.  The plot symbol will be shadowed in
     both planes.  In addition a dotted line parallel to X will be  drawn  from
     the point to the YZ plane.  


     15.64.51  SHIELD 

     Sets  an area to be shielded.  Nothing may be drawn inside this area while
     shielded.  
     SET SHIELD [=n] [OFF] [DAtA|TExT] [FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[Y=]ny,[Z=]nz]]
     --  --           --    ---------- ---    --   -      -      -
               [CURSOR] 
                --

          1.  n - The shield number between 1 and 4.  If unspecified the next
              available shield is used.  

          2.  OFF - Turns the n'th shield off.  If n is not specied all
              shielded areas are turned off.  

          3.  FROM|TO - Allows you to specify the limit of the shielded area.
              If no limits are specified the current window is shielded.  

          4.  DATA - Specifies the limit in data coordinates.  

          5.  TEXT - Specifies the limit in text coordinates.  

          6.  CURSOR - You use the cursor to specify the limits.  

                                       example
          TD:SET SHIELD FROM 1,2 to 3,5 
     Sets a shielded area in text coordinates.  
          TD:SET SHIELD DATA FROM Y=5 
     Shield all data from Y=5 for all X values.  



                                      Page 171


                                      COMMANDS
                                        SIZE

     15.64.52  SIZE 

     This sets the physical size of the plot.  Once set it remains the same
     until a new SET SIZE command is issued.  This command should only be used
     immediately after a NEW PLOT command or a SET DEVICE command.  It may not
     be used after any commands that plot data.  
     SET SIZE [[X=]x [BY|Y=] y] 
     --  --     -     -- -
          [UNITS=units] [CM|CENTIMETERS|MM|MILLIMTERS|METERS|INCHES] 
           --            -- --          -- --         --     --
          [MAGNIFY|REDUCE=factor] 
           --      --
          [SIDEWAYS|ROTATED|NORMAL|ORIENTATION=n] 
           --       --      --     --
          [MARGINS=[nl,[nr,[nb,[nt]]]]] [LEFT=n] [RIGHT=n] [BOTTOM=n] [TOP=n] 
           --                            --       --        --         --
     If no options are specified the sizes are reset to the defaults.  
     (Default:NORMAL 13 by 10 inches MARGINS=0) 


     15.64.52.1  X,y   - Set the overall size of the plot The final size is the
     selected size plus the margins.  The actual size of the  plot  depends  on
     the  device  you  are using.  The x,y are the size of the TEXT system.  If
     the final size plus margins is  larger  than  the  physical  size  of  the
     display,  the  plot is automatically reduced to fit.  If the final size is
     smaller than the physical size of the device, the  plot  plus  margins  is
     centered.  


     15.64.52.2  UNITS   - Sets  the  units of x and y.  For example UNITS=2.54
     sets the units to centimeters.  This changes only the position units.  All
     character  sizes  are still measured in tenths of an inch.  If you wish to
     set the units without changing the size of the plot or you wish to  change
     the character size measurement use the command SET UNITS 


     15.64.52.3  CM....   - This sets the units to a standard set of units.  


     15.64.52.4  MAGNIFY|REDUCE  - Magnifies or reduces the overall plot by the
     specified factor.  This modifies the entire plot including  the  character
     sizes.   If  the requested final size is too big for the device, REDUCE is
     automatically set to  a  value  smaller  than  1.   The  magnification  or
     reduction is limited to the range 1.0E-5 to 1.0E+5.  

                                       example
          TD:SET SIZE REDUCE=2 
             --- ---- --------
               or...  
          TD:SET SIZE MAGNIFY=0.5 
             --- ---- -----------
     reduce the plot from 13 by 10 to 6.5 by 5.0 inches in size.  








                                      Page 172


                                      COMMANDS
                                        SIZE

     15.64.52.5  ORIENTATION  - This is an integer value from 0 to 3 specifying
     the orientation of the plot.  
         ***  0 Normal orientation 
         ***  1 Rotated 90 degrees clockwise.  This is the same as sideways.  X
              goes from top to bottom, while Y points to the right.  
         ***  2 Rotated 180 degrees or Upside down 
         ***  3 Rotated 270 degrees clockwise, appropriate for TeX 


     15.64.52.6  SIDEWAYS   - Rotates  the  entire  plot  by  90  degrees.   If
     SIDEWAYS was specified by SET DEVICE, the  plot  is  already  rotated,  in
     which case NORMAL will rotate it back.  


     15.64.52.7  MARGINS   - Sets  the left,right,bottom, and top margins.  Any
     unspecified margins are set equal to the left margin.  If no  margins  are
     specified then all margins are set to zero.  


     15.64.52.8  LEFT|RIGHT|TOP|BOTTOM  - Sets just the specified margin.  


     15.64.52.9  Examples  - 
          TD:SET SIZE 10 BY 13 SIDEWAYS 
             --- ---- -- -- -- --------
               or...  
          TD:SET SIZE X=10 Y=13 SIDEWAYS 
             --- ---- ---- ---- --------
     This  rotates the normal plot from landscape to portrait and uses the full
     page.  
          TD:SET SIZE Y=13 
             --- ---- ----
     Sets Y to 13 while leaving X at the previous settting.  
          TD:SET SIZE SIDEWAYS 
             --- ---- --------
     This rotates the plot and it occupies 13 by 10.  
          TD:SET SIZE 6.0 BY 9.0 SIDEWAYS MARGINS=1.15,.65,.775,.775 
             --- ---- --- -- --- -------- --------------------------
     This  sets  the size and margins to produce a 1.5" margin on the left, and
     1" on all other sides for a portrait plot on the VERSATEC.  
          TD:SET SIZE 9.0 BY 13.5 SIDEWAYS MARGINS=1.725,.975 
             --- ---- --- -- ---- -------- ------------------
     This  sets  the size and margins to produce a 1.5" margin on the left, and
     1" on all other sides for a portrait plot on the VERSATEC.   This  example
     uses  a  9 by 13.5 drawing space instead of a 6 by 9 space.  There will be
     an automatic reduction of .666667.  


     15.64.53  SPHERICAL 

     SET POLAR [ON|OFF] [RADIANS|DEGREES|FULLCIRCLE=n|GRAD] [PEERMANENT] 
     --  --     -- --    --      --      --           --     --

     This  sets  up to plot in spherical coordinates.  (THETA,R,PHI) instead of
     (X,Y,Z).  The data in X is now interpreted as THETA, Y is intepreted as  R
     and Z is intepreted as PHI.  The data is not modified, just reinterpreted. 
          R=sqrt(X**2=Y**2+Z**2) 
          THETA=ATAN2(Y,X) 


                                      Page 173


                                      COMMANDS
                                     SPHERICAL

          PHI=ATAN2(sqrt(x**2+Y**2),Z) 

     NOTE:   There  is  no  universally  accepted  convention for THETA or PHI.
     Various books use different conventons.  I have adopted a convention  that
     gives THETA the same definition in both spherical and polar coordinates.  

          1.  ON|OFF turn the spherical coordinates on or off.  (Default:ON) 
          2.  PERMANENT - Sets these parameters permanently.  
          3.  DEGREES...  - Selects angle representation (Default:DEGREES) 
              A.  GRAD - (0-400) 
              B.  DEGREES - (0-360) 
              C.  PERCENT - (0-100) 
              D.  RADIANS - (0-6.2831853) 
              E.  FULLCIRCLE=n - (0-n) 

     You  still  set  the  limits  in  X,Y,Z coordinates, and automatic scaling
     centers the origin.   When  you  plot,  the  axes  are  not  automatically
     generated  if  spherical  coordinates  are on.  You must manually plot the
     axes with the command:  PLOT AXES.  


     15.64.54  STATISTICS 

     SET STATISTICS 
     --  ---
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
     This sets the range of data used by the lexicals.  If any changes are made
     to the data you need to use this command again.  


     15.64.54.1  LIMITED   - Limits  the  data to the specified range.  For 3-d
     data the limit on the dependent variable is ignored.  If  limits  are  not
     specified,     the     default     is    the    current    plot    limits.
     See:Command SET LIMITS.  
          1.  X - Specifies X limit 
          2.  Y - Specifies Y limit 
          3.  Z - Specifies the Z limit 
          4.  CURSOR  - Brings up the cursor.  You move it to the X,Y value you
              wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to  enter  X
              or Y to enter Y.  
          5.  RECURSOR - The cursor enters both limits.  
                   TD:SET STATISTICS LIMITED RECURSOR 
                      --- ---------- ------- --------
                        is the same as...  
                   TD:SET STATISTICS LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR 
                      --- ---------- ------- ---- ------ -- ------



                                      Page 174


                                      COMMANDS
                                     STATISTICS

          6.  VLOG  -  Draws  a cross when you press the space bar, and draws a
              dotted line around the final limits.  


     15.64.54.2  LINES|ROWS   - For  3-d plots specifies which lines or rows of
     the mesh data to use.  


     15.64.54.3  POINTS|COLUMNS  - This specifies which points to use.  For 3-d
     this is the range of column numbers.  


     15.64.54.4  SETS  - This specifies which data set to use.  


     15.64.55  STORAGE 

     This defines what is kept in storage.  SET ORDER automatically  calls  SET
     STORAGE  if  room  for extra data is needed.  This option remains the same
     until changed by a SET ORDER or SET STORAGE command.  The VAX uses virtual
     memory, so the actual amount of storage is not not limited, but expands as
     needed.  If you have a virtual memory allocation failure, you may  prevent
     it  by preallocating the needed memory with the SIZE option.  If you still
     get memory allocation failures, ask your system manager  to  increase  the
     available virtual memory.  
     SET STORAGE [ALL] [[N][R|D]X|THETA] [[N][R|D]Y|RADIUS] [[N][R|D]Z|PHI]
     --  ---      --            - --              - --               - --
               [[N][R|D]U] [[N][R|D]V] [[N][R|D]W] [SYMBOL] 
                        -           -           -   --
          [SIZE=n] 
           --

     (Default:SYMBOL,X,Y,DX,DY) 

     ALL selects all coordinates.  If this command is used without any options,
     the storage is reset to the default.   If  all  3  coordinates  X,Y,Z  are
     included in storage, 3-d plots are turned on.  

     If  DX,  the  error  on X, is selected then X is also selected.  If NDX is
     selected  then  both  DX  and  X  are  selected.   Likewise   DY,DZ,..DPHI
     automatically select Y....PHI.  SYMBOL, X and Y are always included in the
     storage.  All other variables must be declared.  

     The  NDX  is  the  negative half of the error bar while DX is the positive
     half.  If NDX is not in stoage then DX specifies both  halves.   Similarly
     NDY and NDZ are the negative halves of the Y,Z error bars.  

     If  THETA  is specified polar coordinates are enabled permanently.  If PHI
     is specified spherical coordinates are enabled.  

     SIZE=n  allows  you to pick the number of words of storage to allocate for
     the VAX.  This is not necessary, but  it  may  save  time  since  you  may
     preallocate  the  storage  and avoid multiple automatic storage expansion.
     Normally the amount of storage needed for  regular  data  is  about  n*d+4
     where  n  is  the  number  of  points  and  d is the number of coordinates
     available  in  storage  (SYMBOL,X,DX,Y,DY,....).   For  mesh  data  it  is
     ((n+1)*(m+1)+4)*d+4  where  n and m are the mesh dimensions and d is 1 for
     regular mesh data or 2 for data with errors.  If you have a name  for  the


                                      Page 175


                                      COMMANDS
                                      STORAGE

     data set it takes up 1 storage location for every 4 characters.  

                                       Example
          TD:SET STORAGE X Y SYMBOL 
             --- ------- - - ------
     To see the current storage use the command:  SHOW STORAGE.  
          TD:SET STORAGE SIZE=<4+101*201+20> 
             --- ------- -------------------
     Preallocates storage for a 100 by 200 mesh with an 80 character name.  


     15.64.56  SYMBOL 

     This selects the default symbol 
     SET SYMBOL "xx" [SIZE=n] [THETA=n] [PHI=n] [ANGLE=n] [PERMANENT] 
     --  --           --       --        --      --        --
     If no parameters are specified the symbol and size are set to NONE  and  2
     and  the  angles are turned off.  In other words SET SYMBOL is the same as
     SET SYMBOL=NONE SIZE=2.  

     This  command  determines the symbol plotted data that have no symbol.  If
     you SET SYMBOL before reading data the symbol is assumed for the data  you
     are reading.  See:Command READ POINTS and PLOT.  


     15.64.56.1  Xx   - is the symbol to plot 0O to 9O or any duplex character.
     DOT or "  " produces a dot.  The second character in the xx  pair  selects
     the  case or font to use.  Only plot symbols 0O to 9O are guaranteed to be
     properly centered.  If no symbol is desired specify NONE.  


     15.64.56.2  ANGLE   - Specifies  the  orientation angle of the symbol in a
     plot of 3-d data.  This is the rotation angle around the axis specified by
     THETA and PHI.  


     15.64.56.3  SIZE   - is  the  size  in  tenths  of  an inch If the size is
     negative then it is adjusted automatically by the window size.  The  units
     may be modified by SET UNITS CHARACTER.  
     (Default:2) 


     15.64.56.4  THETA  - Specifies the polar angle of the normal to the symbol
     in a plot of 3-d data.  


     15.64.57  PERMANENT 

     Makes  the  current  symbol  the  permanent  default.  Normally a NEW PLOT
     command resets the symbol to the permanent default.  


     15.64.57.1  PHI   - Specifies  the  azimuthal  angle  of the normal to the
     symbol in a plot of 3-d data.  A negative value  makes  the  symbols  plot
     with  the  normal  perpendicular  to  the  screen.  In other words you are
     looking normally at the symbol for a negative value.  




                                      Page 176


                                      COMMANDS
                                     PERMANENT

     15.64.57.2  3-d   - If  you  plot  3-d data and PHI is greater than 0, the
     symbol is oriented according to the specified THETA, PHI, and ANGLE.  


     15.64.57.3  Example  - 
          TD:SET SYMBOL "$" SIZE=3.5 
             --- ------ --- --------
     plots dollar signs .35 inches in size.  
          TD:SET SYMBOL 0O SIZE=10 
             --- ------ -- -------
     plots "X" 1 inch high.  
          TD:SET SYMBOL GF 
             --- ------ --
     plots uppercase Greek Gammas.  See:FONTS 
          TD:SET SYMBOL 0O PHI=0 ANGLE=45 
             --- ------ -- ----- --------
     plot crosses with the arms along the X,Y axes 
          TD:SET SYMBOL 0O PHI=90 THETA=90 ANGLE=45 
             --- ------ -- ------ -------- --------
     plot crosses with the arms along the X,Z axes 


     15.64.58  TEXTURE 

     SET TEXTURE|STRUCTURE [SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|
     --  --      ---        --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --
               SPACE] 
               --
          [PERMANENT] 
           --
     This sets the default texture of a line drawn by a BOX,  CIRCLE,  ELLIPSE,
     DIAMOND,  PLOT,  BAR,  JOIN,  or  HIST command.  To set the Texture of the
     axes, ticks, or outline See:Command SET AXIS, SET OUTLINE, or  SET  TICKS.
     You may also specify the texture with any command that draws.  For example
     you may JOIN DOTS or JOIN PATTERN and so on.  

          1.  SOLID - Solid line 
          2.  DOTS - Dotted line 
          3.  DASHES - Short dashed line 
          4.  DAASHES - Long dashed line (3x) 
          5.  DOTDASH - Dot-dash line 
          6.  SPACE - Adds an extra space between dots/dashes 
          7.  PATTERNED - Line determined by SET PATTERN.  
          8.  FUNNY  -  is  a  dot  at  the ends of each line segment.  This is
              generally only useful for joined and smoothed curves.  
          9.  PERMANENT - Sets the current texture to be the permanent default. 

     (Default:SOLID) 

     If  no  options  are  specified  it  is  set to SOLID.  When a new plot is
     started the texture is set to the permanent default.  

     If you specify more than 1 texture option, or use the option PATTERN, then
     a patterned texture is assumed and the pattern is generated.   When  FUNNY
     precedes any other texture specifier then it is generated randomly.  





                                      Page 177


                                      COMMANDS
                                      TEXTURE

     15.64.58.1  Example  - 
          TD:SET TEXTURE DAASH 
             --- ------- -----
     This generates a "hardware" texture or long dashes.  
          TD:SET TEXTURE DOT DOT DASH 
             --- ------- --- --- ----
               or...  
          TD:SET PATTERN DOT DOT DASH;  SET TEXTURE PATTERN 
             --- ------- --- --- -----  --- ------- -------
     This  is  a  dot-dot-dash  texture,  which  is  also set to be the current
     pattern.  
          TD:SET TEXTURE DOT FUNNY DASH 
             --- ------- --- ----- ----
               or...  
          TD:SET PATTERN DOT RANDOM DASH;  SET TEXTURE PATTERN 
             --- ------- --- ------ -----  --- ------- -------
     This is a uniformly spaced dot 0.1" followed by a random length dash.  
          TD:SET TEXTURE PATTERN DASH;  JOIN 
             --- ------- ------- -----  ----
               or...  
          TD:SET PATTERN DASH;  SET TEXTURE PATTERN;  JOIN 
             --- ------- -----  --- ------- --------  ----
     Sets  the  texture  to  be  a  patterned  dash.   This will produce device
     independent pictures, but they will be slower than:  
          TD:SET TEXTURE DASH;  JOIN 
             --- ------- -----  ----
               or...  
          TD:JOIN DASH 
             ---- ----


     15.64.59  THREE 

     This  sets  parameters  for 3-dimensional plots and turns ON 3-d graphics.
                                                               --
     Essentially you must set up the viewpoint for 3-D.  The plot is seen by an
     observer  through  a  "screen"  or window.  The location of the screen and
     observers eye may be specified.  
     SET THREE [ON|OFF|AUTOMATIC]] 
     --  --     -- --  --
          [CENTER=x,y,z] 
           --
          [VERTICAL=xv,yv,zv] 
           --
          [DIRECTION=xv,yv,zv] [THETA=angle] [PHI=angle] 
           ---                  --            --
          [DISTANCE|RDISTANCE=n] [SCRD=n] 
           ---      ---           --
          [REDUCE|MAGNIFY=n] 
           --     --
          [ORIGIN=x,y,z] 
           --
          [SEPARATION=s|LEFT|RIGHT|MIDDLE] 
           --           --   --    --
          [WORLD=x [BY] y [BY] z] 
           --       --     --
          [XAXIS|YAXIS|ZAXIS=angle] 
           --    --    --


                                      Page 178


                                      COMMANDS
                                       THREE

          [PERMANENT] 
           --

     NOTE:   The  actual  view  also depends on the window size selected by SET
     WINDOW.  


                                       WARNING
                                       -------

          If  this  command  is  issued in between 2 plots overlaying each
          other, they will not have the same scales.  




     15.64.59.1  Options  - 
          1.  CENTER=x,y,z  -  Is  the  center of the 3-d view.  This moves the
              plot around.  
          2.  DIRECTION=xv,yv,zv  -  Controls  the  direction you are "looking"
              from.  
          3.  THETA=angle - The direction you are looking from (polar angle) 
          4.  PHI=angle - The direction you are looking from (Azimuthal angle) 
          5.  DISTANCE - Distance from you to the object.  
          6.  SCRD - Distance from you to the viewing window.  
          7.  RDISTANCE  - Modifies DISTANCE + SCRD together (DISTANCE from you
              to object) 
          8.  REDUCE|MAGNIFY  - Modifies size of the object relative to current
              size.  
          9.  ON|OFF - Turns 3-d plot on or off.  
         10.  AUTOMATICE - 3-d plots are on if the data is 3-d.  
         11.  ORIGIN=x,y,z - Set origin of axes for a PLOT AXES command.  
         12.  PERMANENT  -  Makes  current  parameters permanent for subsequent
              plots.  
         13.  SEPARATION=n - Specifies left, right separation for stereo plots 
         14.  LEFT - Specifies left eye view.  
         15.  RIGHT - Specifies right eye view.  
         16.  MIDDLE - Specifies center view (neither left nor right "Cyclops") 
         17.  VERTICAL=xv,yv,zv - Direction of vertical.  
         18.  WORLD=x BY y BY z - Limits on x,y,z coordinates.  
         19.  X|Y|ZANGLE=n  - Specifies orientation of labels and titles around
              axis.  


     15.64.59.2  CENTER  - 
          CENTER=x,y,z 
     The  center  of  the  picture  in 3-d WORLD coordinates.  This defines the
     center of the object being viewed.  If unspecified it is at the center  of
     the WORLD size.  
     (Default:6.5,5,5 inches) 


     15.64.59.3  DIRECTION  - 
          DIRECTION=xv,yv,zv 
     Direction vector from CENTER to eye.  
          THETA=angle  PHI=angle  br;Alternate  specification  of  DIRECTION in
     polar coordinates.  This is probably an easier  number  to  specify.   You
     should specify either the DIRECTION or THETA and PHI.  These are specified


                                      Page 179


                                      COMMANDS
                                       THREE

     relative to the VERTICAL vector.  

     PHI is the angle in degrees from vertical to line through the eye.  PHI is
     the azimuthal angle of the viewers eye.  
     (Default:60.0) 


                                       WARNING
                                       -------

          The  alogorithm  used  in  Histogramming  or  Joining  the  data
          requires that the viewpoint can  not  be  "over"  the  structure
          being  plotted.  The hidden line removal algorithm will not work
          for an improperly placed viewpoint.  You should avoid  PHI=0  or
          PHI=180.  



     THETA  is  the  angle  between  projections in the horizontal plane of the
     X-Axis and the line to the viewing position.  THETA is the polar angle  of
     the viewers eye.  
     (Default:30.0) 

                                       Example
     You wish to look at the plot from the +X axis:  
          TD:SET THREE THETA=0 
             --- ----- -------
     You wish to lood at the plot from the +Y axis:  
          TD:SET THREE THETA=90 
             --- ----- --------


     15.64.59.4  DISTANCE,SCRD,RDIST  - 
          DISTANCE=nnn 
     Distance from CENTER to the EYE (Default:35in.) 
          SCRD=nnn 
     Distance from screen or viewing window to EYE.  (Default:-18in.) 
          RDISTANCE=nnn 
     Same  as distance, but the SCRD is changed also to keep the view the same.
     (Relative distance) 

     If  SCRD  is negative then the actual SCRD is adjusted so that the view is
     the same independent of the current window size.  If |SCRD| = 0.5*DISTANCE
     then the plot will fill the current window.  

     Essentially  the SCRD is the distance from you to the screen, and DISTANCE
     is the distance to the object being viewed.  The  ratio  of  SCRD/DISTANCE
     determines  the  plot  size  while  the  absolute  distance determines the
     perspective of the plot.  Large distances produce essentially  a  parallel
     projection.  If you wish to modify the plot size use the MAGNIFY or REDUCE
     option.  

     Sometimes vertical lines are treated as being hidden when in fact they are
     visible.  This may be corrected by moving the  view  point  far  from  the
     screen.  To set a distant viewpoint:  
          TD:SET THREE RDIST=8000 
             --- ----- ----------
     RDIST  adjusts  the  viewpoint  without changing the size of the resulting


                                      Page 180


                                      COMMANDS
                                       THREE

     plot.  


     15.64.59.5  REDUCE|MAGNIFY   - These  change  the size of the plot without
     changing the perspective.  REDUCE=0.5 or MAGNIFY=2 both increase the  size
     by  a  factor  of  2.   The  SCRD  is  modified but not the DISTANCE.  The
     magnification or reduction is limited to the range 1.0E-5 to 1.0E+5.  


     15.64.59.6  ON|OFF|AUTOMATIC    - This  turns  on  or  off  3  dimensional
     graphics.  AUTOMATIC specifies that 3-d  graphics  is  determined  by  the
     data.   3-d  is turned on only for Mesh data or if all 3 coordinates X,Y,Z
     are in storage.  (Default:ON) 


     15.64.59.7  ORIGIN  - 
          ORIGIN=x,y,z 
     Sets  the  position  in  DATA  system  at which 3 axes will intersect when
     drawn.  (For MESH data, PLOT AXES is needed to draw them)  The  origin  is
     normally  set  to be the minimum X,Y,Z value entered.  When set this value
     is used locate the axes and the title.  


     15.64.59.8  PERMANENT   - This  makes  all  currently  set  parameters the
     default.  Since the command line is parsed from left to right, options  on
     the  left  side of this option are permanent, but options to the right are
     not.  When a new plot  is  started  the  current  options  revert  to  the
     permanent value.  


     15.64.59.9  SEPARATION  - 
     This  specifies  the  distance  between the true viewing point and viewing
     axis.  This is used for making stereo pairs.  
     (Default:SEPARATION=0) 
          1.  LEFT - SEPARATION = -1.5 
          2.  RIGHT - SEPARATION = 1.5 
          3.  MIDDLE - SEPARATION = 0 


     15.64.59.10  VERTICAL  - 
          VERTICAL=xv,yv,zv 
     Direction  vector  in  WORLD system which projects onto a vertical line in
     the window.  (Default:0,0,1 - Z axis) 


     15.64.59.11  WORLD  - 
          WORLD x [BY] y [BY] z 
                   --     --
     This  sets  the  limits  in inches on x,y,z in the world coordinates.  All
     data outside of these limits is clipped.  This is not set to  the  default
     when a new plot is started.  
     (Default:13,10,10 inches) 








                                      Page 181


                                      COMMANDS
                                       THREE

     15.64.59.12  XAXIS  - 
          XAXIS|YAXIS|ZAXIS angle 

     These  options  are  used  to  control  how the ticks and labels are drawn
     relative to the axes.  If the angle is not specified or it is greater than
     360  degrees  the  axes  are  drawn  in  either the XY,YZ, or ZX plane for
     maximum visibility.  The angle allows you to rotate the labels,ticks,  and
     title  around  the  axis.  The rotation is specified by permuting the axes
     XYZ.  For a given axis n the angle 0 lies in the n,n+1 plane, and angle 90
     lies in the n,n+2 plane, with the labels in the negative side.  

                                    Table of axes

     This  gives the plane and direction of the labels.  The sign indicates the
     side the labels are drawn on.  
          Axis    0       90      180     270 degrees
          X       -XY     -ZX     XY      ZX
          Y       -YZ     -XY     YZ      XY
          Z       -ZX     -YZ     ZX      YZ

          TD:SET THREE XAXIS=0 
             --- ----- -------
     This  draws  the X labels and ticks in the XY plane with the labels in the
     negative X side of the axis.  

          TD:SET THREE YAXIS=90 
             --- ----- --------
     This  draws  the X labels and ticks in the YZ plane with the labels in the
     negative Z side of the axis.  


     15.64.59.13  Revisions   - Originally  there  was  a  major  problem  with
     TOPDRAWER.  The documented definition of THETA was not  the  same  as  the
     actual  definition.   THETA  was  actually  measured  from  the Y axis and
     positive valued put the eye closer to the positive  X  axis.   The  actual
     definition  has  been  modified  to  conform to both the documentation and
     conventional notation.  If this is a problem, you may return  to  the  old
     definition by:  
          SET REVISION=1.  


     15.64.59.14  Examples   - There  is  a  set  of sample plots you may view.
     They include a drawing of the various angles and distances.  They are:  
          TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TD3D.TOP 


     15.64.60  TICKS 

     This determines the presence or absence of tick marks and their sizes.  To
     control the default number of ticks see SET SCALE.  
     SET TICKS [SIZE=n] [LONG=n] 
     --  ---    --       --
          [ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|X|Y|Z] [ON|OFF] 
           --  --  --     --    --   - - -   -- --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --
          [NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           ----    --    --  --    --   --     --      --


                                      Page 182


                                      COMMANDS
                                       TICKS

          [NOTEXTURE|SOLID|DOTS|DASHES|DAASHES|DOTDASH|PATTERNED|FUNNY|SPACE] 
           ----      --    --   --     ---     ----    --        --    --
          [PERMANENT] 
           --
     This  acts  on  the  current plot only if PERMANENT not specified.  If the
     parameters are omitted they are reset to the original default.  To control
     other individual elements of the axes use:  
     SET AXES, SET TICKS, SET LABELS, SET OUTLINE 

     (Default:ALL ON) 


     15.64.60.1  Options  - 

          1.  SIZE  - Sets the size of the smaller ticks in inches.  The larger
              ones are normally 3 times the small ones.  If unspecified this is
              automatically set according to the paper size, and window to give
              you pleasing results.  
              (Default:0.1) 
          2.  LONG  - Sets the ratio of long ticks to short ticks.  This may be
              varied from 0.1 to 10.  (Default:3) 
          3.  ALL - enables ticks for top, bottom, right and left.  
          4.  TOP - enables tick for the TOP of plot 
          5.  BOTTOM - selects tick for the bottom of the plot.  
          6.  RIGHT - selects tick for the right hand side 
          7.  LEFT - selects tick for the left hand side.  
          8.  X,Y,Z - selects the axis to plot.  
          9.  ON - allows drawing ticks 
         10.  OFF - prevents drawing ticks 
         11.  INTENSITY  -  Sets  line  intensity  or  width (0-5).  0 gets the
              intensity from the SET INTENSITY command.  
         12.  WHITE...  - Sets the line color.  
         13.  SOLID...     -    Sets   the   line   texture.    (Default:SOLID)
              See:Command SET TEXTURE 
         14.  PERMANENT  -  Makes  the  current settings permanent from plot to
              plot.  



     15.64.60.2  Examples  - 
          TD:SET TICKS ALL OFF BOTTOM ON LEFT ON 
             --- ----- --- --- ------ -- ---- --
     specifies ticks only on the bottom and left of the plot.  
          TD:SET TICKS RED DOTS SIZE=0.2 LONG=2 
             --- ----- --- ---- -------- ------
     specifies dotted red ticks with short ticks 0.2 inches long and long ticks
     0.4 inches.  


     15.64.61  TITLES 

     This sets default title values.  
     SET TITLES [ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|X|Y] 
     --  ---     --  --  --     --    --   - -
          [INDEX=n] [LINES=n] [MARGIN=n] [SCALE=n] [SHIFT=n] [SIZE=n] 
           --        ---       --         --        --        --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] 
           --        --


                                      Page 183


                                      COMMANDS
                                       TITLES

          [NOCOLOR|WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           ----    --    --  --    --   --     --      --
          [PERMANENT] 
           --
          [ESCAPE="char"] [SUBSTITUTE="char1char2"] 
           ---             ---
     If the parameters are omitted they are reset to the original default.  You
     should make modifications to the title  options  before  any  plotting  is
     done.   The  MARGIN, SIZE, SCALE, INDEX, and LINES all modify the location
     and size of relative windows.  See:Command SET WINDOWS.  


     15.64.61.1  Options  - 
          1.  ALL,TOP,BOTTOM,RIGHT,LEFT,X,Y - Selects title to modify 
          2.  INDEX=n - The separation between consecutive lines for all titles 
          3.  INTENSITY=n - The intensity (width) of all titles 
          4.  LINES=n - The maximum number of lines to reserve for a title 
          5.  MARGIN=n - Extra margin around the window for titles 
          6.  PERMANENT - Makes values permanent 
          7.  SCALE=n - Multiply title size by n 
          8.  SIZE=n - Character size for all titles 
          9.  WHITE...  - Title color for all titles 
         10.  ESCAPE - Sets the escape character for imbedded text/case 
         11.  SUBSTITUTE  -  Sets the begin, end substititute characters.  This
              allows you to include predefined text strings.  


     15.64.61.2  ALL|TOP|BOTTOM|LEFT|RIGHT|X|Y  - Selects the title you wish to
     change.  
     (Default:ALL) 


     15.64.61.3  INDEX   - Sets  the  height  of  a  title  line.   The  actual
     character height is the same as the size.  This determines the  separation
     between  2  lines of text for the titles.  The INDEX applies to all titles
     LEFT...TOP.  
     (Default:2) 


     15.64.61.4  INTENSITY   - Sets  the  title intensity or line width.  (0-5)
     (Default:NONE) 0 gets the intensity from the SET INTENSITY command.  


     15.64.61.5  LINES  - Sets the number of lines to reserve for a title.  For
     example if you wish to have a 2 line title at the  top  of  the  plot  you
     should:  
          TD:SET TITLE TOP LINES=2 
             --- ----- --- -------

     Negative lines puts the title inside the window.  
          TD:SET TITLE BOTTOM LINES=-2 
             --- ----- ------ --------
     puts  the bottom title inside the window and allocates room for 2 lines of
     title.  
     (Default:1.2 BOTTOM 2) 





                                      Page 184


                                      COMMANDS
                                       TITLES

     15.64.61.6  MARGIN   - This  sets  a fractional margin around each window.
     Normally this is 0.025 or 2.5% of the total window size.  You may  set  it
     to any value from 0.0 to 0.4.  If you use relative or numbered windows the
     final window size is reduced by the margin as well as the number of  title
     lines,  and labels.  The margin is not absulute.  You may still put titles
     inside the margin, by specifying the title location.  
     (Default:0.025) 


     15.64.61.7  PERMANENT  - makes the current values the permanent values.  


     15.64.61.8  SCALE  - This sets a scale factor on the title size.  Normally
     LEFT,RIGHT, and BOTTOM are 1.0 while TOP is 1.5.  This makes the Top title
     50%  bigger  than  other titles.  You may modify this to range from 0.1 to
     10.0.  
     (Default:1.0 TOP 1.5) 


     15.64.61.9  SIZE   - SIZE=n  gives  the approximate spacing between chars.
     in tenths of an inch.  If n is negative hardware characters will  be  used
     when  available.   If  n is positive software characters will be used when
     mode  VECTOR=OFF.   This  size  determines   the   title   size   when   a
     TOP,BOTTOM,...   title  is specified.  The TOP title is normally 1.5 times
     this value.  Normally the size is automatically set according to the paper
     size,  and  window  to give you pleasing results.  The SIZE applies to all
     titles LEFT...TOP.  The units may be modified by SET UNITS CHARACTER.  
     (Default:2) 


     15.64.61.10  WHITE...   - sets the title color.  (Default:NONE) 


     15.64.61.11  Windows  - When you specify a relative or numbered window the
     window is first reduced by  the  margin  fraction.   Then  each  title  is
     allocated INDEX*LINES*SIZE*SCALE around the window.  Finally the window is
     reduced to make room for labels.  Each title except for the bottom will be
     positioned INDEX*SIZE*SCALE*(LINES-.5) from the edge of the window+labels.
     The bottom is positioned INDEX*SIZE*SCALE/2 from the window+labels.  


     15.64.61.12  ESCAPE   - This  defines  a  character  to use as an "escape"
     character.  After the escape character you  enter  a  "text","case"  pair.
     This  allows  you  to  imbed  text case pairs in the text, without using a
     separate case line.  When used with the substitution you can define macros
     for  expressions.   To output the ESCAPE character you must enter it twice
     followed by a space.  
                                      example 
          TD:SET TITLE ESCAPE="@" 
          TD:TITLE TOP "This is a Greek alpha @AG" 
     Writes a title with an imbedded alpha.  
          TD:TITLE TOP "This an at symbol @@ ." 
     Writes the title:"This an at symbol @." 







                                      Page 185


                                      COMMANDS
                                       TITLES

     15.64.61.13  SUBSTITUTE   - This defines a pair of characters to delimit a
     substitution.  Substitutions may not be nested.  You define a string,  and
     then  it  will  be included in your text when the name is bracketed by the
     substitute pair.  When used with  the  escape  character,  you  can  build
     complicated  expressions  and  include  them  in  your  titles in a simple
     fashion.  If you need to output the begin substitute character you  should
     define a substitution for it.  
                                       example
          TD:SET TITLE SUBSTITUTE="{}" 
          TD:DEFINE STRING curly "{" 
          TD:DEFINE STRING SEASONS "spring,summer,winter,fall" 
          TD:TITLE TOP "The seasons are {SEASONS}." 
     Writes the title:  
     "The seasons are spring,summer,winter,fall." 
          TD:TITLE TOP "A left curly bracket is {curly}" 
     Writes the title:  
     "A left curly bracket is {" 
          TD:SET TITLE SUBSTITUTE="\\" 
          TD:TITLE TOP "The seasons are \SEASONS\." 
     Writes the title:  
     "The seasons are spring,summer,winter,fall." 
          TD:SET TITLE SUBSTITUTE="\" 
          TD:TITLE TOP "The seasons are \SEASONS ." 
     Writes the title:  
     "The seasons are spring,summer,winter,fall." 
          NOTE:  in this example the trailing substitute char is a blank.  


     15.64.61.14  Examples  - 
          TD:SET TITLE INDEX=3 
             --- ----- -------
     increases the space per line to make room for sub/superscripts.  
          TD:SET TITLE TOP LINE=2.5 
             --- ----- --- --------
     allocates  room  for  2 lines of title at the top, with a half line margin
     between the titles and the window.  
          TD:SET TITLE SCALE=1.0 RIGHT MARGIN=0 BOTTOM MARGIN=0 LINE=-1 
             --- ----- --------- ----- -------- ------ -------- -------
     sets  all  titles to the same size and removes the margin at the right and
     bottom.  The bottom title is allocated 1 line of space inside the window. 


     15.64.62  UNITS 

     This sets the units that you may use to specify sizes and locations.  
     SET UNITS 
     --  --
          [REDUCE=units] [ALL|TEXT|CHARACTERS] [CM|CENTIMETERS| DM|DECIMETERS|
           --             --  --   --           -- --           -- ----
               MM|MILLIMTERS|METERS|INCHES| POINTS|MILS] 
               -- ----       --     --      --     ----
     If no options are specified the sizes are reset to the defaults.  
     (Default:TEXT INCHES CHARACTERS REDUCE=10) 







                                      Page 186


                                      COMMANDS
                                       UNITS

     15.64.62.1  CM....   - This sets the units to a "standard" set of units.  
          1.  MM       = CM/10 
          2.  DM       = 10 CM 
          3.  METERS   = 100 CM 
          4.  INCHES   = 1.54 CM 
          5.  MILS     = INCHES/1000 
          6.  POINTS   = INCHES/72 
          7.  FEET     = 12 INCHES 
          8.  YARDS    = 3 FEET 
          9.  FATHOMS  = 6 FEET 
         10.  RODS     = 16.5 FEET 
         11.  FURLONGS = 40 RODS 
         12.  MILES    = 8 FURLONGS 
         13.  LEAGUES  = 3 MILES 


     15.64.62.2  REDUCE   - Sets the units by the specified value.  This is the
     number of units per standard unit.  


     15.64.62.3  ALL...    - This  selects which set of units to modify.  There
     are 2 sets of units.  One is the TEXT units which specify the location  in
     TEXT  space,  while  the other is used to specify the character and symbol
     sizes.  The character units are also used  to  speicify  the  fill  sizes.
     Normall  text  sizes are in inches while the character units are one tenth
     of the text units.  


     15.64.63  WAIT 

     See:Command SET PAUSE 


     15.64.64  WIDTH 

     This sets the default line width or intensity of a plot.  
     SET WIDTH level [PERMANENT] 
     --  ---          --
     level=1 to 5.  
     (Default:2) 5 is the widest (brightest).  
     PERMANENT - Sets the current width to be the new default.  
     If no options are specified it is set to 2.  


     15.64.65  WINDOWS 

     There are 3 ways to set windows, absolute, numbered, or relative.  

                                  Absolute windows
     SET WINDOW|AREA [CURSOR] {X|Y}[FROM] n1 [TO] n2] [AT n1 [SIZE] n2]
     --  ---    --    --       - -  --        --       --     --
               [LEVEL=n] 
                --
               or...  
     SET WINDOW|AREA [FROM] nx,ny [TO] nx,ny] [AT nx,ny [SIZE] nx,ny] 
     --  ---    --    --           --          --        --
     Sets the X,Y axes to run between the specified limits in inches.  



                                      Page 187


                                      COMMANDS
                                      WINDOWS

                                      Numbered
          SET WINDOW [{FIRST|LAST|NEXT|PREVIOUS|n1 [OF n2]}] [LEVEL=n|INSIDE|
                       --    --   --   --           --        --      --
               OUTSIDE] 
               --
     Divides  the  entire  screen  into  n2 windows of equal size, and sets the
     current window to number n1.  The  windows  are  as  close  to  square  as
     possible.  

                                      Relative
          SET WINDOW [{X|Y} n1 [OF n2]] [LEVEL=n] 
                       - -      --       --
     Divides  one  axis of the screen into n2 windows of equal size and selects
     one of them.  


                                       WARNING
                                       -------

          If  this  command  is  issued in between 2 plots overlaying each
          other, they will not have the same scales.  




     15.64.65.1  ABSOLUTE   - The  window may not exceed the current plot SIZE.
     See:Command SET SIZE.  If CURSOR is specified, the cursor may be  used  to
     set  windows.   Simply move the cursor to one corner of the window and hit
     the space bar.  Them move the cursor to the diagonally oppostte corner and
     hit the space bar.  The new limits are entered into the journal file.  

                                       example
          TD:SET WINDOW X FROM 1 to 6 Y FROM 1.5 to 9.0 
             --- ------ - ---- - -- - - ---- --- -- ---
               or...  
          TD:SET WINDOW FROM 1,1.5 TO 6,9.0 
             --- ------ ---- ----- -- -----
               or...  
          TD:SET WINDOW AT 3.5,5.25 SIZE=5,7.5 
             --- ------ -- -------- ----------
               or...  
          TD:SET WINDOW X AT 3.5 SIZE=5 Y AT 5.25,7.5 
             --- ------ - -- --- ------ - -- --------
     All produce the same window in inches.  
          TD:SET WINDOW CURSOR 
             --- ------ ------
     You move the cursor to diagonally opposite corners of the window and press
     the space bar to enter the cursor location.  


     15.64.65.2  NUMBERED   - A  numbered  window is a special type of relative
     window.  If n2 is omitted then the n2 is assumed to be the last n2.   Both
     n1  and  n2 must be greater than or equal to 1.0.  n2 must be smaller than
     or equal to n2.  You may initially  set  up  a  window  as  relative,  and
     specify  it  as  a  set  of numbered windows.  When you do this the window
     number modifies only  the  integer  part  of  the  relative  window.   For
     example:  
          TD:SET WINDOW 1 OF 4 
             --- ------ - -- -

                                      Page 188


                                      COMMANDS
                                      WINDOWS

     This sets the lower left window out of 6.  
          TD:SET WINDOW 6 OF 6 
             --- ------ - -- -
     Sets the upper right window out of 6.  
          TD:SET WINDOW X 1.1 of 3.2 Y 1.2 of 2.4 
             --- ------ - --- -- --- - --- -- ---
          TD:SET WINDOW 5 
             --- ------ -
               is the same as 
          TD:SET WINDOW X 2.1 of 3.2 Y 2.2 of 2.4 
             --- ------ - --- -- --- - --- -- ---


     15.64.65.3  RELATIVE   - If n2 is omitted then the last n2 for the current
     plot is assumed.  Both n1 and n2 must be larger than 0.8 and n1 may not be
     larger  than 1.2*n2.  If both n1 and n2 are positive the window is reduced
     in size to allow for labels and titles.  If negative the  window  occupies
     the  entire  space.   If  you  do not specify a fixed symbol, grid, label,
     title, or tick size then they are adjusted to  be  in  proportion  to  the
     window  size.  Absolute windows do not adjust the sizes.  If n2 is omitted
     then the current n2 is assumed.  

     For  windows  which do not occupy the entire space, the actual size of the
     window depends on the location and position of  labels  and  titles.   The
     size  is  set  to  allow a 5% border with room for titles and labels.  The
     default is a window with approximately 8.5% left on the right and top  for
     titles,  and  13%  on  the bottom and left for labels and titles.  For 3-d
     plots it is assumed that no labels will be produced.  To change  the  size
     available for titles and labels use the SET TITLE and SET LABELS commands. 

     Non  integral  n1  or  n2  may  be  used  for fine adjustment.  If you use
     negative  windows  you  may  also  need  to  turn   off   INSIDE   labels.
     See:Command SET LABELS INSIDE 


     15.64.65.3.1  Example  - 
          TD:SET WINDOW Y 1.2 OF 2.5 
             --- ------ - --- -- ---
     Divides  y  into 2.5 windows and sets the current window to 1.2.  Assuming
     the y size is the default 10 inches, the total window runs from 0.8 inches
     to  4.8  inches.   Since the window is positive, the actual window area is
     reduced  to  make  room  for  labels.   The  actual  plot  area  would  be
     approximately 1.6 inches to 4.3 inches.  
          TD:SET WINDOW Y 1.2 OF -2.5 
             --- ------ - --- -- ----
     Divides  y  in  the  same  fashion as above, except that the actual window
     occupies the entire specified area from y=0.8 inches to y=4.8 inches.   If
     a second window is then specified:  
          TD:SET WINDOW Y=2.2 
             --- ------ -----
     it  is adjacent to the first one, with the top axes of the first window in
     the same location as the bottom axes of the second window.  








                                      Page 189


                                      COMMANDS
                                      WINDOWS

     15.64.65.4  LEVEL   - INSIDE,OUSIDE,  or  LEVEL=n  sets  the window level.
     Levels may range from 1 to 4.  INSIDE increases the level by 1 and OUTSIDE
     decreases  the level by 1.  Using this option you may inset windows inside
     other windows.  When you increase the LEVEL by 1  the  current  window  is
     used  to set the maximum limits of the new window.  You may increase LEVEL
     by 1 or decrease it to any number from 1 to the current level.   When  you
     increase  the  level,  you have effectively decreased the plot size to the
     current window size.  

                                       example
     As  an  example  you wish to create a set of six windows within a definite
     location.  
          TD:SET WINDOW X FROM 1 TO 12 Y FROM 1 TO 7 
             --- ------ - ---- - -- -- - ---- - -- -
     Set the outer level 
          TD:SET WINDOW 1 OF 6 INSIDE 
             --- ------ - -- - ------
               or...  
          TD:SET WINDOW 1 OF 6 LEVEL=2 
             --- ------ - -- - -------
     Now  you  have 6 equal size windows bounded by 1,1 and 12,7.  To return to
     having only 1 window 
          TD:SET WINDOW LEVEL=1 
             --- ------ -------
                                       example
          TD:SET WINDOW X FROM 1 TO 12 Y FROM 5 TO 7 
             --- ------ - ---- - -- -- - ---- - -- -
          TD:SET WINDOW LEVEL=2 FROM 1,1 TO 2,2 
             --- ------ ------- ---- --- -- ---
     Insets  a  window within another.  The actual physical location of the new
     window is X=2 to X=3 and Y=6 to Y=7.  


     15.64.65.5  Labels   - Normally space for labels is allocated according to
     the current AXES, and LABEL settings.  For example if you SET LABELS  LEFT
     OFF, no space will be allocated for labels on the left side, so the window
     will be larger.  If you need to have several plots all  sharing  the  same
     scale,  use  either  negative  windows or absolute windows.  For example 2
     plots which share the same X axis may be plotted.  
          TD:SET WINDOW Y 1.2 OF -2.6 
             --- ------ - --- -- ----
          TD:PLOT SET=1 
             ---- -----
          TD:SET LABELS BOTTOM OFF 
             --- ------ ------ ---
          TD:SET WINDOW Y 2.2 
             --- ------ - ---
          TD:PLOT SET=2 
             ---- -----
     Only 1 bottom axes is plotted for both windows.  

     It is assumed that LEFT or RIGHT labels will occupy 6 characters.  If this
     is incorrect you may adjust this value when you set the  window  with  the
     CHARACTERS parameter.  
          TD:SET LABEL CHARACTERS=4 
             --- ----- ------------
     allocates  only  4  characters for the labels.  This gives you more usable
     plotting area.  


                                      Page 190


                                      COMMANDS
                                      WINDOWS

     15.64.65.6  Examples   - Assuming you have a plot size of 13 by 10 you may
     setup 6 windows, and start with the window in the middle, bottom:  
          TD:SET WINDOW 2 of 6 
             --- ------ - -- -
               or...  
          TD:SET WINDOW X 2 OF 3 Y 1 OF 2 
             --- ------ - - -- - - - -- -
     you may select the next window (Right, bottom) by:  
          TD:SET WINDOW X NEXT 
             --- ------ - ----
               or...  
          TD:SET WINDOW X 3 
             --- ------ - -
               or...  
          TD:SET WINDOW 3 
             --- ------ -
     You may set the previous window by:  
          TD:SET WINDOW X PREVIOUS 
             --- ------ - --------
               or...  
          TD:SET WINDOW X 1 
             --- ------ - -
     you may select the last window (right, upper corner) by:  
          TD:SET WINDOW 6 
             --- ------ -
               or...  
          TD:SET WINDOW X 3 Y 2 
             --- ------ - - - -


     15.64.65.7  3-d   - When  setting  the  windows  for  3-d  plots  there is
     compensation for the viewing distance from the object if SCRD is negative.
     For the same DISTANCE and positive SCRD a window which is half the size of
     a normal window will only show half of the view.  You may  compensate  for
     this  effect  by changing DISTANCE or SCRD.  The effect is similar to what
     you would see if you, and the window remained in  the  same  position  and
     only  the  window size changed.  The following will plot approximately the
     data with the same view.  
          TD:SET THREE DISTANCE 100 SCRD 50 
             --- ----- -------- --- ---- --
          TD:SET WINDOW X 1 of 1 Y 1 of 1 
             --- ------ - - -- - - - -- -
          TD:HISTOGRAM 
             ---------
               or ...  
          TD:SET THREE DISTANCE 100 SCRD -50 
             --- ----- -------- --- ---- ---
          TD:SET WINDOW X 1 of 2 Y 1 of 2 
             --- ------ - - -- - - - -- -
          TD:HISTOGRAM 
             ---------
               or ...  
          TD:SET THREE DISTANCE 100 SCRD 25 
             --- ----- -------- --- ---- --
          TD:SET WINDOW X 1 of 2 Y 1 of 2 
             --- ------ - - -- - - - -- -
          TD:HISTOGRAM 
             ---------


                                      Page 191


                                      COMMANDS
                                      WINDOWS


     The  following  will  show  a  similar  view,  but  from  a  more  distant
     perspective:  
          TD:SET THREE DISTANCE 200 SCRD 50 
             --- ----- -------- --- ---- --
          TD:SET WINDOW X 1 of 2 Y 1 of 2 
             --- ------ - - -- - - - -- -
          TD:HISTOGRAM 
             ---------

     Since  the  size  of  2  windows  is less than half of a single window the
     example with 2 windows shows slightly less than 1 window.  


     15.65  SHOW 

          SHOW opt1 opt2 ,....  optn 
          --
     Shows  options for the current plot.  Most options for SET may be used for
     show.  The options are:  
          ALL       ARROW     AXIS      BAR       BOX       BLINK     CARD
          CHARACTER CYCLE     CIRCLE    CLEAR     COLOR     COMMAND   Ctrl_Z
          CURSOR    DATA      DATE      DEVICE    DIAMOND   DIGITS    ELLIPSE
          ERRORS    EXACT     FIT       FILE      FLUSH     FONT      FORMAT 
          GRID      HISTOGRAM INTENSITY KEYS      LABELS    LEXICALS  LIMITS 
          MODE      MONITOR   ORDER     OUTLINE   PATTERN   PAUSE     PEN
          PLOTS     POLAR     REVISION  SCALE     SECONDARY SHIELD    SIZE
          STATISTICS          STORAGE   STRINGS   SYMBOL    TEXTURE   THREE
          TICKS     TIME      TITLE     UNITS     WIDTH     VALUES    VERSION
          WINDOW 
     The  "Default"  values  are  the values that are automatically set for the
     next plot.  These are controlled by the  "PERMANENT"  option  on  the  SET
     commands.   The SHOW commands are not usually journaled with the exception
     of SHOW CURSOR.  


     15.65.1  Options 

          1.  ALL - Shows all options except for CURSOR, FLAGS, and HISTOGRAM. 
          2.  ARROW - default arrow format 
          3.  AXIS - default axis 
          4.  BAR - ends of error bars 
          5.  BOX - default box size 
          6.  BLINK - whether plots are in blink mode 
          7.  CARD - Maximum length of input lines 
          8.  CYCLE - The color,width, texture to cycle through.  
          9.  CHARACTERS - Shows character definitions 
         10.  CIRCLE - Same as SHOW ELLIPSE 
         11.  CLEAR - Clear setting is Deferred or Immediate.  
         12.  COLOR - default color or pen number 
         13.  COMMAND - Shows the currently defined commands.  
         14.  Ctrl_Z - Whether Ctrl_Z stops TOPDRAWER.  
         15.  CURSOR - Shows the location of the cursor.  
         16.  DATA [options] - Show current data.  
         17.  DATE - Show current base date.  
         18.  DEVICE - Show current device being used 
         19.  DIAMOND - default diamond size 



                                      PAGE 192


                                      COMMANDS
                                        SHOW

         20.  DIGITS - The number of digits to use for output 
         21.  ELLIPSE - default ellipse size 
         22.  ERRORS - Shows status of error messages, and any errors for the
              current plot are displayed.  
         23.  FILE - shows current files open, and line number.  
         24.  FILL - the current fill patterns 
         25.  FIT [FULL] - shows the current fit [with error matrix].  
         26.  FLUSH - Controls automatic flushing of plot data 
         27.  FONT - the current character set 
         28.  FORMAT - Format for input lines 
         29.  GRID - grid marks that overlay plot 
         30.  HISTOGRAM - Shows the list of histograms available.  
         31.  INTENSITY - default intensity (line width) 
         32.  KEYS [key names] - the defined keypad keys 
         33.  LABELS - numeric labels on axes 
         34.  LEXICALS [lexical] - exams the current values of lexicals.  
         35.  LIMITS - limits for plot axis 
         36.  MODE - Misc.  options.  These change the mode of operation.  
         37.  MONITOR - Plot options for monitor command.  
         38.  ORDER - Determines interpretation of input data 
         39.  OUTLINE - outline around plot 
         40.  PATTERN - the pattern for PATTERNED lines 
         41.  PAUSE - controls whether TOPDRAWR pauses at NEW PLOT 
         42.  PEN - the pen or color to use in plotting.  
         43.  PLOTS - The number of plots produced 
         44.  POLAR - Whether mode is polar or spherical plots 
         45.  REVISION - The current revision level.  
         46.  SECONDARY - Secondary contour line options.  
         47.  SCALE - scale (log/linear) and units.  
         48.  SHIELD - the location and sizes of shielded areas.  
         49.  SIZE - size and orientation of screen or paper 
         50.  STATISTICS - The statistics set by the last SET STATISTICS or
              SHOW DATA command.  
         51.  STORAGE - what is kept in storage 
         52.  STRINGS - strings defined by DEFINE STRING 
         53.  SYMBOL - default symbol to plot 
         54.  TEXTURE - default line style (DOTTED,SOLID...) 
         55.  THREE - parameters for 3-dimensional plots 
         56.  TICKS - tick marks on axes 
         57.  TITLE - size of title 
         58.  UNITS - the units of measurement 
         59.  VALUES - The user defined Lexical values.  
         60.  VERSION - The current version number of TOPDRAWER 
         61.  WIDTH - the line width or intensity 
         62.  WINDOW - the plotting area (labels may be outside area) 


     15.65.2  CURSOR 

          SHOW CURSOR 
          --   --

     This puts a cursor on the graph.  After moving the cursor to  the  desired
     location, press any key.  The current location of the cursor will be typed
     and entered into the journal file as a comment.  This does not work if the
     device  has no cursor.  If you have not plotted any data this command will
     not work.  



                                      Page 193


                                      COMMANDS
                                       CURSOR

     The position of the cursor is given in both TEXT and DATA units.  If a 3-d
     plot is displayed, The X,Y,Z given are  on  a  plane  through  the  origin
     parallel to the screen.  


     15.65.3  DATA 

     SHOW DATA 
     --   --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --
          [BRIEF|FULL|STATISTICS|TOTAL[=ON|OFF]] 
           --    --   --         --     -- --
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
          [OUTPUT=file] 
           --
     This types the current data and statistics on the data.  You may terminate
     the listing in the middle by pressing Ctrl_C.  


     15.65.3.1  BRIEF...   - 
          1.  BRIEF=ON  or FULL=OFF displays only the number of data points and
              sets.  
          2.  FULL=ON   or   BRIEF=OFF   displays  both  data  and  statistics.
              (Default:FULL) 
          3.  STATISTICS=ON  displays  the statistics on the data for each set,
              and the grand total if more than 1 set.  
          4.  STATISTICS=OFF displays the data without statistics.  
          5.  TOTAL=ON displays only the total statistics for all data sets.  
          6.  TOTAL=OFF displays the data with statistics, but no total.  
     If you do not specify ON or OFF then ON is assumed.  


     15.65.3.2  LIMITED   - Limits  the data shown to the specified range.  For
     3-d  data  the  limit  on  the  dependent  variable  fully  modifies   the
     statistics.   The  actual data shown my include data outside the Z limits,
     but the statistics reflects only the data within all  limits.   If  limits
     are   not   specified,   the   default   is   the   current  plot  limits.
     See:Command SET LIMITS.  
          1.  X - Specifies X limit 
          2.  Y - Specifies Y limit 
          3.  Z - Specifies the Z limit 
          4.  CURSOR  - Brings up the cursor.  You move it to the X,Y value you
              wish then press the space bar to enter both X,Y or X to  enter  X
              or Y to enter Y.  
          5.  RECURSOR - The cursor enters both limits.  
                   TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED RECURSOR 
                      ---- ---- ------- --------
                        is the same as...  


                                      Page 194


                                      COMMANDS
                                        DATA

                   TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR 
                      ---- ---- ------- ---- ------ -- ------
          6.  VLOG  -  Draws  a cross when you press the space bar, and draws a
              dotted line around the final limits.  

                                       example
          TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM 1,1 to 2,5 
             ---- ---- ------- ---- --- -- ---
               or...  
          TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM X=1 Y=1 TO X=2 Y=5 
             ---- ---- ------- ---- --- --- -- --- ---
     Shows  all  points  that  with  X  between  1  and 2 and Y between 2 and 5
     inclusive.  
          TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM Y=1 TO Y=5 
             ---- ---- ------- ---- --- -- ---
     Shows all data points with Y values between 1 and 5 inclusive.  
          TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM CURSOR TO CURSOR 
             ---- ---- ------- ---- ------ -- ------
     Shows all data points as defined by the cursor limits.  
          TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM X=CURSOR TO X=CURSOR 
             ---- ---- ------- ---- -------- -- --------
     Shows all data points according to X values defined by the cursor.  


     15.65.3.3  LINES|ROWS   - For  3-d  plots specifies which lines or rows of
     the mesh data to show.  


     15.65.3.4  OUTPUT  - This specifies the output file for the DATA.  If this
     option is not used, the default  is  SYS$OUTPUT,  or  your  terminal.   If
     OUTPUT=NONE is specified, then there is not output.  


     15.65.3.5  POINTS|COLUMNS  - This specifies which points to show.  For 3-d
     this is the range of column numbers.  


     15.65.3.6  SETS  - This specifies which data set to show.  


     15.65.3.7  Statistics   - The  statistics on the data are typed at the end
     of the data.  This includes the following:  
          1.  Range of data for X and Y 
          2.  Sum of all Y values and average Y value per point.  
          3.  Error  in  the sum.  This is only produced if the Y values have a
              non zero DY.  To specify errors for existing data see the command
              X.  
          4.  Mean X value, and standard deviation of the mean.  
              Mean=SUM(X*Y)/SUM(Y) 
              Std=SQRT(SUM((X-MEAN)*Y))/SUM(Y) 
          5.  Error  on  the  mean  and  standard  deviation.   These  are only
              produced if either DX or DY are non zero for  the  data.   DY  is
              used  if  available  otherwise DX is used to calculate the error.
              If the number of data points with Y,DX,DY non zero is less than 3
              then DX is also used to calculate the error.  





                                      Page 195


                                      COMMANDS
                                        DATA

     15.65.3.8  Example  - You have entered a 3 dim array with 20 by 20 points.
     X ranges from 0 to 10, Y from 100 to 200.  The total array will not fit on
     the terminal screen so you show a subset of the data:  
          TD:SHOW DATA POINTS 3 to 8 LINES 5 to 10 
             ---- ---- ------ - -- - ----- - -- --
          TD:SHOW DATA POINTS 1 5 LINES 1 5 (SHOWS 25 points) 
             ---- ---- ------ - - ----- - - ------ -- -------
          TD:SHOW DATA LINE=1 (Shows only first 20 points) 
             ---- ---- ------ ------ ---- ----- -- -------
          TD:SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM .5,100 TO .8,120 
             ---- ---- ------- ---- ------ -- ------

                                       Example
     You  have  entered  100  data  points  X,Y,DX,DY etc.  To show only points
     number 5 to 20 
          TD:SHOW DATA POINTS 5 to 20 
             ---- ---- ------ - -- --


     15.65.4  ERRORS 

     This shows the status of the error reports, and  any  error  messages  for
     this plot are displayed.  


     15.65.5  FLAGS 

     This show the status of all flags.  This  is  generally  only  useful  for
     debugging TOPDRAWER.  There is no SET FLAGS command.  


     15.65.6  HISTOGRAMS 

     This  command  shows  the  list  of  histograms  made  available  by   the
     SET HISTOGRAM  command.   You  may  terminate the listing in the middle by
     pressing Ctrl_C.  
     SHOW HISTOGRAMS [CURRENT] [[IDENT=] n] [FROM] [n1] [TO] [n2] 
     --   --          --         --          --          --
          [SELECT|NAME='hist_name'] 
           ---    --
          [EXACT[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [ALL|FULL|BRIEF[=ON|OFF]] 
           --  --   --     -- --
          [CONTENTS[=ON|OFF]] 
           --        -- --
          [OPTIONS[=ON|OFF]] 
           --       -- --
          [STATISTICS[=ON|OFF]] 
           --          -- --
          [AREA|DIRECTORY="dir/subdir..."] 
           ---  --
          [SEARCH[=ON|OFF]] 
           --      -- --
          [TReE[=ON|OFF]] 
           -------- --
          [ENTRIES[=ON|OFF]] 
           --       -- --


                                      Page 196


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAMS

          [HISTOGRAM[=ON|OFF]] 
           --         -- --
          [ARRAY[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [MESH[=ON|OFF]] 
           --    -- --
          [NTUPLES[=ON|OFF]] 
           --       -- --
          [NLMIT[=n]] 
           --
          [NMASK[=n]] 
           --
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --


     15.65.6.1  Options  - 
          1.  AREA/DIRECTORY - Specifies the area to list.  
          2.  ALL, or FULL - Shows everyhing about the histograms.  
          3.  EXACT  -  Histogram  names are treated as exact strings, and they
              are not searched in a case independent manner.  This must precede
              the option NAME="...".  
          4.  BRIEF - Shows only a list of the hist IDENTS.  
          5.  CONTENTS  -  Shows  a listing of the histogram contents.  NTUPLES
              are shown according to the SET HISTOGRAM SELECT options.  
          6.  STATISTICS - Shows the histogram statistics.  
          7.  POINTS|COLUMNS - Selects the range of contents to show.  
          8.  SEARCH  - Prints information only if the specified histograms are
              found.  
          9.  TREE - Looks through the specified directory tree.  
         10.  OPTIONS - Shows the histogram options.  
         11.  AREA - Shows a brief directory of the selected area.  
         12.  CURRENT - Selects the current hist to show.  
         13.  FROM, TO - Selects a range of histograms to show.  
         14.  IDENT - The histogram number to show.  
         15.  MESH - Chooses only MESH data or regular data.  
         16.  NTUPLE  -  Selects  only  NTUPLE data.  OFF selects both MESH and
              regular data.  
         17.  NAME - Selects hist by name.  
         18.  NLIMIT - Shows the limits on NTUPLE variables.  
         19.  NMASK - Shows the hist masks on NTUPLE variables.  


     15.65.6.2  AREA|DIRECTORY  - Selects the area to list histograms.  You may
     use wild characters to select the particular areas to show.   See  COMMAND
     SET HISTOGRAM.  If you wish to get a directory of the direct access file: 
          TD:SHOW HIST AREA=//FILE/subdir/sub-subdir...  
     If you wish to get a directory of a global comman section:  
          TD:SHOW HIST AREA=//SECT/subdir/sub-subdir...  
                                       example
          TD:SHOW HIST AREA=/X 
     Shows all histograms in subdirectory //PAWC/X.  
          TD:SHOW HIST TREE AREA=/X 
     Shows all histograms in the directory starting with //PAWC/X.  
          TD:SHOW HIST AREA=/X/* 
     Shows all histograms in subdirectories of area //PAWC/X 


                                      Page 197


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAMS

          TD:SHOW HIST AREA=/X*/Y 
     Shows  all  histograms  in the selecte areas.  For example //PAWC/X1/Y and
     //PAWC/X2/Y will be shown but //PAWC/N/Y and //PAWC/X1/Z will not.  


     15.65.6.3  ALL|FULL  - Shows all data about the histograms.  This includes
     the ID,NAME, SIZE, and  range  of  values.   For  some  packages  entries,
     over/underflows,  sum, mean, and standard deviations are also listed.  For
     Rice histograms the cuts are also listed.  This option may slow  the  time
     to  show  each  histogram, especially MESH histograms.  This will not show
     extra information about histograms in an HBOOK4 RZ file.   ALL=ON  is  the
     opposite of BRIEF=OFF.  


     15.65.6.4  BRIEF   - Shows only the list of IDs available.  ALL=OFF is the
     opposite of BRIEF=ON.  


     15.65.6.5  CONTENTS   - Shows  the  contents of the histograms.  This only
     works for NTUPLES and Arrays.  POINTS selects the range of  the  array  or
     the  element  of the ntuple.  LINES selects the NTUPL element.  The actual
     Ntuples shown are modified by previous SET HISTOGRAM SELECT commands.  The
     number  of  significant  figures  in  the  output is set by the SET DIGITS
     command.  


     15.65.6.6  CURRENT  - Specifies the current histogram.  
          See:Command SET HISTOGRAM.  


     15.65.6.7  ENTRIES   - If ON it selects only histograms which have entries
     (contain data).  If OFF it selects only histograms without  entries.   The
     default  is  ON.   If the option ENTRIES is not used, then no selection by
     entries is made.  


     15.65.6.8  EXACT  - If ON and SELECT is used, then the histogram names are
     searched for in a case sensative manner.  


     15.65.6.9  FROM|TO  - Specifies the range of histogram IDs to show.  


     15.65.6.10  IDENT  - Specifies a single histogram to show.  


     15.65.6.11  HISTOGRAM  - If HISTOGRAM=ON selects only histograms.  


     15.65.6.12  NTUPL  - Selects only NTUPL data to show.  
     (Default:ON) 


     15.65.6.13  NLIMITS   - Shows  you the existing limits on NTUPL variables.
     If the variable number is negative, it has not been used.  





                                      Page 198


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAMS

     15.65.6.14  NMASKS  - Shows you the existing masks on NTUPL variables.  If
     the histogram number is negative, it has not been used.  


     15.65.6.15  MESH   - If  ON only 3-d or mesh histograms (scatterplots) are
     listed.  If ON or OFF are omitted, ON is assumed.  


     15.65.6.16  SELECT   - Selects  the  histograms  by  name.  All histograms
     beginning with the hist_name will be shown.  Percent '%' and star '*'  are
     wild characters.  


     15.65.6.17  SEARCH    - Information  is  printed  only  if  the  specified
     histograms are found.  If SEARCH=OFF then the number of histograms and the
     current AREA are printed.  
     (Default:SEARCH=OFF) 


     15.65.6.18  STATISTICS   - Shows  the  statistics on the histograms.  This
     consists  of  the  number  of  entries,  the  range  and  the  number   of
     over/underflows.  This will not show extra information about histograms in
     an HBOOK4 RZ file.  


     15.65.6.19  TREE   - Searches  the current or specified directory tree for
     histograms.  For example you have directories //PAWC/X/A, //PAWC/X/B,  and
     //PAWC/Y.  You wish to list all histograms in directories X/A and X/B:  
          TD:SHOW HIST AREA=//PAWC/X TREE 
             ---- ---- ------------- ----
               or ...  
          TD:SET HIST AREA=//PAWC/X 
             --- ---- -------------
          TD:SHOW HIST TREE 
             ---- ---- ----


     15.65.6.20  Example  - 
          TD:SHOW HIST BRIEF 
             ---- ---- -----
     Lists just the IDs of all available histograms.  
          TD:SHOW HIST ID=5 FULL 
             ---- ---- ---- ----
     Types all information about histogram ID number 5.  
          TD:SHOW HIST FROM 10 SELECT='ENERGY' 
             ---- ---- ---- -- ---------------
     Types the names and ids of all histograms with ID above 9 which have names
     beginning with 'ENERGY'.  
          TD:SHOW HIST SELECT='*ENERGY' 
             ---- ---- ----------------
     Types on your screen the names of all histograms with names containing the
     word 'ENERGY'.  
          TD:SHOW HIST SELECT='*PI*ENERGY' 
             ---- ---- -------------------
     Types the names of all histograms containing 'PI...ENERGY' in the name.  
     ----- --- ----- -- --- ---------- ---------- ------------- -- --- -----
          TD:SHOW HIST SELECT='*ENERGY' MESH 
          ------- ---- ---------------- ----


                                      Page 199


                                      COMMANDS
                                     HISTOGRAMS

     Types on your screen the names of all 3-d histograms with names containing
     the word 'ENERGY'.  
          TD:SHOW HIST SELECT='*ENERGY' MESH BRIEF 
             ---- ---- ---------------- ---- -----
     Types  on  your screen the IDs of all 3-d histograms with names containing
     the word 'ENERGY'.  


     15.65.7  KEYS 

          TD:SHOW KEYS [key1,key2....] 
             --   --
     Shows you the current key definitions for the selected keys.  If ALL or no
     keys are specified then all keys will be shown.  See:Command SET KEY.  

     To show KP0-KP9 keys you may specify just KP.  Likewise you may specify PF
     for PF1-PF4 or F for F1-F20.  

     key names are:  
     PF1-PF4,  KP0-KP9,  MINUS,  COMMA,  PERIOD,  ENTER,  F1-F20,  INSERT,  DO,
     PREV_SCREEN, NEXT_SCREEN.  


     15.65.8  LEXICALS 

          SHOW LEXICALS [V_lex1] [V_lex2]...  
     Shows you the values of the specified lexicals.  


     15.65.9  TIME 

     This shows the current CPU and clock time for your process.  There  is  no
     SET command corresponding to SHOW TIME.  


     15.65.10  Example 

          TD:SHOW BOX CIRCLE DIAMOND 
             ---- --- ------ -------
     shows the default sizes for drawing boxes etc.  

          TD:SHOW COLOR INTENSITY TEXTURE 
             ---- ----- --------- -------
     shows all the default attributes for lines.  

          TD:SHOW STORAGE 
             ---- -------
     shows the current storage allocation.  


     15.66  SMOOTH 

     SMOOTH [{X|Y|Z|RADIUS|THETA|PHI}] [LEVEL=n] 
     --                                 --
          [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] 
           --      -- --     ---
          [CHECK[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --


                                      PAGE 200


                                      COMMANDS
                                       SMOOTH

          [ERROR[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
          [FLAT[=ON|OFF]] [AVERAGE[=ON|OFF]] 
           --    -- --     --       -- --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --     --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
          [LOG[=ON|OFF]] [MONITOR[=ON|OFF]] 
           --   -- --     --       -- --

     Replace  the X,Y, or Z values by new values that give a smooth curve.  The
     data is assumed to be a histogram of equally spaced  bins.   An  alternate
     way  of  smoothing  data  is  by  convolution.   See COMMAND CONVOLUTE.  A
     convolution may be used to both smooth and "sharpen" the data.  


     15.66.1  Options 

          1.  APPEND   -   Puts   the  smoothed  data  into  a  new  data  set.
              (Default:OFF) 
          2.  AVERAGE  -  Modifies  FLAT.  When average=off each channel is the
              sum of n adjacent channels.  
              (Default:ON) 
          3.  CHECK - Checks the data to see if it is a proper histogram with X
              or X/Y for mesh equally spaced.  IF it is not an error message is
              issued,and no smoothing is done.  
              (Default:ON) 
          4.  ERROR  -  Modifies  the  errors  on the data assuming statistical
              errors.  If OFF the errors are  not  modified.   Essentially  the
              smoothing algorithm is used on the square of the errors.  
              (Default:ERROR=ON for REVISION>4.99) 
          5.  FLAT  - Smooths the data by adding together and averaging every n
              points.  The  result  has  every  n  points  identical.   LEVEL=n
              selects  the  number  of points.  For example SMOOTH FLAT LEVEL=2
              averages points 1+2, 3+4, 5+6...  
              (Default:OFF) 
          6.  LEVEL=n  -  Selects  approximately the number of points on either
              side of the bin that are used in determining the value  for  that
              bin.   The  range  of  levels  is  1  to 5.  1 Will smooth over 3
              points, while 5 will smooth over 11 points.  
              (Default:3) 
          7.  LINES/ROWS - Selects which rows of a mesh are smoothed.  
          8.  LIMITED - Selects the range of X,Y,Z values to smooth.  
          9.  LOG - Logs or types the results on your terminal.  
         10.  MONITOR - Histograms the original data and joins the result.  
              See:  SET MODE MONITOR 
              The  result  is joined using the SECONDARY attributes.  to change
              them use the SET SECONDARY command.  



                                      PAGE 201


                                      COMMANDS
                                       SMOOTH

         11.  NAME - Selects the name of the appended data set 
         12.  POINTS/COLUMNS  -  Selects which data points or columns of a mesh
              are smoothed.  If omitted all are smoothed.  
         13.  SELECT - Selects the data set by name 
         14.  SETS - Selects which data sets to use.  
         15.  X,Y,Z...   selects  whether  X, Y, or Z values are replaced.  For
              MESH data it selects the axis to smooth along.  (Default:Y) 



     15.66.2  Algorithm 

     The  data is smoothed by repeatedly transforming the points and residuals,
     using  running  means,  quadratic  interpolation,  and  hanning.   Similar
     algorithms  are  described in Exploratory Data Analysis by John W Tukey at
                                   ----------- ---- --------
     SLAC.  This has been modified slightly by  J.   Clement  to  treat  sparse
     statistical  data  correctly.   The  original  alogorithm would throw away
     isolated data points which were larger than the surrounding data.  


     15.67  SORT 

     SORT [SYMBOL] [[N][D]{X|Y|Z|U|V|W|THETA|RADIUS|PHI}] 
     --    --              - - - - - - --    --     --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --      --        --
          [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] 
           --      -- --     ---
          [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
           --   -- --
     Sorts the data according to the order of the fields (X,Y...) selected.  If
     fields  are  omitted  then  they  are  sorted  according  to   the   order
     SYMBOL,X,DX,Y,DY,Z,DZ.  Each data set is sorted independently.  

                                       example
          TD:SORT X Y Z SYMBOL 
             ---- - - - ------
     Sorts  data  so  that  all  low X are first.  Within groups of identical X
     values all low Y values are first, and so on.  Since DX,DY,DZ are  omitted
     the actual sorting order is:  X,Y,Z,SYMBOL,DX,DY,DZ.  


     15.68  SPAWN 

     This command temporarily spawns  out  of  TOPDRAWER  to  VMS.   The  SPAWN
     command is not journaled unless ABORT=OFF MODE is selected.  
          SPAWN [dcl_command] 
          --

     For  example  you  are  trying  to  do  a plot, but you have forgotten the
     filename with the TOPDRAWER source, so you:  
          TD:SPAWN  DIRECTORY  You will get a directory listing so you can find
             -----  ---------


                                      PAGE 202


                                      COMMANDS
                                       SPAWN

     the file name.  

     If  you  use the SPAWN command with no parameters, you return to TOPDRAWER
     with the VMS command:  
          $ LOGOFF 
            ------


     15.69  STOP 

          STOP|END|EXIT|HALT|QUIT ['string'] These commands all stop TOPDRAWER.
          --   --- --   --   --
     Any data remaining in the buffers is flushed, and  all  output  files  are
     closed.  
     This is also equivalent to typing Ctrl_Z if Ctrl_Z is ON.  

     The  program  is  stopped and the string is typed.  If you wish to stop in
     the middle type Ctrl_C.  This will abort the current operation and restore
     the  prompt.   If  you  are in the middle of getting data from a file, the
     file will skip to the next CLEAR or STOP command.  Pressing  Ctrl_C  twice
     rapidly in succession will abort all file input.  If you type Ctrl_C twice
     rapidly again you will be prompted if you wish to  terminate  the  program
     completely.  


     15.70  SWAP 

     SWAP {X|[N]DX|Y|[N]DY|Z|[N]DZ|U|[N]DU|V|[N]DV|W|[N]DW} [WITH] {X|[N]DX|Y|
               [N]DY|Z|[N]DZ|U|[N]DU|V|[N]DV|W|[N]DW} 
          [POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --      --        --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [ERROR[=ON|OFF]] 
           --     -- --
     This command swaps the data for 2 variables.  

     If  ERROR  is specified then the corresponding errors are swapped with the
     data.  
     (Default:ERROR=ON for REVISION>4.99) 

     This  is  useful if the data is in the wrong location for the type of plot
     you wish to make.  An example of this is  making  3-d  plots  from  binned
     data.   You  have  read  in  data,  X,Y,DY  and  you have binned it into a
     frequency distribution using the  BIN  command.   Now  the  result  is  in
     X,Y,DX,DY.   You  wish  to  make  a 3-d histogram, but the data must be in
     X,Z,DX,DZ.  To fix the problem:  
          TD:SWAP Z WITH Y 
             ---- - ---- -
          TD:SWAP DZ WITH DY 
             ---- -- ---- --
     Now you can set the Y value and perform the histogram.  
          TD:Y=10.0 
             ------
          TD:SET THREE ON 
             --- ----- --


                                      PAGE 203


                                      COMMANDS
                                        SWAP

          TD:HISTOGRAM 
             ---------
     You may copy data using the X,Y,Z,DX,...  commands.  


     15.71  SYMBOL 

     SYMBOL=symbol 
     --
          [LIMITED [VLOG[=ON|OFF]] [[FROM]|TO [[X=]nx,[[Y=]ny[,[Z=]nz]]]
           ---      --    -- --      --    --   -       -       -
               [RECURSOR] [CURSOR] ] 
                --         --
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [POINTS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           --      --        --
     This  resets  the  symbol  for  the selected data points or sets.  Symbols
     should be 0O,1O,...9O, DOT or NONE.  Any other symbol may not be  properly
     centered.  


     15.72  TITLE 

     Puts a title on the plot 
     TITLE [x, [y, [z]]|CURSOR] 'text_of_title' [TIME] [lexicals] 
     --                 --                       --
          [TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|X|Y|Z|GENERAL] 
           --  --     --    --   - - - -
          [DATA|XDATA|YDATA|TEXT] 
           --   --    --    --
          [LJUSTIFY|CENTER|RJUSTIFY] [LINES=n] 
           --       --     --         ---
          [SIZE=n] [ANGLE=n] [SPACES=n] [INDEX=n] [DIGITS=n] 
           --       --        --         --        --
          [CASE 'case modifier string'] 
           --
          [INTENSITY|WIDTH=n] [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|MAGENTA|CYAN] 
           --        --        --    --  --    --   --     --      --
     The  text will be written on the plot.  It must be enclosed in apostrophes
     or quotes.  


     15.72.1  Xyz 

     x,  y, z - Specify the position of left most character in the text.  If no
     position is given, and TOP,BOTTOM...   are  not  specified  the  title  is
     placed below the most recent title.  CURSOR produces the cross hair curson
     on interactive terminals.  You move the cursor to the  location  you  wish
     the  title to appear, and press the space bar.  The position of the cursor
     is written to the JOURNAL file so you may repeat the plot exactly.  If you
     need  titles  at  angles  other  than  horizontal, you should also use the
     option ANGLE=n.  





                                      PAGE 204


                                      COMMANDS
                                       TITLE

     15.72.2  ANGLE 

     ANGLE=n  - Gives the angle in degrees measured counterclockwise.  ANGLE=90
     runs the title from bottom to top.  This  has  no  effect  on  perspective
     labels for 3-d plots.  


     15.72.3  LJUSTIFY|CENTER|RJUSTIFY 

     Either left, right or center justifies the title.  (Default:LJUSTIFY) 
       *  LJUSTIFY - The center of the first character is at x,y,z.  
       *  CENTER - The center of the string is at x,y,x.  The center is assumed
          half way between the first and last characters.  
       *  RJUSTIFY - The center of the last character is at x,y,z.  
     If TOP,BOTTOM...  are specified then the title is automatically centered. 

                                       example
          TD:Title TOP LJUST 'Left' 
             ----- --- ----- ------
          TD:Title top 'Center' 
             ----- --- --------
          TD:Title top RJUST 'Right' 
             ----- --- ----- -------
     puts 3 titles at the top of the plot on the left,center, and right.  

                                       example
          TD:TITLE 10,5 RJUST 'Location 10,5 -->+' 
             ----- ---- ----- --------- ---- -----
     Puts the title with the plus sign at x=10, y=5.  


     15.72.4  DATA|XDATA|YDATA|TEXT 

     Specifies  the  DATA  or  TEXT coordinate frame.  Normally x, y are in the
     text coordinate system.  If you specify x,y, and z then the data frame  is
     assumed.  
     DATA - both x,y are in the data frame.  
     TEXT - both x,y are in the text frame.  
     XDATA - x is in data frame y in text frame.  
     YDATA - y is in data frame x in text frame.  


     15.72.5  DIGITS 

     DIGITS=n  selects  the  number  of  significant  figures  to reproduce for
     lexicals.  If n is omitted it is assumed to be 4.  You may  also  set  the
     number of digits with the SET DIGITS command.  

                                       example
          TD:TITLE TOP 'Mean=',DIGITS=6,T_MEAN,' err=',DIGITS=2,T_EMEAN 
             ----- --- ------------------------- ----------------------
     The top title will be the mean and error for the data.  








                                      PAGE 205


                                      COMMANDS
                                       TITLE

     15.72.6  Lexicals 

     You may include a lexical value in your title.   A  title  lexical  is  an
     option in the form T_xxxx, where xxxx is the value to plot.  The number of
     significant digits in the number is normally 4.  You may alter  this  with
     the  DIGITS=n  option  or the SET DIGITS command.  For example you wish to
     show the sum of the data in the top title:  
          TD:TITLE TOP 'My data - Sum=',T_SUM 
             ----- --- --- ---- - -----------
     You  may  wish  to limit the sum to a portion of the data so you first use
     show data to calculate the sum for a limited portion, then put it  in  the
     title:  
          TD SHOW DATA LIMITED FROM X=5 to X=10 
          -- ---- ---- ------- ---- --- -- ----
          TD:TITLE BOTTOM 'Sum=' T_SUM 'X from ' T_XMIN ' to ' T_XMAX 
             ----- ------ ------ ----- -- ---- - ------ - -- - ------

          TD:TITLE TOP 'Sum=' T_SUM ' '+' CASE'M' T_ESUM 
             ----- --- ------ ----- - --- ------- ------
     For more information SEE:TOPDRAWER LEXICALS.  


     15.72.7  TIME 

     Inserts the current DATE and TIME into the title.  For example:  
          TD:TITLE TOP '(Date:  ' TIME ')' 
             ----- --- -------  - ---- ---
     Assuming  the current time is noon on the Jan 1, 1987, the following title
     is plotted at the top:  
          (Date: 1-JAN-87 12:00:00) 


     15.72.8  TOP|BOTTOM|RIGHT|LEFT|GENERAL 

     TOP,BOTTOM,RIGHT,LEFT  -  Specify  the title position relative to the data
     window.  GENERAL is a synonym for TOP.   The  title  is  centered  at  the
     appropriate  position.   The size and angle are determined by the SET SIZE
     command.  If a size, or x,y,z are specified,  they  override  the  default
     position and size.  A TOP title is generally drawn with character size 1.5
     times the default.  If no other options are specified, then the  character
     size  is reduced by up to a factor of 4 to keep the title from overflowing
     the screen.  


     15.72.9  X|Y|Z 

     For  3-d  plots the label is drawn in perspective parallel to the selected
     axis.  For 2-d plots X,Y,Z are synonyms for LEFT,BOTTOM,TOP.  


     15.72.10  LINES 

     LINES=n  -  Moves the title up space for n extra lines of text.  The title
     is moved up by n-1 lines.  If LINES=1 then the title is not moved at all. 






                                      PAGE 206


                                      COMMANDS
                                       TITLE

     15.72.11  SIZE 

     SIZE=n gives the approximate spacing between chars.  in tenths of an inch.
     If n is negative hardware characters will be used when available.  If n is
     positive  software  characters  will  be  used  if mode VECTOR=ON.  If not
     specified the size is determined by the most recent title  command.   Once
     this  parameter has been set, the character size remains the same unless a
     BOTTOM,TOP,RIGHT,LEFT,X,Y,Z or SIZE option is used.  If not specified  the
     angle is determined by the most recent title command.  


     15.72.12  INDEX 

     INDEX=n  -  Specifies  the line spacing in multiples of character spacing.
     This is used for multiline titles.  


     15.72.13  SPACES 

     SPACES=n  This  specifies how much space the title occupies.  This is only
     necessary if variable character spacing, or sub/superscripts are used  and
     you wish to center the title.  


     15.72.14  INTENSITY 

     INTENSITY - Determines the intensity or line width of the title.  


     15.72.15  WHITE...  

     WHITE....  Determines the color of the title.  


     15.72.16  CASE 

     Controls the format of the title.  It must be the next command  after  the
     TITLE  or  MORE  command  or  on the same line with the TITLE command.  It
     modifies only the preceding string.  It must immediately follow the string
     either on the same, or the next line.  

          CASE 'case_text' 
          --

     This  specifies  the case or character type of each character in the title
     text.  For the definitions of all possible CASE characters see:  
          TOPDRAWER FONTS 

     It is not necessary to use a case command if you only want upper and lower
     case ASCII characters.  Simply type them into your title as  you  wish  to
     see them.  

                                       example
          TD:TITLE TOP 'ABG' CASE 'GGG' 
             ----- --- ----- ---- -----
     Produces a title with 3 lower case Greek letters alpha,beta,gamma.  
          TD:TITLE TOP 'ABC' 'ABG' CASE 'GGG' 
             ----- --- ----- ----- ---- -----


                                      PAGE 207


                                      COMMANDS
                                       TITLE

     Produces a title with 3 Roman letters followed by 3 Greek letters.  
          TD:TITLE TOP 'S=' CASE 'G' V_SUM 
             ----- --- ---- ---- --- -----
     Produces a Greek "Sigma".  
          TD:TITLE TOP 'S=' V_SUM CASE 'G' 
             ----- --- ---- ----- ---- ---
     Does  not produce any Greek because the case and string are separated by a
     lexical.  


     15.72.17  3-d 

     If the options  X,Y,  or  Z  are  used,  then  the  title  is  plotted  in
     perspective  relative  to the default X,Y,Z axis.  If you set each axis to
     be in  a  particular  location,  then  you  should  plot  the  axis  title
     specifying  X,Y,Z  or specify the origin using the SET THREE command.  The
     title starts at the origin of the axis.  If the option CENTER is used  the
     title is centered along the axis.  

     If  the  title  position  is  also  specified,  then  the title is plotted
     according to the position specified.  

     The  AXIS  angle determines the orientation of the title.  See the command
     SET THREE.  

     If  a title is drawn in perspective, subsequent title commands without any
     position specifications will draw more titles above  or  below  the  first
     one.  The displacement is picked away from the axis.  


     15.72.18  Consecutive_titles 

     If  a title command omits the options TOP, BOTTOM, RIGHT, LEFT, X, Y, or Z
     and no locations (x,y,z) are specified, then the title is placed under the
     previous  one.   The  spacing  is  determined  by  the  INDEX option.  The
     previous  INDEX,  ANGLE,  SIZE,  justification,  LINES,  and  SPACING  are
     retained.   If  the  previous title was a 3-D title then the current title
     may be placed above it, depending on the axes angle and orientation of the
     view.  


     15.73  TRANSFORM 

     TRANSFORM [FROM|TO CARTESIAN|POLAR|SPHERICAL] [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]]
     --         --   -- --        --    --          ---   --        --
               [SELECT="name"] [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
                ---             --      -- --     ---           --   -- --
     Transforms data coordinates from one frame to another.  This will not work
     with mesh data.  If omitted, the FROM or TO is  assumed  to  be  CARTESIAN
     coordinates.  
          1.  APPEND - Appends the transformed data as a new data set.  
          2.  LOG - Logs the operation on your terminal.  
          3.  POLAR - THETA,R,Z cordinates selected 
          4.  SPHERICAL - THETA,R,PHI cordinates selected 
          5.  CARTESIAN - X,Y,Z cordinates selected (Default) 
                                       example
          TD:TRANSFORM FROM POLAR TO SPERICAL SET=5 
             --------- ---- ----- -- -------- -----


                                      PAGE 208


                                      COMMANDS
                                     TRANSFORM

     Transforms data set 5.  
          TD:TRANSFORM TO POLAR 
             --------- -- -----
     All  data  sets  are transformed from X,Y,Z to polar coordinates THETA,R,Z
     respectively.  


     15.74  TYPE 

     TYPE  [ERASE]  [TOP]  [BOTTOM] [BELL] [BOLD] [BLINK] [REVERSE] [UNDERLINE]
     --     --       --     --       --     --     --      --        --
               [WIDE]  [BACKGROUND|FOEGROUND  [   [WHITE|RED|GREEN|BLUE|YELLOW|
                --      --         --              --    --  --    --   --
               MAGENTA|CYAN]] [nn] ["string"] 
               --      --
     The  string is typed on your terminal.  This is useful for typing messages
     on the users terminal while plots are being produced from an input file.  
          1.  ERASE - This erases the screen (ANSI terminal).  This erases text
              from a VT-1xx/2xx  compatible  terminal.   This  does  not  erase
              TEKTRONIX graphics, but REGIS graphics will be erased.  This must
              be precede the string.  
          2.  TOP - The string is at the top of the screen (ANSI terminal).  
          3.  BOTTOM  -  The  string  is  at  the  bottom  of  the screen (ANSI
              terminal).  
          4.  BELL - This rings the bell.  
          5.  BOLD,BLINK,REVERSE,UNDERLINE,WIDE  - Sets the video attributes of
              the line.  These must be after the ERASE,TOP options  and  before
              the  string.   Several of these may be used together.  These only
              work for a VT-100 or compatible ANSI terminal.  
          6.  BACKGROUND|FOREGROUND  control  the  color.  (ANSI terminal) Once
              the color has been set it remains set until another type  command
              sets new colors.  
          7.  nn - This inserts a control character (0-255) into the string.  
     nn  and  string may be repeated to generate control characters.  See also:
     SET PROMPT.  


     15.75  U 

     See:Command X 


     15.76  V 

     See:Command X 


     15.77  W 

     See:Command X 


     15.78  X 

     Put a sequence of values into one of the data point or error arrays.  This
     is  useful  when  the  X values are uniformly spaced, and you only wish to
     enter the Y  values.   This  may  also  be  used  for  entering  constant,
     proportional  or  counting  errors.   You  may  also  modify the data by a


                                      PAGE 209


                                      COMMANDS
                                         X

     constant or an equation.  For example you can normalize the data.  
     {[N][D]{X|Y|Z|U|V|W|THETA|RADIUS|PHI}}= 
             - - - - - - --    --     --
                                  Generate a range of values
          [BINS|VALUES] [[FROM] xlow] [TO xhi] [BY|WIDTH|STEP xstep] [N=n] 
           --   --        --           --       -- --    --           -
                                          Operations
          "expression" 
                         or ...  
          {[N][D]{X|Y|Z|U|V|W|THETA|RADIUS|PHI}} [PLUS|+|MINUS|-|TIMES|*|
                  - - - - - - --    --     --     --   - --    - --    -
               DIVIDE|/] n [[NO]ERROR=n] 
               --     -     ------
                         or ...  [POISSON|SQRT|SAMPLES=s] 
                                  ----    --   --
                                        Data selection
          [APPEND[=ON|OFF]] [NAME="name"] 
           --      -- --     ---
          [SETS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --        --
          [SELECT="name"] 
           ---
          [POINTS|COLUMNS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ----   --       --        --
          [LINES|ROWS=[FROM] n1 [TO] [n2]] 
           ---   --    --        --
          [LOG[=ON|OFF]] 
           --   -- --


     15.78.1  APPEND 

     The specified points are appended to last data set.  If you wish to create
     a new set you should use the DATA SET command.  This  option  may  not  be
     used  with  the SETS or POINTS options.  It is also illegal for mesh data.
     Along with APPEND you must specify 3 of the options FROM,TO,BY,N.  


     15.78.2  BINS|VALUES 

          BINS
     creates values at the centers of bins whose edge is defined by the values. 
          VALUES
     specifies the values for the specified coordinate.  If you specify a range
     of  values  or  bins,   you   may   not   specify   operations   such   as
     TIMES,DIVIDE,MINUS,PLUS or a coordinate such as X,Y,DX...  or an equation.
     If you generate a new data set you must specify 3 numbers for  FROM,TO,BY,
     and  N.   If  you modify an existing data set only 2 numbers are spcified.
     You may also specify a single value.  
                                      examples
          TD:DX=0.5 
     Sets all DX values to 0.5 
          TD:X=BINS FROM 1 to 10 by 2 
             ------ ---- - -- -- -- -
     Generates a new data set with values X=2,4,6,8 
          TD:X=VALUES FROM 1 TO 10 BY 2 
             -------- ---- - -- -- -- -
               or...  


                                      PAGE 210


                                      COMMANDS
                                         X

          TD:X FROM 1 TO 10 BY 2 
             - ---- - -- -- -- -
     Generates a new data set with values X=1,3,5,7,9 
          TD:X FROM 1 BY 2 SET=2 
             - ---- - -- - -----
     Modifies data set 2 with values X=1,3,5,7,9...  
          TD:X=Y TIMES FROM 1 TO 10 BY 2 
             --- ----- ---- - -- -- -- -
     Is illegal 
          TD:X=Y TIMES 2 
             --- ----- -
     is legal 


     15.78.3  ERROR 

     This specifies the error on the value you  have  specified.   If  you  use
     NOERROR  the  error  analysis is turned off.  This only works when you are
     modifying X,Y,Z values.   The  specified  error  is  used  to  modify  the
     DX,DY,DZ value.  
                                       example
          Y=Y * 5.0 
     Will multiply each Y and DY value by 5.0.  
          Y=Y * 5.0 ERROR=0.1 
     Will multiply each Y and DY value by 5.0.  The specified error of 0.1 Will
     be used to compute the actual DY value.  
          Y=Y * 5.0 NOERROR 
     Will multiply each Y value by 5.0.  The DY values will remain unchanged.  
          Y="LOG(YV)" NOERROR 
     Will  take  the LOG to base 10 of each Y value.  The DY values will remain
     unchanged.  
          Y="LOG(YV)" 
     Will  take  the  LOG  to  base  10 of each Y value.  The DY values will be
     modified as:  DY=ABS(LOG(Y+DY)-LOG(Y)).  


     15.78.4  Expression 

     You  may  use  an expression inside quotes to actually calculate the value
     for an existing data set.  The expression  is  evaluated  for  each  value
     required.   The  lexicals  V_XVALUE,V_DXVALUE,V_ZVALUE...  are the current
     X,DX,Y...  needed to perform the  calculation.   If  you  do  not  specify
     NOERROR  then  the  error  is also computed when X,Y,Z are modified by the
     expression.  If you use an expression you may not use  any  other  options
     except for POINTS, LINES, COLUMNS, SETS, and LOG and ERROR.  


     15.78.4.1  Errors   - The  error  is  generated  in a simple fashion.  The
     computation is repeated for the value+err.  For example you specify:  
          TD:Y="SIN(YV)" 
               then the result is:  
          NDY=-(SIN(Y-DY)-SIN(Y)) 
          DY=SIN(Y+DY)-SIN(Y) 
          Y=SIN(Y) 

     This  computation  may  not  be  correct,  so  the  error analysis must be
     carefully checked.  It will work for many simple cases.  



                                      PAGE 211


                                      COMMANDS
                                         X

     15.78.4.2  Examples  - 
          TD:X FROM 0 to 360 by 5 
             - ---- - -- --- -- -
          TD:Y="SINE<XV>" 
             ------------
     Generates a sine wave between 0 and 360 degrees in 5 degree steps.  
          TD:Y=Y TIMES 10 
             --- ----- --
     or...  
          TD:Y="YV*10" 
             ---------
     Both  multiply  y by the constant value 10.0.  The first method is faster,
     and it also multiplies DY by the constant, while the expression  does  not
     alter DY.  


     15.78.5  LINES|ROWS 

     selects  the mesh rows for which values are generated.  If a single number
     is specified it is the row number to set.  If both n1 and n2 are specified
     they are the first and last row to set.  


     15.78.6  LOG 

     Types on your terminal the results of the operation.  
     (Default:LOG=OFF) 


     15.78.7  NAME 

     The  new  set will usually have a name consisting of a transformation name
     followed by the old set name.  If you specify a new name it is applied  to
     the  new  data set.  If the name ends in "%" then the old name is appended
     to the new name.  See option:APPEND 


     15.78.8  POINTS|COLUMNS 

     selects  the  points  or mesh data columns for which values are generated.
     If a single number is specified it is point number to set.  If both n1 and
     n2 are specified they are the first and last point to set.  


     15.78.9  POISSON|SQRT 

     applies only to Dn and makes Dn=SQRT(n).  This is counting statistics.  It
     is a special case of binomial statistics for a large number of samples.  


     15.78.10  SAMPLES 

          SAMPLES=s      applies      binomial      statistics      to      Dn,
     Dn=SQRT(max(n,1)*max(s-n,1)/s).  You must supply  the  number  of  samples
     (s).   If  you  generate  a  set of data by a Monte-Carlo method where the
     total number of hits s is selected, but the distribution of  the  hits  is
     generated by the program then you should use Binomial statistics.  



                                      PAGE 212


                                      COMMANDS
                                         X

     15.78.11  SETS 

     selects the data set to modify.  


     15.78.12  TIMES 

     Multiplies  the  selected  coordinate  by  the selected value.  If you are
     multiplying X,Y, or Z by a constant the DX,DY, or DZ are  also  multiplied
     by  the  constant.   In  addition if ERROR was specified then the final Dn
     will be modified  by  the  specified  error.   DY=SQRT(DY**2+(e*n/c)**2)*c
     where C is the specified constant.  

     If  a coordinate and a number are specified, but no operator then TIMES is
     assumed.  
                                       example
     To multiply y by 2+-0.1 
          Y=Y TIMES 2 ERROR=.1 
               or...  
          Y=Y * 2 ERROR=.1 To multiply y by 2 with no error on the value 2.  
          Y=2 Y 
               or...  
          Y=2 TIMES Y 
               or...  
          Y=2 * Y 


     15.78.13  PLUS 

     Adds the value to the coordinate.  If you specify ERROR and you are adding
     a  constant  to  X,Y,  or  Z  the  DX,DY,  or  DZ   are   also   modified.
     DY=SQRT(DY**2+(e)**2) where e is the specified error.  
                                       example
     To add 2+-0.1 to y 
          Y=Y PLUS 2 ERROR=.1 
               or...  
          Y=Y + 2 ERROR=.1 


     15.78.14  MINUS 

     Subtracts  the value from the coordinate or the coordinate from the value.
     If you specify ERROR and you are subtracting a constant to X,Y, or  Z  the
     DX,DY,  or  DZ  are  also  modified.  DY=SQRT(DY**2+(e)**2) where e is the
     specified error.  
                                       example
     To subtract 2+-0.1 from y 
          Y=Y MINUS 2 ERROR=.1 
               or...  
          Y=Y - 2 ERROR=.1 
     To subtract Y from 2.  
          Y=2 MINUS Y 
               or...  
          Y=2 - Y 






                                      PAGE 213


                                      COMMANDS
                                         X

     15.78.15  DIVIDE 

     Divides  the  coordinate  by the value or a value by a coordinate.  If you
     are dividing X,Y, or Z by a constant the DX,DY, or DZ are also divided  by
     the  constant.   In addition if ERROR was specified then the final Dn will
     be modified by the specified error.  DY=SQRT(DY**2+(e*n/c)**2)/c  where  C
     is the specified constant.  
                                       example
     To divide y by 2+-0.1 
          Y=Y DIVIDE 2 ERROR=.1 
               or...  
          Y=Y / 2 ERROR=.1 To divide 2+-0.1 by Y 
          Y=2 ERROR=.1 DIVIDE Y 
               or...  
          Y=2 ERROR=.1 / Y 


     15.78.16  Warning 

     If  you have already plotted the current data, this command will delete it
     if just a value, or range of values is specified for X,Y, or  Z.   If  you
     wish to keep the data, you should use the option POINTS, SETS, or APPEND. 


     15.78.17  Examples 

          TD:X VALUES FROM 0 to 10 by 1 
             - ------ ---- - -- -- -- -
               creates a data set with 11 values for X 0,1,2,...10 
          TD:X BINS FROM 0 to 10 N=10 
             - ---- ---- - -- -- ----
               or ...  
          TD:X FROM 0 to 10 by 1 BINS 
             - ---- - -- -- -- - ----
               create a data set with 10 values for X 0.5,1.5....9.5 
          TD:X FROM 0 to 20 BINS POINTS=1 TO 10 
             - ---- - -- -- ---- -------- -- --
     generates 1,3,5,...19 for Data points 1 to 10.  
          TD:Y=2.0 POINT=5 
             ----- -------
     data point number 5 is set to 2.0 
          TD:DY =5 
             -- --
     Sets all Y errors to +-5.  
          TD:DX =.1 * X 
             -- --- - -
               or ....  
          TD:DX =.1 TIMES X 
             -- --- ----- -
     Sets all X errors to 1.  times the X value.  
          TD:X = 1 PLUS X 
             - - - ---- -
               or ...  
          TD:X = 1 + X 
             - - - - -
     Adds 1.0 to all X values.  
          TD:X = 1 + X ERROR=0.1 
             - - - - - ---------


                                      PAGE 214


                                      COMMANDS
                                         X

     Adds  1.0  to  all  X  values  and  adds  0.1  in  quadrature  to  all DX.
     DX=SQRT(DX**2+(0.1)**2) 
          TD:Y = DIVIDE 5 
             - - ------ -
     Both Y and DY are divided by 5.  
          TD:Y =Y * 5 ERROR=0.1 
             - -- - - ---------
     The  Y  coordinate is multiplied by 5, and the DY is modified according to
     the error.  DY=5*SQRT(DY**2+(0.1*Y/5)**2) 
          TD:SET ORDER Y 
             --- ----- -
          TD:1.5;  3.8;  9.7 
             ----  ----  ---
          TD:X FROM 1 to 3 
             - ---- - -- -
               or....  
          TD:X FROM 1 BY 1 
             - ---- - -- -
               is the same as:  
          TD:1 1.5;  2 3.8;  3 9.7 
             - ----  - ----  - ---
          TD:DY SAMPLES=100 
             -- -----------
     Each  DY  is  now  equal to SQRT(Y*(100-Y)/100).  This assumes that each Y
     represents the number of sucesses out of a sample of 100.  
          TD:Y=Y / V_SUM 
             --- - -----
     Normalizes  the  data to the total sum over all data.  Note:  This may not
     have the desired effect if you have more than 1 data  set.   To  normalize
     only one data set:  
          SET STATISTICS SET=2 
          TD:Y=Y / V_SUM 
             --- - -----
     Normalizes only data set 2.  
          TD:Y="LOG(YV)" 
             -----------
     Transforms  Y  by  taking  the  LOG  to base 10.  DY is likewise modified.
     ----------  -  --  ------  ---  ---  -- ---- ---  -- -- -------- ---------
     Y=LOG10(Y) and DY=ABS(LOG10(Y+DY)-LOG10(Y)) 
     ---------- --- ----------------------------


     15.78.18  Mesh_examples 
     --------  -------------

     Assume you have mesh data X,Y (ROW,COLUMN) of size 20, 30.  
     ------ --- ---- ---- ---- --- ------------ -- ---- --- ---
          TD:X=X MINUS 5 
          ------ ----- -
     Shifts the X scale 
          TD:Y=Y TIMES 2 
             --- ----- -
     Expands the Y scale 
          TD:Z=10 ROW=5 COLUMN=3 
             ---- ----- --------
     Modifies 1 entry 
          TD:Z=0 
             ---


                                      PAGE 215


                                      COMMANDS
                                         X

     Sets all mesh values to 0.0 
          TD:Z=Z PLUS 1 ROW=5 TO 10 COLUMN=3 TO 5 
             --- ---- - ----- -- -- -------- -- -
     Adds 1 to all mesh values for the specified range of rows and columns.  15
     values are modified.  


     15.79  Y 

     See:Command X 


     15.80  Z 

     See:Command X 













































                                      Page 216














                                         16

                                   LEXICAL_VALUES



     You have access to data via lexicals.  For example you may access the sum,
     mean,  standard  deviation  of  your  data  set and put them into a title.
     See:Command TITLE.  Quantities such as points, sum etc.  are calculated by
     a  SET  STATISTICS or SHOW DATA command.  If you do not use SET STATISTICS
     or SHOW DATA to generate them, they are automatically calculated from  the
     entire  data  set.   Whenever  you  modify  the data set, you must use SET
     STATISTICS to set the statistics if you wish  the  lexicals  to  represent
     only  a  subset of the data.  To use a lexical value you must use a symbol
     of the form:  T_NAME, S_NAME, or V_NAME.  The T_NAME inserts the value  of
     the  name  into a title string.  V_NAME or <NAME> is used to get the value
     as a number.  S_NAME gets a value as a string.   You  may  define  lexical
     values by the command DEFINE VALUE or DEFINE STRING.  

     The  lexicals  may  be  abbreviated  to  the  shortest  unique  name.  For
     convenience V_ may be omitted inside an expression.   This  will  increase
     the  time  to  parse an expression.  For example <V_XVALUE> is the same as
     <XVALUE> or V_XV.  


     16.1  LIST_OF_NAMES 

          NAMES - Value 
          -----   -----
       *  INPUT_LEVEL - The number of input files opened by SET FILE INPUT.  
       *  CPUTIME - The current cpu time 
       *  CPULIMIT - The cpu time remaining 
       *  SETS - The number of data sets.  
       *  CURRENT_SET - The current data set (Set by option:SETS=) 
       *  XVALUE[np,nr,ns] - The X value for point n in set ns.  
       *  DXVALUE[np,nr,ns] - The error on X for point np row nr in set ns 
       *  NDX[np,nr,ns],NDY,NDZVALUE - Negative part of error bar.  
       *  YVALUE[np,nr,ns] 
       *  ZVALUE[np,nr,ns] 
       *  UVALUE[np,nr,ns] 
       *  VVALUE[np,nr,ns] 
       *  WVALUE[np,nr,ns] 
       *  DYVALUE[np,nr,ns] 
       *  DZVALUE[np,nr,ns] - (data for point n) 
       *  RVALUE[np,nr,ns],DRVALUE[np,nr,ns] - Radius in polar or spherical
          coordinates 
       *  THVALUE[np,nr,ns],DTHVALUE[np,nr,ns] - Theta in polar or spherical
          coordinates 



                                      PAGE 217


                                   LEXICAL_VALUES
                                   LIST_OF_NAMES

       *  PHIVALUE[np,nr,ns],DPHIVALUE[np,nr,ns] - Phi in Spherical coordinates 
       *  PLOTS - The number of plots produced.  
       *  WINDOWS - The maximum number of windows 
       *  CURRENT_WINDOW - The current window number 
       *  XWINDOWS - The maximum number of X windows 
       *  CURRENT_XWINDOW - The current X window number.  
       *  YWINDOWS - The maximum number of Y windows 
       *  CURRENT_YWINDOW - The current Y window number.  
       *  COLUMNS - Number of columns in a mesh.  
       *  CURRENT_COLUMN - Current column of a mesh (Set by option:POINT|
          COLUMN=) 
       *  ROWS - Number of rows in a mesh.  
       *  CURRENT_ROW - Current row in a mesh.  (Set by option:LINE|ROW=) 

                           Calc by SET STATISTICS or SHOW DATA
       *  POINTS - The points in your data set.  
       *  nMIN - The minimum value of n where n=X,Y, or Z.  
       *  nMAX - The maximum value of n where n=X,Y, or Z.  
       *  SUM - The sum over all points.  
       *  AVERAGE - The average over all points.  
       *  MEAN - The mean of the data.  
       *  STD - The standard deviation of the data from the average.  
       *  ESUM - The error on the sum.  
       *  EAVERAGE - The error on the average.  
       *  ESTD - The error in the STD.  
       *  EMEAN - The error in the mean.  

                                   Calc by FIT command
       *  TERMS - The maximum term fit or constrained.  (0...20) 
       *  NPFIT - Then number of points fit 
       *  NTFIT - The number of terms fit.  
       *  CHISQR - The chi squared/point.  
       *  FTEST - The value of FTEST.  
       *  FIT[n] - 1 if coefficient n has been fit (n=0-19), 0 if not.  
       *  CONSTRAINED[n] - 1 if this coefficient has been picked or
          constrained.  
       *  COEFFICIENT[n] - Value of the coefficient of the fit.  
       *  ECOEFFICIENT[n] - Error on coefficient n.  

                                 SET by SET HIST command
       *  CURRENT_HISTOGRAM - The current histogram ID
          (See:Command SET HISTOGRAM) 
       *  HIST_NAME - Current hist name (S_ only) 
       *  HIST_ENTRIES - The number of entries in the hist 
       *  HIST_MEAN - The mean of the hist 
       *  HIST_STD - The hist standard deviation 
       *  HIST_SUM[n1,n2] - The sum over this histogram.  
               n1 = 1,2,3 for X Under,sum,over 
               n2 = 1,2,3 for Y Under,sum,over 
               If n1 or n2 are omitted or are 0 then you get the sum of all 3. 
       *  XMARKER[n] - Array of 8 X markers 
       *  YMARKER[n] - Array of 8 Y markers 
       *  ZMARKER[n] - Array of 8 Z markers 

                                     3-d Parameters
       *  VIEW_THETA - Viewing angle 
       *  VIEW_PHI - Viewing angle 



                                      PAGE 218


                                   LEXICAL_VALUES
                                   LIST_OF_NAMES

       *  VIEW_SEPARATION - Eye separation 
       *  VIEW_DISTANCE - Distance from observer to object 
       *  VIEW_SCRD - Distance from observer to screen 

                                      Miscellaneous
       *  REPEAT[n] - Repeat number for loop n.  



     16.2  VALUES 

     V_XVALUE[n,ns]  is  the n'th value in set ns.  Likewise V_DXVALUE[n,ns] is
     the  n'th  value  in  set  ns.   You  may  also  access  Y,DY,Z,  and  DZ.
     S_SYMBOL[n,ns]  is  the symbol for the the n'th value in set ns.  If ns is
     omited then n is the point number.  

     For  MESH  plots  V_XVALUE[n1],V_YVALUE[n2],V_ZVALUE[n1,n2]  are  used  to
     access the data point values where n1 is the column number and n2  is  the
     row number.  

     If both n and ns are omitted then it is the value for the current point in
     an X=,DX=,Y=...  command.  


     16.3  REPEAT 

          V_REPEAT[n] 
          -----
     This is the repeat index for repeat commands.  It starts at 1 and is equal
     to the number of repeats when the loop terminates.  You  may  specify  the
     loop  number as n.  If n is omitted it is the current inner loop.  If n is
     negative it is the next outer loop.  

                                       example
          TD:REPEAT   2   "TYPE   ""A"",S_REPEAT;REPEAT  3  ""TYPE  S_REPEAT,'|
             ------   -   -----   ---------------------  -  ------  -----------
     'S_REPEAT[-1]""";  
     -----------------
     Types:  
          A1.0 
          1.0|1.0 
          2.0|1.0 
          3.0|1.0 
          A1.0 
          1.0|2.0 
          2.0|2.0 
          3.0|2.0 


     16.4  EXAMPLES 

          TD:TITLE TOP 'Mean=' T_MEAN 
             ----- --- ------- ------
     Writes the mean of our data at the top of the current plot.  
          TD:SET ORDER X Y DX DY 
             --- ----- - - -- --
          TD:DATA SET 
             ---- ---


                                      PAGE 219


                                   LEXICAL_VALUES
                                      EXAMPLES

          TD:V_MEAN,V_SUM,V_ESTD,V_ESUM 
             --------------------------
          TD:DELETE SET=FIRST 
             ------ ---------
     Creates  a  new data set containing the Y=SUM, X=MEAN, DX=STD, DY=error on
     SUM, then deletes the old data set.  
          TD:IF V_FIT[1] .gt.  0 TITLE 'Coef(1)=',T_COEFFICIENT[1] 
             -- -------- ----  - ----- ---------------------------
     Writes coefficient 1 if it has been fit.  
          TD:SET STATISTICS LIMITED FROM 0,1 to 5,10 
             --- ---------- ------- ---- --- -- ----
          TD:TITLE TOP 'Sum=',T_SUM,' between x=0,5 y=1,10' 
             ----- --- -------------- ------- ----- -------
     Plot a title with the sum over the data between limits on x,y.  
          TD:SET STATISTICS SET=2 
             --- ---------- -----
          TD:TITLE TOP 'Sum=',T_SUM,' for data set 2' 
             ----- --- -------------- --- ---- --- --
     Plot a title with the sum over data set 2.  









































                                      Page 220














                                         17

                                      EXAMPLES



     There are several files that give examples of TOPDRAWER plots.  
                           Fonts + 2 dimensional graphics
          TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TDINTRO.TOP 
                               3 dimensional graphics
          TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TD3D.TOP 
                                    Character set
          TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FONT_TABLE.TOP 
                          Color graphics on VT-240 or GIGI
          TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]COLORGRAPH.TOP 
                                    Test routines
          TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]BENCH.TOP 
          TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]RESOLUTION_TEST.TOP 
          TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FIT_TEST.TOP 
               Test to make sure coefficients and errors are correct 
          TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FIT_GAUS_COEF_TEST.TOP 
          TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FIT_EXP_COEF_TEST.TOP 
          TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]FIT_PARABOLA_COEF_TEST.TOP 




























                                      Page 221














                                         18

                                     SUBROUTINES



     The TOPDRAWER package is available as a collection  of  subroutines.   You
     can  call  them to produce plots from any program.  Each subroutine is the
     same as giving a TOPDRAWER command.  They are available in library:  
                               TOPDRAWER_DIR:TOPDRAWER


     18.1  NAMES 

     Most  internal  subroutines  used by TOPDRAWER begin with T1,T2,TD, or TX.
     The unified graphics routines all begin with UG.  The exceptions to  these
     rules  except  for  TOKEN are documented here.  The CERN library histogram
     routines used by TD do not follow any clear conventions.  


     18.2  STRINGS 



                                       WARNING
                                       -------

          Routines  TDSET,TDTITL  and  TDCASE  are  not  fully  Fortran-77
          compatible.  You must use either hollerith  data,  byte  arrays,
          literals,  or  character  variables sent by reference when using
          those routines.  


     If  you  use a byte array or a character array sent by reference, you must
     terminate it with a semicolon (;) The following are all legal:  
          CHARACTER*8 str 
          DATA str /'Title;'/ 
          CALL TDTITL(%REF(str)) 
               or...  
          CALL TDTITL('Title') 
               or...  
          CALL TDTITL(6HTitle;) 
               or...  
          REAL*8 str 
          DATA str /'Title;'/ 
          CALL TDTITL(str) 
               or...  
          byte str(5) 
          DATA str /'T','i','t','l','e',';'/ 


                                      PAGE 222


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                      STRINGS

          CALL TDTITL(str) 


     18.3  UNIT_NUMBERS 

     The following logical unit numbers are used:  
          Unit Routine   Usage
          ---- -------   -----
          1    T2SETH    Histogram input
          6    All       Error message/Information output
          7    TDMAIN    Journal file output
          8    All       Listing output
          9-19 TDMAIN    Input
          86   All       Error message for deferred errors
     The  journal  file,  and  listing  are not output unless the following set
     commands are used:  
          TD:SET FILE LOG filename 
             --- ---- --- --------
          TD:SET FILE LIST filename 
             --- ---- ---- --------


     18.4  LINKING 

     For more information on linking see UGS.  The following routines should be
     linked to your program.  
          $ LINK Routine, - 
               TOPDRAWER_OLB[/INCLUDE=TD]/LIBRARY, - 
               PACKLIB_OLB/LIBRARY,MATHLIB_OLB/LIBRARY, 
               UGS_OLB/LIBRARY 

     If you wish to link a standalone version of topdrawer use /INCLUDE=TD.  

     For  example  you  wish  to make up a version of Topdrawer to do fits with
     your own supplied function TDUFUN.   You  would  link  a  new  version  as
     follows:  
          $ LINK TDUFUN, - 
               TOPDRAWER_OLB/INCLUDE=TD/LIBRARY, - 
               PACKLIB_OLB/LIBRARY,MATHLIB_OLB/LIBRARY, 
               UGS_OLB/LIBRARY 



     18.5  DEMO_PROGRAM 

     There   are   Demo   programs    in    TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]    called
     TD_DEMO.FOR,TD_DEMO3.FOR  and  also  a  command  file  to  build it called
     TD_DEMO.COM.  This illustrates the usage of the TOPDRAWER subroutines.  


     18.6  LIST_OF_SUBROUTINES 

                                   Miscellaneous routines
          1.  CPULIM - Gives you the CPU time remaining.  
          2.  CPUTIM - Gives you the consumed CPU time.  
          3.  DEFKEY - Defines keypad keys.  
          4.  HELP - Types help info in your terminal.  



                                      PAGE 223


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                LIST_OF_SUBROUTINES

          5.  INTRAC - Tells you if you are running interactively.  
          6.  SPAWN - Spawns a subprocess 
          7.  TRACE - Generates traceback.  
          8.  READPR - Reads input with prompt.  
                                     TOPDRAWER routines
          9.  TDARRO - Draws ARROWN 
         10.  TDCRCL - Draws BOX, CIRCLE, DIAMOND 
         11.  TDEND - Empties buffers and closes graphics.  
         12.  TDFLSH - Flushes the buffers 
         13.  TDGETV - Gets a lexical value.  
         14.  TDHIST - Does histograms 
         15.  TDJOIN - Joins points 
         16.  TDLIMS - Sets plot limits 
         17.  TDNEW - Same as NEW FRAME command (with ALIAS) 
         18.  TDNEWP - Same as NEW FRAME command 
         19.  TDPLOT - Same as PLOT command 
         20.  TDSETS - Sets parameters - same as SET command 
         21.  TDSHOW - Type parameters on your terminal - same as SHOW command 
         22.  TDTEXT - Draws text - same as TITLE command 
         23.  TDVAX_PLOT - Set up default device 
         24.  TD3JIN - Join 3-d data 
         25.  TD3HST - Histogram 3-d data 
         26.  T2MAIN - The main program for TOPDRAWER 
         27.  T2CURS - The cursor routine 
         28.  T2UPCS - Converts string to upper case 
         29.  T2SQEZ - Squeezes multiple blanks from character strings.  
         30.  T2_TRAP - Sets up to trap Control_C 


     18.7  CPUTIM 

     TIME = CPUTIM(OTIME) 

          This call will give you the difference in cputime between the current
     time and the previous time (OTIME) in  seconds.   If  otime=0.0  then  the
     total cpu time since the start of your process is returned.  

     This subroutine is independent from the rest of TOPDRAWER 


     18.8  CPULIM 

     TIME = CPULIM(OTIME) 

          This  call  will  give  you  the  difference  in  cputime between the
     remaining cpu time and the previous time (OTIME) in seconds.  If otime=0.0
     then the total time limit since the start of your process is returned.  If
     CPULIM(0.0) is zero then there is no time limit on your process.  

                                       Example
          TIME=CPULIM(CPUTIM(0.0)) 
     This gives you the time remaining.  If this is negative, then there was no
     limit.  

     This subroutine is independent from the rest of TOPDRAWER 





                                      PAGE 224


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                        HELP

     18.9  HELP 

          CALL HELP(string) 
     INPUT:  
          string = string of arguments to pass to help 
     This  program  was  copied  from  Fortran  Users Guide D-16 It assumes the
     primary help library is TOPDRAWER_HLB.  

     This subroutine is independent from the rest of TOPDRAWER 


     18.10  INTRAC 

          ITEST=INTRAC(I) 
     I - A dummy variable 
     ITEST = .TRUE.  if you are running interactively.  


     18.11  SPAWN 

          CALL SPAWN('command line') 
     A  subprocess  is  created, the command line is executed, and then control
     returns to your program.  If the command line is blank, the user gets  the
     DCL prompt, and control returns after the user types LOG.  


     18.12  TRACE 

          CALL TRACE 

     Generates  an  error  message including traceback.  This may be useful for
     debugging.  


     18.13  READPR 

     This reads from the SYS$INPUT after prompting 
          CALL READPR('PROMPT',STRING,LENGTH,[Itimeout]) 

     INPUT:  
          PROMPT= string to prompt with 
          Itimeout= timeout time in seconds (integer) If the time between typed
     characters exceeds the timeout then the read is terminated.  
     OUTPUT:  
          STRING = input 
          LENGTH = length of the input 

     You  may  define  keypad keys to return a string using DEFKEY.  DEFKEY and
     READPR are routines which work together.  

     This subroutine is independent from the rest of TOPDRAWER 

                                       example
          CHARACTER*20 STR 
          CALL READPR('Input:',STR,I,60) 
          IF (I.gt.0) TYPE *,'STR=",STR(1:I),'"' 
     Reads  a  string  of 20 characters or less and writes it on your terminal.
     You have 60 seconds to begin typing after the prompt.  


                                      PAGE 225


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                       DEFKEY

     18.14  DEFKEY 

     This defines a key on the keypad.  
          CALL DEFKEY(string) 

     The  keypad  key  is  defined  in  a  manner similar to the DEFINE/KEY VMS
     command.  All of the ASK routines and READPR  will  interpret  the  keypad
     keys,  according  to  the  DEFKEY routine.  DEFKEY and READPR are routines
     which work together.  

                                       Example
          CALL DEFKEY('/KEY PF2 "HELP"/TERMINATE') 
     This is the default definition of PF2 


     18.15  TDARRO 

     This draws an arrow from XYZ(1:3,1) to XYZ(1:3,2) 
          CALL TDARRO(XYZ,[DXYZ,[IMODE,[ITYPE]]]) 
          1.  XYZ(3,2)  is  the array of XYZ to specify the arrow.  XYZ(*,1) is
              the tail while XYZ(*,2) is the head.  For 2-d plots the  z  value
              is ignored.  
          2.  DXYZ(4) specifies the offsets and size.  
              A.  DXYZ(1) - The offset for the tail of arrow 
              B.  DXYZ(2) - The offset for the head of the arrow 
              C.  DXYZ(3) - Size of arrow if zero the default is used.  
              D.  DXYZ(4) - Flare of arrow if zero the default is used.  
          3.  IMODE(2)  -  Specifies the frame.  DATA=0, TEXT=1 IMODE(1) is for
              tail of arrow.  
          4.  ITYPE - Specifies the Texture,color,intensity 
     For  more  information  see  TOPDRAWER COMMAND ARROW.   This is similar to
     giving the command.  
          TD:ARROW    FROM    XYZ(1,1),XYZ(2,1),XYZ(3,1)    LESS   DXYZ(1)   TO
             -----    ----    --------------------------    ----   -------   --
     XYZ(1,2),XYZ(2,2),XYZ(3,2)  LESS  DXYZ(2)   SIZE=DXYZ(3),DXYZ(4)   Outputs
     --------------------------  ----  -------   --------------------
     extended titles with case formatting.  
     This  routine  is  not recommended.  It is provided for compatability with
     older versions of TOPDRAWER.  Use TDTEXT instead.  
          CALL TDCASE('title','case'[,x,y]) 
          CALL TDCASE('title','case','position') 
          CALL TDCASE('title') 

     See TDTITL for more information 


     18.16  TDCRCL 

     This draws either a BOX, DIAMOND, or ELLIPSE.  
          CALL TDCRCL(XY,DXY,ITYPE,[IDATA,[MODE[,ANGLES]]]);  
          1.  XY(3) is the array of XYZ to specify the center of the figure.  
          2.  DXY(3) is the array of XYZ to specify the width of the figure.  
          3.  ITYPE 
                     1        2       3
                   BOX  DIAMOND ELLIPSE
          4.  IDATA 
                   0 - XYZ specified in text coordinates 
                   1 - Center in Data, width in text coordinates.  


                                      PAGE 226


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                       TDCRCL

                   3 - Both Center and width are in data coordinates.  
          5.  MODE      -      Specifies     Texture,     intensity,     color.
              See:Subroutine TDHIST.  
          6.  ANGLES(2) - Range of angles for circle 

                                       example
          REAL XY(3),DXY(3) 
          DATA XY/1.,1.,1./,DXY/.5,.5,.5/ 
          CALL TDCRCL(XY,DXY,3,3) 
     Draws an ellipse centered at 1,1,1 of size 0.5 in the data frame.  


     18.17  TDEND 

     This  subroutine  ends  the  graphics  and  closes any output files.  This
     should not be used to end an individual plot of a series.  It  only  needs
     to be called once before exiting from your program.  


     18.18  TDFLSH 

     Normally  the  graphics buffer is flushed after the subroutine call unless
     FLUSH is set OFF.  TDFLSH will allow you to flush the  buffers  only  when
     desired.  This is much faster than flushing automatically.  


     18.19  TDGETV 

          LOGICAL L 
          L=TDGETV('string',VALUE) 
     INPUT:  
          string         = The name of the lexical to get 
     OUTPUT:  
          VALUE          = The actual value returned 
          L    = .true.  if the lexical was found, .false.  if not found.  

                                       example
            LOGICAL TDGETV 
            IF (TDGETV('V_SUM',SUM)) WRITE(6,*)'Sum=',SUM 


     18.20  TDHIST 

     Does histograms 
          CALL TDHIST(Npts,X,Y[,DX[,DY[,LEVEL[,MODE[,Z[,DZ]]]]]]) 
          1.  Npts - Then number of points to plot 
          2.  X(Npts) - The X for each datum to histogram 
          3.  Y(Npts) - The Y for each datum 
          4.  DX(Npts) - The Error in X 
          5.  DY(Npts) - The Error in Y 
          6.  LEVEL     = 0 Histogram 
                        = 1 BARCHART 
          7.  MODE  -  Selects  the line structure,color,intensiy If zero these
              are set by the SET command.  
                Intensity*8 (Intensity=1 to 5) 
                1*64,   2*64,    3*64,  4*64,  5*64,      6*64,    7*64 
                  64,    128,     192,   256,   320,       384,     448 
                DOTS, DASHES, DOTDASH, SOLID, FUNNY, PATTERNED, DAASHES 


                                      PAGE 227


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                       TDHIST

                WHITE   RED GREEN  BLUE YELLOW MAGENTA CYAN 
                1*512 2*512 3*512 4*512 5*512  6*512  7*512 
          8.  Z(Npts) - The Z for each datum 
          9.  DZ(Npts) - The Error in Z 


     18.20.1  Example 

          REAL X(5),Y(5),DX(5),DY(5) 
          READ (1,'(4F10.0)') (X(I),Y(I),DX(I),DY(I),I=1,5) 
          CALL TDHIST(5,X,Y,DX,DY,0,64+4*512) 
     Reads  5 lines containing X,Y,DX,DY on each and histograms the result with
     BLUE dotted lines.  


     18.21  TDJOIN 

     Joins points 
          CALL TDJOIN(Npts,X,Y[,DX[,DY[,LEVEL[,MODE[,Z[,DZ]]]]]]) 
          1.  Npts - Then number of points to plot 
          2.  X(Npts) - The X for each datum to histogram 
          3.  Y(Npts) - The Y for each datum 
          4.  DX(Npts) - The Error in X 
          5.  DY(Npts) - The Error in Y 
          6.  LEVEL - The number of segments per/point 
          7.  MODE  -  Texture,color,intensity,  and  Fit  parameters are added
              together.  If zero the default is taken or the SET value is used. 
                                          Type of fit
                      0      1        2 
                Default Spline "GENERAL" 
                     The default is initially "GENERAL" 
                                        Texture params
                Intensity*8 (Intensity=1 to 5) 
                1*64,   2*64,    3*64,  4*64,  5*64,      6*64,    7*64 
                  64,    128,     192,   256,   320,       384,     448 
                DOTS, DASHES, DOTDASH, SOLID, FUNNY, PATTERNED, DAASHES 
                WHITE   RED GREEN  BLUE YELLOW MAGENTA CYAN 
                1*512 2*512 3*512 4*512 5*512  6*512  7*512 
          8.  Z(Npts) - The Z for each datum 
          9.  DZ(Npts) - The Error in Z 


     18.21.1  Example 

          REAL X(5),Y(5),DX(5),DY(5) 
          READ (1,'(4F10.0)') (X(I),Y(I),DX(I),DY(I),I=1,5) 
          CALL TDJOIN(5,X,Y,DX,DY,1,64+4*512) 
     Reads  5 lines containing X,Y,DX,DY on each and joins the result with BLUE
     dotted lines.  A single line segment joins each point.  
          CALL TDJOIN(5,X,Y) 
     Joins  the  5  points  with the default line type (SOLID,WHITE).  The data
     will be joined by multiple line segments to form a smooth curve.  








                                      PAGE 228


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                       TDLIMS

     18.22  TDLIMS 

     Sets limit for data set.  
          CALL TDLIMS(OPTIONS,Npts,values[,errors]) 

          1.  OPTIONS:   'XMIN',  'XMAX',  'X',  'YMIN',  'YMAX',  'Y', 'ZMIN',
              'ZMAX', 'Z' 
              This  specifies what limits are to be set.  For example if 'X' is
              specified, both XMIN and XMAX are set.  
          2.  Npts - The number of data points.  
          3.  Values(NPTS) - The array of data to use in setting the limits.  
          4.  Errors(NPTS) - The corresponding error array 


     18.22.1  Example 

          REAL X(2),DX(2) 
          DATA DX/0.1,1.0/ 
          DATA X/0.,10./ 
          CALL TDLIMS('X',2,X) 
     This will set the plot to range from 0 to 10 along the X axis.  
          CALL TDLIMS('XMIN',1,0.0) 
          CALL TDLIMS('XMAX',1,10.0) 
     This will set the plot to range from 0 to 10 along the X axis 
          CALL TDLIMS('X',2,X,DX) 
     Sets the plot to range from -0.1 to 11.0 


     18.23  TDNEW 

     This starts a new plot and optionally gives the frame an ALIAS.  
          CALL TDNEWP('Alias') 
     If  ALIAS  is  blank  (' ') then there is no alias.  ALIAS may either be a
     string or a character variable.  


     18.24  TDNEWP 

     This  starts a new plot.  This differs from the original TOPDRAWER in that
     you may not specify an ALIAS.  
          CALL TDNEWP 


     18.25  TDPLOT 

     Plots points.  
          CALL TDPLOT(Npts,X,Y[,DX[,DY[,'symbol'[,MODE]]]]) 
     This plots the X,Y data using the specified symbol.  

          1.  Npts - Then number of points to plot 
          2.  X(Npts) - The X for each datum to histogram 
          3.  Y(Npts) - The Y for each datum 
          4.  DX(Npts) - The Error in X 
          5.  DY(Npts) - The Error in Y 
          6.  symbol - The symbol to use in plotting 
          7.  MODE - Determines color,intensity - See TDHIST 




                                      PAGE 229


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                       TDPLOT

     18.25.1  Example 

          CALL TDPLOT(1,100.,200.,0.,0.,2H0O) 
               or...  
          CALL TDPLOT(1,100.,200.,0.,0.,'0O') 
     Puts a cross at 100.,200.  in the data frame.  


     18.26  TDPLT 

     Plots points.  
          CALL TDPLT(SYMBOL,Npts,X,Y[,DX[,DY[,MODE[,Z[,DZ]]]]]]) 
     This plots the X,Y data using the specified symbol.  

          1.  symbol  -  The  symbol  to  use  in plotting.  It may be either a
              literal or character string.  
          2.  Npts - Then number of points to plot 
          3.  X(Npts) - The X for each datum to histogram 
          4.  Y(Npts) - The Y for each datum 
          5.  DX(Npts) - The Error in X 
          6.  DY(Npts) - The Error in Y 
          7.  MODE - Determines color,intensity - See TDHIST 
          8.  Z(Npts) - The Z for each datum 
          9.  DZ(Npts) - The Error in Z 


     18.26.1  Example 

          CALL TDPLT('0O',1,100.,200.,0.,0.) 
               or...  
          CHARACTER*2 SYMBOL 
          DATA SYMBOL/'0O'/ 
          CALL TDPLT(SYMBOL,1,100.,200.,0.,0.) 
     Puts a cross at 100.,200.  in the data frame.  


     18.27  TDSET 

     Sets parameters.  
          CALL TDSET(OPTIONS) 

     OPTIONS is a literal, hollerith, or array containing the options.  
          see:Subroutine STRING 
     This  routine  is  not recommended.  It is provided for compatability with
     older versions of TOPDRAWER.  Use TDTEXT instead.  
     The  options  are  the  same  as for the SET command.  For convenience you
     probably should use TDSETS which is Fortran 77 compatible.  

                                       example
          CALL TDSET('SIZE 10 BY 8') 
     This sets the size of the plot.  
          CALL TDSET('COLOR BLUE') 
     Now everything is plotted in blue.  
               or....  
          BYTE STRING(11) 
          DATA STRING/'C','O','L','O','R',' ', 
         1 'B','L','U','E',';'/ 
          CALL TDSET(STRING) 


                                      PAGE 230


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                       TDSETS

     18.28  TDSETS 

     Sets parameters.  
          CALL TDSETS(OPTIONS) 

     OPTIONS  is  a  literal  or  character string containing the options.  The
     options are the same as for the SET command.  This subroutine  is  Fortran
     77 compatible so %REF should not be used.  


     18.28.1  Example 

                                       example
          CALL TDSETS('SIZE 10 BY 8') 
     This sets the size of the plot.  This is the same as the command:  
          TD:SET SIZE 10 BY 8 
             --- ---- -- -- -
          CALL TDSETS('COLOR BLUE') 
     Now everything is plotted in blue.  
               or....  
          character*10 string 
          data string/'COLOR BLUE'/ 
          CALL TDSETS(string) 

          CALL TDSETS('DEVICE VERSATEC') 
     Sets the current device to be the Versatek printer/plotter.  


     18.29  TDSHOW 

     Shows parameters.  
          CALL TDSHOW(OPTIONS) 

     OPTIONS is a literal or character string containing the options to type on
     your terminal.  The options are the same as for the SET or  SHOW  command.
     This subroutine is Fortran 77 compatible so %REF should not be used.  


     18.29.1  Example 

          CALL TDSHOW('SIZE') 
     This types on your terminal the size of the plot.  
               or...  
          character*4 string 
          data string/'SIZE'/ 
          CALL TDSHOW(string) 


     18.30  TDTEXT 

     Outputs titles 
          CALL TDTEXT('options','title','case'[,x[,y[,z]]]) 
     This puts the title at the specified x,y,z 

          1.  options  - This is a string specifying the options.  These may be
              any options used by the TITLE command.   Some  available  options
              are:  
                   TOP, BOTTOM, RIGHT, LEFT, DATA, ANGLE=n, X, Y, Z, SIZE=n 


                                      PAGE 231


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                       TDTEXT

          2.  title - text to put on the screen.  
          3.  case - The case string.  If ' ' is used then the text consists of
              normal ASCII characters 
          4.  x,y,z  -  Specify  the  title  position  in TEXT coordinates.  If
              omitted and no options are specified, the current title is placed
              under the last.  

     This  is  a  Fortran-77  compatible  subroutine.  Do not use %REF with the
     option, title, or case strings.  Options, title, and case must  be  either
     literals or character variables.  


     18.30.1  Example 

          CALL TDTEXT('TOP','My graph',' ') 
     Puts a title at the top of the graph.  
          CALL TDTEXT('BOTTOM','X Axes',' ') 
     Puts a title at the bottom of the graph.  
          CALL TDTEXT(' ','More on the bottom',' ') 
     Then puts another line ender the previous one.  
          CALL TDTEXT('DATA','This is at location 5,1.8',' ',5.,1.8) 
     Puts a title left justified at the data locations 5.0,1.8 
          CALL TDTEXT('DATA,CENTER','This is at location 5,1.8',' ',5.,1.8) 
     Puts a title centered at the data locations 5.0,1.8 


     18.31  TDTITL 

     Outputs titles 
     This  routine  is  not recommended.  It is provided for compatability with
     older versions of TOPDRAWER.  Use TDTEXT instead.  
          CALL TDTITL('title',,x,y) 
     This puts the title at the specified x,y.  
          CALL TDTITL('title','position') 
     This puts the title at the specified position.  
          CALL TDTITL('title') 
     This puts a title under the last title.  

          1.  title - Title 
          2.  x,y - Specify the title position in TEXT coordinates.  
          3.  position - Specifies the position relative to the data area 
                   parameters:  
                   'TOP', 'BOTTOM', 'RIGHT', 'LEFT' 
          4.  If  'title'  alone is specified, then the current title is placed
              under the last.  


     18.31.1  Example 

          CALL TDTITL('My graph','TOP') 
          CALL TDTITL('X Axes','BOTTOM') 


     18.32  TDTSET 

     This controls the format of titles.  This  modifies  only  the  next  CALL
     TITLE or CALL CASE.  
     This  routine  is  not recommended.  It is provided for compatability with


                                      PAGE 232


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                       TDTSET

     older versions of TOPDRAWER.  Use TDTEXT instead.  
          CALL TDTSET(SIZE,[ANGLE,[SPACES,[IDATA]]]) 
          1.  SIZE - The character size in tenths of inches.  
          2.  ANGLE - The Angle to draw the title at.  
          3.  SPACES - The number of spaces the title occupies.  
          4.  IDATA - Non zero if title is specified in DATA coordinates.  


     18.33  TD3JIN 

     This joins 3-d data.  
     CALL TD3JIN(ARRAY,NX,NY,[[[[[[IXYZ],ITXTUR],NXL],NYL],NXH],NYH]) 
          1.  ARRAY(NX,NY+1) - Contains the 3-d data.  
           *  ARRAY(1,1) - N1+N2*4 - N=1,2,3 for X,Y,Z 
              N1=1 if ARRAY(1,1) is X, 2 if Y, 3 if Z.  
              N2=1 if ARRAY(1,1) is X, 2 if Y, 3 if Z.  
           *  ARRAY(2:NX,1) - X values at center of bin 
           *  ARRAY(1,2:NY) - Y values at center of bin 
           *  ARRAY(2:NX,2:NY) - Z values 
          2.  IXYZ controls type of plot.  
           *  0 = draw X,Y,Z 
           *  1 = draw X lines only 
           *  2 = draw Y lines only 
           *  3 = draw Z lines only 
          3.  ITXTUR - (N*64=texture, N=1:7) 
          4.  NXL - Low X chan to plot (0=plot all) 
          5.  NYL - Low Y chan to plot (0=plot all) 
          6.  NXH - High X chan to plot (0=plot all) 
          7.  NYH - High Y chan to plot (0=plot all) 
     For      more      information      see      the      sample      program:
     TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TD_DEMO3.FOR 


     18.34  TD3HST 

     This histograms 3-d data.  
     CALL TD3HST(ARRAY,NX,NY[[[[[[[IXYZ],ITXTUR],DXYZ],NXL],NYL],NXH],NYH]) 
          1.  ARRAY(NX,NY+1) - Contains the 3-d data.  
           *  ARRAY(1,1) - N1+N2*4 - N=1,2,3 for X,Y,Z 
              N1=1 if ARRAY(1,1) is X, 2 if Y, 3 if Z.  
              N2=1 if ARRAY(1,1) is X, 2 if Y, 3 if Z.  
           *  ARRAY(2:NX,1) - X values at center of bin 
           *  ARRAY(1,2:NY) - Y values at center of bin 
           *  ARRAY(2:nx,2:NY) - Z values 
           *  ARRAY(1,NY+1) - Lower Edge of first x bin 
           *  ARRAY(2,NY+1) - Upper Edge of last x bin 
           *  ARRAY(3,NY+1) - Lower Edge of first y bin 
           *  ARRAY(4,NY+1) - Upper Edge of last y bin 
          2.  IXYZ controls type of plot.  
           *  1 = draw X lines 
           *  2 = draw Y lines 
           *  4 = draw Z lines 
           *  8 = NoDEPTH 
           *  16 = NOHIDE 
           *  32 = NOFRAME 
           *  64 = Shade XY face 
           *  128 = Shade YZ face 



                                      PAGE 233


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                       TD3HST

           *  256 = Shade ZX face 
           *  512 = Shade with X's 
           *  1024 = Shade with dots.  
          3.  DXYZ(3) - Distance between lines used to shade plot (DX,DY,DZ) 
          4.  ITXTUR - (N*64=texture, N=1:7) 
          5.  NXL - Low X chan to plot (0=plot all) 
          6.  NYL - Low Y chan to plot (0=plot all) 
          7.  NXH - High X chan to plot (0=plot all) 
          8.  NYH - High Y chan to plot (0=plot all) 
     For      more      information      see      the      sample      program:
     TOPDRAWER_ROOT:[EXAMPLES]TD_DEMO3.FOR 


     18.35  TDVAX_PLOT 

          CALL TDVAX_PLOT 
     This  will set up your terminal as the default device, provided the symbol
     PLOT_TERM is correctly set.  Normally it is set when you  log  in  so  you
     usually do not need to worry about it.  

     If  this routine is not called, you must call TDSET and specify the device
     to use in plotting.  


     18.36  T2CURS 

          CALL T2CURS(I,XYZ,XYZ1,XYZ2,LF1,LF2);  
     This subroutine returns both text and data coordinates from the Cursor:  
          1.  I = Character typed ICHAR(character) (If 0 no input) 
          2.  XYZ(2) = Physical device coordinates.  
          3.  XYZ1(2) = Text coordinates.  
          4.  XYZ2(3) = Data coordinates.  If the plot is 2-d XYZ2(3)=0 
          5.  LF1 = .true.  if text coor.  returned 
          6.  LF2 = .true.  if data coor.  returned 


     18.37  T2MAIN 

          CALL T2MAIN(IARG,string) 

     This calls the TOPDRAWER main program.  
          INPUT:  string 
     This  is  a command to perform.  If it is blank then TOPDRAWER will prompt
     you until either a RETURN,STOP, or NEW PLOT command is typed.  
          OUTPUT:  IARG 
               = 1 if a CLEAR command was typed.  
               = 2 if a STOP command was typed.  


                                        NOTE

          This  subroutine  calls all other TOPDRAWER subroutines.  If you
          call it then all other subroutines  will  be  included  in  your
          program.  






                                      PAGE 234


                                    SUBROUTINES
                                       T2UPCS

     18.38  T2UPCS 

          CALL T2UPCS(str) 

     Converts a character string to upper case.  


     18.39  T2SQEZ 

          CALL T2SQEZ(str,ILEN) 

     Squeezes  out  multiple  blanks  from str, and returns the location of the
     last non blank character in ILEN.  


     18.40  T2_TRAP 


     Traps  any  control  C  interrupts.  While executing Topdrawer subroutines
     this returns control back to T2MAIN or the user routine.  








































                                      Page 235














                                         19

                                       LINKING



     If  you wish to link a program so that it may share HBOOK4 histograms with
     TOPDRAWER, you need to do the following:  

          1.  Insert the following lines of code into your main program.  
                   INTEGER HCREATEG 
                   PARAMETER IHSIZE=100000 
                   COMMON /PAWC/MEMORY(IHSIZE) 
                        ......  
                   ISTAT=HCREATEG('region_name',MEMORY,IHSIZE) 
                   IF (ISTAT .le.  0) STOP 'Can not create region' 
                   CALL HLIMIT(IHSIZE) 
              You may adjust the IHSIZE to the proper value.  

          2.  When you link you must also include:  
                   TOPDRAWER_DIR:TD_GROUP/OPT 
              To give users in your group only read access to your histograms. 
                   ISTAT=HCREATEG('region_name',MEMORY,-IHSIZE) 
                        or link using....  
                   TOPDRAWER_DIR:TD/OPT 
              TD_GROUP  uses  a  modified  version  of HCREATEG rather than the
              standard CERN version.  The modified one in addition  to  setting
              up  group  read/write  protection  on  the  section also prevents
              creation of the same global section by more than  1  person.   It
              creates  a new version instead.  It will type out the name of the
              created global section.  The modified version will create a  read
              only section if -IHSIZE is passed to it.  

              To  create  a  global  section HCREATEG must open a scratch file.
              The modified version attempts to do  this  on  SYS$SCRATCH:.   By
              reassigning  the  scratch  device you may put this file on a disk
              with enough quota.  
                   $ DEFINE SYS$SCRATCH USR$SCRATCH:[name] 

     For information about using the TD subroutines:  
     SEE:SUBROUTINES 










                                      Page 236














                                         20

                                      REVISIONS



     The original sources were written by:  
                                  Roger B.  Chaffee
                             Computation Research Group
                         Stanford Linear Accelerator Center
                                Stanford, California

     Modified:  
                                     J.  Clement
     All syntax has been "regularized" and extended for convenience.  


     20.1  OBSOLETE_COMMANDS 

     Most  commands  in  the  "original" version still work.  There are the few
     known exceptions.  
          1.  DUMP - Removed 
          2.  SET FILE DEBUG - Removed 
          3.  SET FILE ERROR - Removed 
          4.  SET  FILE  INPUT n - No longer works the same.  Instead of a unit
              number you must specify a file name.  
          5.  SET  FILE OUTPUT n - No longer works the same.  Instead of a unit
              number you must specify a file name.  
          6.  TIME - Replaced by SHOW TIME.  
          7.  SET DEVICE 4013 - Removed.  
          8.  Certain  undocumented commands were removed.  Specifically in the
              original version the option SET may be omitted entirely,  but  it
              must be used in the BONNER LAB version for set commands.  


     20.2  86 

          1.  SET COLOR - Now accepts full range of UGSYS color specs.  
          2.  SET  FILE  -  Command  rewritten.  It now accepts a file name and
              multiple nesting of SET FILE INPUT is possible.  
          3.  Unit numbers modified to allow batch input.  
          4.  SET  DEVICE  DDNAME=filename  -  The  limitation  of  8  chars on
              filename is removed.  
          5.  SET DEVICE - INTERACTIVE is the default.  
          6.  HELP - New command added.  
          7.  Added prompting for interactive input.  
          8.  PLOT_TERM,  PLOT_DEVICE  symbols  are  used  to determine default
              device.  



                                      PAGE 237


                                     REVISIONS
                                         86

          9.  TOKEN - Tabs are treated as spaces.  
         10.  SIXELS is now a legal device.  
         11.  SET INPUT is a synonym of SET CARD.  
         12.  SET ERRORS - New command added.  
         13.  Fixed SET DEVICE command so SIDEWAYS works properly.  
         14.  INTENSITY/WIDTH  3  did  not work properly, and would cause other
              options to work improperly.  
         15.  SET DEVICE accepts lowercase chars.  in string.  
         16.  SET STRUCTURE can now set FUNNY.  
         17.  HISTOGRAM command now produces a BLOCK plot for 3-d data.  
         18.  FLUSH command flushes the buffers.  
         19.  Fixed UG errors when no plot make.  
         20.  Fixed  failure  to  SET  DEVICE  in  the middle of an interactive
              session.  
         21.  Added JOURNAL file and SET JOURNAL command.  
         22.  Added SHOW commands as mirror to SET commands.  
         23.  Rewrote  T23HST  to  add  fast  "LEGO"  plots  as well as minimal
              histograms.  
         24.  TITLE X|Y|Z now produces titles next to 3-d axes.  The lables and
              titles are always drawn on the outer side of axes by default.  
         25.  T23HST,T23JIN accept a texture parameter.  T23HST may plot hidden
              lines with the option HIDE.  
         26.  T2FREQ  modified  for  incomplete  storage.   Now  only  X,Y  are
              required.  
         27.  Modified TXDOT and TXTSYM to produce points directly from unified
              graphics.  This makes better points for hi  resolution  displays,
              and faster points on Tek4010 displays.  
         28.  T23PLT - added to do scatter plots.  
         29.  SLICE - command added to plot slices of mesh data.  
         30.  Fixed T2DEF2 so limits are properly defined at all times.  
         31.  Added  SET  HIST  command.   This  is  conditionalized  for the 3
              different types of hist routines.  You can get RICE  format,  and
              HBOOK format hist files to be displayed by TOPDRAWER.  
         32.  SHOW DATA can show you a subset of the data, with calculations of
              statistics on the data.  
         33.  3D is now properly selected for each type of hist.  
         34.  DEFINE KEY - Defines keypad keys for ANSII terminals.  
         35.  The  previous  20 input lines are stored for recall by ANSII mode
              terms.  This is done using SMG routines so foreign terminals  can
              be defined also.  
         36.  Traceback for input files has been added.  
         37.  Modified   TXLINE  for  optimized  point  plotting.   Essentially
              drawing points with UGMARK is faster  for  some  protocalls  than
              drawing  zero  length lines.  This is automatically done wherever
              possible.  This is especially true for 4010 graphics.  A  cluster
              of Nearby dots can save a factor of 3 in transfer time.  
         38.  Regularized   the   error   messages,   and  added  messages  for
              PEN,WIDTH,CARD LENGTH out of range.  
         39.  Added  PERMANENT option to SET SYMBOL,GRID,WIDTH This changed the
              logic of SET SYMBOL slightly to conform to other commands.  
         40.  The  card  length was changed to conform to standard screen sizes
              (80 cols).  The Format  string  is  (256A1)  to  make  card  size
              changes easy.  
         41.  Fixed automatic flush so it works properly for interactive use.  
         42.  Fixed  NOVECTOR  mode so that it works.  Make the default VECTOR.
              Removed  '$'  as  a  separator.   This  is  necessary  for   some
              filenames!  (TXXUG77) 



                                      PAGE 238


                                     REVISIONS
                                         86

         43.  29-Oct-1986     -     Added     DSIZE,DOTS,...      options    to
              CIRCL,ELLIPSE,DIAMOND,BOX commands.  (T2MAIN,T2PLOT) 
         44.  31-Oct-1986         -         Added         cursor        support
              (T2XFRM,TXXUG77,T2SET1,T2SHOW).  
         45.  5-Nov-1986  - Fixed the option PLOT SYMBOL so it works, and fixed
              problem with multiple options after PLOT.  
         46.  Added color,texture,intensity control to SET AXES, OUTLINE, GRID,
              TITLE.  Also color, texture may now be specifed for  any  command
              that draws something.  PLOT, HIST, BOX, TITLE....  
         47.  Added  support  for  multiple  data sets.  option SETS picks data
              sets.  
         48.  Added MESH data support to SMOOTH command.  
         49.  14-NOV-1986  -  Fixed  bug  in  T2RDPT.   Data after a symbol was
              skipped.  
         50.  Modified string handling to Fortran-77.  
         51.  26-Nov-1986 - Added IF,ELSE,ENDIF.  
         52.  1-Dec-1986  -  Added  options  SCALE, TICKS, and PERMANENT to SET
              SCALE command.  Added option PERMANENT to  SET  COLOR  and  reset
              color with each new plot.  Fixed a problem with JOIN SPLINE DASH.
              If the points were closely spaced a solid line is  drawn.   Added
              options BLINK, PROPORTIONAL, HARDTEXTURE.  
         53.  8-Dec-1986  -  Added  sideways option to SET SIZE.  Added options
              WHITE,...   WIDTH=,  DOTTED  to  SET  TICKS,LABELS,TITLE.    SHOW
              command now shows the Default values as well as the current ones. 
         54.  16-Dec-1986  -  Added  options DOT/DASH/DAASH/RANDOM/SPACE to set
              pattern.  Fixed infinite loop when no pattern specified.  
         55.  23-Dec-1986  -  Added option for automatic pattern generation for
              drawing commands.  ie.  JOIN DOT DOT DASH generates  the  pattern
              to  do  this.   Added  EXPAND  option  to  JOIN,HIST,PLOT.  Added
              VARIABLE, SIZE, NORANDOM options to PLOT.  


     20.3  87 

          1.  1-Feb-1987  - Typing Ctrl_C will abort the current plot or print.
              The SET HISTOGRAM command may select histograms by  substring  in
              the  title.   NEXT|PREVIOUS  may be combined with NAME= to select
              the next hist which matches the name.   NEXT|PREVIOUS  will  wrap
              around the end of the histogram list unless WRAP OFF is specified
              or in BATCH mode.  
          2.  12-Feb-1987  -  The journal file will contain coordinates entered
              by  cursor.   The  AUTOPLOT  mode  was  added.    The   condition
              INTERACTIVE  may  be  tested  by  the IF command.  MARGINS may be
              specified in addition to the SCREEN size in the SET SIZE command. 
          3.  26-Feb-1987  -  Added  DEFINE  COMMAND and SHOW HIST may now show
              more information.  The option CURRENT  has  been  added  to  SHOW
              HIST.  
          4.  10-Mar-1987  -  Added  option  APPEND to SET HIST.  Added options
              POINTS, and SETS to BIN.  Histogramming speed was  optimized  for
              cases  with  a  series  of  identical  Y values.  SHOW DATA gives
              errors on statistics, and statistics are generated for each  data
              set  separately.   Fixed problem with histogramming data withou Z
              values as 3-d plot.  
          5.  7-Apr-1987  -  Added  commands  DELETE, FIT.  Fixed some problems
              with separate data sets.  
          6.  30-Apr-1987  -  Added option ADD to SET HIST.  If a mesh was read
              with one axes increasing and the other decreasing, it  would  not
              plot properly.  This has been fixed.  


                                      PAGE 239


                                     REVISIONS
                                         87

          7.  8-May-1987  -  Added  contour  plotting, and LOG_ERROR routine to
              trap arithmetic errors.  The error handling returns to the T2MAIN
              program.  
          8.  19-May-1987 - Virtual memory added to VAX version.  
          9.  5-Jun-1987  - Fixed hidden line algorithm.  It used wrong average
              X,Y to calculate the vertical.  As a result it treated as  hidden
              many lines incorrectly.  
         10.  11-Jun-1987  - Fixed infinite loop in T2MSFV.  Rewrote T2MESH for
              better hidden line removal.  The old  algorithm  would  leave  in
              hidden  lines, or omit visible line segments that are bisected by
              sharp peaks.  The new algorith fixes these errors with less  than
              a 5% loss in cpu speed.  
         11.  17-Jun-1987  -  Fixed problems with title overflow for small page
              sizes.  Added LINES parameter to  SET  TITLE  and  SHIFT  to  SET
              LABELS.   Added  numbered  windows.   Negative  SCRD will produce
              constant view of mesh.  Dot plots and mesh plots  were  optimized
              for  max  speed.   Essentially  the  user can select windows more
              easily.  
         12.  23-Jun-1987  - Fixed problems with 3-d text.  The DUPLEX font did
              not work for 3-d text, it  caused  array  overflows  or  spurious
              lines.   3-d  text processing was somewhat optimized.  The syntax
              of the SET GRID  command  has  been  brought  in  line  with  set
              AXES,LABEL,TITLE commands.  
         13.  16-Jul-1987 - Fixed SET THREE to conform to documentation.  
         14.  23-Jul-1987 - Modified T2TLAB so that labels may be generated for
              data with a large range.  Some changes were also made in  T2CNTR.
              Added  Table  generation  for  1/2-d  data.  Limit generation was
              modified to keep the limits within reasonable  values,  when  the
              data  has  very  small  relative variation.  Title generation was
              modified to keep long titles on the screen.  The  character  size
              is  reduced  by  up  to a factor of 4 if the title is too long to
              fit.  
         15.  30-Jul-1987  -  Modified YEAR/MONTH scale so that all days occupy
              equal space.  
         16.  30-Aug-1987 
              A.  Lexicals  were  added  as  input  to allow access to internal
                  numbers.  
              B.  The  SET STATISTICS command allows the user to set the actual
                  statistical data used by the lexicals.  
              C.  SET DIGITS  determines  the number of digits used for output.
                  DIGITS options in  titles  allow  formatting  of  numbers  in
                  titles.  
              D.  PLOT TABLE - plots the data as a table of numbers.  
              E.  PLOT AXES/GRID - Has options X,Y,Z...  to allow absolute user
                  control over axes/grid generation.  
              F.  INHIBIT  option has been added to SET LABELS, SET AXES...  To
                  allow inhibiting axes generation while  still  leaveing  room
                  for the axes.  
         17.  16-Sep-1987 - Added mesh data handling to X,Y,Z commands, as well
              as MINUS and DIVIDE options.  MULTIPLY and DIVIDE commands may be
              used  to  manipulate  histograms  or spectra.  The X,Y,Z commands
              were modified to handle DX,DY, and DZ automatically.  
         18.  14-Oct-1987  -  Added Lexicals for external histogram parameters.
              Modified PLOT command so that the current texture applies to  the
              error  bars.  DEFINE VALUE and DEFINE STRING commands were added.
              S_ lexicals were added for access to string lexicals.  
         19.  31-Oct-1987 - Added LOG option to BIN, SWAP, X, SMOOTH, SET HIST,
              DEFINE  HIST,  ADD,  MULTIPLY,  and   DIVIDE   commands.    Added


                                      PAGE 240


                                     REVISIONS
                                         87

              SET MODE LOG  for automatic logging.  Added SET WINDOW LEVEL=n to
              make inset windows easier.  Added INSIDE option to SET LABELS  to
              make packed windows easy to create.  



     20.4  88 

          1.  15-Jan-1988 - Added expression parsing.  This allows you to enter
              an arithmetic expression wherever a number is  called  for.   The
              syntax  is  <expression>.  See TOPDRAWER DATA EXPRESSION for more
              details.  Added REPEAT and ENDREPEAT commands.  The  equals  sign
              "="  may  not be replaced by a comma "," or slash "/" where it is
              used in the documentation.  It may be replaced by spaces.   Plus,
              or  minus "+-" signs are not allowed in options except as part of
              a number.  
          2.  4-Feb-1988 - Added angle lexicals (VIEW_...).  Fixed some bugs in
              MESH plots.  Added X="expression"  command.   Added  CREATE  MESH
              command  to  create  mesh  data sets.  Modified PLOT VARIABLE for
              mesh data so the symbol size is automatically set to the  maximum
              bin size.  
          3.  Apr-1988  - Fixed LIMITED option for SHOW DATA command, and added
              LIMITED option to BIN command.  Added FOR option to WAIT.   Added
              PACKED  option  to  SET ORDER.   The  SET  ORDER  and SET STORAGE
              commands no longer delete data.  The SORT command has been added. 
          4.  Jun-1988   -  Fixed  the  error  calculation  on  MEAN  for  show
              statistics.  Fixed NEW RESET so that scales are also reset to the
              original default.  
          5.  Aug-1988 - Added MESH,NORMAL options to BIN command.  Added CHECK
              option to  ADD,SUBTRACT,MULTIPLY,DIVIDE  commands.   Added  SPLIT
              option  to  PROJECT  command.  Added ADD,SUBTRACT,MULTIPLY,DIVIDE
              options to DEFINE HISTOGRAM commnand.   Fixed  an  infinite  loop
              when a single point is histogrammed.  
          6.  Nov-1988  -  Added  THETA,PHI,ANGLE specifications to SET SYMBOL,
              and SET GRID.  Spiffed up the show formats.   Added  EXCL  driver
              for native mode support of TALARIS-1590 and LN-03+ printers.  
          7.  Dec-1988  -  Fixed several bugs.  Set window 3 of -4 did not work
              as the first window.  Only 1 of 4 could be the first  window.   A
              call  to  t2MAIN  with  blank  string after a call with non blank
              string  would  not  prompt  for  input.    SHOW   WINDOW   worked
              incorrectly   for   -   windows.    Calls   to  T2JOIN,T2HIST...,
              incorrectly reset permanent limits.  
          8.  Dec-1988  -  Added  NTFIT,NPFIT  lexicals,  and  extended  TDPLT,
              T2JOIN,T2HIST for 3-d data.  
          9.  28-Dec-1988              -              Added             options
              AREA/SHARE/SAVE/READ/WRITE/INPUT/OUTPUT    to     SET/DEFINE/SHOW
              HISTOGRAM commands.  Created a compatible version with HBOOK4.  


     20.5  89 

          1.  Jan-1989  -  Fixed  error calculations for fitting routines.  The
              quoted errors were too large.  Added ERROR option to FIT command.
              Fitted curves are generated with error bars now.  ADD FIT to data
              set  now  also  adds  the  fitted  errors  unless  ERROR=OFF   is
              specified.   Fixed equation evaluation.  Exponents were evaluated
              incorrectly ie.  <1.0E-3>-->1000.  and <1.0E+3>-->.001 



                                      PAGE 241


                                     REVISIONS
                                         89

          2.  Feb-1989  -  Added  file  spec/LIST=/COMMAND=/JOURNAL= options to
              TOPDRAWER command line.  
          3.  Mar-1989 - Added MERGE command to merge data sets.  
          4.  Apr-1989  - Added mixed data sets.  Mesh + regular data may exist
              as separate data sets.  Added error display to JOIN  command  for
              mesh  data.   ADD/SUB/MUL/DIV  commands  now  may  add mesh data.
              Added errors to mesh data.  SHOW STAT now shows mean/std...   for
              mesh data.  New options:  
                   ERROR had been added to command READ MESH,JOIN,CREATE MESH. 
                   APPEND has been added to READ MESH,CREATE MESH 
              Modified options:  
                   SETS,   POINTS|COLUMNS,   LINES|ROWS   are  now  independent
              options.  
              SETS - Specifies the data set only.  
              POINTS - Specifies the point/column number within the set.  
              When the LIMITED option is used, the Z value is used to limit the
              data.  
              Created NETWINDOW files to use TD over the DECnet.  
          5.  June-1989  -  Added  TEK4207  support  to TEK driver.  Speeded up
              REGIS/TEK drivers.  Added VAXSTATION (UGUISD driver) support.  
          6.  Nov-1989  -  Added support for NTUPLES to NTOPDAWER.  Removed the
              slash as a separator.  It may be put back by the command:  
                   SET CHARACTER SEPARATOR "/" 
          7.  Dec-1989 - A number of enhancements have been made to NTOPDRAWER.
              Added the options TREE to SAVE/RESTORE/SET HISTOGRAM commands and
              added   support   for   "wild"   characters  for  histogram  area
              specification.   Added  the   MONITOR   HISTOGRAM,   and   DELETE
              HISTOGRAM.   Removed support for RICE histograms from NTOPDRAWER.
              Added support for a GLOBAL SECTION containing HBOOK4  histograms.
              NTOPDRAWER  is  now  capable  of  handling HBOOK4 histograms in a
              fairly simple fashion.  

              Both NTOPDRAWER and TOPDRAWER have been enhanced as follows.  The
              driver for TEK4010 has been modified to allow you to specify  the
              necessary escape sequences for entering and exiting TEK-4010 mode
              as well as for reproducing  colors.   Support  for  the  LSI-7107
              color  terminal  has  been  added.  Support for postscript and am
              IMAGEN printer has been added.  The options SPACE has been  added
              in addition to DOTS,DASH...  for line structure.  


     20.6  90 

          1.  Jan-1990  -  Optimized expression evaluation to achieve a 30 fold
              speedup.  Added  error  handling  to  smoothing  routine.   Added
              support for a postscript printer.  
          2.  Feb-1990  -  Added  EQUATION  option  to FIT.  For general linear
              fits.  Optimized the auto label generation for logarithmic  axes.
              Removed  restrictions  on  order  of DECADES, SUBTICKS in the SET
              SCALE command.  Added device UIS to be able  to  dump  screen  of
              Vaxstation  to  disk  in full resolution.  Made VAXstation driver
              work for color station.  Added color mappings for DECGIGI driver. 
          3.  July-1990  -  Fixed PROJECT command in TOPDRAWER.  It was correct
              in NTOPDRAWER.  It would sometimes  give  incorrect  results  for
              HBOOK histograms.  
              Added  options  FETCH and READ to TOPDRAWER command RESTORE HIST.
              (Version 3.5) 



                                      PAGE 242


                                     REVISIONS
                                         90

              Note:   some  versions  may  have  had  problems with the fitting
              lexicals.  VCOEFFICIENT...  as some modules  were  compiled  with
              /Gfloat  and  some  were  not.   The  standard is /GFLOAT for all
              double precision operations if it is  supported  by  the  machine
              that it is compiled on.  

              Fixed  lexicals V...  inside expressions.  Y="VXVALUE**2" yielded
              incorrect results while Y="XVALUE**2" was correct.  This  problem
              dated from Jan-1990 when optimization was introduced.  
          4.  Dec-1990     -     Added     options     WEIGHT,    EWEIGHT    to
              ADD,SUBTRACT,MULTIPLY,DIVIDE commands.  These allow weighting  of
              data when doing the operation.  


     20.7  91 

          1.  Jan-1991  -  Added  documentation to command SET DEVICE on how to
              create separate plot and command windows for TEK-4010  and  REGIS
              graphics.  
              Added procedures:  FREEZE.TOP and FREEZE22.TOP to TOPDRAWER_DIR: 
          2.  18-Jan-1991  -  Fixed bug in module TXLINE that produced spurious
              lines by incorrect scissoring.  
          3.  Added SET CYCLE, SHOW CYCLE commands and CYCLE option to CONTOUR. 
          4.  21-Jan-1991  - Fixed bug in PLOT,JOIN,HISTOGRAM commands.  SLICES
              did not work properly when THREE was OFF.  Revision level 3.6.  

              Added  options OFFSET,DATA,ABSOLUTE,VALUE,CURSOR to PLOT TABLE to
              move the table to more convenient locations.  

              Add  option VECTOR to PLOT command, to plot a vector field, where
              DX,DY,DZ is the length of the vector.  
          5.  29-Jan-1991 - Fixed security hole to conceal passwords when using
              files    over    DECnet.     Fixed    some    minor    bugs    in
              ADD/SUBTRACT/MULTIPLY commands.  

              Add   option  VECTOR  to  ADD/SUBTRACT/MULTIPLY  commands  to  do
              operations on VECTOR fields.  
          6.  8-Feb-1991  -  Added  SET  MODE CHECK,CONFIRM,TREE.  These select
              whether checking,  confirmation,  or  HBOOK  tree  searching  are
              defaulted   to   ON.    Added   options   POINTS,ROWS,LIMITED  to
              ADD/SUB/MULT/DIV commands This  allows  compete  selection  of  a
              subset  of data to operate on.  Added option CHECK to FFT command
              to allow turning off data checking.  
          7.  11-Feb-1991  -  Fixed  problem with short ticks being produced in
              SET SCALE when option LABEL=n preceded TICKS=m.  Version 3.7 
          8.  28-Feb-1991  - Added options FILL,HIDE to most commands that draw
              something.  This means  you  may  fill  and  hide  BOXES,CIRCLES,
              DIAMONDS,  HISTOGRAMS,  ARROWS.   In  addition  the SET/SHOW FILL
              commands allow you to manipulate the fill  patterns.   Added  the
              command  SET/SHOW  SHIELD  to  shield  a  section  of a plot from
              further plotting.  Added  A  GKS  (DEC)  for  those  devices  not
              availble  through  UGS.   Fixed  a  minor  bug that switched line
              texture unexpectedly in UIS driver.  
          9.  4-Mar-1991 - Added SET/SHOW UNITS to allow you to reset both TEXT
              and character units.  

              Fixed some problems with 3d histograms.  Conditionalized the code
              and documentation to allow cm instead of inches throughout.  This


                                      PAGE 243


                                     REVISIONS
                                         91

              means that the defaults are all in CM instead of INCHES.  You may
              use these conditionals to build a completely metric  verstion  of
              TD.  
         10.  15-Mar-1991   -   Version   4.0   Added   options  SELECT="name",
              NAME="name" to add names to data sets.  SELECT selects data  sets
              by  name,  while  NAME  sets  the data set name.  HBOOK histogram
              names are automatically propagated to the data set.  Option TITLE
              added  to JOIN, PLOT, HIST, CONTOUR to add title when data set is
              plotted.  
         11.  25-Mar-1991  -  Added  NONLINEAR  option  to FIT to use MINUIT to
              perform fits on nonlinear functions.  Fixed problem in  arbitrary
              linear fit functions.  
              Version 4.0.  
         12.  2-May-1991  -  Updated  HBSEARCHID  and T2SETH4 to be HBOOK V4.10
              compatible.  Added more units to SET UNITS.  
         13.  14-Jun-1991  - Add options WIDTH, HEIGHT to SET DEVICE.  Made the
              default the new version of TOPDRAWER.  Fixed some bugs  with  SET
              UNITS.  
         14.  28-Jun-1991 - Modified the X,Y,Z commands so that DX,DY or DZ are
              automatically recomputed when an expression is used.  
         15.  22-Jul-1991  -  Fixed  a  bug  in  STORE HIST command.  The wrong
              default RECL was used.  Removed calls to obsolete HFNEXT routine. 
         16.  23-Aug-1991  -  Added  option  MESH to FIT command for MESH fits.
              Added option APPEND to LIST command  to  append  listing  on  old
              file.   Fixed error handling for MINUIT fits.  Now the errors are
              the same for linear and NONLINEAR fits.  Added  functiond  DGAUSS
              and DPOLY to list of functions, as fits of Z vs X,Y.  Fixed a bug
              in T2MESH that messed up histograms of  mesh  data  with  errors.
              GMINUT has been added to NTOPDRAWER.  
         17.  Sept-1991  -  Added  option  SAVE  to CONTOUR to save the contour
              lines in data sets.  Fixed an 2 outrageous bugs in  T2SMOOTH  and
              SMCTRL.   One  bug incorrectly treated the end points of a curve.
              The other would delete isolated data points that were adjacent to
              a flat region in the data.  

              Added INTERPOLATE command to produce interpolated data sets using
              local fitting procedures.  This uses the same procedures  as  the
              JOIN  command.  Added MONITOR option to BIN, FIT, FFT, CONVOLUTE,
              SMOOTH commands to plot before/after pictures.   Added  SET  MODE
              MONITOR/APPEND to enable automatic MONITOR, APPEND.  

              Fixed  equations  inside  FIT command.  Arbitrary equations would
              sometimes give incorrect results.  It has been fixed.  
              Version 4.31 
         18.  Nov-1991  -  Fixed  fatal error in FIT that prevented producing a
              curve from set coefficients.  Fixed some  bugs  in  all  commands
              that use the option CHECK.  
         19.  Version 4.4 Added ORIENTATION=n to SET SIZE/DEVICE commands.  
         20.  Apr-1992  Added  option  PORTRAIT/LANDSCAPE  to set device.  Also
              added device EPS.  
         21.  July-1992 
              A.  Fixed the BIN command to work properly with data when DY=0.  
              B.  Added  options  BREAK/SUPPRESS  to  SET BAR to suppress error
                  bars around the symbol for a PLOT command.  
              C.  Added  some  fixes  to  SET  DEVICE for DECGKS-3D to send the
                  Xwindow output to the correct device.  Added some FNAL fixes,
                  and added output options to initial command line.  
                       $ TOPDRAWER [filename [device1 [device2 ...]]] 


                                      PAGE 244


                                     REVISIONS
                                         91

              D.  Added new coordinates NDX,NDY,NDZ to PLOT/BAR/HIST assymetric
                  error  bars.   These  are  NOT  used  in  some   computations
                  involving errors.  
              E.  Fixed  an  error  in  TOKEN that prevented access to the data
                  point lexicals when the data  set  number  (3'rd  index)  was
                  specified.  
              F.  Fixed an error that produced spaces when more than 195 points
                  are joined.  
              G.  Reversed  the  default  for  ERROR  option on the SWAP,SMOOTH
                  command.  Now the ERROR option should be default  be  on  for
                  all commands.  By setting the REVISION to lower than 5.0 this
                  should revert to the old behavior.  
              H.  Added  the  minus (-) sign as a continuation character at the
                  end of a line.  
              I.  Added options SET AXES FRONT,BOTH,THREE 
                  To  allow  default  plotting  of  3-d  axes  in  a "sensible"
                  fashion.  
              J.  Added options SET GRID OUTLINE,Z 
                  To improve the 3-d grid capability.  
              Version 5.0 
         22.  Aug-1992 V5.1 - Fixed some bugs in the PLOT command.  
              NOSYMBOL did not work 
              POINTS FROM n TO m would not select the correct range of points. 





































                                      Page 245














                                         21

                                    INSTALLATION



     To    install    topdrawer   on   your   system,   copy   the   files   in
     TOPDRAWERROOT:[*...] to a directory of your choice.  Execute the SETUP.COM
     procedure  to create the necessary local TOPDRAWER symbols and logics.  On
     the FNAL cluster, the files are placed in LIB:[LIB.TOPDRAWER.version], and
     SETUP   TOPDRAWER   causes   the  SETUP.COM  procedure  to  be  run.   The
     TOPDRAWER.HLP help library module has been placed  in  the  LIB  alternate
     help library.  

     You  may wish to rename and delete some of the executables, if your system
     lacks Xwindows or GKS.  
          1.  TOPDRAWERMIN has neither Xwindows nor GKS support.  
          2.  TOPDRAWER has Xwindows but not GKS.  
          3.  TOPDRAWERGKS has both.  
































                                      Page 246














                                         22

                                       AUTHOR



     This version is heavily modified from the original written by:  
          Roger B. Chaffee
          Computation Research Group
          Stanford Linear Accelerator Center
          Stanford, California
          U.S.A.

     The original docuementation is:
          CGTM 178 - November 1980

     This version was written by:
          John Clement
          Bonner Nuclear Lab
          Rice University
          P.O. Box 1892
          Houston, Tx, 77251
          (713) 527-8101 x 2037
          Internet: CLEMENT@PHYSICS.RICE.EDU
          Bitnet:   CLEMENT@RICEVM1
          Hepnet:   FNBIT::RIPHYS::CLEMENT
               or...
                    RIPHYS::CLEMENT























                                      Page 247


                                       AUTHOR
                                       Index






                                        Index




     3-D plots   26, 40, 51, 82, 83, 85, 92, 94, 105, 108, 109, 110, 113, 151,
           156, 169, 174, 175, 178, 191, 194, 195, 203, 205, 206, 208, 233

     Abbreviations   29
     ABORT   158
     ALL   175
     ANGLE   145, 176
     Angles   17
     Answerback   8
     APPEND   39, 95
     Arpanet   139
     Astronomical symbols   23
     AUTOPLOT   158
     AVERAGE   39
     Axes   103, 153, 162, 166, 182
     AXIS   178

     BASE   167
     Binomial statistics   64
     Block plot   83
     Box   43

     Case blind   142
     CENTER   178, 179
     Character case   142
     CLEAR   68, 126
     COEFFICIENTS   75
     COLOR   32, 38, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 81, 90, 102, 122, 126, 145, 153, 164,
           166, 170, 182, 184, 227, 228
     Command   1, 30
       ADD   35
       ARROW   38
       BARGRAPH   38
       BIN   39
       BOX   43
       CASE   207
       CIRCLE   45, 66
       CLEAR   68
       Continuation   29
       CONTOUR   45
       CONVOLUTE   48
       DEFINE 
         COMMAND   53
         KEY   59
       DIAMOND   62
       DIVIDE   64
       DPHI   209
       DRADIUS   209


                                      Page 248


                                       AUTHOR
                                       Index

       DTHETA   209
       DU   209
       DV   209
       DW   209
       DX   209
       DY   209
       DZ   209
       ELLIPSE   66
       END   100, 102, 140, 203
       EXIT   100, 102, 140, 203
       FFT   69
       FILL   70
       FIT   71
       FLUSH   81
       format of commands   29
       HALT   100, 102, 140, 203
       HELP   87
       HISTOGRAM   81
       JOIN   89
       MERGE   95
       MORE   98
       MULTIPLY   99
       NDPHI   209
       NDRADIUS   209
       NDTHETA   209
       NDU   209
       NDV   209
       NDW   209
       NDX   209
       NDY   209
       NDZ   209
       NEW FRAME   100
       NEW PLOT   100
       PHI   209
       PLOT   102
       PROJECT   110
       QUIT   100, 102, 140, 203
       RADIUS   209
       READ 
         MESH   113
         POINTS   112
       SET   120
         AREA   187
         ARROW   122
         AXES   122
         AXIS   122
         BAR   123
         BLINK   125
         BOX   124
         CARD   125
         CHARACTER   125
         CIRCLE   126
         CLEAR   126
         COLOR   126
         COMMAND   126
         Ctrl_Z   126
         DATE   127
         DEVICE   128


                                      Page 249


                                       AUTHOR
                                       Index

         DIAMOND   141
         DIGITS   141
         ELLIPSE   141
         EXACT   34, 142
         FILE   142
         FONT   144
         FORMAT   145
         GRID   145
         HISTOGRAM   13, 147
         INPUT   125
         INTENSITY   153
         LABELS   153
         LIMITS   155
         MODE   157
         MONITOR   160
         ORDER   161
         OUTLINE   162
         PATTERN   163
         PEN   164
         POLAR   164
         PROMPT   165
         REVISION   166
         SCALE   166
         SECONDARY   166
         SEGMENTS   166
         SHADOW   170
         SIZE   172
         SPHERICAL   173
         STATISTICS   174
         STORAGE   175
         STRUCTURE   177
         SYMBOL   176
         TEXTURE   177
         THREE   178
         TICKS   182
         TITLES   183
         UNITS   186
         WIDTH   187
         WINDOW   187
       SHOW   192
         CURSOR   193
         DATA   141, 194
         FLAGS   196
         HISTOGRAMS   196
         TIME   200
       SMOOTH   201
       SORT   202
       SPAWN   202
       STOP   100, 102, 140, 203
       SUBTRACT   35
       SWAP   203
       SYMBOL   204
       THETA   209
       TITLE   204
       TRANSFORM   208
       U   209
       V   209
       W   209


                                      Page 250


                                       AUTHOR
                                       Index

       X   209
       Y   209
       Z   209
     Command<SET<ERRORS   142
     Comments   29
     Contour plots   45
     Coordinates   19
     Copying data   95
     Cosine fit   74
     Ctrl_C   52, 53, 100, 194, 196, 203
     Ctrl_Z   126, 192, 203
     CURSOR   10, 38, 41, 43, 51, 63, 67, 76, 93, 107, 155, 156, 166, 187, 193,
           204
     CYCLE   46
     Cyrillic characters   21

     DAASHES   32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
     DASHES   32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
     data format   14
     Data frame   19
     Dates   17, 127
     Days   17, 127, 167
     DEBUG   158
     DECnet   139
     DECwindows   139
     Degrees   17
     Demonstartion programs   223
     Devices   8, 128
       ADM-3A Retrographics   8, 135
       C.ITOH 328   8, 135
       C.ITOH 467   135
       CGM   131
       CIT-467   8
       DECwindows   139
       Digital GIGI   134
       EPS   131
       EXCL   9, 129
       Falco infinity series   8
       GKS   130
       GPOSTSCRIPT   131
       HP7550   131
       HP7580   131
       HP7585   131
       HPGL   132
       IMAGEN   9
       Kermit   8, 135
       LA-100   9
       LA-50   9
       LCP01   131
       LJ250   131
       LJ250_180DPI   131
       LN-03   9
       LSI 7107   8, 135
       LVP16A   131
       LVP16B   131
       METAFILE   131
       POSTSCRIPT   9, 133
       Printronix   9, 133


                                      Page 251


                                       AUTHOR
                                       Index

       QMS-1200   9, 133
       REGIS   9, 134
       Selanar HiREZ 100XL   8, 135
       Sixels   9
       Talaris 1590   8, 9, 129, 135
       TEEMTALK   8
       Tek-4027   8
       TEK4107   131
       TEK4128   131
       TEK4129   131
       Tek4207   8, 131
       Tekemulation   8
       Tektronix 4010   8, 135
       Tektronix 4207   135
       Versatec   9, 139
       VersaTerm   8
       Visual 102   8, 135
       VSXXX   131
       VT-100 Retrographics   8, 135
       VT-240   9, 134, 135
       VT125   131
       VT125BW   131
       VT240   131
       VT240BW   131
       VT330   131
       VT340   131
       Xwindow 
       XWINDOWS   9, 139
     Diamond   62
     Digits   141, 205
     DIRECTION   178, 179
     DISTANCE   178, 180
     DOTDASH   32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
     DOTS   32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
     DOUBLE   47
     Drawing characters   23

     ECHO   158
     Efficiency curves   35, 64
     Ellipse   66
     ERASE   158
     Error bars   16, 81, 102, 123, 161
     error matrix   72, 76, 78, 193
     ERRORS   36, 40, 65, 75, 90, 99, 103, 107, 196, 211
     Example   182
     EXPAND   46
     Exponential fit   74

     Fast Fourier Transformation   69
     File 
       BENCH.TOP   221
       Case of filename   159
       COLORGRAPH.TOP   221
       Data output   92, 93
       FIT_TEST.TOP   221
       FONT_TABLE.TOP   221
       Histogram   147, 149
       Input   6, 10, 143


                                      Page 252


                                       AUTHOR
                                       Index

       Journal   11
       Listing   11, 223
       Logfile   223
       Output   11
       Plot output   128, 139
       TD.OPT   236
       TD3D.TOP   182, 221
       TDINTRO.TOP   143, 221
       TD_DEMO3.FOR   233, 234
       TD_GROUP.OPT   236
     Fourier series   73, 74
     Frequency distribution   39
     FUNNY   32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228

     Gaussian fit   74, 75
     Global section   55, 59, 96, 98, 117, 118, 147, 151, 197, 236
     Greek characters   21
     Grids   103

     HARDTEXTURE   159
     Hardware characters   134, 160, 185, 207
     HBOOK   13, 28, 147
     Hewlett Packard Plotters   132
     HISTOGRAM   4
     Histograms   147
     Hours   17, 167

     input   16, 125, 142, 145
     INSIDE   47
     INTENSITY   32, 38, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 81, 90, 102, 122, 145, 153, 166,
           170, 182, 183, 187, 227, 228
     Internet   139
     Inverse power series fit   73

     JOIN   4
     journaling   10, 11, 13, 143, 156, 159, 188, 193, 223

     Key-pad   59

     LABEL   45, 47
     Labels   105, 123, 153, 167
     Legendre polynomial fit   74
     Lego plot   83
     Lexicals   141, 174, 206, 217
     LIMITED   41, 51, 76, 93, 95, 102, 107
     Line texture   177
     Line width   153, 187
     LINEAR   167
     Linking routine   223
     Linking with global section   236
     Listing   142, 159
     LOG   95
     LOGARITHMIC   46, 167
     Logging   159
     Logical 
       PLOT_DEVICE   8
       PLOT_TERM   8, 234
     LONG   105


                                      Page 253


                                       AUTHOR
                                       Index

     MAGNIFY   172, 181
     MARGINS   173
     Markers   23
     Mathematical characters   21
     Merging several data sets.     95
     MESH   37, 64, 99
     Mesh data   26, 34, 45, 51, 82, 84, 85, 88, 106, 109, 112
     Minutes   17, 167
     MONITOR   39, 40, 42, 71, 72, 79, 95, 157, 159, 201
     Months   17, 127, 167

     NDU   101
     NDV   101
     NDW   101
     NDX   17, 101, 119, 147, 161, 175, 202, 210, 217
     NDY   17, 40, 101, 119, 147, 161, 175, 202, 210, 217
     NDZ   17, 101, 119, 147, 161, 175, 202, 210, 217
     Network connections   139
     Nonlinear fits   74, 75, 77
     NTUPLES   52, 54, 56, 94, 147, 150, 197

     Option 
       FILL   33, 43, 63, 66, 82, 90, 144
       HIDE   33, 83, 90
     ORIGIN   178, 181
     output   11, 128, 142
     OUTSIDE   47

     PARALLEL   47
     PATTERNED   32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
     Pen number   126, 164
     PERMANENT   122, 123, 124, 126, 141, 145, 153, 155, 161, 162, 170, 176,
           177, 179, 183, 184, 187
     PERPENDICULAR   48
     PHI   145, 156, 161, 174, 176, 178, 179, 180, 200, 210
     PLOT   4
     Plotting symbols   23
     POINTS   95
     Polynomial fit   73, 75
     POWER   167
     PRIMARY   45, 48
     Projections   110
     PROPORTIONAL Spacing   159

     RADIUS   161, 165, 174, 175, 200, 210
     RDIST   180
     REDUCE   172, 181, 187
     Revisions   166, 182, 237
     ROOT   167
     ROTATED   140, 173
     RZ file   197

     SCALE   155
     Scatter plot   26, 88, 103, 108, 110, 238
     SCRD   178, 180
     SECONDARY   45, 48, 166
     Seconds   17, 167
     Segmentation   166


                                      Page 254


                                       AUTHOR
                                       Index

     SEPARATION   178, 181
     Separators 
     Set up   13
     SETS   95
     SHORT   105
     SIDEWAYS   140, 173
     Significant digits   141, 205
     Sine fit   73
     Slice   31, 34, 81, 84, 90, 92, 102, 111
     SOLID   32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
     SPACE   32, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 82, 90, 102, 177, 227, 228
     SPLINE   90
     Stereo plots   181
     Subroutine   222
       TDCASE   226
       TDHIST   227
       TDJOIN   228
       TDLIMS   229
       TDNEWP   229
       TDPLOT   229
       TDPLT   230
       TDSET   230
       TDSETS   231
       TDSHOW   231
       TDTEXT   231
       TDTITL   232
       TDTSET   232
       TDVAX_PLOT   234
     Subroutines   223
     Substitution   53, 126, 184, 185, 186
     Symbol   16, 17, 102, 145, 161, 170, 175, 176

     TCP/IP   139
     TEXT   172
     Text frame   19
     Texture   32, 38, 39, 43, 46, 62, 66, 81, 90, 102, 122, 145, 162, 166,
           170, 177, 183
     Theoretic special symbols   22
     THETA   145, 156, 161, 165, 174, 175, 176, 178, 179, 180, 200, 210
     Ticks   105, 123, 167, 169, 182
     Time   17
     Time scale   169
     TITLE   159
     TOPDRAWER_INIT   13
     TRACE   160

     UNITS   172, 186
     User function fit   75
     USER SCALE   169

     VECTOR   160
     Vector plot   110
     VERTICAL   178, 181
     Virtual memory   175
     VLOG   41, 51, 76, 93, 107, 160

     Windows   187
     WORLD   178, 181


                                      Page 255


                                       AUTHOR
                                       Index

     X   17
     Xwindows   139

     Y   17
     Years   17, 127, 167

     Z   17





















































                                      Page 256